0% found this document useful (0 votes)

250 views414 pages

Accessories Catalog Edition 5.1

The document is the Catalog Edition 5.1, detailing various accessories for Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, and Power Supplies. It includes sections on auxiliary relays, communication systems, power supplies, machine protection, and temperature measurement devices. The catalog emphasizes the importance of selecting high-quality accessories that meet industry standards for reliability and performance.

Uploaded by

danil.kasperskiy

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

250 views414 pages

Accessories Catalog Edition 5.1

Uploaded by

danil.kasperskiy

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

CATALOG EDITION 5.

Accessories
Protection, Substation Automation,
Power Quality and Measurement
2 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Content

Accessories Introduction 1

Energy Automation, Auxiliary Relays 2

Industrial Automation, Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay 2.1
Power Supplies Monostable Relay 2.2

Signal Relay 2.3

Catalog - Edition 5.1 Auxiliary Relay 2.4

High Speed Trip Relay 2.5

Invalid:
Katalog - Edition 5.0 Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay 2.6

AC/DC Supervision Relay 2.7

Supply Supervision Relay 2.8

Trip Relay Supervision Relay 2.9

Interposing Relay 2.10

Trip Circuit Supervision Resistors 2.11

Communication 3

Cables 3.1

RS485 Bus System 3.2

10 dB Attenuator 3.3

2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater 3.4

Converters 3.5

RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches 3.6

RUGGEDCOM Redundancy Box (HSR/PRP) 3.7

RUGGEDCOM Multiprotocol Router 3.8

RUGGEDCOM Media Converter 3.9

RUGGEDCOM Serial Device Servers 3.10

RUGGEDCOM Software 3.11

SCALANCE X204RNA 3.12

SOFTNET-IE RNA 3.13

SCALANCE M87x Mobile Wireless Router 3.14

PROFIBUS/MPI Router SCALANCE M804PB 3.15

Mobile Wireless Antennas 3.16

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 3
Content

3.17 Industrial Security Appliances SCALANCE S

3.18 SINEMA Remote Connect

3.19 Industrial Ethernet – Cable System Technology

4 Power Supply

4.1 LOGO!Power

4.2 SITOP PSU

4.3 SITOP Add-on Modules

4.4 SITOP DC UPS

5 Machine Protection

5.1 Miniature Current Transformers

5.2 20 Hz Generator

5.3 20 Hz Band-Pass

5.4 Injection Unit

5.5 Coupling Unit

5.6 Resistor Unit

5.7 Resistance-Coupling Unit

5.8 Voltage Divider

6 High Impedance Protection Accessories

6.1 Auxiliary Units

6.2 Resistors

6.3 Metrosils

7 Devices for Input/Output Signals

7.1 SICAM I/O-Unit

7.2 SICAM AI-Unit

8 Temperature Measurement

8.1 RTD Unit TR1200

8.2 RTD Unit TR800Web

8.3 RTD Unit TR1200IP

4 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Content

Arc Protection 9

Sensors for SIPROTEC 5 and Reyrolle 5 9.1

ReyArc 7XG31 9.2

Test Equipment 10

Test Switch/Test Block 10.1

Time Synchronization 11

SNTP Master/Server 11.1

Bus Cable for Time Synchronization 11.2

GPS Time Synchronization Unit 11.3

Miscellaneous 12

Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker 12.1

Isolating Transformer 12.2

Diodes 12.3

Reyrolle Device Accessories 12.4

Appendix 13

Index 14

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 5
Introduction

Introduction • Power Supply

1
Selecting high-grade accessories is an important decision. LOGO!Power, SITOP
Ensure that all accessories you require meet the quality, inno- • Machine Protection
vation, and technology standards which you expect from the Miniature current transformer, 20-Hz generator/band-pass
products, services, and solutions provided by Siemens. filters, resistor units, etc.
This catalog provides an overview and descriptions of the acces-
• Devices for Input/Output Signals
sories for the Energy Automation products – protection devices,
station automation equipment, and devices for power quality Binary signal transmitter, SICAM I/O unit, SICAM AI unit
and measurement – and for automation-engineering products. • Temperature Measurement
The catalog is broken down as follows: RTD units
• General accessories • Test Equipment
Voltage and auxiliary current transformers, voltage control- Switches for testing protection devices
lers, and relays • Time Synchronization
• Communication SNTP master/server, bus cables, and GPS time synchronization
Fiber-optic cable, Ethernet-patch cable, star coupler, system
converter, etc.

[EA Products DE, 2, en_US]

Figure 1/1 Product Portfolio

6 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 7
Auxiliary Relays
Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay – 7PA22

Description
7PA22 is a bistable fast-acting auxiliary relay with 8 change-over
contacts.
Due to their quality, reliability, and their structure, these relays
are suitable for applications requiring high reliability and availa-
2.1
bility, as for example power plants, switchgear, railroad systems
and industrial plants. Typical examples for this are the petro-
chemical industry, chemical industry, cement industry, and
rolling mills.
The relays comply with IEC, EN, IEEE standards (type testing and
routine testing) and bear the CE marking.
The sturdy switch contacts distinguish themselves with a high
switching capacity, overload capacity and continuous current
capacity which provides perfect insulation. The direct control of
high-voltage and medium-voltage systems is possible.
Their high degree of protection and the transparent cover
ensure reliable operation under tropical environmental condi-
tions and/or use in salty sea air.
[ph_7PA22, 1, --_--]
7PA22 Fast-Acting Relay with Suppressor Diode
Figure 2.1/1 Auxiliary Relay 7PA22
Bistable fast-acting lockout relay with eight change-over
contacts, plugged into a flush-mounting frame of type power, and a high continuous current enable direct switching in
7XP9010-1 for cabling with screws at the rear, or in an assembly high-voltage and medium-voltage systems. The high degree of
frame of type 7XP9012-0 for cabling with screws at the front. protection and the transparent cover ensure absolute reliability
during operation within a wide temperature range, and in a
Benefits tropical or salty environment.
Tested according to IEC, EN, IEEE standards and bearing the CE
marking. Applications
No continuous internal consumption. Position display on the The design, quality and high durability of the relays ensure reli-
front. Mechanical reset button. able usability under highly demanding conditions such as in
power plants, generator stations, transformer stations and rail-
Position memory with two stable positions (for example, open/
roads. They are suitable for use in energy systems and process
closed, automatic/manual, local/remote). Mechanically sturdy
control systems for large-scale industry applications, the petro-
contacts, high insulation resistance, high making and breaking
chemical sector, steel and cement factories, and many more.

Dimensions and Connections

[dw_7pa22_dimensions_and_panel-mounting-cutout, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.1/2 Dimensions and Installation Dimensions

8 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay – 7PA22

2.1

[dw_7pa22_socket_for_surface-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.1/3 Surface-Mounting Base

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 9
Auxiliary Relays
Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay – 7PA22

2.1

[dw_7pa22_socket_for_flush-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.1/4 Flush-Mounting Base

10 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay – 7PA22

Breaking power for 105 switching cycles

220 0.65 1.4 0.28 0.58
For details, refer to diagram

2.1

[dw_7PA22_curva, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.1/6 Diagram

[dw_7pa22_connection, 2, en_US] Vmax, open-circuited contact 250 VDC/400 VAC

Figure 2.1/5 Connections 7PA22 – Contacts shown in RESET Position Mechanical endurance 107 switching cycles
Operating temperature -40 °C +70 °C
Max. humidity 93%/40 °C
Technical Data Seismic load according to IEEE501
3 g/33 Hz
The reset button may not be depressed for longer than ZPA
20 seconds when the auxiliary voltage is applied to the SET coil.
Design guidelines
Rated voltage and internal consumption Electrical tests according to IEC 60255
VN (VDC) Voltage range (VDC) Internal consumption for switching Insulation 2 kV/50 Hz/1 min
24 19 to 26 Surge immunity 5 kV/1.2/50 μs
30 24 to 33 Insulation resistance > 2000 MOhm/500 VDC
48 38.5 to 53 Flame resistance IEC 60692-2-1
60 48 to 66 ≤45 W Plastics UL94: V0
110 88 to 121 IEC 60695: 850 ºC/30 s
125 100 to 137 Protection class IEC 60529, EN60529
220 176 to 242 Relays IP40
Flush-mounting base IP10
Pre-arcing time < 10 ms
Surface-Mounting Base IP10
Environmental conditions IEC 60255-7
Contacts
Heat test IEC 60068-2-2
Continuous current 10 A
- Relays in operation +70 °C/96 h
Overload capability 80 A/200 ms
- Relays not in operation +55 °C/96 h
150 A/10 ms
Air humidity, cyclical IEC 60068-2-30: +55 °C/12 h
Breaking power 40 A/0.5 s, 110 VDC
Cold test, 100 cycles IEC 60068-2-1
Relays not in operation -10 °C/2 h
Breaking power for 105 switching cycles
Thermal aging IEC 60255-7
Not inductive Inductive, 40 ms
At rated voltage (VN) 55 °C/1440 h
VDC 1 contact [A] 2 contacts in 1 contact [A] 2 contacts in
series [A] series [A]
24 14.5 >20 9.7 >20 Weights and packaging
48 7.65 >20 3.5 >20 7PA22 600 g
60 5.1 >20 2.3 >20 7XP9010 400 g
125 1.2 3.75 0.55 3.75 Carton 150 x 124 x 84 mm

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 11
Auxiliary Relays
Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay – 7PA22

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

2.1 Bistable fast-acting auxiliary relay with 8 change-over contacts 7 P A 2 2 □ 1 - □

▲ ▲
Rated voltage │ │
DC 24 V 1 │
DC 60 V 2 │
DC 110 V 3 │
DC 220 V 4 │
DC 125 V 5 │
DC 30 V 6 │
DC 48 V 8 │
Base │
Without base 0
With 7XP9010-1 base 1
Base as spare part
Installation 7 X P 9 0 1 0 - 1
Surface Mounting 7 X P 9 0 1 2 - 0
5 x retaining bracket for auxiliary relay with surface mounting base (1 required for each relay/
. . . . . . . . A Y R : E 2 9
surface mounting base)

12 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay – 7PA23

Description
7PA23 is a bistable fast-acting auxiliary relay with 4 change-over
contacts.
Due to their quality, reliability, and their structure, these relays
are suitable for applications requiring high reliability and availa-
2.1
bility, as for example power plants, switchgear, railroad systems
and industrial plants. Typical examples for this are the petro-
chemical industry, chemical industry, cement industry, and
rolling mills.
The relays comply with IEC, EN, IEEE standards (type testing and
routine testing) and bear the CE marking.
The sturdy switch contacts distinguish themselves with a high
switching capacity, overload capacity and continuous current
capacity which provides perfect insulation. The direct control of
high-voltage and medium-voltage systems is possible.
Their high degree of protection and the transparent cover
ensure reliable operation under tropical environmental condi-
tions and/or use in salty sea air.
[ph_7PA23, 1, --_--]

Benefits Figure 2.1/7 Auxiliary Relay 7PA2351

Tested according to IEC, EN, IEEE standards and bearing the CE

bility during operation within a wide temperature range, and in
marking.
a tropical or salty environment.
No continuous internal consumption. Position display on the
front. Mechanical reset button. Applications
Position memory with two stable positions (for example, open/ The design, quality and high durability of the relays ensure reli-
closed, automatic/manual, local/remote). Mechanically sturdy able usability under highly demanding conditions such as in
contacts, high insulation resistance, high making and breaking power plants, generator stations, transformer stations and rail-
power, and a high continuous current, enable direct switching roads. They are suitable for use in energy systems and process
in high-voltage and medium-voltage systems. The high degree control systems for large-scale industry applications, the petro-
of protection and the transparent cover ensure absolute relia- chemical sector, steel and cement factories, and many more.

Dimensions and Connections

[dw_7pa23_dimensions_and_panel-mounting-cutout, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.1/8 Dimensions and Installation Dimensions

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 13
Auxiliary Relays
Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay – 7PA23

2.1

[dw_7pa23_27_30-1phs_socket_for_surface-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.1/9 Surface-Mounting Base

14 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay – 7PA23

2.1

[dw_7pa23_socket_for_flush-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.1/10 Flush-Mounting Base

Technical Data
The reset button may not be depressed for longer than 20
seconds when the auxiliary voltage is applied to the SET coil.

Rated voltage and internal consumption

VN (VDC) Voltage range (VDC) Internal consumption for
switching
24 19 to 26
30 24 to 33
48 38.5 to 53
60 48 to 66 ≤17 W
110 88 to 121
125 100 to 137
220 176 to 242

[dw_7pa23_connection, 2, en_US] Pre-arcing time < 10 ms

Figure 2.1/11 Connections 7PA23 – Contacts shown in RESET Position

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 15
Auxiliary Relays
Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay – 7PA23

Contacts Operating temperature -40 °C +70 °C

Continuous current 10 A Max. humidity 93%/40 °C
Overload capability 80 A/200 ms Seismic load according to IEEE501
3 g/33 Hz
150 A/10 ms ZPA
Switching power 40 A/0.5 s, 110 VDC
2.1 Design guidelines
Breaking power for 105 switching cycles Electrical tests according to IEC 60255
Not inductive Inductive, 40 ms Insulation 2 kV/50 Hz/1 min
VDC 1 contact [A] 2 contacts in 1 contact [A] 2 contacts in Surge immunity 5 kV/1.2/50 μs
series [A] series [A] Insulation resistance > 2000 MOhm/500 VDC
24 14.5 >20 9.7 >20 Flame resistance IEC 60692-2-1
48 7.65 >20 3.5 >20 Plastics UL94: V0
60 5.1 >20 2.3 >20
IEC 60695: 850 ºC/30 s
125 1.2 3.75 0.55 3.75
Protection class IEC 60529, EN60529
220 0.65 1.4 0.28 0.58
Relays IP40
For details, refer to diagram
Flush-mounting base IP10
Surface-Mounting Base IP10
Environmental conditions IEC 60255-7
Heat test IEC 60068-2-2
- Relays in operation +70 °C/96 h
- Relays not in operation +55 °C/96 h
Air humidity, cyclical IEC 60068-2-30: +55 °C/12 h
Cold test, 100 cycles IEC 60068-2-1
Relays not in operation -10 °C/2 h
Thermal aging IEC 60255-7
At rated voltage (VN) 55 °C/1440 h

Weights and packaging

7PA23 300 g
7XP9011 300 g
[dw_7PA22_curva, 2, en_US]
Carton 145 x 79 x 84 mm
Figure 2.1/12 Diagram

Vmax, open-circuited contact 250 VDC/400 VAC

Mechanical endurance 107 switching cycles

16 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Bistable Fast-Acting Lockout Relay – 7PA23

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Bistable fast-acting auxiliary relay with 4 change-over contacts 7 P A 2 3 □ 1 - □ 2.1

▲ ▲
Rated voltage │ │
DC 24 V 1 │
DC 60 V 2 │
DC 110 V 3 │
DC 220 V 4 │
DC 125 V 5 │
DC 30 V 6 │
DC 48 V 8 │
Base │
Without base 0
With 7XP9011-1 base 1
Base as spare part
Installation 7 X P 9 0 1 1 - 1
Surface Mounting 7 X P 9 0 1 3 - 0
5 x retaining bracket for auxiliary relay with surface mounting base (1 required for each relay/
. . . . . . . . A Y R : E 3 1
surface mounting base)

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 17
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA26

Description
7PA26 is a monostable relay with 8 change-over contacts.
The relay has been tested according to IEC and EN standards and
has the CE marking.

Benefits

2.2 Mechanically sturdy contacts, high insulation resistance, high

making and breaking power, and a high continuous current
enable direct switching in high-voltage and medium-voltage
systems.

Applications
The design, quality and high durability of the relays ensure
reliable usability under highly demanding conditions such as
in power plants, generator stations, transformer stations and
railroads.
They are suitable for use in energy systems and process control [ph_7PA26, 1, --_--]
systems for large-scale industry applications, the petrochemical
sector, steel and cement factories, and many more. Figure 2.2/1 Auxiliary Relay 7PA2642

Dimensions and Connections

[dw_7pa26_dimensions_and_panel-mounting-cutout, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.2/2 Dimensions and Installation Dimensions

18 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA26

2.2

[dw_7pa26_socket_for_surface-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.2/3 Surface-Mounting Base – 7XP9012-0

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 19
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA26

2.2

[dw_7pa26_socket_for_flush-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.2/4 Flush-Mounting Base – 7XP9010-3

20 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA26

Rated voltage and internal consumption 7PA26 ☐21

24/3 19 to 33 66 0.8 16 and 19 9 and 14
0 A/20
48 38.4 to 52.8 32 ms 23.8 and 33.6 14.4 and 21.6
60 48 to 66 28 36 and 42 18 and 27
110/ 88 to 137 13 0.3 66 and 77 V 38 and 42 V
125 A/20
220 176 to 242 8 ms 132 and 154 66 and 99 2.2
(1) Excitation and de-excitation voltages for the 7PA26*21 are
specified for an ambient temperature of 23 °C and a cold
relay. These values change with temperature.

Pre-arcing time
For excitation
7PA26 ☐20 <20 ms
7PA26 ☐21 <10 ms
For de-excitation < 40 ms

Contacts
Continuous current 10 A
Overload capacity 80 A/200 ms
200 A/10 ms
Switching power 40 A/0.5 s, 110 VDC

[dw_7pa26_connection, 2, en_US] Breaking power for 105 switching cycles

Figure 2.2/5 Connections 7PA26 Not inductive Inductive, 40 ms

VDC 1 contact [A] 2 contacts in 1 contact [A] 2 contacts in
series [A] series [A]

Technical Data 24 18 >20 8.1 >20

48 6.9 >20 3.3 18
Rated voltage and internal consumption 7PA26 ☐20 60 3.4 >20 1.85 13
VN Voltage range Internal Excitation De-excitation 125 0.9 4 0.47 2
(VD (VDC) consumption voltage (VDC) voltage (VDC) 220 0.55 1.5 0.24 0.43
C) (mA) between 1) between 1) For details, refer to diagram
24/3 17 to 37 288 8.4 and 13.2 3.6 and 9
0
48 33.6 to 60 144 16.8 and 26.4 7.5 and 17
60 42 to 75 115 21 and 33 9 and 21
110/ 77 to 156 63 38.5 and 60.5 16.5 and 38.5
125
220 154 to 275 31 77 and 121 33 and 77

(1) Excitation and de-excitation voltages for the 7PA26*20 are

specified for an ambient temperature of 23 °C and a cold
relay. These values change with temperature.

Rated voltage and internal consumption 7PA26 ☐21

VN Voltage range Internal Excitation De-excitation
(VD (VDC) consumption voltage (VDC) voltage (VDC)
C) (mA) between 1) between 1)
Standa Peak
rd
[mA] [dw_7PA26_27_curva, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.2/6 Diagram

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 21
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA26

Vmax, open-circuited contact 250 VDC/400 VAC EMC Tests

Mechanical endurance 107 switching cycles Radiated HF field interference, EN 61000-4-3
Operating temperature -25 °C +70 °C amplitude-modulated: Test level:
Storage temperature -40 °C +85 °C 80-1000 MHz, 10 V/m, 80% AM (1
kHz)
Max. humidity 93%/40 °C
Radiated HF field interference, EN 61000-4-3
pulse-modulated:
Weights and packaging
2.2 Test level: 900 ±5 MHz, 10 V/m,
7PA26 500 g
50% (200 Hz) 1.89 GHz ±10 MHz,
Carton 150 x 124 x 84 mm 10 V/m, 50% (200 Hz)
7XP9010-3 400 g Line-conducted HF EN 61000-4-6
7XP9012-0 225 g amplitude-modulated: Test level:
0.15-80 MHz, 10 V, 80% AM (1
Design guidelines kHz)
Electrical tests according to IEC 60255-27 Electrostatic discharge test: Test EN 61000-4-2
level:
Insulation 2 kV/50 Hz/1 min
Surge immunity 5 kV/1.2/50 μs Contact ±15 kV, air mode ±15 kV
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ/500 VDC Magnetic Field with Energy EN 61000-4-8
Frequency
Flame resistance
Plastics UL94: V0 Test level: 100 A/m 1 min•1000
A/m 1 s.
Protection class IEC 60529, EN60529
Emitted interference tests: Test EN 55011 Class A
Relays IP40
level: Cover:
Flush-mounting base IP10
30-230 MHz, 40 dB (μV/m) (quasi
Surface-Mounting Base IP10 peak) - 10 m
Environmental conditions IEC 60068-2
230-1000 MHz, 47 dB (μV/m)
Dry cold, in operation -25 ºC (quasi peak) - 10 m
Dry heat, in operation +70 ºC
Power supply:
Storage and transportation -25 ºC + 85 ºC
0.15-0.5 MHz, 79 dB (μV) (quasi
peak)/66 dB average
EMC Tests
0.5-5 MHz, 73 dB (μV) (quasi
High-frequency test: EN 60255-22-1 peak)/60 dB average
Test level: 1 MHz, 400 imp/s, 2 s 5-30 MHz, 73 dB (μV) (quasi
Common mode: 2.5 kV peak)/60 dB average
Differential mode: 1 kV
Fast transient bursts EN 61000-4-4
Test level: 4 kV, 2.5 kHz, 1 min•2
kV, 5 kHz, 1 min
Energy surge voltages EN 61000-4-5
8/20 μs. (current) - 1.2/50 μs.
(voltage) - 8/20 μs. (current)
Common mode: 2 kV - differential
mode: 1 kV

22 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA26

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Monostable relay with 8 change-over contacts 7 P A 2 6 □ 2 - □ A A 0 0 - □

▲ ▲ ▲
Rated voltage │ │ │ 2.2
DC 24/30 V 1 │ │
DC 60 V 2 │ │
DC 110/125 V 3 │ │
DC 220 V 4 │ │
DC 48 V 8 │ │
Standard, 20 ms 0 │
Fast-acting, 10 ms 1 │
Base │
Without base 0
With base 7XP9010-3 (flush mounting) 1
With base 7XP9012-0 (surface mounting) 2
5 x retaining bracket for auxiliary relay with surface mounting base (1 required for each relay/
. . . . . . . . A Y R : E 4 5
surface mounting base)

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 23
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA27

Description
7PA27 is a monostable relay with 4 change-over contacts.
The relay has been tested according to IEC and EN standards and
has the CE marking.

Applications

2.2 The design, quality and high durability of the relays ensure
reliable usability under highly demanding conditions such as
in power plants, generator stations, transformer stations and
railroads.
They are suitable for use in energy systems and process control
systems for large-scale industry applications, the petrochemical
sector, steel and cement factories, and many more. Mechani-
cally sturdy contacts, high insulation resistance, high making
and breaking power, and a high continuous current enable
direct switching in high-voltage and medium-voltage systems.

[ph_7PA27, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.2/7 Monostable Fast-Acting Relay 7PA2732

Dimensions and Connections

[dw_7pa27_dimensions_and_panel-mounting-cutout, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.2/8 Dimensions

24 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA27

2.2

[dw_7pa23_27_30-1phs_socket_for_surface-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.2/9 Surface-Mounting Base

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 25
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA27

2.2

[dw_7pa27_socket_for_flush-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.2/10 Flush-Mounting Base

Technical Data

Rated Voltage and Internal Consumption

VN Voltage Range Internal Excitation De-Excitation
(VD (VDC) Consumption Voltage (VDC) Voltage (VDC)
C) (mA) between 1 between 1
Standa Peak
rd
[mA]
24/3 19 to 36 42 1 A/20 16 and 19 9 and 14
0 ms
48 38.4 to 52.8 32 28.8 and 33.6 14.4 and 21.6
60 42 to 72 18 36 and 42 18 and 27

[dw_7pa27_connection, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.2/11 Connections 7PA27

1 Excitation and de-excitation voltages for the 7PA26*20 are specified for an ambient temperature of 23°C and cold relay. These values change with
temperature.

26 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA27

Rated Voltage and Internal Consumption Weights and Packaging

110/ 77 to 150 8 0.3 65 and 77 38 and 55 7XP9011-2 300 g
125 A/20 7XP9013-0 110 g
220 154 to 264 6 ms 132 and 154 66 and 99
Design guidelines
Pre-Arcing Time Electrical tests according to IEC 60255-27
For excitation <8 ms Insulation 2 kV/50 Hz/1 min
For de-excitation <40 ms Surge immunity 5 kV/1.2/50 μs 2.2

Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ/500 VDC

Contacts Flame resistance
Continuous current <10 A Plastics UL94: V0
Overload capability 80 A/200 ms Protection class IEC 60529, EN60529
200 A/10 ms Relays IP40
Switching power 40 A/0.5 s, 110 VDC Flush-mounting base IP10
Surface-Mounting Base IP10
Breaking Power for 105 Switching Cycles Environmental conditions IEC 60068-2
Not inductive Inductive, 40 ms Dry cold, in operation -25 ºC
VDC 1 contact (A) 2 contacts in 1 contact (A) 2 contacts in Dry heat, in operation +70 ºC
series (A) series (A)
Storage and transportation -25 ºC + 85 ºC
24 18 >20 8.1 >20
48 6.9 >20 3.3 18 EMC Tests
60 3.4 >20 1.85 13 High-frequency test: EN 60255-22-1
125 0.9 4 0.47 2
Test level: 1 MHz, 400 imp/s, 2 s
220 0.55 1.05 0.24 0.43
Common mode: 2.5 kV
For details, refer to Figure 2.2/12
Differential mode: 1 kV
Fast transient bursts EN 61000-4-4
Test level: 4 kV, 2.5 kHz, 1 min•2
kV, 5 kHz, 1 min
Energy surge voltages EN 61000-4-5
8/20 μs. (current) - 1.2/50 μs.
(voltage) - 8/20 μs. (current)
Common mode: 2 kV - differential
mode: 1 kV
Radiated HF field interference, EN 61000-4-3
amplitude-modulated: Test level:
80-1000 MHz, 10 V/m, 80% AM (1
kHz)
Radiated HF field interference, EN 61000-4-3
pulse-modulated:
Test level: 900 ±5 MHz, 10 V/m,
50% (200 Hz) 1.89 GHz ±10 MHz,
[dw_7PA26_27_curva, 2, en_US]
10 V/m, 50% (200 Hz)
Figure 2.2/12 Diagram Line-conducted HF EN 61000-4-6
amplitude-modulated: Test level:
Vmax, open-circuited contact 250 VDC/400 VAC 0.15-80 MHz, 10 V, 80% AM (1
Mechanical endurance 107 switching cycles kHz)
Operating temperature -25 °C +55 °C Electrostatic discharge test: Test EN 61000-4-2
level:
Storage temperature -40 °C +85 °C
Max. humidity 93 %/40 °C Contact ±15 kV, air mode ±15 kV

Weights and Packaging

7PA27 250 g
Carton 125 x 79 x 84 mm

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 27
Auxiliary Relays
Monostable Relay – 7PA27

EMC Tests
Magnetic Field with Energy EN 61000-4-8
Frequency
Test level: 100 A/m 1 min•1000
A/m 1 s.
Emitted interference tests: Test EN 55011 Class A
level: Cover:
2.2 30-230 MHz, 40 dB (μV/m) (quasi
peak) - 10 m
230-1000 MHz, 47 dB (μV/m)
(quasi peak) - 10 m
Power supply:
0.15-0.5 MHz, 79 dB (μV) (quasi
peak)/66 dB average
0.5-5 MHz, 73 dB (μV) (quasi
peak)/60 dB average
5-30 MHz, 73 dB (μV) (quasi
peak)/60 dB average

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Monostable quick-operating relay with 4 change-over contacts 7 P A 2 7 □ 2 - 0 A A 0 0 - □

▲ ▲
Rated voltage │ │
DC 24/30 V 1 │
DC 60 V 2 │
DC 110/125 V 3 │
DC 220 V 4 │
DC 48 V 8 │
Base │
Without base 0
With base 7XP9011-2 (flush mounting) 1
With base 7XP9013-0 (surface mounting) 2
5 x retaining bracket for auxiliary relay with surface mounting base (1 required for each relay/
. . . . . . . . A Y R : E 4 0
surface mounting base)

28 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Signal Relay – 7TS16

Description
7TS16 is a versatile signal relay with 4 inputs for signals. It has 4
local LED displays and 4 output contacts with auto-reset that can
be used in SCADA control systems. In addition, there are 2 diode
circuits.
A local or remote-control reset is possible via a separate input.
The reset must not be permanently switched.

Benefits
2.3
• High durability and functional guarantee
• Tests according to the latest standards: IEC, EN and with the
CE marking.

[ph_7TS16, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.3/1 Signal Relay 7TS16

Dimensions and Connections

[dw_7ts16_dimensions_and_panel-mounting-cutout, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.3/2 Dimensions

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 29
Auxiliary Relays
Signal Relay – 7TS16

2.3

[dw_7pa30-3phs_socket_for_surface-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.3/3 Surface-Mounting Base

30 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Signal Relay – 7TS16

2.3

[dw_7pa30-3phs_socket_for_flush-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.3/4 Flush-Mounting Base

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 31
Auxiliary Relays
Signal Relay – 7TS16

Max. humidity 93%/40 °C

Pre-arcing time <5 ms

Internal consumption
VN Per During moni- For perma- For set LEDs
switching toring nent, contin-
procedure uous
switching
24/30 1 A/3 ms 0.5 21 1
2.3 110/125 3 A/3 ms 2 8 3
220 4 A/3 ms 3.5 6.5 5

Display 4 LEDs, stored until reset

Inputs 4 alarm/switch inputs

Input for remote reset
Push-button for local reset

Monostable outputs: A direct output via diode, 2.5 A

Each for alarm/switch input: An isolated change-over contact
An isolated make contact
A common output via diode (2.5 A;
Vmax 220 VDC)

Contacts
Continuous current 8A
Overload capacity 15 A
Switching power ON 15 A/4 s/110 VDC
Switching capacity OFF 0.3 A/110 VDC

Weights and packaging

7TS16 165 g
Carton 150x124x84 mm
7XP9010-2 400 g
7XP9012-0 225 g

Design guidelines
[dw_contact_without_aux_voltage, 2, en_US] Electrical tests according to IEC 60255-27

Figure 2.3/5 Connection Diagram – Contacts shown without Auxiliary Insulation 2 kV/50 Hz/1 min
Voltage in the Relay Surge immunity 5 kV/1.2/50 μs
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ/500 VDC
Flame resistance
Technical Data Plastics UL94: V0
Protection class IEC 60529, EN60529
Rated voltage and internal consumption Relays IP40
VN Voltage range (VDC) Excitation voltage De-excitation Flush-mounting base IP10
(VDC) (VDC) voltage (VDC)
Surface-Mounting Base IP10
24/30 17 to 33 13.5 to 17 >6
Environmental conditions IEC 60068-2
110/1 77 to 137.5 60 to 77 > 35
Dry cold, in operation -10 ºC
25
Dry heat, in operation +55 ºC
220 154 to 242 103 to 154 > 65
Storage and transportation -30 ºC +70 ºC

Operating temperature -10 °C +55 °C

Storage temperature -30 °C +70 °C

32 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Signal Relay – 7TS16

EMC Tests 1 MHz immunity test IEC 60255-22-1 / 1 kV / 2.5 kV

Emitted interference, industrial IEC 61000-6-4
EMC tests Standard environment
EN 61000-6-4
Immunity, industrial environment IEC 61000-6-2
EN 55011/Class A
EN 61000-6-2

Selection and Ordering Data

2.3
Description Order No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Signal relay with 4 LEDs 7 T S 1 6 □ 2 - 0 A A 0 0 - □

▲ ▲
Rated voltage │ │
DC 24/30 V 1 │
DC 110/125 V 3 │
DC 220 V 4 │
Base │
Without base 0
With base 7XP9010-2 (flush mounting) 1
With base 7XP9012-0 (surface mounting) 2
5 x retaining bracket for auxiliary relay with surface mounting base (1 required for each relay/
. . . . . . . . A Y R : E 4 7
surface mounting base)

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 33
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Description
The 7PG111 and 7PG112 AR (auxiliary relay) range of electro-
mechanical relays are available with up to eight self, hand or
electrically reset contacts. They can be supplied with various
combinations of contact, flag and reset arrangements.
AR relays are voltage operated from either AC or DC supplies.
Relays may be built with or without a flag indicator.
Features
Type AR relays are a range of electro-mechanical relays with up
to 8 contacts and complying to BS142. They can be supplied
2.4 in most combinations of contact, flag and reset arrangements.
They are used wherever there is a need for additional contacts.
The relays are identified by a series of numbers and letters
which define important relay features.

The following comments are provided as a guide to the various

features of type AR relays.
[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7PG11, 1, --_--]
AR - XX1 Up to 8 self reset contacts, in any
Figure 2.4/1 7PG11 Auxiliary Relay
combination of normally open or
normally closed as required.
AR - XX2 Up to 8 self reset contacts, in any Benefits
combination of normally open or
normally closed as required.
• Robust design for a long, reliable service life
AR - XX3 Electrical and hand set contacts • Supplied in a draw-out type case
supplied with a contact reset • Various combinations of coils, contacts, operation indicator
mechanism in the relay case cover. flags can be specified
AR - XX4 Hand and self reset contacts, can
be supplied with 2 hand reset • Consistent positive action
contacts and a maximum of 4
self reset contacts. All the contacts
may be either normally open or Hardware Construction
normally closed.
The device is housed in a draw-out case designed for panel
AR - XX6 Electrical reset contacts with
mounting.
optional self reset flag.
AR - XX3 and XX6 Reset coils are short time rated, The rear connection comprises of M4 screw terminals suitable
we recommend that reset circuits for ring type crimps.
include a normally open (cut-off)
contact The chassis of the device can be withdrawn from the case by
pulling the handles on the top and bottom.
First Digit Second Digit - Type of Flag Third Digit - Type of
Contact Reset
Number of 0 No flag 1 Self
identical 1 Hand reset 2 Hand
elements
2 Hand reset 3 Electrical
reverse and hand
acting
3 Self reset 4 Hand and
self
4 Self reset 6 Electrical
reverse
acting

Table 2.4/1 Relay Features

The AR901 has 4 user available contacts and has been designed
for a specific function to be used in conjunction with the 7SR23
DAD high impedance protection relay to act as a CT shorting
relay.

34 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

2.4

[sc_7PG11_HandlesWithdrawing, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.4/2 Withdrawing Device Using Handles

Earthing Terminal
The case earth stud should be solidly earthed to the panel earth
before any connections to the device rear terminal. Located at
the top rear of the case is a case earth stud as shown in Figure
2.4/3, this must be connected to the main panel earth.

[sc_7PG11_HandResetMechanism, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.4/4 Hand Reset Mechanism

Relay Information

[sc_7PG11_EarthingTerminal, 1, --_--]
The device fascia displays the MLFB order code, serial number,
and device identification reference.
Figure 2.4/3 Case Earth Stud
Electrical Hazard
Hand Reset Mechanism
Pull the blue handle upwards to slide the mechanism in an Refer to device documentation
upwards direction with the flag reset wire at the bottom.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equip-

ment Directive (WEEE)

European CE marking

Guideline for the Eurasian Market

United Kingdom (UK) conformity-

assessed marking

Connection Diagrams
Please refer to the Siemens website for the connection
diagrams.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 35
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Dimension Drawings

2.4

[sc_E2casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.4/5 E2 Case

36 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

2.4

[sc_E4casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.4/6 E4 Case

Operating Range
Technical Data
AC 80 % to 110 % of rated voltage
Inputs and Outputs
DC 70 % to 115 % of rated voltage

Rated Voltage (Vn)

AC 63.5, 110, 220, 240 V
DC 12, 24, 30, 50, 125, 240 V

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 37
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Burden Shock Bump

3 to 5 W/VA depending upon Dependent on rating. Rectified AC
voltage rating relays nominal power factor = 0.96 IEC 255-21-2 Class 1 severity
BS142, sub-section 1.5.2. (1989) Class 1 severity
Output Contacts
Mechanical Life
Make and carry continuously AC 1250 VA or DC 1250 W within
the limits of 660 V and 5 A Durability In excess of 10,000 operations
Make and carry for 3 seconds AC 7500 VA or DC 7500 W within with the contact rating at a rate of
the limits of 660 V and 30 A 600 operations per hour
Breaking Capacity ( ≤ 5 A and ≤
250 V): Environmental
2.4
AC Resistive Temperature
1250 VA
DC Resistive
100 W IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2 and BS2011 (1977)
DC Inductive
50 W L/R = 40 ms
Minimum number of operations 1000 at maximum load Operating -10°C to +55°C
Minimum recommended load 0.5 Watt limits 10 mA or 5 V Storage -25°C to +70°C

Electrical Tests Humidity

Insulation IEC 60068-2-30

IEC 60255-5 RMS levels for 1 minute

Operational test 56 days at 40°C and 95 % RH

Between contacts to earth and to 2.0 kV

Ip Ratings
the coil
Between any case terminal and 2.0 kV
earth Type Level

Between case terminals of inde- 2.0 kV Installed with cover IP 5X

pendent circuits
Across normally open contacts 1.0 kV Performance

Transient Overvoltage Instantaneous Operating time

Typically 25 ms
IEC 60255-5
Range 10 ms to 50 ms

Between all terminals and earth 5 kV

or between any two independent
1.2/50 μs
circuits without damage or flash-
over 0.5 J

Mechanical
Vibration (Sinusoidal)

IEC 255-21-1 The relays meet the requirements

of Class 1 for vibration response
and endurance
BS142 section 2.1 category S2 Relays will withstand a 20G shock
or impact on the panel without
operating

38 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR101,

AR103)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR101, AR103) 7 P G 1 1 1 0 - □ □ □ □ 0 - 0 A □ □
| | | | | |
Single element, no flag, size E2, AC or DC voltage operated relay | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Contact Operation | | | | | |
Self reset contacts 1 | | | | | 2.4
Hand and electrical reset contacts 3 | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
0 NO A | | | |
1 NO B | | | |
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | |
4 NO E | | | |
5 NO F | | | |
6 NO G | | | |
7 NO H | | | |
8 NO J | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
5 NC F | | |
6 NC G | | |
7 NC H | | |
8 NC J | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 2 | | |
Two 0 | |
Four 1 | |
Six 3 | |
Eight 5 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0

2 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 39
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Product Description Order No.

AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |
Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

2.4

40 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR106)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR106) 7 P G 1 1 1 0 - 6 □ □ □ 0 - 0 A □ □
| | | | |
Single element, no flag, electrical reset contact, size E2, AC or DC voltage operated relay | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
0 NO A | | | |
1 NO B | | | | 2.4
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | |
4 NO E | | | |
5 NO F | | | |
6 NO G | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
5 NC F | | |
6 NC G | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 3 | | |
Two 0 | |
Four 1 | |
Six 3 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0
AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |
Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

3 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 41
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR201)

Product Description Order No.

4 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

42 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR111,

AR112)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR111, AR112) 7 P G 1 1 1 1 - □ □ □ □ 0 - 0 A □ □
| | | | | |
Single element, hand reset flag, size E2, AC or DC voltage operated relay | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Contact Operation | | | | | |
Self reset contacts 1 | | | | | 2.4
Hand reset contacts 2 | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
0 NO A | | | |
1 NO B | | | |
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | |
4 NO E | | | |
5 NO F | | | |
6 NO G | | | |
7 NO H | | | |
8 NO J | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
5 NC F | | |
6 NC G | | |
7 NC H | | |
8 NC J | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 5 | | |
Two 0 | |
Four 1 | |
Six 3 | |
Eight 5 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0

5 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 43
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Product Description Order No.

AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |
Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

2.4

44 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR112SB)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR112SB) 7 P G 1 1 1 1 - 2 □ □ □ 4 - 0 A □ □
| | | | |
Single element, hand reset flag, hand reset contacts, size E2, DC voltage operated relay with series | | | | |
break contact to reduce relay burden to zero after operation
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | 2.4
1 NO B | | | |
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | |
4 NO E | | | |
5 NO F | | | |
6 NO G | | | |
7 NO H | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
5 NC F | | |
6 NC G | | |
7 NC H | | |
8 NC J | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 6 | | |
Two 0 | |
Four 1 | |
Six 3 | |
Eight 5 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0
AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |
Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

6 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 45
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR113)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR113) 7 P G 1 1 1 1 - 3 □ □ □ 0 - 0 A □ □
| | | | |
Single element, hand reset flag, hand and electrical reset contacts, size E2, AC or DC voltage | | | | |
operated relay
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
2.4 0 NO A | | | |
1 NO B | | | |
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | |
4 NO E | | | |
5 NO F | | | |
6 NO G | | | |
7 NO H | | | |
8 NO J | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
5 NC F | | |
6 NC G | | |
7 NC H | | |
8 NC J | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 7 | | |
Four 1 | |
Six 3 | |
Eight 5 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0
AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |
Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

7 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

46 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR114)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR114) 7 P G 1 1 1 1 - 4 □ □ □ □ - 0 A □ □
| | | | | |
Single element, hand reset flag, hand and self reset contacts, size E2, AC or DC voltage operated | | | | | |
relay
| | | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | | 2.4
1 NO B | | | | |
2 NO C | | | | |
3 NO D | | | | |
4 NO E | | | | |
5 NO F | | | | |
6 NO G | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | | |
0 NC A | | | |
1 NC B | | | |
2 NC C | | | |
3 NC D | | | |
4 NC E | | | |
5 NC F | | | |
6 NC G | | | |
| | | |
Number of Contacts 8 | | | |
Four 1 | | |
Six 3 | | |
| | |
Contact Type 9 | | |
NO (Self reset) / NC (Self reset / 2 Hand reset) 1 | |
NO (Self reset / 2 Hand reset) / NC (Self reset) 2 | |
NO (Self reset / 1 Hand reset) / NC (Self reset / 1 Hand reset) 3 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0
AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |

8 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

9 1) Hand reset contacts are fitted as 2NO, 2NC or 1NO/1NC, remaining contacts are self reset in any combination

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 47
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Product Description Order No.

Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

2.4

48 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR211,

AR212)

Product Description Order No.

10 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 49
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Product Description Order No.

AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |
Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

2.4

50 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR212SB)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR212SB) 7 P G 1 1 2 1 - 2 □ □ □ 4 - 0 C □ □
| | | | |
Two element, hand reset flag, hand reset contacts, size E4, DC voltage operated relay with series | | | | |
break contact to reduce relay burden to zero after operation
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | 2.4
1 NO B | | | |
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | |
4 NO E | | | |
5 NO F | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
5 NC F | | |
6 NC G | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 11 | | |
Two 0 | |
Four 1 | |
Six 3 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0
AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |
Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

11 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 51
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR121)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR121) 7 P G 1 1 1 2 - 1 □ □ □ 0 - 0 A □ □
| | | | |
Single element, hand reset reverse acting flag, self reset contacts, size E2, AC or DC voltage | | | | |
operated relay
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
2.4 0 NO A | | | |
1 NO B | | | |
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | |
4 NO E | | | |
5 NO F | | | |
6 NO G | | | |
7 NO H | | | |
8 NO J | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
5 NC F | | |
6 NC G | | |
7 NC H | | |
8 NC J | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 12 | | |
Two 0 | |
Four 1 | |
Six 3 | |
Eight 5 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0
AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |

12 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

52 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Product Description Order No.

Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

2.4

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 53
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR124)

Product Description Order No.

13 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

54 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR221)

Product Description Order No.

14 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 55
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR131,

AR136)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR131, AR136) 7 P G 1 1 1 3 - □ □ □ □ 0 - 0 A □ □
| | | | | |
Single element, self reset flag, size E2, AC or DC voltage operated relay | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Contact Operation | | | | | |
2.4 Self reset contacts 1 | | | | |
Electrical reset contacts 6 | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
0 NO A | | | |
1 NO B | | | |
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | |
4 NO E | | | |
5 NO F | | | |
6 NO G | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
5 NC F | | |
6 NC G | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 15 | | |
Two 0 | |
Four 1 | |
Six 3 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0
AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |
Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

15 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

56 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR133)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR133) 7 P G 1 1 1 3 - 3 □ □ □ 0 - 0 A □ □
| | | | |
Single element, self reset flag, hand and electrical reset contacts, size E2, AC or DC voltage oper- | | | | |
ated relay
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
0 NO A | | | | 2.4
1 NO B | | | |
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | |
4 NO E | | | |
5 NO F | | | |
6 NO G | | | |
7 NO H | | | |
8 NO J | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
5 NC F | | |
6 NC G | | |
7 NC H | | |
8 NC J | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 16 | | |
Two 0 | |
Four 1 | |
Six 3 | |
Eight 5 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0
AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |

16 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 57
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Product Description Order No.

Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

2.4

58 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR231)

Product Description Order No.

17 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 59
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR141)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Auxiliary relay (AR141) 7 P G 1 1 1 4 - 1 □ □ □ 0 - 0 A □ □
| | | | |
Single element, self reset reverse acting flag, self reset contacts, size E2, AC or DC voltage operated | | | | |
relay
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
2.4 0 NO A | | | |
1 NO B | | | |
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | |
4 NO E | | | |
5 NO F | | | |
6 NO G | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
5 NC F | | |
6 NC G | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 18 | | |
Two 0 | |
Four 1 | |
Six 3 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 12 V A |
DC 24 V B |
DC 30 V C |
DC 50 V D |
DC 60 V E |
DC 125 V F |
DC 220 V G |
DC 240 V H |
AC 63.5 V J 0
AC 110 V K 0
AC 220 V L 0
AC 240 V M 0
|
Back EMF Suppression Diode |
Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

18 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

60 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Auxiliary Relay – 7PG11

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR241)

Product Description Order No.

19 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 61
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Description
The 7PG15 TR relay has a range of multi-contact attracted arma-
ture relays designed to both IEC 255-5 and BS142 standards. A
wide range of models are available to meet the requirements of
the electric supply industry.
• Low burden, TR1 series, 7PG151
Type TR1 relays are suitable for application for tripping and
auxiliary duties where immunity to capacitance discharge is
not required. These relays are not intended for use with
current operated series follower relays.
• High burden, TR2 series, 7PG152
High burden relays with immunity to capacitance discharge
currents. They are also suitable for certain applications where
2.5
they are remote from the initiation signal.
A high burden also permits reliable operation of current oper-
ated series repeat relays. TR relays can be provided with an
instantaneous or time-delayed cut-off.
• Low burden relay, TR312, 7PG153
Designed to meet the requirements of NGC (CEGB) specifica-
tion P15, this is an electrically reset relay (no flag indicator)
with additional terminals in the economy circuit to enable a
direct connection to the DC supply.
This arrangement allows a reduction in the break duty of the [sc_7PG15_profile, 1, --_--]
initiating contact. TR312 is designed for use with protection
relays having output contacts with a low break duty, e.g. reed Operate Coil Cut Off
relays.
• Economy – After initial operation the burden of the relay is
• Switching relay, TR431, 7PG154 automatically reduced to a low economy level.
Designed to meet the requirements of NGC TDM 5/11,
this is an electrically reset relay with an (IN/OUT) flag indi- • Instantaneous – After initial operation the burden of the relay
cator which follows the contact operation. These relays are automatically switches out. An internal heavy duty contact is
intended to switch protection and auto reclose equipment in arranged to open circuit the operate coil when operated.
and out of service when controlled over pilot wires from a • Time Delay Cut Off – Where instantaneous cut-off relays are
remote point. The relay is designed to have immunity to AC utilized a normally closed contact opens the operating coil
voltages to prevent maloperation of the relay due to induced circuit and so the burden is reduced to zero instantaneously.
voltages on interconnecting cables. They are intended to A time delay circuit has been introduced on various 7PG15
operate from a remote DC 50 V battery with a pilot loop variants for occasions where another series operating element
resistance of up to 200 Ω. requires a longer operating time.
• Special purpose relays, TR9 series, 7PG156 Contacts
This designation identifies TR relays designed to meet a
special purpose e.g. TR901 is a high burden repeat relay, a
• Self Reset – Contact is in the operate position whilst the relay
operate coil is energized.
type TR231 with a 2 position flag indicator used as a plant
follower relay for circuit breakers and disconnectors. • Hand Reset – Contact is in the operated position by a mechan-
ical latch that is released by the reset mechanism.
Benefits • Electrical Reset – Contact is in the operated position by a
The benefits of the High Speed Trip Relay are: mechanical latch that is released by energizing the reset coil.

• High speed, high burden, positive action, and instantaneous

cutoff. Hardware Construction
• The 7PG15 trip relay can be used with the Trip Circuit Supervi- The device is housed in a draw-out case designed for panel
sion relay (7PG17, XR250 to XR351) to monitor and supervise
mounting.
the integrity of the trip circuit with coil supervision terminal.
The rear connection comprises of M4 screw terminals suitable
• Supplied in a draw-out type case. for ring type crimps.
• Robust design for a long, reliable service life.
• The trip relay coil may be supervised using a trip relay supervi-
sion relay (7PG17, XR151).

62 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

2.5

[sc_7PG11_HandlesWithdrawing, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.5/3 Withdrawing Device Using Handles

[sc_7PG15_E2, 1, en_US]

Earthing Terminal
Figure 2.5/1 Size E2
The case earth stud should be solidly earthed to the panel earth
before any connections to the device rear terminal. Located at
the top rear of the case is a case earth stud as shown in Figure
2.4/3, this must be connected to the main panel earth.

[sc_7PG11_EarthingTerminal, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.5/4 Case Earth Stud

Hand Reset Mechanism

Pull the blue handle upwards to slide the mechanism in an
upwards direction with the flag reset wire at the bottom.

[sc_7PG15_E4, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.5/2 Size E4

The chassis of the device can be withdrawn from the case by

pulling the handles on the top and bottom.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 63
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Relay Information
The device fascia displays the MLFB order code, serial number,
and device identification reference.

Electrical Hazard

Refer to device documentation

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equip-

ment Directive (WEEE)

European CE marking

2.5 Guideline for the Eurasian Market

United Kingdom (UK) conformity-

assessed marking

[sc_7PG11_HandResetMechanism, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.5/5 Hand Reset Mechanism

64 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Dimension Drawings

2.5

[sc_E2casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.5/6 E2 Case

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 65
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

2.5

[sc_E4casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.5/7 E4 Case

Connection Diagrams
Please refer to the Siemens website for the connection
diagrams.

66 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Break AC 1250 VA or DC 100 W (resis-

Technical Data
tive) or DC 50 W (inductive) within
Indication of Conformity limits of 250 V and 5 A
Indication TR1 and TR2 relays have a hand
This product complies with the reset mechanical flag indicator.
directive of the Council of the TR4 and TR9 relays have a self
European Communities on the reset flag indicator.
harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to elec- Mechanical Tests
trical equipment for use within
specified voltage limits (Low
Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU) as Test Reference Requirement
well as restriction on usage of Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Class I
hazardous substances in electrical Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class I
and electronic equipment (RoHS and BS142, 1.5.2
Directive 2011/65/EU). (1989) 2.5
This conformity has been proved
by tests conducted by Siemens AG Electrical Tests
in accordance of the Council Direc-
tive in accordance with the product
Test Standard
standard IEC/EN 60255-27 for the
low-voltage directive. Insulation resistance IEC 60255-4, 5 kV 1.2/50 μs wave-
form
RoHS directive 2011/65/EU is met
using the standard EN 50581. The 2 kV RMS 50 Hz for 1 min (2.5 kV
device has been designed and for 1 s) between all terminals and
produced for industrial use. earth.
IEC 60255-5 and BS142, 1 kV RMS
General Technical Data 50 Hz for 1 min across make
contacts.
Parameter Value
Operate time 10 ms at rated voltage Climatic Environmental Tests
Rated voltage Vrated DC 24 V, DC 30 V, DC 48 V, DC 125 V, Temperature
DC 240 V 20
IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2 and BS2011 (1977)
Operating range 50 % to 120 % of rated voltage 21 22
Ambient operating temperature -10 °C to +55 °C
Nominal Burdens Storage temperature (non-opera- -25 °C to +70 °C
tional)
Burden (W)
Rated voltage TR1 TR2 Humidity
DC 30 V 43 43
IEC 60068-2-30
DC 48 V 46 52
DC 125 V 47 127 Damp heat test, cyclic 56 days at 40 °C and 95 % relative
Reset coil 50 50 humidity

Ip Ratings
NOTE

i Relays with economy circuits reduce to approxi-

mately 7 W after operation.
Type
Installed with cover
Level
IP 5X

Contact Ratings

Make and carry continuously AC 1250 VA or DC 1250 W within

limits of 660 V and 5 A
Make and carry for 3 s AC 7500 VA or DC 7500 W within
limits of 660 V and 30 A

20 DC 24 V and DC 240 V ratings are not part of ESI 48-4.

21 Operating coils of self-reset and economy cut-off relays are rated at 120 % of rated voltage. All other operate and reset coils are short time rated well
in excess of the operating time of their cut-off contacts. Self-reset relays will reset at not less than 5 % rated voltage.
22 The operating range for the 20 contact TR212 device is 70 % to 110 % of rated voltage (Starting with product code 7PG1521-2XX80).

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 67
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

23 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

68 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

24 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 69
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

25 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

70 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

26 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 71
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

27 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

72 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 73
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

28 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

74 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

29 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 75
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

30 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

76 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

31 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 77
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

32 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

78 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 79
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

33 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

80 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 81
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

34 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

82 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PG15

Ordering Information – 7PG15

Product Description Order Number

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 83
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

Description
The 7PJ1521 and 7PJ1524 High Speed Trip relay is a
multi-contact attracted armature relay designed to IEC 60255.
High burden relays with immunity to capacitance discharge
currents. They are also suitable for certain applications where
they are remote from the initiation signal.
A high burden also permits reliable operation of current oper-
ated series repeat relays. TR relays can be provided with an
instantaneous or time-delayed cut-off.

Benefits
The features of the High Speed Trip Relay are:
2.5
• High speed, high burden, positive action, and instantaneous
cutoff.
• The 7PJ15 series High Burden Trip Relay can be used with
Trip Circuit supervision relay (Siemens Reyrolle 7PJ13) having
a supervision current of ≤ 3 mA to monitor and supervise the
integrity of the Trip circuit with coil supervision terminal.
• It is supplied in a draw-out type case.

[7PJ15_FrontView, 1, --_--]

Applications
The high speed trip relay type 7PJ15 is mainly used for all types
of control and protection circuits in power stations and indus-
trial applications, where a higher grade of reliability and high
contact rating is stipulated. The 7PJ15 relay acts as a high speed
element and contact multiplication in tripping and signaling
circuits of protective relays.
The high speed trip relay is used in the following applications:
• Tripping of multiple circuit-breakers
• Tripping and lock out application of feeder and transformer
circuit-breakers
• Control signaling and interlocking
• Inter tripping and remote tripping interface for SCADA

[sc_7PJ15_drawout-gen, 1, --_--]

• The relay has a robust design for a long, reliable service life.

Dimension Drawings
This section displays the different dimensional views of a High
Speed Trip Relay.

84 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

2.5

[sc_E2casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.5/8 E2 Case

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 85
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

2.5

[sc_E4casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.5/9 E4 Case

86 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

2.5

[lo_7PJ15_10contactswiringdiagram, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.5/10 7PJ1521 (10 Contacts Self Reset Trip Relay) Wiring Diagram

Trip + ve 27
coil - ve 28
supply
Coil supervi- 24
sion
Contact config- Output Contact Pair / Terminal Number
uration 1–3 2–4 5–7 6–8 9– 10– 13– 14– 17– 21–
11 12 15 16 19 23
10M + 0B M M M M M M M M M M
8M + 2B B B M M M M M M M M
6M + 4B B B B B M M M M M M

Table 2.5/1 7PJ1521 (10 Contacts Self Reset Trip Relay) Terminal Details

DC 125 V Relay R1-2X 100R, 12 W

R2-2X 3.9K, 12 W
R3-1X 270R, 6 W
DC 240 V Relay R1-1X 470R, 12 W
R2-1X 2.2K, 12 W
R2-1X 4.7K, 12 W
R3-1X 270R, 6 W [sc_7PJ15_10contactsterminaldiagram1, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.5/11 7PJ1521 (10 Contacts Self Reset Trip Relay) Terminal
Table 2.5/2 7PJ1521 (10 Contacts Self Reset Trip Relay) Resistor Details Diagram

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 87
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

2.5

[lo_7PJ15_6/10contactswiringdiagram, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.5/12 7PJ1524 (6/10 Contacts Hand Reset and Electrical Reset Trip Relay) Wiring Diagram

Trip + ve 27
coil - ve 28
supply
Reset + ve 25
coil - ve 26
supply
Coil supervi- 24
sion
Contact config- Output Contact Pair / Terminal Number
uration 1–3 2–4 5–7 6–8 9– 10– 13– 14– 17– 18–
11 12 15 16 19 20
8M + 2B B B M M M M M M M M
6M + 4B B B B B M M M M M M
4M + 2B B B M M M M – – – –
5M + 1B B – M M M M M – – –
6M + 0B – – M M M M M M – –

Table 2.5/3 7PJ1524 (6/10 Contacts Hand Reset and Electrical Reset Trip
Relay) Terminal Details

DC 125 V Relay R1-2X 100R

DC 240 V Relay R1-1X 470R, 14 W
[sc_7PJ15_610contactsterminaldiagram1, 1, --_--]
R2-1X 470R, 3 W
Figure 2.5/13 7PJ1524 (6/10 Contacts Hand Reset and Electrical Reset
Trip Relay) Terminal Diagram
Table 2.5/4 7PJ1524 (6/10 Contacts Hand Reset and Electrical Reset Trip
Relay) Resistor Details

88 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

2.5

[lo_7PJ15_20contactswiringdiagram, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.5/14 7PJ1524 (20 Contacts hand Reset and electrical reset Trip Relay) Wiring Diagram

Trip coil + ve B 27 DC 125 V Relay No resistor

supply - ve B 28 DC 240 V Relay R1&R2 – 470R, 14 W
Reset + ve B 25 R3&R4 – 470R, 3 W
coil - ve B 26
supply
Table 2.5/6 7PJ1524 (20 Contacts Hand Reset and Electrical Reset Trip
Coil supervi- B 24 Relay) Resistor Details
sion
Contact config- "A" Block Output Contact Pair / Terminal Number
uration 1–3 2–4 5–7 6–8 9– 10– 13– 14– 17– 18–
11 12 15 16 19 20
18M + 2B M B M M M M M M M M
16M + 4B B B M M M M M M M M
Contact config- "B" Block Output Contact Pair / Terminal Number
uration 1–3 2–4 5–7 6–8 9– 10– 13– 14– 17– 18–
11 12 15 16 19 20
18M + 2B M B M M M M M M M M
16M + 4B B B M M M M M M M M

Table 2.5/5 7PJ1524 (20 Contacts Hand Reset and Electrical Reset Trip
Relay) Terminal Details

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 89
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

Parameter Value
Rated voltage Vrated DC 125 V, DC 240 V 35
Operating range 50 % to 120 % of rated voltage Vrated 36
Permissible current for coil 3 mA maximum
supervision
Contact reset arrangement Self
(7PJ1521)
Contact reset arrangement Hand and Electrical
(7PJ1524)
Flag reset arrangement Hand

7PJ1521 Nominal Burden (Self Reset)

2.5
Operate Coil Burden (W)
Rated voltage Nominal burden (W) Burden (W) after oper-
to operate ation of economy
circuit
DC 125 V ≤ 150 ≤ 10
DC 240 V ≤ 180 ≤ 10

7PJ1524 Nominal Burden (Hand and Electrical Reset)

[sc_7PJ15_20contactsterminaldiagram1, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.5/15 7PJ1524 (20 Contacts Hand Reset and Electrical Reset Operate Coil Burden (W)
Trip Relay) Terminal Diagram Rated voltage 10 Contacts 20 Contacts
DC 125 V ≤ 150 ≤ 180
Technical Data DC 240 V ≤ 180 ≤ 180
For full technical data refer to the Performance Specification Reset Coil Burden (W)
Chapter of the Technical Manual. Rated voltage 10 Contacts 20 Contacts
DC 125 V ≤ 50 ≤ 70
Indication of Conformity
DC 240 V ≤ 70 ≤ 150
This product complies with the directive of the
Council of the European Communities on the Contact Ratings
harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to concerning electrical equipment for use Make and carry AC 1250 VA or DC 1250 W within limits of
within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Direc- continuously 660 V and 5 A
tive 2014/35/EU) as well as restriction on usage
Short time AC 30 A or DC 30 A for 0.5 s
of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic
equipment (RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU). Make and carry for 3 s AC 7500 VA or DC 7500 W within limits of
660 V and 30 A
This conformity has been proved by tests conducted
by Siemens AG in accordance of the Council Direc- Limiting making 1000 W within limits of 250 V
tive in accordance with the product standard IEC/EN capacity (L/R ≤ 40 ms)
60255-27 for the low-voltage directive. Limiting breaking
capacity
RoHS directive 2011/65/EU is met using the standard
IEC/EN 63000. The device has been designed and AC resistive 1250 VA V/I = 250/5
produced for industrial use. DC resistive 100 W V/I = 48/2.09;
110/0.91;
General Technical Data
250/0.4
DC inductive (L/R ≤ 40 50 W
Parameter Value V/I = 48/1.042;
ms)
Operating time 10 ms at rated voltage Vrated 110/0.454;
Reset time < 20 ms at rated voltage Vrated (electrical 250/0.2
reset)
Drop-off time < 20 ms (self reset)

35 10 contacts - DC 240 V, 20 contacts - DC 125 V and DC 240 V, product variants are not part of the ENA TS 48-4.
36 Operating coils of self-reset and economy cut-off relays are rated at 120 % of rated voltage. All other operate and rest coils are short time rated well in
excess of the operating time of their cut-off contacts. Self-reset relays will reset at not less than 5 % rated voltage.

90 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

Electrical endurance 10,000 operations Test Standard

Switching rate 600 operations per hour Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10, Level 5
value
0.1 and 1.0 MHz,100 A/m
Mechanical Tests Impulse magnetic field immunity IEC 61000-4-9, Level 5
test
1000 A/m, +/- 5 pulses
Test Reference Requirement
Immunity to capacitance discharge ENA TS 48-4
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response and endurance
Issue 4 2010
Class I
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock response and with- Refer to General Technical Data35.
stand
Class I
Product Safety Test

Bump Class I
Test Standard
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class I 2.5
Clearances and creepage distances IEC 60255-27
Degree of protec- IEC 60529 IP50 – Front
IP rating
tion
IP10 – Rear Impulse voltage
AC or DC dielectric voltage
Electrical Tests Insulation resistance
Protective bonding continuity
Test Standard
Protective bonding resistance
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-27 37
Flammability of insulating mate-
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ at rials, components and fire enclo-
DC 500 V sures
Between all terminals and earth Single fault condition

Between coil terminals and Mechanical resistance to shock and IEC 61010-1
contacts impact

Impulse voltage withstand Protection against electric shock

IEC 60255-27 37
Protection against the spread of
5 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J fire
5 +ve, -ve pulses Equipment temperature limits and
Between all terminals and earth resistance to heat

Between coil terminals and

contacts Climatic Environmental Tests
High voltage (Dielectric) IEC 60255-27 37 Temperature
2 kV, 50 Hz@1 min IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2/IEC 60068-2-14/IEC 60255-1
Between all terminals and earth
Ambient operating temperature -10 °C to +55 °C
Between coil terminals and
contacts Storage temperature (non-opera- -25 °C to +70 °C
tional)
AC 1 kV, 50 Hz @ 1 min across
make contacts Change of temperature Cyclic: 3 h at -10 °C to 3 h at +55°C

Thermal withstand continuous 38 IEC 60255-6 Number of cycles: 5

1.2 Vrated
Humidity
Functional performance IEC 60255-1
Maximum allowable temperature IEC 60255-6 IEC 60068-2-30/IEC 60068-2-78/IEC 60255-1
Maximum temperature limit
+ 100 °C Damp heat test, cyclic 6 days at +25 °C to +55 °C (12 h
+ 12 h cycle) and 93 % relative
AC ripple on DC supply IEC 61000-4-17 humidity
Withstand 15 % AC ripple on DC Damp heat steady state test 10 days at +40 °C and 95 %
Power frequency magnetic field IEC 61000-4-8 Level 4, humidity
30 A/m applied continuously Maximum altitude of operation Up to 2000 m

300 A/m applied for 3 s

37 All aspect of IEC 60255-5 have been covered under IEC 60255-27.
38 Applicable for self reset type trip relays

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 91
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

Installation Category Pollution

Installation category (overvoltage Class III Pollution degree 2

category)

2.5

92 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

Ordering Information – 7PJ1524

Product Description Order Number

39 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 93
Auxiliary Relays
High Speed Trip Relay – 7PJ15

Ordering Information – 7PJ1521

Product Description Order Number

40 The number of contacts must match the selected contact arrangement.

94 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PA30 1-phase

Description
The 7PA30 1-phase relay is used to monitor the trip circuit of
circuit breakers with 1 trip coil.
The trip circuit wiring is supervised from the positive supply to
the negative supply whilst the circuit breaker is open or closed.

Applications
Due to the design and quality of the relays, their high durability
and functional reliability, the relays are ideally suited for applica-
tion in critical control systems and ensure proper monitoring of
the entire trip circuit.
The high degree of protection ensures absolute reliability during
operation within a wide temperature range, even in harsh envi-
ronmental conditions.
The relay has been tested according to IEC, EN and IEEE stand- 2.6
ards. It bears the CE marking.
The monitoring current is always less than 1.4 mA and ensures [ph_7PA30-1, 1, --_--]

that there can be no failure of the trip coil. Proper operation is Figure 2.6/1 1-Phase Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay 7PA3032
signaled via a green LED.

Dimensions and Connections

[dw_7pa30-1phs_dimensions_and_panel-mounting-cutout, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.6/2 Dimensions and Installation Dimensions

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 95
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PA30 1-phase

2.6

[dw_7pa23_27_30-1phs_socket_for_surface-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.6/3 Surface-Mounting Base

96 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PA30 1-phase

2.6

[dw_7pa30-1phs_socket_for_flush-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.6/4 Flush-Mounting Base

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 97
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PA30 1-phase

Storage temperature -30 ºC +70 ºC

Max. humidity 93%/40 ºC

Weights and packaging

7PA30 1-phase 100 g
Carton 145x78x71 mm.
7XP9011-0 300 g
7XP9013-0 110 g

Design guidelines
Electrical tests according to IEC 60255-27
Insulation 2 kV/50 Hz/1 min
Surge immunity 5 kV/1.2/50 μs
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ/500 VDC
2.6 Flame resistance
Plastics UL94: V0
Protection class IEC 60529, EN60529
Relays IP40
Flush-mounting base IP10
Surface-Mounting Base IP10
Environmental conditions IEC 60068-2
Dry cold, in operation -10 ºC
Dry heat, in operation +55 ºC
Storage and transportation -30 ºC +70 ºC

EMC Tests
High-frequency test: EN 60255-22-1
Test level: 1 MHz, 400 imp/s, 2 s
[dw_7pa30-1phs_connection, 2, en_US]
Common mode: 2.5 kV
Figure 2.6/5 Connections – Contacts for a de-energized Relay
Differential mode: 1 kV
Fast transient bursts EN 61000-4-4
Technical Data Test level: 4 kV, 2.5 kHz, 1 min•2
kV, 5 kHz, 1 min
Rated Voltage and Internal Consumption Energy surge voltages EN 61000-4-5
VN (VDC) Voltage range (VDC) Internal consumption (mA) 8/20 μs. (current) - 1.2/50 μs.
(voltage) - 8/20 μs. (current)
24/30 18 to 33
32 Common mode: 2 kV - differential
48 38.5 to 52.5
mode: 1 kV
60 45 to 66
18 Radiated HF field interference, EN 61000-4-3
110/125 82.5 to 137.5
220 165 to 242 13 amplitude-modulated: Test level:
80-1000 MHz, 10 V/m, 80% AM (1
kHz)
Pre-arcing time for excitation > 500 ms
Radiated HF field interference, EN 61000-4-3
pulse-modulated:
Contacts
Test level: 900 ±5 MHz, 10 V/m,
Continuous current 8A 50% (200 Hz) 1.89 GHz ±10 MHz,
Overload capability 15 A 10 V/m, 50% (200 Hz)
Switching power 15 A/4 s/ 110 VDC Line-conducted HF EN 61000-4-6
Breaking power 0.3 A/110 VDC amplitude-modulated: Test level:
0.15-80 MHz, 10 V, 80% AM (1
kHz)
Vmax, open-circuited contact 250 VDC/400 VAC
Electrostatic discharge test: Test EN 61000-4-2
Mechanical endurance 107 switching cycles level:
Operating temperature -10 ºC +55 ºC
Contact ±15 kV, air mode ±15 kV

98 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PA30 1-phase

EMC Tests
Magnetic Field with Energy EN 61000-4-8
Frequency
Test level: 100 A/m 1 min•1000
A/m 1 s.
Emitted interference tests: Test EN 55011 Class A
level: Cover:
30-230 MHz, 40 dB (μV/m) (quasi
peak) - 10 m
230-1000 MHz, 47 dB (μV/m)
(quasi peak) - 10 m
Power supply:
0.15-0.5 MHz, 79 dB (μV) (quasi
peak)/66 dB average
0.5-5 MHz, 73 dB (μV) (quasi
2.6
peak)/60 dB average
5-30 MHz, 73 dB (μV) (quasi
peak)/60 dB average

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1-phase Trip-circuit supervision relay with 2 change-over contacts 7 P A 3 0 □ 2 - □ A A 0 0 - □

▲ ▲ ▲
Rated voltage │ │ │
DC 24/30 V 1 │ │
DC 60 V 2 │ │
DC 110/125 V 3 │ │
DC 220 V 4 │ │
DC 48 V 8 │ │
Number of phases │ │
1-phase 1 │
Base │
Without base 0
With base 7XP9011-0 (flush mounting) 1
With base 7XP9013-0 (surface mounting) 2
5 x retaining bracket for auxiliary relay with surface mounting base (1 required for each relay/
. . . . . . . . A Y R : E 4 3
surface mounting base)

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 99
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PA30 3-phase

Description
The 7PA30 3-phase relay is used to monitor the trip circuit of
circuit breakers with 3 phase-segregated trip coils.
The trip circuit wiring is supervised from the positive supply to
the negative supply whilst the circuit breaker is open or closed.

Applications
Due to the design and quality of the relays, their high durability
and functional reliability, the relays are ideally suited for applica-
tion in critical control systems and ensure proper monitoring of
the entire trip circuit.
The high degree of protection ensures absolute reliability during
operation within a wide temperature range, even in harsh envi-
ronmental conditions.
2.6 The relay has been tested according to IEC, EN and IEEE stand-
ards. It bears the CE marking.
The monitoring current is less than 1.4 mA and ensures that [ph_7PA30-3, 1, --_--]

there can be no failure of the trip coil. Figure 2.6/6 3-Phase Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay 7PA3042-3AA00
Proper operation is signaled via a green LED.

Dimensions and Connections

[dw_7pa30-3phs_dimensions_and_panel-mounting-cutout, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.6/7 Dimensions and Installation Dimensions

100 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PA30 3-phase

2.6

[dw_7pa30-3phs_socket_for_surface-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.6/8 Surface-Mounting Base

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 101
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PA30 3-phase

2.6

[dw_7pa30-3phs_socket_for_flush-mounting, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.6/9 Flush-Mounting Base

102 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PA30 3-phase

Weights and packaging

7XP9010-4 400 g
7XP9012-0 225 g

Design guidelines
Electrical tests according to IEC 60255-27
Insulation 2 kV/50 Hz/1 min
Surge immunity 5 kV/1.2/50 μs
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ/500 VDC
Flame resistance
Plastics UL94: V0
Protection class IEC 60529, EN60529
Relays IP40
Flush-mounting base IP10
Surface-Mounting Base IP10 2.6
Environmental conditions IEC 60068-2
Dry cold, in operation -10 ºC
Dry heat, in operation +55 ºC
Storage and transportation -30 ºC +70 ºC

EMC Tests
[dw_7pa30-3phs_connection, 2, en_US] High-frequency test: EN 60255-22-1

Figure 2.6/10 Connections - Contacts shown for a De-Energized Relay Test level: 1 MHz, 400 imp/s, 2 s
Common mode: 2.5 kV
Differential mode: 1 kV
Technical Data
Fast transient bursts EN 61000-4-4
Test level: 4 kV, 2.5 kHz, 1 min•2
Rated Voltage and Internal Consumption
kV, 5 kHz, 1 min
VN (VDC) Voltage range (VDC) Internal consumption (mA)
Energy surge voltages EN 61000-4-5
24/30 18 to 33 32
8/20 μs. (current) - 1.2/50 μs.
48 36 to 52.8 35 (voltage) - 8/20 μs. (current)
60 45 to 66 18
Common mode: 2 kV - differential
110/125 82.5 to 137.5 18 mode: 1 kV
220 165 to 242 13 Radiated HF field interference, EN 61000-4-3
amplitude-modulated: Test level:
Pre-arcing time for excitation > 500 ms 80-1000 MHz, 10 V/m, 80% AM (1
kHz)
Contacts Radiated HF field interference, EN 61000-4-3
Continuous current 8A pulse-modulated:
Overload capability 15 A Test level: 900 ±5 MHz, 10 V/m,
Switching power 15 A/4 s/ 110 VDC 50% (200 Hz) 1.89 GHz ±10 MHz,
10 V/m, 50% (200 Hz)
Breaking power 0.3 A/110 VDC
Line-conducted HF EN 61000-4-6

Vmax, open-circuited contact 250 VDC/400 VAC amplitude-modulated: Test level:

0.15-80 MHz, 10 V, 80% AM (1
Mechanical endurance 107 switching cycles kHz)
Operating temperature -10 ºC +55 ºC Electrostatic discharge test: Test EN 61000-4-2
Storage temperature -30 ºC +70 ºC level:
Max. humidity 93%/40 ºC Contact ±15 kV, air mode ±15 kV

Weights and packaging

7PA30 3-phase 165 g
Carton 150x124x84 mm

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 103
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PA30 3-phase

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

3-phase Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay with 2 change-over contacts 7 P A 3 0 □ 2 - □ A A 0 0 - □

▲ ▲ ▲
Rated voltage │ │ │
DC 24/30 V 1 │ │
DC 60 V 2 │ │
DC 110/125 V 3 │ │
DC 220 V 4 │ │
DC 48 V 8 │ │
Number of phases │ │
3-phase 3 │
Base │
Without base 0
With base 7XP9010-4 (flush mounting) 1
With base 7XP9012-0 (surface mounting) 2
5 x retaining bracket for auxiliary relay with surface mounting base (1 required for each relay/
. . . . . . . . A Y R : E 4 7
surface mounting base)

104 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PJ13

Description
The 7PJ13 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay is an electronic-circuit
based relay. The relay is a member of Siemens Reyrolle protec-
tion devices product family. It is used to monitor and supervise
the integrity of a circuit-breaker’s trip coil and other wiring
circuits.
The 7PJ13 is connected with a circuit-breaker to monitor the
trip circuit positions (make or break). The 7PJ13 generates
a trip circuit failure alarm, either if the trip circuit supply is
disconnected or if the trip circuit connection is changed to an
open circuit. Trip circuit continuity is measured by supplying the
supervision current of 0.7 mA to 1.5 mA and sensing the flow
of current with two opto-couplers. The circuit-breaker contact
indicates the status of the relay whether the circuit-breaker is in
a make position or a break position.
2.6
The 7PJ13 is available in 2 variants depending on the auxiliary
voltage range. The front panel of the 7PJ13 comprises of a dual
colored LED to indicate the status of process.

Outputs 2 Changeover
Housing Size 106 mm x 58 mm x 118 mm (Width
x Height x Depth), panel mounting, non
draw-out
Indication Auxiliary Power On LED

• Green = Aux Power On

Trip circuit supervision LED [dw_7PJ13v1-v2_FrontViews, 1, --_--]

• Green = TCS Healthy Benefits

• Red = TCS Faulty
• A compact design 108 mm x 56 mm (Width x Height)
For MLFB 7PJ1321-5CC02-0AA0 only
• Flush mounting moulded case.
Binary Input 1 LED and Binary Input 2 LED
• Continuous supervision of trip circuit in pre-closed condition,
• Green = ON post-closed condition, and latched trip condition.
• No indication = OFF • Detect and indicate auxiliary voltage loss and circuit failure in
Universal Auxiliary MLFB 7PJ1321-5AA21-0AA0
supervised circuits.
Voltage Range
• AC 24 V to 240 V/DC 24 V to 240 V • Indicates operational status by a single LED with dual color.
MLFB 7PJ1321-4AA21-0AA0 • The relay with MLFB 7PJ1321-5CC02-0AA0 displays status of
binary inputs with LED indication.
• AC 110 V to 240 V/ DC 110 V to 240 V
• Depending on relay selection, the contacts available are 2
contacts or 2 make contact + 2 break contact.
MLFB 7PJ1321-5CC02-0AA0

• AC 24 V to 240 V/DC 24 V to 240 V • The relay complies with IEC 60255 standards.
Burden Maximum burden upto 4 W or 9 VA
Applications
Universal Supervision MLFB 7PJ1321-5AA21-0AA0
Voltage Range The 7PJ13 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay is used in the following
• DC 18 V to 265 V field applications:

MLFB 7PJ1321-4AA21-0AA0 • The relay is used for supervising and monitoring activities. The
trip circuit wiring is supervised from the positive supply to the
• DC 18 V to 265 V negative supply when the circuit-breaker is in a make position
or a break position.
MLFB 7PJ1321-5CC02-0AA0
• The relay is used for detecting and generating a
• AC 40 V to 240 V/DC 40 V to 240 V circuit-breaker alarm, if the trip circuit supply has failed.
• The relay is used to generate an alarm if the trip signal is
received but the circuit-breaker fails to operate.
• The binary outputs can be wired on to a numerical protection
relay to indicate the faulted circuit to remote SCADA.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 105
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PJ13

Terminal Terminal Name Description

Connection Diagrams Number
K1-3 – Not connected
The terminal diagram is located on top of the 7PJ13 Trip Circuit
Supervision Relay housing and displays the terminal numbers K1-4 Earth
and terminals.

Table 2.6/1 Auxiliary Terminals Specification

Terminal Terminal Name Description

Number
K2-1 BI 1 + Binary input 1 positive
K2-2 BI 1 - Binary input 1 negative
K2-3 – Not connected
K2-4 BI 2 + Binary input 2 positive
K2-5 BI 2 - Binary input 2 negative
2.6
K2-6 – Not connected
K2-7 BO 1-COM Common
[sc_7PJ13_Terminal_5AA21, 1, en_US] K2-8 BO 1-B Binary output 1 break contact
Figure 2.6/11 Terminal Details (for MLFB 7PJ1321-5AA21-0AA0) of K2-9 BO 1-M Binary output 1 make contact
7PJ13 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay K2-10 BO 2-COM Common
K2-11 BO 2-B Binary output 2 break contact
K2-12 BO 2-M Binary output 2 make contact

Table 2.6/2 Binary Terminals Specification

[MLFB 7PJ1321-5AA21-0AA0/MLFB 7PJ1321-4AA21-0AA0]

Terminal Terminal Name Description

Number
K2-1 BI 1 + Binary input 1 positive
K2-2 BI 1 - Binary input 1 negative
K2-3 BI 2 + Binary input 2 positive
K2-4 BI 2 - Binary input 2 negative
[sc_7PJ13_Terminal4AA21, 1, en_US] K2-5 BO 1-B Binary output 1 break contact
Figure 2.6/12 Terminal Details (for MLFB 7PJ1321-4AA21-0AA0) of K2-6 BO 1-COM Common
7PJ13 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay K2-7 BO 2-B Binary output 2 break contact
K2-8 BO 2-COM Common
K2-9 BO 3-COM Common
K2-10 BO 3-M Binary output 3 make contact
K2-11 BO 4-COM Common
K2-12 BO 4-M Binary output 4 make contact

Table 2.6/3 Binary Terminals Specification

[MLFB 7PJ1321-5CC02-0AA0]

Mounting Instructions
A Trip Circuit Supervision Relay comprises of spring type
mounting clamps, which enables easy installation. To mount
[sc_7PJ13_Terminal_5CC02, 1, en_US]
the Trip Circuit Supervision Relay, the following requirements
Figure 2.6/13 Terminal Details (for MLFB 7PJ1321-5CC02-0AA0) of should be satisfied:
7PJ13 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay
• Cut a hole in the panel with a measurement of 92 mm x 45
mm (Width x Height).
Terminal Terminal Name Description
Number • Carry out all of the required internal wiring connections.
K1-1 L (+) Auxiliary voltage positive • Install the Trip Circuit Supervision Relay into the panel and
K1-2 N (-) Auxiliary voltage negative lock with the clamps.

106 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PJ13

Dimension Drawings
This section displays the different dimensional views of a Trip
Circuit Supervision Relay.

2.6

[dw_7PJ13_4AA21_FrontDim, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.6/14 Front View [MLFB 7PJ1321-5AA21-0AA0 and MLFB

7PJ1321-4AA21-0AA0]

[lo_7PJ13_dimension_top, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.6/17 Top View

[lo_7PJ13_dimension_front, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.6/15 Front View [MLFB 7PJ1321-5CC02-0AA0]

[lo_7PJ13_dimension_side, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.6/18 Side View

[lo_7PJ13_dimension_panelcutout, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.6/16 Panel Cut-out View

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 107
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PJ13

Binary Outputs
Technical Data
Indication of Conformity Parameter Value
Operate time > 500 ms and < 800 ms
This product complies with the directive of
Reset time < 100 ms
the Council of the European Communities
on the harmonization of the laws of the Mechanical life (loaded) 10 000 operations (at rated current of
Member States relating to electromagnetic resistive load)
compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU) and Number of contacts 2 change-over contacts,
concerning electrical equipment for use within
Selectable 2 make contacts + 2 break
specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
contacts
2014/35/EU) as well as restriction on usage
of hazardous substances in electrical and elec- (As per MLFB selection)
tronic equipment (RoHS Directive 2011/65/ Contact details Rated voltage AC 250 V
EU).
DC 250 V
This conformity has been proved by tests
Contact current
conducted by Siemens AG in accordance of
rating:
2.6 the Council Directive in accordance with the
product standard IEC/EN 60255-26 for the Continuous AC 5 A/DC 5 A
EMC directives, and with the standard IEC/EN Short time AC 30 A/DC 30 A
60255-27 for the low-voltage directive. for 0.2 s
RoHS directive 2011/65/EU is met using the Make and carry for AC 10 A
standard EN 50581. The device has been 0.5 s
designed and produced for industrial use. Make and carry for AC 8 A
3s
Break Breaking capacity
NOTE

i
for DC with circuit
Product CE certified for MLFBs: time-constant
7PJ1321-4AA21-0AA0 and 7PJ1321-5CC02-0AA0 L/R < 40 ms,
at 48 V/110 V/
220 V 0.7 A/
General Technical Data 0.25 A/0.15 A
Power Supply Limiting making capacity: 1000 W
(L/R ≤ 40 ms)
Parameter Value
Auxiliary voltage range DC 24 V to 240 V/AC 24 V to 240 V 41 Installation Category
Vrated
DC 110 V to 240 V/ AC 110 V to 240 V 41
Parameter Value
Auxiliary voltage operating 80 % to 110 %
range Installation category (overvoltage Class III
category)
Input power consumption < 4 W/ 9 VA

Pollution
Binary Inputs
Parameter Value
Parameter Value
Pollution degree 2
BI threshold/oper- BI voltage rating BI operating range
ating voltage DC 19 V DC 18 V to 265 V
External Interfaces
AC 40 V/DC 40 V AC 40 V to 265 V/DC 40 V
to 265 V
Parameter Value
Input power < 1 W/VA
consumption Power supply (1 make contact) Header: 4 Pin

Current for opera- 0.9 mA to 3 mA Cabling-type: standard wire,

tion unshielded, max. 2.5 mm2
Isolation AC 2 kV Binary inputs (2 make contacts) Header: 12 Pin
and contact outputs (2 make
Cabling-type: standard wire,
contacts)
unshielded, max. 2.5 mm2

41 Based on ordering option

108 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PJ13

Mechanical Tests Test Standard

Slow damped oscillatory wave IEC 60255-26
Test Standard Common-mode:
Degree of protection IEC 60529,
Test voltage: 2.5 kV peak voltage
IP54 front
Differential mode:
IP20 rear
Test voltage: 1.0 kV peak voltage
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1,
Test duration: 2 s
Response and endurance,
Source impedance: 200 Ω
Class I
Voltage oscillation frequency:
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2,
1 MHz
Shock response and withstand,
Repetition frequency: 400 Hz
Class I Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-26
Bump, class I 8 kV air discharge
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3, 2.6
6 kV contact discharge
Class I Electrical fast transient or burst IEC 60255-26
Contact performance IEC 60255-1,
Test level: zone A
(Ref: Std IEC 61810-1)
Test severity amplitude: ± 4 kV
Repetition frequency: 5 kHz
Electrical Tests
Surge immunity IEC 60255-26

Test Standard Test level: zone B

Insulation resistance IEC 60255-27 42 Line to line: 0.5 kV, 1 kV
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ at Line to earth: 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV
DC 500 V Front time/time to half-value:
Test duration: > 5 s (Between any 1.2/50 μs
terminal and earth, independent Source impedance: 2 Ω
circuits)
Radiated immunity IEC 60255-26
Impulse voltage withstand IEC 60255-27 42
80 MHz to 1.0 GHz and 1.4 GHz to
5 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J 2.7 GHz
5 +ve, -ve pulses Field strength: 10 V/m (RMS)
(Between all terminals and case Amplitude modulated: 80 % AM
earth and any 2 independent (1 kHz)
circuits)
Conducted radio frequency inter- IEC 60255-26
AC dielectric voltage IEC 60255-27 42 ference
150 kHz to 80 MHz,
AC 2 kV RMS for 1 min (Between
any terminal and earth, inde- 10 VRMS , dwell time: 0.5 s
pendent circuits) Power frequency magnetic field IEC 60255-26
AC 1 kV RMS for 1 min (across 30 A/m applied 1 min,
make contacts)
300 A/m applied for 3 s
Radiated emissions IEC 60255-26 and CISPR 11
Conducted emissions IEC 60255-26 and CISPR 32
Functional performance IEC 60255-1
Gradual shutdown/start-up test IEC 60255-26
Shut down/start up ramp 60 s
Power off 5 min
Power frequency immunity test 43 IEC 60255-26
Test level: zone B

42 All aspects of IEC 60255-5 have been covered under IEC 60255-27.
43 DC binary input ports interfacing with cables whose total length is more than 10 m, need to have a multi core twisted screened cable for providing
immunity against high level of power frequency interferences.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 109
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PJ13

Test Standard Test Reference

Pulse magnetic field test IEC 61000-4-9 Protection against electric shock IEC 61010-1: Edition 3
1000 A/m, 5 +ve and 5 -ve Clause number 6
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10 Protection against the spread of IEC 61010-1: Edition 3
value fire
0.1 and 1.0 MHz, 100 A/m Clause number 9
Equipment temperature limits and IEC 61010-1: Edition 3
Product Safety Test resistance to heat
Clause number 10

Test Reference Climatic Environmental Tests

Clearances and creepage distances IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2
Temperature
≥ 4 mm
IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2/IEC 60255-1/IEC 60068-2-14
IP rating IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2
IP54 (front side)
Ambient operating temperature -10 °C to +55 °C
IP20 (rear side) Storage temperature (non-opera- -25 °C to +70 °C
2.6
Impulse voltage IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 tional)
5 kV, 5 +ve, 5 -ve pulses Change of temperature test -10 °C to +55 °C
AC dielectric voltage IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2
Humidity
AC 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
Insulation resistance IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 IEC 60068-2-30/IEC 60068-2-78/IEC 60255-1
DC 500 V, > 5 s, > 100 MΩ
Damp heat test, cyclic +25 to 55 °C, RH > 93 % RH
Protective bonding resistance IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2
(6 cycles)
< AC 12 V/DC 12 V, 1 min, < 0.1 Ω
Protective bonding continuity IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 At lower temperature, 93 %,
± 3 % RH
Flammability IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2
Single fault condition IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 At upper temperature, 93 %,
± 3 % RH
Mechanical resistance to shock and IEC 61010-1: Edition 3
impact Damp heat test, steady state 10 days at 93 ± 3 % RH, +40 °C
Clause number 8

110 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PJ13

Ordering Information – 7PJ13

Product Description Order Number Order Description

Trip Circuit Supervision Relay 7PJ1321-4AA21-0AA0 • Number of Binary Inputs: Element 2
(Global Region) • Contact Reset Type: Self reset
• Auxiliary Voltage Range: AC 110 V to 240 V/ DC 110 V to 240 V
• Contact Arrangement: 0 make contact, 0 break contact and 2 change-over contact
• Binary Input Range: DC 18 V to 265 V, Threshold DC 19 V
Trip Circuit Supervision Relay 7PJ1321-5CC02-0AA0 • Number of Binary Inputs: Element 2
(Global Region) • Contact Reset Type: Self reset
• Auxiliary Voltage Range: AC 24 V to 240 V/DC 24 V to 240 V
• Contact Arrangement: 2 Make contact, 2 Break contact and 0 change-over contact
• Binary Input Range: AC 40 V to 240 V/DC 40 V to 240 V, Threshold AC/DC 40 V
Trip Circuit Supervision Relay 7PJ1321-5AA21-0AA0 • Number of Binary Inputs: Element 2
(India Region) • Contact Reset Type: Self reset
• Auxiliary Voltage Range: AC 24 V to 240 V/DC 24 V to 240 V 2.6
• Contact Arrangement: 0 make contact, 0 break contact and 2 change-over contact
• Binary Input Range: DC 18 V to 265 V, Threshold DC 19 V

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 111
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR250 to XR351

Description
Type XR relays are developments for specific applications of the
type AR relay range. They are electro-mechanical relays with a
consistent positive action, a long service life and complying with
the appropriate requirements of IEC 255 and BS142. Models
XR250/251 have two attracted armature elements, XR350/351
have three. These relays incorporate a time delay on de-energi-
sation to keep the relay in an operated condition during tempo-
rary reductions in the battery voltage.
• Low burden
• Versatile design, can provide pre-close supervision
• Consistent positive action
[sc_7PG17_E3Angle, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.6/19 7PG17 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay

Supervision for the trip circuit breaker is desirable as a means of
ensuring the integrity to the trip circuit.
2.6
There are differing requirements for monitoring a trip circuit,
supervision of the trip with the circuit breaker closed, supervi-
sion with the circuit breaker open and closed and pre-closing
supervision. These XR relays are designed to meet all of these
requirements and in particular the requirements of BEBS S15
schemes H4 and H7.
XR250 and XR251
• Circuit breaker closed supervision will initiate an alarm and
provide indication with the circuit closed for failure of the
trip supply, open circuit trip coil, an open circuit in the trip
circuit wiring and if the trip coil should fail to respond to a trip
command.
XR350 and XR351
• Continuous supervision with the circuit breaker in the open
and closed positions and in compliance with the scheme
requirements of BEBS S15 scheme H7.
XR350 and XR351 relays also have a contact for pre-closing
supervision, where a circuit breaker is prevented from being [sc_7PG11_HandlesWithdrawing, 1, --_--]
closed if trip relays have not been reset. BEBS S15 scheme H7
Figure 2.6/20 Withdrawing Device Using Handles
is applicable to trip circuit voltages of DC 30 V, 50 V, 125 V,
and 240 V.
Earthing Terminal
Benefits The case earth stud should be solidly earthed to the panel earth
before any connections to the device rear terminal. Located at
• A robust design for a long, reliable service life the top rear of the case is a case earth stud as shown in Figure
• Supplied in a draw-out type case 2.4/3, this must be connected to the main panel earth.
• Various combinations of coils, contacts, and operation indi-
cator flags can be specified
• Options are also available for operate and reset modes
The device is housed in a draw-out case designed for panel
mounting.
The rear connection comprises of M4 screw terminals suitable [sc_7PG11_EarthingTerminal, 1, --_--]
for ring type crimps.
Figure 2.6/21 Case Earth Stud
The chassis of the device can be withdrawn from the case by
pulling the handles on the top and bottom. Hand Reset Mechanism
Pull the blue handle upwards to slide the mechanism in an
upwards direction with the flag reset wire at the bottom.

112 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR250 to XR351

Relay Information
The device fascia displays the MLFB order code, serial number,
and device identification reference.

Electrical Hazard

Refer to device documentation

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equip-

ment Directive (WEEE)

European CE marking

Guideline for the Eurasian Market

2.6
United Kingdom (UK) conformity-
assessed marking

[sc_7PG11_HandResetMechanism, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.6/22 Hand Reset Mechanism

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 113
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR250 to XR351

Dimension Drawings

2.6

[sc_E2casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.6/23 Size E2

114 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR250 to XR351

2.6

[sc_E3casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.6/24 Size E3

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 115
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR250 to XR351

2.6

[sc_E4casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.6/25 Size E4

Connection Diagrams
dsffsd

116 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR250 to XR351

Technical Data Humidity

IEC 68-2-3
7PG17 (XR250 and XR350)
56 days at 95 % RH and 40°C.
Rated voltage Vn DC 30 V, 50 V, 125 V and 220 V Vibration
Operating range 80 % to 120 % of Vn IEC 255-21-1
Reset time 400 ms when supply is switched The relays meet the requirements of Class 1 for vibration
from Vn to off
response and endurance.
Shock and Bump
Burden
IEC 255-21-2
H7 scheme relay burdens are typically:
The relays meet the requirements of IEC 255-21-2 and BS142,
Rated Voltage Trip Circuit Condition Alarm Circuit sub-section 1.5.2. (1989) with respect to shock and bump
C.B. Open C.B. Closed testing for class 1 severity.
DC 50 V -- -- 2W Operational/Mechanical Life 2.6
DC 125 V 1W 2W 4W The relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations with
DC 240 V 2W 4W 9W the contact rating at a rate of 600 operations per hour.
Insulation IEC 255-5
Thermal Withstand 1.15 Vn continuous
Relays will withstand: 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J between all
Indication terminals and case earth and between adjacent terminals 2
A flag indicator shows when the relay is de- energised. kVRMS 50 Hz for 1 minute between all case terminals connected
together, the case earth and between independent circuits 1
Self reset flag XR250 and XR350.
kVRMS 50 Hz for 1 minute between normally open contacts.
Hand reset flag XR251 and XR351.
Coil and Resistor Data
Contact Arrangements
Alarm output - 4 contacts in any combination of normally open Voltage R1 R2 R3 R4
and normally closed. Pre-closing supervision, XR350 and XR351, DC 30 V - - 100 100
1 normally open contact. DC 50 V - - 350 350
Contact Rating DC 125 V 2000 - 3300 3300
Make and carry continuously: AC 1250 VA or DC 1250 W with DC 240 V 7000 - 10300 10300
limits of 660 V and 5 A.
R1 and R2 are fitted in the ‘C’ coil circuit.
Make and carry for 3 seconds: AC 7500 VA or DC 7500 W with
limits of 660 V and 30 A. R3 and R4 are fitted in the ‘A’ and ‘B’ coil circuits respectively.
Break: AC 1250 VA or DC 7500 W resistive, or 50 W inductive
(L/R = 0.04) DC with limits of 250 V and 5 A.
Environmental
Temperature
IEC 68-2-1 & 2

Storage -25°C to +70°C

Operating -10°C to +55°C

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 117
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR250 to XR351

Ordering Information - 7PG17 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay

(XR250, XR251)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Trip Circuit Supervision Relay (XR250, XR251) 7 P G 1 7 5 2 - □ □ □ 1 0 - □ B □ 0
| | | | |
Two element, self reset contacts, 4 contact, size E3, trip circuit supervision relay | | | | |
| | | | |
Type of Flag | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | |
2.6
0 NO A | | |
1 NO B | | |
2 NO C | | |
3 NO D | | |
4 NO E | | |
| | |
Contact Arrangement – NC | | |
0 NC A | |
1 NC B | |
2 NC C | |
3 NC D | |
4 NC E | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 30 V44 2 |
DC 50 V44 3 |
DC 125 V44 4 |
DC 240 V44 5 |
|
Voltage Rating (Alarm) |
DC 30 V C
DC 50 V D
DC 125 V44 E
DC 240 V44 F

44 Supplied with external resistors

118 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR250 to XR351

Ordering Information - 7PG17 Trip Circuit Supervision Relay

(XR350, XR351)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Trip Circuit Supervision Relay (XR350, XR351) 7 P G 1 7 5 3 - □ □ □ 1 0 - □ B □ 0
| | | | |
Three element, self reset contacts, 4 contact, size E3, trip circuit supervision relay | | | | |
| | | | |
Type of Flag | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | |
2.6
0 NO A | | |
1 NO B | | |
2 NO C | | |
3 NO D | | |
4 NO E | | |
| | |
Contact Arrangement – NC | | |
0 NC A | |
1 NC B | |
2 NC C | |
3 NC D | |
4 NC E | |
| |
Voltage Rating45 | |
DC 30 V46 2 |
DC 50 V46 3 |
DC 125 V46 4 |
DC 240 V46 5 |
|
Voltage Rating (Alarm) |
DC 30 V C
DC 50 V D
DC 125 V46 E
DC 240 V46 F

45 Voltage rating for both trip coils

46 Supplied with external resistors (2 x 3k3 and 1 x 2k resistors)

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 119
Auxiliary Relays
AC/DC Supervision Relay – 7PJ14

Description
The 7PJ14 AC/DC Supervision Relay is a relay used for detecting
the loss of the alternating or direct current supply. The relay is
a member of the Siemens Reyrolle protection devices product
family and is an electronic device.
The supply supervision schemes typically require a low oper-
ating current, and the ability to initiate a time-delayed output
for remote monitoring along with local visual flag indication to
indicate if the supply is lost.
Under normal operating condition, the 7PJ14 relay is energised
and the normally closed contacts are held open. If the supply is
disconnected, the 7PJ14 relay provides a visual flag indication
[ph_7PJ14_frontview, 1, --_--]
and the normally closed binary output contacts are de-energised
and can be used for remote monitoring.
Outputs 2 (NO) make contacts and 2 (NC) break
The 7PJ14 requires minimal operating current and includes a contacts
drop-off delay. These features keep the relay in the operating BI supervision voltage 7PJ1411-5CC01-0AA0, 7PJ1412-5CC01-0AA0
2.7 condition during a temporary decrease in the battery voltage. based selection range
For example, during a busbar fault when the trip relays operate • Threshold DC 24 V
simultaneously, this avoids any spurious alarms being gener-
ated. 7PJ1411-5CC02-0AA0, 7PJ1412-5CC02-0AA0

The 7PJ14 is available in 8 variants with different threshold • Threshold DC 48 V

values based on the supply voltage that needs to be moni-
tored and flag indication options. The front panel of the 7PJ14 7PJ1411-5CC03-0AA0, 7PJ1412-5CC03-0AA0
comprises 1 single color LED for power status, 1 dual colored • Threshold AC/DC 110 V
LED for supervision status, and 1 flag indicator.
The status LED and flag indicator provide visual indication of the 7PJ1411-5CC04-0AA0, 7PJ1412-5CC04-0AA0
supervision state. If the auxiliary supply and supervision supply • Threshold AC/DC 220 V
is available, the flag indicator can be reset manually using the
reset button or it can automatically reset itself via the self-reset Benefits
option, depending on the chosen variant.
• A compact design 106 mm x 58 mm (Width x Height).
Type of device Electronic circuit relay • Surface/flush mounting molded case.
Housing Size 106 mm x 58 mm x 118 mm (Width • Continuous supervision of supervised supply by keeping the
x Height x Depth), surface/flush mounting, output contacts in a pickup condition.
non-draw–out
LED indications Auxiliary power On LED
• Able to detect and indicate auxiliary supply failures in super-
vised circuits.
• Green = Auxiliary power On • Indicates operating state by a single LED with dual color and
flag indicator.
Supply supervision status LED
• LED indications for auxiliary voltage and supervision voltage.
• Green = Healthy status
• Red = Faulty status • The relay complies with IEC 60255 standards.
Flag indication Black = Healthy status
Applications
Red = Faulty status
Auxiliary voltage range AC 24 V to 240 V The 7PJ14 AC/DC Supervision Relay is used in the following field
applications:
DC 24 V to 240 V
Burden < 4 W or 9 VA • The relay is used for supervising and monitoring the voltage
of a station battery in protection systems.
• If the alternating or direct current supply fails then the relay
generates an alarm.
• The binary outputs can be wired to a digital protection device
or RTU to indicate the faulty circuit to remote SCADA.

120 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
AC/DC Supervision Relay – 7PJ14

Dimension Drawings
Connection Diagrams This section displays the different dimensional views of a AC/DC
The terminal diagram is on top of the 7PJ14 AC/DC Supervision Supervision Relay.
Relay housing and displays the terminal numbers and terminals.

[sc_7PJ14_terminaldiagram, 1, --_--] 2.7

Figure 2.7/1 Terminal Details for AC/DC Supervision Relay [dw_7PJ14_FrontDim, 2, en_US]

Figure 2.7/2 Front View (Hand Reset)

Terminal Terminal Name Description
Number
K1-1 L (+) Auxiliary voltage positive
K1-2 N (-) Auxiliary voltage negative
K1-3 – Not connected
K1-4 Ground

Table 2.7/1 Binary Input and Binary Output Specifications

Terminal Terminal Name Description

Number
K2-1 BI 1 + Binary input 1 positive
K2-2 BI 2 - Binary input 1 negative
K2-3 – Not connected
K2-4 – Not connected
[dw_7PJ14_FrontDimensionsSR, 1, en_US]
K2-5 BO 1-B Binary output 1 break contact
Figure 2.7/3 Front View (Self Reset)
K2-6 BO 1-C Common
K2-7 BO 2-B Binary output 2 break contact
K2-8 BO 2-C Common
K2-9 BO 3-C Common
K2-10 BO 3-M Binary output 3 make contact
K2-11 BO 4-C Common
K2-12 BO 4-M Binary output 4 make contact

Table 2.7/2 Binary Input and Binary Output Specifications

Assembly Instructions
[lo_7PJ14_dimension_panelcutout, 1, en_US]
The AC/DC Supervision Relay comprises of spring type assembly
Figure 2.7/4 Panel Cut out View
clamps, which enables easy installation. To mount the relay, the
following requirements must be satisfied:
• Carry panel cut out with a measurement of 92 mm x 45 mm
(Width x Height).
• Carry out all of the required internal wiring connections.
• Install the relay into the panel and lock with the clamps.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 121
Auxiliary Relays
AC/DC Supervision Relay – 7PJ14

Technical Data
Indication of Conformity

This product complies with the directive of

the Council of the European Communities
on the harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU) and
concerning electrical equipment for use within
specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2014/35/EU) as well as restriction on usage
of hazardous substances in electrical and elec-
tronic equipment (RoHS Directive 2011/65/
EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests
conducted by Siemens AG in accordance of
the Council Directive in accordance with the
product standard IEC/EN 60255-26 for the
2.7 EMC directives, and with the standard IEC/
EN 60255-27 for the low-voltage directive.
RoHS directive 2011/65/EU is met using the
standard EN 63000. The device has been
designed and produced for industrial use.

General Technical Data

Power supply
[lo_7PJ14_dimension_top, 1, en_US]
Parameter Value
Figure 2.7/5 Top View
Auxiliary-voltage range DC 24 V to 240 V/AC 24 V to 240 V
Vrated
Auxiliary-voltage operating 80% to 110%
range
Input power consumption < 4 W/ 9 VA
Allowable super imposed 15% of direct voltage
AC component
Max interruption time ≤ 20 ms (AC/DC 19.2 V)
(collapse to zero)

Binary Inputs

Parameter Value
BI operating voltage DC 24 V, DC 48 V,
AC/DC 110 V,
AC/DC 220 V
Input power consumption < 1 W/VA
[lo_7PJ14_dimension_side, 1, en_US] Current for operation 2 mA to 4 mA (typical)
Figure 2.7/6 Side View 5 mA maximum
Isolation AC 2 kV

Operating Voltage Value

DC 24 V, DC 48 V, DC 110 Pickup voltage: < 70% of VBI
V, DC 220 V
AC 110 V, AC 220 V
DC 110 V, DC 220 V Drop-off voltage: > 50% of VBI

122 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
AC/DC Supervision Relay – 7PJ14

Operating Voltage Value Installation Category

DC 24 V, DC 48 V Drop-off voltage: > 45% of VBI
AC 110 V, AC 220 V Drop-off voltage: > 40% of VBI Parameter Value
Installation category (overvoltage Class III
category)
Parameter Value
Reset time > 200 ms and < 400 ms Pollution
DC 24 V, DC 48 V, DC 110 V, DC 220 V, AC
110 V, AC 220 V Parameter Value
Operate time < 100 ms Degree of pollution 2
DC 24 V, DC 48 V, DC 110 V, DC 220 V
Operate time < 110 ms External Interfaces
AC 110 V, AC 220 V
Parameter Value
LED Indications Power supply Header: 4 Pin
Cabling type: standard wire,
Indicator Status unshielded, max. 2.5 mm2
Binary inputs and binary outputs Header: 12 Pin 2.7
Power LED – ON Green color
– Auxiliary supply is available Cabling type: standard wire,
Power LED – OFF No color unshielded, max. 2.5 mm2

– Auxiliary supply is not available

Recommended Terminal Lugs Specifications
Status LED Green color
– AC/DC Healthy (supervision status is Terminal lugs Type/Cable Specifications
healthy)
Auxiliary supply Insulated tin plated crimp pin
Red color connector,
– AC/DC Faulty (supervision status is 2.6 mm² to 6.6 mm²,
faulty)
12 AWG to 10 AWG,
Bi-stabel flag indicator Black color
Torque required is 0.5 Nm to 0.6
– AC/DC Healthy (supervision status is
Nm
healthy)
Red color Manufacturer/part number: End
sleeve 3D-8011H or equivalent
– AC/DC Faulty (supervision status is
Binary input/binary output Insulated tin plated crimp pin
faulty)
connector,
2.6 mm² to 6.6 mm²,
Binary Outputs
12 AWG to 10 AWG,
Parameter Value Torque required is 0.5 Nm to 0.6
Mechanical life (loaded) 10 000 operations Nm
Number of contacts 2 make contacts + 2 break contacts Manufacturer/part number: End
Reset type Self reset sleeve 3D-8011H or equivalent
Contact details Contact voltage AC 250 V
Mechanical Tests
DC 250 V
Contact current
Test Standard
rating:
Degree of protection IEC 60529,
Continuous AC 5 A/DC 5 A
IP54 front
Short time for 0.2 s AC 30 A/DC 30 A
IP20 rear
Make and carry for AC 10 A
0.5 s Vibration IEC 60255-21-1,
Make and carry for AC 8 A Response and endurance,
3s
Class I
Limiting making 1000 W
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2,
capacity:
Shock response and withstand,
(L/R ≤ 40 ms)
Class I
Bump, class I

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 123
Auxiliary Relays
AC/DC Supervision Relay – 7PJ14

Test Standard Test Standard

Seismic IEC 60255-21-3, Surge immunity IEC 60255-26
Class I Test level: zone A
Contact performance IEC 60255-1, Phase-to-phase: 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2 kV
(Reference standard: IEC 61810-1) Phase-to-ground: 0.5 kV, 1 kV, 2
kV, 4 kV
Electrical Tests Front time/time to half-value:
1.2/50 μs
Test Standard Source impedance: 2 Ω
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-27 47 Radiated immunity IEC 60255-26
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ at 80 MHz to 1.0 GHz and 1.4 GHz to
DC 500 V 2.7 GHz
Test duration: > 5 s (Between any Field strength: 10 V/m (RMS)
terminal and ground, independent
circuits) Amplitude modulated: 80% AM
(1 kHz)
Impulse voltage withstand IEC 60255-27 47
Conducted high frequency inter- IEC 60255-26
2.7 5 kV, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J ference
150 kHz to 80 MHz,
5 +ve pulses, 5 -ve pulses
10 Vrms, dwell time: 1.0 s
(Between all terminals and case
Power frequency magnetic field IEC 60255-26
ground and any 2 independent
circuits) 30 A/m applied 1 min,
AC dielectric voltage IEC 60255-27 47 300 A/m applied for 3 s
AC 2 kV RMS for 1 min (Between Radiated emissions IEC 60255-26 and CISPR 11
any terminal and ground, inde- Conducted emissions IEC 60255-26 and CISPR 32
pendent circuits)
Functional performance IEC 60255-1
AC 1 kV RMS for 1 min (across Gradual shutdown/start-up test IEC 60255-26
make contacts)
Shut down/start up ramp 60 s
Slow damped oscillatory wave IEC 60255-26
Power off 5 min
Common-mode:
Power frequency immunity test 48 IEC 60255-26
Test voltage: 2.5-kV peak voltage
Test level: zone A
Differential mode:
Pulse magnetic field test IEC 61000-4-9
Test voltage: 1.0-kV peak voltage
1000 A/m, 5 +ve and 5 -ve
Test duration: 2 s Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10
Source impedance: 200 Ω value
0.1 MHz and 1.0 MHz, 100 A/m
Voltage oscillation frequency:
1 MHz Product Safety Test
Repetition frequency: 400 Hz
Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-26 Test Reference
8-kV air discharge Clearances and creepage distances IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2

6-kV contact discharge ≥ 4 mm

Electrical fast transient or burst IEC 60255-26 IP rating IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2

Test level: zone A IP54 (front side)

Test severity amplitude: ± 4 kV IP20 (rear side)

Repetition frequency: 5 kHz Impulse voltage IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2

5 kV, 5 +ve, 5 -ve pulses
AC dielectric voltage IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2
AC 2 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min

47 All aspects of IEC 60255-5 have been covered under IEC 60255-27.
48 The DC binary input ports interfacing with cables whose total length is more than 10 m, must have a multi-core twisted shielded cable for providing
immunity against high level of power frequency interferences.

124 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
AC/DC Supervision Relay – 7PJ14

Test Reference Climatic Environmental Tests

Insulation resistance IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 Temperature
DC 500 V, > 5 s, > 100 MΩ
IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2/IEC 60255-1/IEC 60068-2-14
Protective bonding resistance IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2
< AC 12 V/DC 12 V, 1 min, < 0.1 Ω Ambient operating temperature -10 °C to +55 °C
Protective bonding continuity IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 Storage temperature (non-opera- -25 °C to +70 °C
Flammability IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 tional)
Single fault condition IEC/EN 60255-27: Edition 2 Change of temperature test -10 °C to +55 °C
Mechanical resistance to shock and IEC 61010-1: Edition 3
impact Humidity
Clause number 8
Protection against electric shock IEC 61010-1: Edition 3 IEC 60068-2-30/IEC 60068-2-78/IEC 60255-1
Clause number 6
Damp heat test, cyclic +25 °C to 55 °C, Relative Humidity
Protection against the spread of IEC 61010-1: Edition 3
(RH) > 93 % RH (6 cycles)
fire
Clause number 9
Equipment temperature limits and IEC 61010-1: Edition 3 At lower temperature, 93 %,
resistance to heat ± 3 % RH
Clause number 10 2.7
At upper temperature, 93 %,
± 3 % RH
Damp heat test, steady state 10 days at 93 ± 3 % RH, +40 °C

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 125
Auxiliary Relays
AC/DC Supervision Relay – 7PJ14

Ordering Information – 7PJ14

Product Description Order Number

126 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Supply Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR152 and XR153

Description
Type XR relays are developments for specific applications of the
type AR relay range. They are electro-mechanical relays with
long service life and complying with the appropriate require-
ments of IEC 255 and BS 142. These relays have a low operating
current, specific settings and time delayed drop-off. This latter
feature is to keep the relay in the operated condition during
temporary reductions in the battery voltage, such as those
which occur just prior to a fuse blowing or during a busbar fault
when many trip relays operate simultaneously. Healthy circuits
therefore do not give spurious alarms and the relay effected by
the fuse failure provides the alarm and indication necessary for
accurate maintenance attention.
Application
Types XR152 and XR153 relays are designed to comply with
CEGB and other specification for protection supervision require-
ments and the monitoring of DC voltage supplies. These applica- [Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7PG17 Supply Supervision Relay, 1, --_--]
tions require relays with low operating current, visual indication
Figure 2.8/1 7PG17 Supply Supervision Relay
and the ability to initiate a remote alarm. Both these relays have
2.8
mechanical flag indicators which show on de-energization, self
reset on the XR152 and hand reset on the XR153.
• Low burden
• Versatile design
• Consistent positive action
Benefits
• A robust design for a long, reliable service life
• Supplied in a draw-out type case
• Various combinations of coils, contacts, and operation indi-
cator flags can be specified

The device is housed in a draw-out case designed for panel

mounting.
The rear connection comprises of M4 screw terminals suitable
for ring type crimps.
The chassis of the device can be withdrawn from the case by
pulling the handles on the top and bottom. [sc_7PG11_HandlesWithdrawing, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.8/2 Withdrawing Device Using Handles

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 127
Auxiliary Relays
Supply Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR152 and XR153

Relay Information
The device fascia displays the MLFB order code, serial number,
and device identification reference.

Electrical Hazard

[sc_7PG11_EarthingTerminal, 1, --_--]
Refer to device documentation
Figure 2.8/3 Case Earth Stud
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equip-
Hand Reset Mechanism ment Directive (WEEE)
Pull the blue handle upwards to slide the mechanism in an European CE marking
upwards direction with the flag reset wire at the bottom.

Guideline for the Eurasian Market

United Kingdom (UK) conformity-

assessed marking

2.8

[sc_7PG11_HandResetMechanism, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.8/4 Hand Reset Mechanism

128 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Supply Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR152 and XR153

Dimension Drawings

2.8

[sc_E2casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.8/5 Size E2

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 129
Auxiliary Relays
Supply Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR152 and XR153

2.8

[sc_E3casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.8/6 Size E3

130 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Supply Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR152 and XR153

2.8

[sc_E4casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.8/7 Size E4

Connection Diagrams
dsffsd

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 131
Auxiliary Relays
Supply Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR152 and XR153

Technical Data Humidity

IEC 68-2-3
7PG17 (XR152 and XR153)
56 days at 95 % RH and 40°C.
Rated voltage Vn DC 24 V, 30 V, 50 V, 60 V, 125 V Vibration
and 220 V
IEC 255-21-1
Settings Pick-up 70 % of rated voltage
The relays meet the requirements of Class 1 for vibration
Drop-off not less than 26 % of Vn
response and endurance.
Reset time No less than 100 ms when supply
is switched from 100 % to 26 % of Shock and Bump
V n. IEC 255-21-2
Operating current 10 mA nominal. (17 mA for 24 V
The relays meet the requirements of IEC 255-21-2 and BS142,
and 30 V ratings)
sub-section 1.5.2.
Burden 0.4 W at DC 24 V, 1.25 W at DC
125 V (1989) with respect to shock and bump testing for class 1
Thermal Withstand 1.15 Vn continuously severity.
Indication A flag indicator shows when the Mechanical Life
relay is de-energised
The relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations with
XR152 self reset flag the contact rating at a rate of 600 operations per hour.
2.8
XR153 hand reset flag Insulation
IEC 255-5
Contact Arrangements
Relays will withstand: 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J between all
2 or 4 contacts in any combination of normally open and
terminals and case earth and between adjacent terminals. 2
normally closed.
kVRMS 50 Hz for 1 minute between all case terminals connected
Contact rating - Make and carry continuously: AC 1250 VA or together and the case earth and between independent circuits.
DC 1250 W with limits of 660 V and 5 A. Make and carry for 3 1 kVRMS 50 Hz for 1 minute between normally open contacts.
seconds: AC 7500 VA or DC 7500 W with limits of 660 V and 30
A.
Break
AC 1250 VA or DC 100 W resistive, or 50 W inductive (L/R =
0.04) DC with limits of 250 V.
Environmental Information
Temperature
IEC 68-2-1 & 2

Storage 25°C to +70°C

Operating 10°C to +55°C

132 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Supply Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR152 and XR153

Ordering Information - 7PG17 Supply Supervision Relays

(XR152, XR153)

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
Supply Supervision Relays (XR152, XR153) 7 P G 1 7 4 1 - □ □ □ 1 0 - □ A A 0
| | | |
Single element, self reset contacts, 4 contact, size E2, DC supply supervision relay | | | |
| | | |
Type of Flag | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | |
Self reset flag 3 | | |
| | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | |
0 NO A | |
1 NO B | |
2 NO C | |
3 NO D | | 2.8
4 NO E | |
| |
Contact Arrangement – NC | |
0 NC A |
1 NC B |
2 NC C |
3 NC D |
4 NC E |
|
Voltage Rating |
DC 24 V 1
DC 30 V 2
DC 50 V 3
DC 125 V 4
DC 240 V 5

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 133
Auxiliary Relays
Trip Relay Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR151

Low burden and consistent operation, positive action. Suitable Figure 2.9/1 7PG17 Trip Relay Supervision Relay
for operating with high burden trip relays (EB2) only.
Exact burden and operating current dependent upon applica-
2.9 tion.

Benefits
• A robust design for a long, reliable service life
• Supplied in a draw-out type case
• Various combinations of coils, contacts, and operation indi-
cator flags can be specified

The device is housed in a draw-out case designed for panel

mounting.
The rear connection comprises of M4 screw terminals suitable
for ring type crimps.
The chassis of the device can be withdrawn from the case by
pulling the handles on the top and bottom.

[sc_7PG11_HandlesWithdrawing, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.9/2 Withdrawing Device Using Handles

134 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip Relay Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR151

Relay Information
The device fascia displays the MLFB order code, serial number,
and device identification reference.

Electrical Hazard

[sc_7PG11_EarthingTerminal, 1, --_--]
Refer to device documentation
Figure 2.9/3 Case Earth Stud
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equip-
Hand Reset Mechanism ment Directive (WEEE)
Pull the blue handle upwards to slide the mechanism in an European CE marking
upwards direction with the flag reset wire at the bottom.

Guideline for the Eurasian Market

United Kingdom (UK) conformity-

assessed marking

2.9

[sc_7PG11_HandResetMechanism, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.9/4 Hand Reset Mechanism

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 135
Auxiliary Relays
Trip Relay Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR151

Dimension Drawings

2.9

[sc_E2casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.9/5 Size E2

136 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip Relay Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR151

2.9

[sc_E3casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.9/6 Size E3

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 137
Auxiliary Relays
Trip Relay Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR151

2.9

[sc_E4casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.9/7 Size E4

Connection Diagrams
dsffsd

138 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Trip Relay Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR151

Technical Data Humidity

IEC 68-2-3
7PG17 (XR151)
56 days at 95 % RH and 40°C.
Rated voltage Vn 125 V Vibration
Settings Pick-up: 70 % of Vn IEC 255-21-1
Drop-off: not less than 26 % of Vn The relays meet the requirements of Class 1 for vibration
Reset time No less than 100 ms when supply response and endurance.
is switched from 100 % to 26 % of Shock and Bump
V n.
IEC 255-21-2
Operating current Less than 20 mA. The relays meet the requirements of IEC 255-21-2 and BS142,
Burden Less than 2.5 W sub-section 1.5.2. (1989) with respect to shock and bump
Thermal Withstand 1.15 Vn continuously testing for class 1 severity.

Indication A self or hand reset flag indicator Mechanical Life

shows when the relay is de-ener- The relays will withstand in excess of 10,000 operations with
gised.
the contact rating at a rate of 600 operations per hour.

Contact Arrangements Insulation

4 contacts in any combination of normally open or normally IEC 255-5

closed. Relays will withstand: 5 kV peak, 1.2/50 μs, 0.5 J between all 2.9

Contact rating terminals and case earth and between adjacent terminals. 2
kVRMS 50 Hz for 1 minute between all case terminals connected
Make and carry continuously: AC 1250 VA or DC 1250 W with
together and the case earth and between independent circuits.
limits of 660 V and 5 A.
1 kVRMS 50 Hz for 1 minute between normally open contacts.
Make and carry for 3 seconds: AC 7500 VA or DC 7500 W with
limits of 660 V and 30 A.
Break
AC 1250 VA or DC 100 W resistive, or 50 W inductive (L/R =
0.04) DC with limits of 250 V.
Environmental Information
Temperature
IEC 68-2-1 & 2

Storage 25°C to +70°C

Operating 10°C to +55°C

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 139
Auxiliary Relays
Trip Relay Supervision Relay – 7PG17-XR151

Ordering Information - 7PG17 Trip Relay Supervision Relay

(XR151)

Product Description Order No.

140 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Interposing Relay – 7PG17-XR105, XR106 and XR107, XR205 and XR206

Description
Interposing relays are used for remote control of switchgear
and associated equipment over pilot wires or cross-site cables.
Type XR205 and XR206 are two element versions of the XR105
and XR106 respectively with the same performance. Type XR
relays are developments for specific applications from the type
AR (7PG11) relay range. They are electro-mechanical relays with
a consistent positive action, a long service life and complying
with BS142.
Type XR105 has no flag indicator, an XR106 has a flag indicator
and an XR107 has a hand reset flag.
XR105 and XR106 have self-reset contacts and an XR107 has
hand reset contacts.
[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7PG17 Interposing Relay, 1, --_--]
Both types are available with a suppression diode across the coil
to reduce the effects of the back emf which occurs on switch- Figure 2.10/1 7PG17 Interposing Relay
off.
Application
Types XR105/XR106/XR107 are intended for the remote control
of switchgear and associated equipment over pilot wires with a
maximum resistance of 200 Ω. These relays are designed so that
they are not susceptible to certain AC voltage levels which may
be induced onto the pilots wires.
2.10

Benefits
• A robust design for a long, reliable service life
• Supplied in a draw-out type case
• Various combinations of coils, contacts, and operation indi-
cator flags can be specified

The device is housed in a draw-out case designed for panel

mounting.
The rear connection comprises of M4 screw terminals suitable
for ring type crimps.
[sc_7PG11_HandlesWithdrawing, 1, --_--]
The chassis of the device can be withdrawn from the case by
Figure 2.10/2 Withdrawing Device Using Handles
pulling the handles on the top and bottom.

[sc_7PG11_EarthingTerminal, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.10/3 Case Earth Stud

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 141
Auxiliary Relays
Interposing Relay – 7PG17-XR105, XR106 and XR107, XR205 and XR206

Hand Reset Mechanism Relay Information

Pull the blue handle upwards to slide the mechanism in an The device fascia displays the MLFB order code, serial number,
upwards direction with the flag reset wire at the bottom. and device identification reference.

Electrical Hazard

Refer to device documentation

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equip-

ment Directive (WEEE)

European CE marking

Guideline for the Eurasian Market

United Kingdom (UK) conformity-

assessed marking

2.10

[sc_7PG11_HandResetMechanism, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.10/4 Hand Reset Mechanism

142 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Interposing Relay – 7PG17-XR105, XR106 and XR107, XR205 and XR206

Dimension Drawings

2.10

[sc_E2casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.10/5 Size E2

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 143
Auxiliary Relays
Interposing Relay – 7PG17-XR105, XR106 and XR107, XR205 and XR206

2.10

[sc_E3casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.10/6 Size E3

144 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Interposing Relay – 7PG17-XR105, XR106 and XR107, XR205 and XR206

2.10

[sc_E4casing, 1, en_US]

Figure 2.10/7 Size E4

Technical Data With a maximum pilot loop resistance of 200 Ω 92 to 125 % of

nominal rated voltage. Burden: Typically 3.7 W for a relay with 4
7PG17 (XR105, XR106 and XR107, XR205 and XR206) normally open contacts.
External resistor required for DC 125 V operation. Operating A.C. Rejection
range: With zero pilot resistance 78 to 125 % of nominal rated For a DC 48 V rated relay, typically AC 110 V 50 Hz. Operating
voltage time: For a relay rated DC 48 V with 4 normally open contacts

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 145
Auxiliary Relays
Interposing Relay – 7PG17-XR105, XR106 and XR107, XR205 and XR206

at rated voltage typically 30 ms. With 200 Ω pilot resistance less Mechanical Durability
than 80 ms. Reset time is less than 35 ms.
Vibration, relays comply with BS142, Section 2.1 Category S2.
Contacts
Shock, relays will withstand a 20G shock or impact on the panel
2 normally open, 4 normally open or 2 normally open and 2 without operating. Operational/mechanical life, relays will with-
normally closed, self reset on XR105 and XR106. stand in excess of 10,000 operations with the contact rating
stated.
Hand reset on XR107.
Normal duty, contact ratings. Make and carry continuously AC Normally Closed Contact Location (Epsilon case terminal numbers)
1250 VA or DC 1250 W within the limits of 660 V and 5 A.
1 to 3 2 to 4 5 to 7 6 to 8
Make and carry for 3 seconds: AC 7500 VA or DC 7500 W within 1 NC NC
the limits of 660 V and 30 A. 2 NC NC NC
Break: AC 1250 VA or DC 100 W (resistive) or 50 W (inductive). 3 NC NC NC NC
L/R = 0.04, DC within the limits of 250 V and 5 A. 4 NC NC NC NC NC
Temperature

In service: -10°C to 55°C

Storage -25°C to 70°C

2.10

146 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Auxiliary Relays
Interposing Relay – 7PG17-XR105, XR106 and XR107, XR205 and XR206

Ordering Information - 7PG17 XR105, XR106 and XR107

Interposing Relays

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - 8 9 10 11 12 - 13 14 15 16
7PG17 XR105, XR106 and XR107 7 P G 1 7 3 □ - □ □ □ □ 0 - □ A A □
| | | | | | |
Size E2, interposing control relay (XR105, XR106, XR107) | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
Number of Elements | | | | | | |
Single element, self reset contacts 1 | | | | | |
Single element, hand reset contacts 3 | | | | | |
| | | | | |
Type of Flag | | | | | |
No flag 0 | | | | |
Hand reset flag 1 | | | | |
| | | | |
Contact Arrangement – NO | | | | |
0 NO A | | | |
1 NO B | | | |
2 NO C | | | |
3 NO D | | | | 2.10
4 NO E | | | |
| | | |
Contact Arrangement – NC | | | |
0 NC A | | |
1 NC B | | |
2 NC C | | |
3 NC D | | |
4 NC E | | |
| | |
Number of Contacts 49 | | |
Two 0 | |
Four 1 | |
| |
Voltage Rating | |
DC 24 V 1 |
DC 30 V 2 |
DC 50 V 3 |
DC 125 V50 4 |
|
Back Emf Suppression Diode |
Not fitted 0
Fitted 1

49 Number of contacts must match selected contact arrangement

50 Supplied with resistor VCE:2101H10152 (1500 Ohm) for wiring in series with the coil

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 147
Auxiliary Relays
Trip Circuit Supervision Resistors – 7PG1753

Description
Dimension Drawings
The 7PG1753 Trip Circuit Supervision devices and protection
relays provide the trip circuit supervision function. Trip Circuit
supervision circuits are derived from UK ENA S15 standard
schemes H4, H5, H6 and H7.

7PG1753 Trip Circuit Supervision devices (XR250 and XR251)

with DC 125 V voltage rating always supplied with 2 x 3.3k Ω
(410A13288) and 1 x 2k Ω (410A13213) resistors and use the
following external resistors:

Voltage R1 R2 R3 R4
DC 30 V – – 100 100
DC 50 V – – 350 350
DC 125 V 2000 – 3300 3300
DC 240 V 7000 – 10300 10300

Table 2.11/1 Coil and Resistor Data

[sc_TCS_Bracket, 1, --_--]

Figure 2.11/1 TCS Resistor with Bracket

Ordering Information - TCS Resistors

2.11
Resistors AW1602 and 5 %
2300 Ω VCE: 410A12727
2000 Ω VCE: 410A13213
3300 Ω VCE: 410A13288
350 Ω VCE: 410A15941
1500 Ω VCE: 410A24322
3100 Ω VCE: 410A19819
4000 Ω VCE: 410A23204
10300 Ω VCE: 410A24319

Resistors
7000 Ω VCE: 410A19820

Resistors W24
100 Ω VCE: 410A24277
4700 Ω VCE: 410A24291

148 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 149
Communication
Cables – Fiber Optic Cables

6XV8100/6XV8200
Description
• Plastic fiber optic duplex indoor cable (6XV8100-0DA)
• Glass fiber optic duplex outdoor cable (6XV8100-0BD)
• Glass fiber optic duplex indoor cable (6XV8100-0BE)
• Glass fiber optic duplex indoor cable (6XV8100-0CF)
• Fiber optic set (6XV8200-0AA)
Applications
These fiber optic cables are intended for use in industrial
systems and not for general/public buildings. They have not
been evaluated in terms of the Construction Products Regulation
(EU No. 305/2011).
You can find the selection and order data for fiber optic cables in
the following tables.

[6XV8100, 1, --_--]

Figure 3.1/1 Example of a Fiber Optic Cable

3.1

150 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Cables – Fiber Optic Cables

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Plastic optical fiber duplex indoor cable 6 X V 8 1 0 0 - 0 D A ☐ 1 - 0 A ☐ ☐

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Connectors │ │ │ │
FSMA connectors at each end 2 │ │ │
ST connectors at each end 4 │ │ │
One end, FSMA connectors; other end, ST connectors 5 │ │ │
10 meter lengths │ │ │
Length: 0 m + A │ │
Length: 10 m + B │ │
Length: 20 m + C │ │
Length: 30 m + D │ │
Length: 40 m + E │ │
Length: 50 m + F │ │
Length: 0.5 m A 5
Length: 1.0 m B 0
Length: 1.5 m B 5
Length: 2.0 m C 0
Length: 2.5 m C 5
Length: 3.0 m D 0
Length: 3.5 m D 5
Length: 4.0 m E 0
Length: 5.0 m F 0
Length: 6.0 m G 0
Length: 7.0 m H 0 3.1
Length: 8.0 m J 0
Length: 9.0 m K 0
Plastic fiber type PMMA P980/1000 (black)
Fiber diameter 1.0 mm
PE core jacket diameter 2.2 mm x 4.4 mm
Halogen-free
Resistant to oil, petrol, acid, leach
For applications with simple mechanical demand
Cable weight: 8 g/m + 10 g per connector

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 151
Communication
Cables – Fiber Optic Cables

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Glass optical fiber duplex outdoor cable 6 X V 8 1 0 0 - 0 B D ☐ ☐ - ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Connectors │ │ │ │ │ │
Without 0 1 │ │ │ │
1 end pre-assembled with an FSMA connector 1 1 │ │ │ │
Both ends pre-assembled with FSMA connectors 2 1 │ │ │ │
Pre-assembled with ST and LC connectors 3 1 │ │ │ │
Both ends pre-assembled with ST connectors 4 1 │ │ │ │
Prefabricated with FSMA and ST connectors 5 1 │ │ │ │
Both ends prefabricated with LC connectors 6 1 │ │ │ │
Both ends prefabricated with FC/PC connectors 7 1 │ │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with FC/PC connector, other end with LC connector 8 1 │ │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with ST connector, other end with SC connector 1 2 │ │ │ │
100 meter lengths │ │ │ │
Length: 0 m + 0 │ │ │
Length: 100 m + 1 │ │ │
Length: 200 m + 2 │ │ │
Length: 300 m + 3 │ │ │
Length: 400 m + 4 │ │ │
Length: 500 m + 5 │ │ │
Length: 600 m + 6 │ │ │
Length: 700 m + 7 │ │ │
Length: 800 m + 8 │ │ │
3.1 Length: 900 m + 951 │ │ │
10 meter lengths │ │ │
Length: 0 m + A │ │
Length: 10 m + B │ │
Length: 20 m + C │ │
Length: 30 m + D │ │
Length: 40 m + E │ │
Length: 50 m + F │ │
Length: 60 m + G │ │
Length: 70 m + H │ │
Length: 80 m + J │ │
Length: 90 m + K │ │
1 meter lengths │ │
Length: 0 m + A │
Length: 1 m + B │
Length: 2 m + C │
Length: 3 m + D │
Length: 4 m + E │
Length: 5 m + F │
Length: 6 m + G │
Length: 7 m + H │
Length: 8 m + J │
Length: 9 m + K │

51 For this version, add the short identifier “N1A” to the order number.

152 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Cables – Fiber Optic Cables

Description Order no.

1000 meter lengths │
Length: 0 m + 0
Length: 1000 m + 1
Length: 2000 m + 2
Glass fiber type G62.5/125 (blue),
Fiber diameter 0.9 mm,
Break-out subcables diameter 2.5 mm,
Halogen-free and flame-retardant,
For fixed installation indoor and outdoor,
Longitudinally waterproof,
Non-metallic rodent protection,
No resistance to oil, petrol, acid, leach;
Length selection:
Increment is 10 m up to 490 m
Increment is 50 m from 500 m on
Custom lengths upon request from the supplier

3.1

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 153
Communication
Cables – Fiber Optic Cables

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Glass optical fiber duplex indoor cable 6 X V 8 1 0 0 - 0 B E ☐ ☐ - ☐ ☐ ☐ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Connectors │ │ │ │ │
Without 0 1 │ │ │
1 end pre-assembled with an FSMA connector 1 1 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with FSMA connector, other end with SC connector 1 2 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with FSMA connector, other end with LC connector 1 3 │ │ │
Both ends prefabricated with LC connectors 1 4 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with FSMA connector, other end with FC/PC connector 1 5 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with ST connector, other end with SC connector 1 6 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with ST connector, other end with LC connector 1 7 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with ST connector, other end with E2000 connector 1 8 │ │ │
Both ends pre-assembled with FSMA connectors 2 1 │ │ │
1 end pre-assembled with ST connector 3 1 │ │ │
Both ends pre-assembled with ST connectors 4 1 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with FSMA connector, other end with ST connector 5 1 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with FSMA/K connector, other end with ST connector 6 1 │ │ │
Both ends prefabricated with FSMA/K connectors 7 1 │ │ │
Both ends prefabricated with FC/PC connectors 8 1 │ │ │
Both ends pre-assembled with SC connector, crossed 2 2 │ │ │
Both ends prefabricated with E2000 connectors 2 3 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with FC/PC connector, other end with LC connector 2 4 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with SC connector, other end with LC connector 2 5 │ │ │
3.1 1 end prefabricated with ST connector, other end with FC/PC connector 2 6 │ │ │
Both ends prefabricated with ST connectors and angled optical fiber 2 7 │ │ │
100 meter lengths │ │ │
Length: 0 m + 0 │ │
Length: 100 m + 1 │ │
Length: 200 m + 2 │ │
Length: 300 m + 3 │ │
Length: 400 m + 4 │ │
Length: 500 m + 5 │ │
Length: 600 m + 6 │ │
Length: 700 m + 7 │ │
Length: 800 m + 8 │ │
Length: 900 m + 952 │ │
10 meter lengths │ │
Length: 0 m + A │
Length: 10 m + B │
Length: 20 m + C │
Length: 30 m + D │
Length: 40 m + E │
Length: 50 m + F │
Length: 60 m + G │
Length: 70 m + H │
Length: 80 m + J │

52 For this version, add the short identifier “N1A” to the order number.

154 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Cables – Fiber Optic Cables

Description Order no.

Length: 90 m + K │
1 meter lengths │
Length: 0 m + A
Length: 1 m + B
Length: 2 m + C
Length: 3 m + D
Length: 4 m + E
Length: 5 m + F
Length: 6 m + G
Length: 7 m + H
Length: 8 m + J
Length: 9 m + K
Glass fiber type G62.5/125 (orange),
Fiber diameter 0.9 mm,
2 break-out subcables diameter 2.8 mm,
Outer diameter 4.0 mm x 6.8 mm,
Halogen-free and flame-retardant,
Indoor cable installations suitable for interconnection ideal for fiber to desk,
No resistance to oil, petrol, acid, leach
Cable weight 32 g/m
Length selection:
Increment is 1 m up to 49 m
Increment is 10 m from 50 m on
Custom lengths upon request from the supplier

3.1

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 155
Communication
Cables – Fiber Optic Cables

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Glass optical fiber duplex indoor cable 6 X V 8 1 0 0 - 0 C F ☐ ☐ - ☐ ☐ ☐ 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Connectors │ │ │ │ │
Without 0 1 │ │ │
1 end pre-assembled with ST connector, other end with SC connector 1 1 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with ST connector, other end with LC connector 1 2 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with FC/PC connector, other end with SC connector 2 1 │ │ │
1 end pre-assembled with ST connector 3 1 │ │ │
Both ends pre-assembled with ST connectors 4 1 │ │ │
Both ends prefabricated with LC connectors 5 1 │ │ │
1 end pre-assembled with FC/PC connector 6 1 │ │ │
Both ends prefabricated with FC/PC connectors 7 1 │ │ │
1 end pre-assembled with FC/PC connector, other end with ST connector 8 1 │ │ │
1 end pre-assembled with E2000 connector 1 3 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with E2000 connector, other end with ST connector 1 4 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with E2000/APC 8° connector, other end with ST connector 1 5 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with FC/PC connector, other end with LC connector 1 6 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with SC connector, other end with LC connector 1 7 │ │ │
Both ends prefabricated with SC connectors 1 8 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with DIN connector, other end with LC connector 2 2 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with SC/APC 9° connector, other end with LC connector 2 3 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with SC/APC 9° connector, other end with ST connector 2 4 │ │ │
1 end prefabricated with E2000/APC 8° connector, other end with ST connector 2 5 │ │ │
3.1 100 meter lengths │ │ │
Length: 0 m + 0 │ │
Length: 100 m + 1 │ │
Length: 200 m + 2 │ │
Length: 300 m + 3 │ │
Length: 400 m + 4 │ │
Length: 500 m + 5 │ │
Length: 600 m + 6 │ │
Length: 700 m + 7 │ │
Length: 800 m + 8 │ │
Length: 900 m + 953 │ │
10 meter lengths │ │
Length: 0 m + A │
Length: 10 m + B │
Length: 20 m + C │
Length: 30 m + D │
Length: 40 m + E │
Length: 50 m + F │
Length: 60 m + G │
Length: 70 m + H │
Length: 80 m + J │
Length: 90 m + K │
1 meter lengths │

53 For this version, add the short identifier “N1A” to the order number.

156 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Cables – Fiber Optic Cables

Description Order No.

Length: 0 m + A
Length: 1 m + B
Length: 2 m + C
Length: 3 m + D
Length: 4 m + E
Length: 5 m + F
Length: 6 m + G
Length: 7 m + H
Length: 8 m + J
Length: 9 m + K
Glass fiber type E9/125 (yellow),
Fiber diameter 0.9 mm,
2 break-out subcables diameter 2.8 mm,
Outer diameter 4.0 mm x 6.8 mm,
Halogen-free and flame-retardant,
Indoor cable installations suitable for interconnection ideal for fiber to desk,
No resistance to oil, petrol, acid, leach,
Cable weight 32 g/m
Length selection:
Increment is 1 m up to 49 m
Increment is 10 m from 50 m on
Custom lengths upon request from the supplier

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no. 3.1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Optical fiber set 6 X V 8 2 0 0 - 0 A A 0 0 - 0 A A 0

For connecting of devices with FSMA connector sockets to existing fiber optic structures with ST sockets.

Contains: Glass optical fiber duplex indoor cable (1 m) 6XV8100-0BE51-0AB0 FSMA/ST and 2 FSMA/FSMA bus couplers
For devices of the old hardware version with FSMA connector sockets
Application for optical components:

• 7XV5450 or CM-0822 mini star couplers

• 7XV5652 → FO-RS232
• 7XV5650/1 → FO-RS485

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 157
Communication
Cables – Ethernet Patch Cable

7KE6000
Description
Ethernet patch cable 7KE6000, double shielded (SFTP) and LAN
connector at both ends.
Cable Overview
• Ethernet Y-adaptor cable (7KE6000-8GD)
• Ethernet patch cable, double shielded (SFTP), with LAN
connector at both ends (7KE6000-8GD)
• Ethernet patch cable, double shielded (SFTP), crossed, LAN
connector at both ends (7KE6000-8GE)
You can find the selection and order data for Ethernet patch
cables on the following pages.

[ph_7KE6000, 1, --_--]

Figure 3.1/2 Example of an Ethernet Patch Cable

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Short
code

Ethernet patch cable, double shielded (SFTP), LAN connectors at both ends 7 K E 6 0 0 0 - 8 G D 0 ☐ - ☐ A A ☐
3.1 Device ↔ Switch ▲ ▲ ▲
Switch ↔ PC
| | |
Length: 0.5 m 0 0 5
Length: 1 m 0 1 0
Length: 2 m 0 2 0
Length: 3 m 0 3 0
Length: 5 m 0 5 0
Length: 10 m 1 0 0
Length: 15 m 1 5 0
Length: 20 m 2 0 0
Ethernet patch cable, double shielded (SFTP), crossed, LAN connector at both
7 K E 6 0 0 0 - 8 G E 0 ☐ - ☐ A A ☐
ends
Switch ↔ Switch
▲ ▲ ▲
Device ↔ PC
| | |
Length: 0.5 m 0 0 5
Length: 1 m 0 1 0
Length: 2 m 0 2 0
Length: 3 m 0 3 0
Length: 5 m 0 5 0
Length: 10 m 1 0 0
Length: 15 m 1 5 0
Length: 20 m 2 0 0

158 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Cables – Serial DIGSI Cable

7XV5100
Description/Overview
Serial RS232 communication cables (wire/optical fiber)
• 7XV5100-2 – PC/PG to 25-pole protection device
The serial connecting cable connects a serial 9-pole PC inter-
face with a male connector (for example, COM1) or a PG
interface to a protection device with a 25-pole user interface.
• 7XV5100-4 – (/BB) PC/PG, 9-pole, to the 9-pole protection
device (DIGSI 4 cable)
The serial connecting cable (DIGSI 4 cable) connects a serial 9-
pole PC interface with a male connector (for example, COM1)
or a PG interface to a protection device with a 9-pole user
interface.
The following devices have such an interface: 7SJ531,
7SJ602 and all SIPROTEC 4 devices such as 7SA522, 7SA6x,
7SJ61/62/63, and 6MD6x
The shielding has been changed in the 7XV5100-0 cable,
version/BB. The cable shield is no longer connected to “GND"
but instead to the connector housings at both ends. [ph_7XV5100, 1, --_--]

• 7XV5100-8H – 9/25-pole adaptor to the 7XV5100-4 cable Figure 3.1/3 7XV5100 Serial DIGSI 4 Cable
If this 9/25-pole adaptor is connected to the 9-pole male
connector of the 7XV5100-4 (/BB) cable, protection devices Applications
with a 25-pole user interface can also be connected to the
Application note for the 7XV5100-4 – (/BB) PC/PG, 9-pole, to the
PC/laptop computer using this cable.
9-pole protection device (DIGSI 4 cable)
• 7XV5100-5 – PC / PG, 25-pole, to the 9-pole protection device If the 9/25-pole adaptor is connected to the 9-pole male
The serial connecting cable connects a serial 25-pole PC inter-
face with a male connector (for example, COM1) to a protec- connector of the 7XV5100-4 cable, protection devices with a
tion device with a 9-pole user interface. The following devices 25-pole user interface can also be connected to the PC/laptop
have such an interface: 7SJ531, 7SJ602 and all SIPROTEC 4 computer using this cable.
3.1
devices, for example the 7SA522, 7SA6x, 7SJ61/62/63, and
6MD6x.

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Copper connecting cable between 7 X V 5 1 0 0 - ☐ ☐

▲ ▲
| |
Laptop computer/PC/9-pole socket and protection device/25-pole plug, length: 3 m 2 |
Laptop computer/PC/9-pole socket and protection device/9-pole plug, length: 3 m 4 |
Laptop computer/PC/25-pole socket and protection device/9-pole plug, length: 3 m 5 |
RS232/RS485 converter/25-pole connector and protection device/single wire ring cable protection, length: 1 m 7 |
Plug adaptor, 9-pole socket/25-pole connector to the DIGSI 7XV5100-4 cable (9-pole) for the protection unit with 25-pole interface at
8 H
the front

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 159
Communication
Cables – USB-RS485 Converter Cable

7XV5710
Description
The USB converter cable 7XV5710 with its special pin assign-
ment, enables the temporary connection of up to 31 Siemens
protection devices with an electrical RS485 interface to a PC
with a USB interface for direct or central control using DIGSI 4.
The converter is connected directly to the PC via the standard
USB connector (type A). The RS485 connector (9-pole D-
sub male) can be connected directly to SIPROTEC 4 devices
with RS485 interface modules. To connect individual compact
devices with the RS485 interface to terminals, the adaptor
7XV5103-2AA00 or -3AA00 is needed. The converter can
also be connected to the bus system 7XV5103 using the
included gender changer (Bu-Bu) enabling communication with
all devices connected to the bus. As the cable has a switchable
bus termination, it can be connected at one of the ends or even
in the middle of the bus. The converter is supplied with power
via the USB interface of the PC. [ph_7XV5710, 1, --_--]

Figure 3.1/4 USB RS485 Converter Cable 7XV5710

Benefits
• Compact connector housing devices are connected to the bus in series (not in star or
• USB 2.0/1.1 interface type A ring topology). The individual wires protruding from the screen
should be kept as short as possible.
• RS485 interface 9-pole D-sub
The screen is to be connected at both ends to the housing
• Max. bus length: 800 m ground. A 220-ohm load resistor is connected to the last protec-
• Load resistors, connectible tion device between the data circuits A and B.
• Baud rates: 300 Bd to 115 kBd
• Data Transfer Display (Data LED) Connecting the RS485 Bus
3.1
• Protocol transparency (not for PROFIBUS) The RS485 bus is a two-conductor bus (half-duplex) and up
to 32 devices (participants) can exchange their data on the
• Power supply via the USB connector (no galvanic separation) bus according to the master/slave principle. All devices are
• Compatible with the 7XV5103 bus system (with the 9-pole connected to the bus in series (not in the star or ring topology).
Bu/Bu gender changer) A 220-ohm load resistor is connected to the first and last device
between Pin 3 (A) and Pin 8 (B), regardless of whether this is a
Data Transfer master or slave device.
Before using the converter cable for the first time, a USB driver The SIPROTEC protection devices are preferably connected
must be installed from the included CD. The driver creates a new to the bus has slave devices downstream of a master, for
virtual COM port that can then be selected in the application example, RS484 converter 7XV5710 or 7XV5650/51. With these
used, for example, DIGSI 4. The converter works on the master/ converters (1st device), the load resistor can be implemented
slave principle in the half-duplex process. using DIL switches (S1, S2) via additional pull-up/pull-down
In the idle state, the USB interface is inactive and the RS485 resistors. The low-resistance pull-up/pull-down resistors are
interface is set to receive. For communication, the PC, operating absolutely necessary in various SIPROTEC bus applications, that
as the master, sends its data to the USB interface which, in is, the use of other converters might cause problems.
turn, sends the data from the converter to the RS485 interface In the protection devices, the load resistor may only be activated
to the protection device (slave). After this, the RS485 interface in the last device on the bus and, to do this, the specially
is again set to receive. Data coming from the protection are provided jumpers are to be used. If this is not possible in the
now transferred by the converter in the other direction to the device, an external load resistor, for example, 7XV5103-5AA00,
USB interface and to the PC. A data LED indicates when data is to be inserted after the last device (see Figure 3.1/6).
transmission is active.
In this example, the load resistors of the converter cable
are active (factory setting); the load resistors which some of
Connection of the Compact Devices using Terminals the protection devices have remain inactive. The bus is termi-
(without the Bus Cable 7XV5103) nated after the last device using the bus termination connector
A shielded and twisted cable (STP) is to be used for the RS485 7XV5103-5AA00 or an external resistor (220 ohms). If the last
bus. The conductor cross-section must be suitable for termi- protection device has a load resistor that can be connected, this
nating with ring-type lugs or D-SUB connectors. The protection can also be activated to terminate the bus.

160 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Cables – USB-RS485 Converter Cable

Application Example

[dw_central_operation_via_RS485-Bus, 3, en_US]

Figure 3.1/5 Central Operation via the RS485 Bus

Several SIPROTEC 3 and 4 protection devices can be centrally The converter cable may only be used temporarily because
operatedvia their interface with DIGSI using the USB converter it lacks galvanic separation. For permanent use, the optical
cable 7XV5710. There are corresponding cables and adaptors fiber converters7XV5652 and 7XV5650/51 should be used. The
for SIPROTEC devices for the various connection types. You optical fiber conductor provides complete galvanic separation
can find additional information in catalog sheet 7XV5103. between the PC and the SIPROTEC devices. You will find appro-
3.1
SIPROTEC 4 devices with an RS485 interface can be directly priate applications under: www.siprotec.com/accessories/7XV56
connected and operated with DIGSI 4.
To connect individual compact protection devices with the
RS485 interface to terminals, the adaptor cable 7XV5103-2AA00
or the adaptor 7XV5103-3AA00 is needed (see Figure 3.1/5).

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 161
Communication
Cables – USB-RS485 Converter Cable

Applications

[dw_connection-diagram_PRS485-bus_with_USB-converter, 3, en_US]

Figure 3.1/6 RS485 Bus with USB Converter Cable 7XV5710 and several SIPROTEC Devices (Block Diagram)

3.1 Product USB converter cable 7XV5710-0AA00

Technical Data Connection 2 protection Recei ± 15 kV Human Body Model
ver:
± 6 kV IEC 1000-4-2, contact
Product USB converter cable 7XV5710-0AA00 discharge
Driver on the included CD or on the Internet under: ± 12 kV IEC 1000-4-2, air discharge
www.siprotec.com/accessories/7XV5710
Perm up to 128 receivers on the bus,
Installation Plug & Play itted: true fail-safe receiver, -7 V to +12 V
Cable length 1.8 m common mode operation
USB interface virtual COM port Temperature protection against an
Connection 1 USB 2.0 (1.1) plug A output short circuit
Connection 1 Pin-assign- Connector type A, Pin 1 – Vcc Drive ± 9 kV Human Body Model rise rate
ment r: limited for healthy data transmission,
Pin 2 – D-
–7 V to +12 V common mode opera-
Pin 3 – D+ tion
Pin 4 – GND Current limiting
Connection 2 D-SUB 9-pole male connector with fastening Thermal disconnection for driver overload
screws protection
Connection 2 Pin-assign- Pin 3 – Tx / Rx (A) Handshake No
ment TX / RX-switchover automatic
Pin 5 – GND
Pin 8 – Tx / Rx+ (B) Serial data transmission half-duplex 2-wire
Power supply +5 V via the USB (max. 80 mA)
All other pins are not connected (nc)
Load resistor Selectable (S1, S2 ON = load resistor The module logs in to the USB at 96 mA
selected) max. 38 mA ready (converter on, no data
+ 5 V – Pin 3 = 390 Ω transmission)
Pin 3 – Pin 8 = 220 Ω max. 80 mA full-duplex, 4-wire operation
(max. transmission rate)
Pin 8 – Pin 5 = 390 Ω

162 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Cables – USB-RS485 Converter Cable

Product USB converter cable 7XV5710-0AA00

Serial transmission rates 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200,
38,400, 57,600, 115,200 bits/s
Status display Tx and Rx – 3 mm LED red
Operating temperature –5 to +70 °C
Driver software Windows 98, Windows 98 State Estimator,
[dw_7XV5710_USB-cable, 2, en_US]
Windows 2000, ME, XP, Vista 32 / 64,
Windows 7 32 / 64. No administrator rights Figure 3.1/7 USB Converter Cable with Plug. Factory Setting: S1 + S2
required ON = Load Resistor active Dimensions: 75 × 32 × 15 (L × W
Approval CE compliant / RoHS compliant × H)
Application No permanent installation for SIPROTEC
devices You can find additional technical data in the manual under:
www.siemens.com/accessories

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

USB – RS485 converter cable 7 X V 5 7 1 0 - 0 A A 0 0

1.8 m (without galvanic separation) for connecting up to 31 SIPROTEC 4 devices with RS485 interface to PC/laptop computer with USB 1.1/2.0 interface,
also for SICAM P

3.1

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 163
Communication
RS485 Bus System – 7XV5103

Description
The RS485 bus is a cost-effective half-duplex communications
bus that is not only used for the monitoring and control
of industrial plants, but, thanks to its high immunity, is
also increasingly employed by utilities for SCADA and protec-
tion applications in switchgear. Protocols such as DIGSI,
IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3, and Modbus up to 115 Kbps are
used between one master and up to 31 slave devices, using
a shielded twisted-pair cable (STP). Under ideal conditions, the
bus can be up to 1000 m long. This requires the correct bus
configuration, the use of suitable cables and connections, and
the right bus termination. Devices with different termination
methods require special adaptors to achieve the maximum
possible immunity. The RS485 bus systems 7XV5103 are opti-
mized in this respect for our instrumentation, control, and
power-system protection product family.
There are a 2 different RS485 bus systems under the order iden-
tifier 7XV5103.
[ph_7XV5103_RS485, 1, --_--]
When assembling the required components for an RS485 bus,
Figure 3.2/1 RS485 Bus Cable System 7XV5103
the respective application examples in this document can be
used as a guide.
• It is possible to combine both bus systems.
The bus system with 9-pole D-sub connectors has long been
used in systems with SIPROTEC protection devices, 7XV5 • The maximum length of the bus within one common
grounding system is 1000 m.
converters, and central units. The individual devices are
connected directly using a special Y-cable or a suitable adaptor Keep in mind that this system may not be used for PROFIBUS
cable for devices with different termination methods. The bus DP. This has its own bus system using components suitable for
terminates in a 9-pole D-sub bus termination plug with an inte- PROFIBUS.
grated 220-ohm resistor.
In some SIPROTEC devices, the serial signals are routed to the Applications
RJ45 sockets on the communication module, as, for example, The bus system with 9-pole D-sub connector plugs
in the case of the redundant IEC 60870-5-103 module. There,
3.2 The bus system with 9-pole D-sub bus termination plugs
the bus is constructed using double-shielded CAT 5 patch cables.
has long been used in systems with SIPROTEC protection
The individual devices are connected to the 2 redundant buses
devices, 7XV5 converters, and central units from Siemens.
using 2 special Y-adaptor cables each. The buses terminate
Individual devices and devices with different connection types
at one RJ45 bus termination connector each with a 120-ohm
are connected directly via special Y-cables or suitable adaptor
resistor.
cables. The bus terminates in a 9-pole D-sub bus termination
Using the 7XV5103-2BA00 Y-adaptor cable, it is also possible to plug with an integrated 220-ohm resistor.
combine both bus systems with the different device interfaces
or to combine the two systems. Application Examples
Example 1: SIPROTEC Protection Devices on the RS485 Bus
Benefits
The 9-pole male connector of the S1 Y-bus cable always comes
• For data transmission up to 115 Kbps from the master and connects to the slaves via a 1, 3, 5 or 10
(for example, DIGSI 4, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3)
m long cable and a 9-pole S2 male connector. The S2 connector
• Variable bus topology with shielded cables of different is equipped with a 20-centimeter long cable and a 9-pole B3
lengths socket to extend the bus. The compact protection devices are
• Metalized, shielded connector housings with reduced flush- directly connected with the B2 socket or an RS485 adaptor
mounting depth and strain relief 7XV5103-3AA00 via the adaptor cable 7XV5103-2AA00. After
the last device, a terminator 7XV5103-5AA00 is connected using
• Bus termination with terminators and integrated resistor a B3 plug to terminate the bus.
• Connection of the SIPROTEC 4 protection device to the redun-
dant IEC 60870-5-103 interface via a Y-adaptor cable and
RJ45 plug
• Connection of the SIPROTEC 4 protection devices to the RS485
interface and D-sub connector plug directly or via a Y-adaptor
cable
• Connection to miscellaneous RS485 converters, for example,
the 7XV5650/51

164 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RS485 Bus System – 7XV5103

• Adaptors/cables for compact protection devices

• Metalized plug housings with strain relief of the cable connec-
tions
• Compact plugs
• Data transmission up to 115 Kbps (for example, DIGSI,
IEC 60870-5/Association of German Power Plants)
• Maximum extension of the bus to 800 m within one common
ground system
• Bus termination with terminators and integrated 120-ohm
resistor
• Connection to the fiber-optic RS485 converter 7XV5650 or
the bus system with D-sub connector plugs via Y-adaptors.
Notes on configuring the RS485 bus system (see Application
[dw_SIP4_Prot-device_RS485-Bus_Abb13-36, 2, en_US]
examples 2 and 3)
Figure 3.2/2 SIPROTEC Protection Devices on the RS485 Bus
The housings of all devices connected to the bus must be rigidly
grounded via one common ground to prevent hazardous ground
Bus System with RJ45 Patch Cables currents from flowing via the cable shields
The bus system with RJ45 plugs has been developed specifically Longer distances, especially into a different building with its
for SIPROTEC devices for communication modules with serial own grounding system, should be handled preferably using
RJ45 plugs and is made using cost-effective double shielded CAT fiber-optic cables via converters (for example, 7XV5650/51).
5 patch cables.
The RS485 bus must be linear. This means that there must be
The individual devices are connected to the 2 redundant buses no feeders from the bus (for example, a terminal block) to the
via 2 special Y-adaptor cables each. The buses terminate with connected bus devices. This would create a star topology and
one RJ45 bus termination plug having an integrated 120-ohm have a negative effect on functionality.
resistor.
Only double-shielded CAT 5 patch cables (for example,
7KE6000) can be used as bus cables. The maximum bus length
must not exceed 800 m.
The bus must be terminated at the first device (usually the
master) and at the last device using a bus load resistor to avoid 3.2
interference due to reflection. No other load resistors can be
installed between these terminations.
Since all devices, a maximum of 32 (including the master), pick
up everything on the RS485 bus, all these devices on the bus
must be set to the same baud rate and the same data format. All
slaves must have different device addresses.
Within the system, only one master can be active at a time in
each bus and only one slave can respond.

[7XV5103_mo_ad, 1, --_--]

Figure 3.2/3 Bus System with RJ45 Patch Cables

Technical Data
• Cost-effective bus topology using shielded patch cables (CAT
5) with RJ45 plugs
• Cable lengths from 0.5 to 20 m (7KE6000-8G)
• Connecting SIPROTEC 4 protection devices to redundant
IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces using Y-adaptor with RJ45 plugs
• Connecting SIPROTEC 4 protection devices to RS485 interface
via a Y-cable to the D-sub connector plug

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 165
Communication
RS485 Bus System – 7XV5103

Example 2: Connection of a SIPROTEC 4 to a (Redundant) Example 3: Central Operation of SIPROTEC 4 Devices with
Control System DIGSI 4

[dw_central-operating-sip4-dev-with-digsi4, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.2/5 Central Operation of SIPROTEC 4 Devices with DIGSI 4

The RS485 bus cable system using patch cables (CAT 5) was
developed as a cost-effective alternative to the earlier 7XV5103
[dw_SIP4_control-system_redundant, 2, en_US] systems with D-sub connector plugs. The advantages are the
Figure 3.2/4 Connection of a SIPROTEC 4 to a (Redundant) Control
global use of patch cables and the compact dimensions of the
System RJ45 connector.
The 7XV5103-2BA00 Y-adaptor makes it possible to implement
The RS485 bus cable system using patch cables (CAT 5) was an RS485 bus using patch cables and to connect various
developed as a cost-effective alternative to the earlier 7XV5103 SIPROTEC devices with RS485 interfaces. The Y-adaptors have
systems with D-sub connector plugs. The advantages are the 2 parallel RJ45 sockets to implement the buses. The approx.
global use of patch cables and the compact dimensions of the 20 cm long connecting cable to the device has one RJ45 plug
3.2 RJ45 plug. This allows a redundant IEC 60870-5-103 interface with the corresponding pin assignment.
with a single interface module within a SIPROTEC 4 device.
Devices with an RS485 interface and D-sub connector plugs
Two different Y-adaptors make it possible to implement an (7XV5650/51, SIPROTEC 4 devices with D-sub) are connected
RS485 bus using patch cables and connection to devices with using the 7XV5103-2BA00 Y-adaptor.
RS485 interfaces and different types of interface connections.
Devices with an RS485 interface on screw plugs require
Both Y-adaptors have 2 parallel RJ45 sockets to implement the
an additional adaptor for 9-pole D-sub connector plugs to
buses. The approx. 20 cm long connecting cable to the device
single-conductor cables, for example, 7XV5103-2AA00 or
has either one RJ45 or one D-sub connector plug.
7XV5103-3AA00.
Devices with D-sub connector plugs (for example, master RTU,
After the last device, the bus is terminated using a
7XV5650/51, SIPROTEC 4 devices with D-sub are connected
7XV5103-5BA00 bus termination plug.
using the 7XV5103-2BA00 Y-adaptor. Devices with RJ45 plugs,
such as the SIPROTEC 4 with redundant IEC 60870-5-103 inter-
face, are connected using the 7XV5103-2CA00 Y-adaptor. For
the redundant bus system, 2 Y-adaptors are necessary for each
SIPROTEC 4 device.
After the last device, the bus is terminated using a
7XV5103-5BA00 bus termination plug. For the redundant bus
system, a bus load resistor is needed for each bus.

166 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RS485 Bus System – 7XV5103

Example 4: Connecting two 7XV5103 Bus Systems designation 7XV5103-2BA00. Complete the connection on the
last device with a terminal resistor. For the SIPROTEC 5 device,
use a terminal resistor with the order designation RS485 termi-
nator 7XV5103-5BA00.

[dw_serma1, 1, en_US]

[dw_terminal_2_busy-system-7xv5103, 3, en_US] Figure 3.2/7 Cabling Example SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5, Communica-
tion with a Single Master Using an RS485 Bus
Figure 3.2/6 Connecting two 7XV5103 Bus Systems

The 7XV5103-2BA00 Y-adaptor makes it possible to configure Technical Data and Summary
an RS485 bus using RJ45 patch cables and to connect SIPROTEC • Direct connection to SIPROTEC 4 protection devices with
devices with an RS485 interface via a D-sub connector plug. RS485 interface via an RS485 optical fiber converter
Using an additional gender-changer (socket-socket) makes it 7XV5650/51
possible to connect an RS485 bus using a 7XV5103-0AAxx Y • Adaptors/cables for compact protection devices with RS485
bus cable instead of a SIPROTEC device. interface to terminals

Example 5: Connecting the SIPROTEC 5 Series to Devices

• 4 cable lengths from 1 to 10 m
from the SIPROTEC 4 Series • Shielded twisted-pair cable (STP) with 9-pole D-SUB connector
plug 3.2
Serial electrical RS485 connections of devices in the SIPROTEC 5
series can be cabled with low-cost Ethernet patch cables. Special • Metalized, shielded connector housings with reduced flush-
bus cables and adaptors are not needed. mounting depth and strain relief

Pay attention to the following if you include devices from the • Data transmission up to 115 Kbps (for example, DIGSI,
SIPROTEC 4 series in the connection: IEC 60870-5/Association of German Power Plants)

The RS485 interface in devices of the SIPROTEC 4 series is a • The maximum length of the bus within one common
grounding system is 1000 m.
D-sub 9 connection with a connected terminal resistor. If you
connect devices from the SIPROTEC 5 series with devices from • Bus termination with terminators and integrated 220-ohm
the SIPROTEC 4 series, then use a Y adaptor with the order resistor

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 167
Communication
RS485 Bus System – 7XV5103

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

7XV5103 cables and adaptors are not suitable for PROFIBUS applications or PROFIBUS cabling 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

RS485-Y copper connecting cable 7 X V 5 1 0 3 - 0 A A ☐ ☐

▲ ▲
| |
For connecting a device with 9-pole D-sub plug Length: 1 m 0 1
(socket) and extension of the bus (9-pole socket), Length: 3 m 0 3
2-wire, shielded
Length: 5 m 0 5
Length: 10 m 1 0
RS485 bus extension cable 7 X V 5 1 0 3 - 1 A A ☐ ☐
▲ ▲
| |
Length: 10 m 1 0
Length: 20 m 2 0
Length: 30 m 3 0
Length: 40 m 4 0
Length: 50 m 5 0
Adaptors 7 X V 5 1 0 3 - ☐ ☐ A 0 0
▲ ▲
| |
RS485 adaptor for devices with RS485 interface on screw terminals to 9-pole D-sub connector
2 A
plug (socket), 2-wire, shielded, length: 0.3 m
Y-adaptor cables for devices with RS485 interface and D-sub connector plug to 2 x RJ45 socket
for flush-mounting sockets of an RS485 bus with patch cables, 2-wire, twisted, 2 B
shielded 1 x D-sub male, 9-pole, to 2 x RJ45 socket, 8-pole, length: 0.3 m
for devices with RS485 interface and RJ45 connector plug to 2 x RJ45 socket
plugs to build an RS485 bus with patch cables, 2 x 2-wire, twisted, shielded 2 C
1 x RJ45 male, 8-pole, to 2 x RJ45 socket, 8-pole, length: 0.3 m
3.2 RS485-bus termination With an internal 220-ohm resistor between pins 3 and 8 5 A
With an internal 120-ohm resistor between pins 1 and 2, 1 x RJ45 male plug,
5 B
8-pole
RS485 copper cable 7 X V 5 1 0 3 - 7 A A ☐ ☐
▲ ▲
| |
For the connection between the 7XV5662-xAD10 Length: 5 m 0 5
RTD unit and SIPROTEC 4 devices (port C or port D Length: 25 m 2 5
with RS485 interface) 7UT6, 7SJ6, 7UM62 Length: 50 m 5 0
RS485 copper connecting cable
2-wire, shielded, with RJ45 bus coupler, socket/
for connecting the 7XV5662-xAD10 RTD unit to 7 X V 5 1 0 3 - 7 B A 0 3
socket
SIPROTEC 5

168 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
10 dB Attenuator – 7XV5107

Description
Attenuators are components connected in the signal path to
reduce the amplitude of the signal.

Applications
If 7SA or 7SD SIPROTEC devices with protection-interface
communication are used over distances (s) shorter than speci-
fied in the Technical Data, the transmission power must be
reduced with optical attenuators. The same applies to the
7XV5461-0Bx00 devices.

To continue using the duplex LC plug, both attenuators are [ph_7XV5107, 1, --_--]

installed at one end of the optical wide area network connec- Figure 3.3/1 10 dB Attenuator 7XV5107
tion.
Distanc Module/device Attenuator Comments
Distanc Module/device Attenuator Comments e required
e required 100 km C53207A At s < 50 km -
24 km C53207A No No constraint 351D657 1 /
351D655 1 / 7XV5461-0BJ00
7XV5461-0BG00 170 km No module / At s < 100 km Required or damage to
60 km C53207A At s < 25 km - 7XV5461-0BM00 the optical receivers
351D656 1 /
7XV5461-0BH00

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Optical attenuators (minimum order: 2 pc) 7 X V 5 1 0 7 - 0 A A 0 0

2 optical attenuators for single-mode optical fibers for the protection interface of 7SD/7SA or 7XV5461
repeater. 10-dB optical attenuation to avoid overdriving over short distances. LC duplex connection

3.3

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 169
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 40 km

Description
The optical repeater 7XV5461 exchanges serial optical signals
via 1 singlemode fiber-optic cable only over long distances. It
converts serial optical 820 nm signals at port 1 and port 2 in the
range of 300 bit/s up to 4.096 Mbps up to 1300/1550 nm for
1 singlemode fiber-optic cable.
Synchronous or asynchronous signals can be connected to port
1/2. In this way, 2 independent, serial 820 nm inputs with ST
connectors are available and these can be multiplexed onto
port 3. 2 devices with an optical 820 nm interface, such as the
line differential protection devices of the SIPROTEC 4/5 series
or the 7XV5652 RS232/820 nm converter, can be connected to
ports 1 and 2 via multimode fiber-optic cables for distances of
up to 1.5 km. These signals are transmitted to port 3 via the
single LC connector in the wavelengths of 1300 nm/1550 nm
for connection of singlemode fiber-optic cables of up to 40 km.
The device can be connected to DC battery voltages or AC
voltage sources. To support commissioning, loops can be acti-
vated for port 1/2 so that the input signals are reflected at each [ph_7XV5461_W3, 1, --_--]
port to support commissioning of the optical fiber connections.
Figure 3.4/1 Optical Repeater with Integrated Multiplexer with
1300 nm/1550 nm Wavelength for 1 Singlemode Fiber-
Benefits
Optic Cable
• 2 independent multiplexed 820 nm ports 1/2 with ST connec-
tors for max. 1.5 km over 50/125 µm and 62.5/25 µm multi- The FO repeater supports easy commissioning of the entire
mode fiber-optic cables communication path. For commissioning, loops can be activated
• Transmission rate of the serial ports 1/2 of 300 bit/s up to for port 1/2 so that the input signals are reflected at the respec-
4.096 Mbps. Automatic baud rate matching to synchronous tive port. The FO repeater has a relay contact to issue a “device
and asynchronous serial signals; no settings necessary ok” indication (DOK), and is equipped with a wide-range power
supply unit that covers the entire normal DC and AC auxiliary
• Powerful 1300 nm/1550 port with single LC plug for distances voltage range.
up to 40 km using a singlemode fiber-optic cable at 9/125 µm
Until now, 2 fiber-optic cables were needed for the bidirectional
• Wide-range power supply of DC 24 V to 250 V and AC 115 transmission of protection signals. Using the repeater with inte-
V to 230 V with alarm relay
grated wavelength multiplexer, one fiber-optic cable is suffi-
• Display of the data traffic via LED cient.

3.4 • Integrated commissioning aids Substation automation technology, telecontrol engineering, or

additional protection data transmissions can be connected via
Applications port 2. As a result, the long-distance optical fiber is put to
The typical application area for the FO repeater is the protec- optimal use for 2 separate serial connections to transmit serial
tion-interface communication for SIPROTEC 4/5 differential and data between 300 bit/s and 4.096 Mbps.
distance protection devices. Furthermore, serial data of the
7XV5 device series can be transmitted over long distances. Application Example with SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5
The connection to the protection device is provided interfer- Figure 3.4/2 shows the interference-free data exchange of
ence-proof via a fibre-optic connection. The maximum trans- SIPROTEC 5 protection devices, e.g. differential protection 7SD8
mission distance between the protection device and the FO or distance protection 7SL8, is via single mono-mode Fiber Optic
repeater is specified at 1.5 km when using a 62.5/125 μm fiber- cable up to a max. distance of 40 km and the DIGSI 5 access via
optic cable or a 50/125 μm fiber-optic cable. Ethernet.

170 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 40 km

[dw_SIP5_prot-data transm_40km, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.4/2 Transfer of Protection Data Signals of SIPROTEC 5 Devices via Single Mono-Mode FO Cable and DIGSI 5 Access via Ethernet (Note: Devices
7XV5461-0BK00 and 7XV5461-0BL00 must be Used in Pairs)

Application Example with SIPROTEC 4 and DIGSI 4 star coupler 7XV5450 or CM-0822. A serial connection to
other switchgear is established via this port using a PC with
(see Figure 3.4/3)
DIGSI 4 installed. The remote protection devices can be queried
2 protection devices, for example, differential protection remotely via port 2.
7SD52/7SD610 or distance protection 7SA52/7SA6, exchange
The baud rate is optimally set to 57.6 Kbps so that there are no
information via port 1 (Po1). Data is exchanged interference-
differences from local control. When commissioning and during
free using an optical singlemode fiber-optic cable covering a
operation, the data of the devices can be changed or read from
distance of up to 40 km. A protection remote control with
the other switchgear. 3.4
DIGSI 4 is connected to port 2 of the repeater using a mini

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 171
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 40 km

[dw_prot-data transm_and_integration_fiber-optic-cable, 3, en_US]

Figure 3.4/3 Protection Data Transmission and Remote Control/Integration Using One Singlemode Fiber-Optic Cable (Note: The 7XV5461-0BK00 and
7XV5461-0BL00 Devices must be used in Pairs.)

(1) Multimode fiber-optic cable with ST connectors (6XV8100)

3.4

Power supply
Technical Data Wide-range: 24 to 250 VDC or 115 / 230 VAC

Connections Displays
Ports 1 / 2 ST connectors for 820 nm, for 4 LEDs
50/125 µm and for 62.5/125 µm
Green Power supply
multimode fiber-optic cable
Red Alarm relay
Port 3 Single LC connector for 1300 nm/
1550 nm, for 9/125 µm single- 2 × yellow Data traffic display
mode fiber-optic cable
Screw terminals 2-pole screw terminals for auxiliary You can find additional technical data in the manual under:
voltage www.siemens.com/accessories
3-pole make contact/break contact
for an alarm relay

Housing
Interference-resistant aluminum housing, 188 x 56 x 120 mm for
mounting to 35-mm DIN rail according to EN 50032.
Weight: 0.8 kg. Degree of protection according to EN 60529: IP41

172 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 40 km

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Optical repeater for asynchronous and synchronous coupling 7 X V 5 4 6 1 - 0 B ☐ 0 0

▲
|
1550 nm/LC single connector/permissible attenuation: 25 dB (0.45 dB/km) for radii up to 40 km via a fiber-optic cable K
1300 nm/LC single connector/permissible attenuation: 25 dB (0.45 dB/km) for radii up to 40 km via a fiber-optic cable L
For converting/amplifying multimode optical fiber, 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm (820 nm), to singlemode optical fiber, 9/125 µm, for serial data from 300
bit/s to 4.096 Mbps
2 independent serial optical input channels with ST connectors for 820 nm and multimode optical fiber
1 optical output at 1300 nm or 1550 nm with an LC connector for singlemode optical fiber
Permissible path attenuation of the 820 nm multimode connection is 8 dB (approx. 1.5 km).
Permissible path attenuation of the 1300 nm or 1550 nm singlemode connection: see order option
Wide-range voltage supply/auxiliary voltage: 24 to 250 VDC or 115/230 VAC
1 fault signaling contact for auxiliary voltage faults or loss of data connection
LEDs for display of data transmission
Data transmission in 2 directions from 2 optical ports using singlemode optical fiber

NOTE

i The -0BK00 and -0BL00 versions must be used in

pairs.

3.4

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 173
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 170 km

Description
The optical repeater 7XV5461 using a duplex singlemode fiber-
optic cable transmits serial optical signals over long distances.
It converts serial optical 820 nm signals at port 1 and port 2
in the range of 300 bit/s up to 4.096 Mbps. Synchronous
and asynchronous signals can be connected. In this way, 2
independent, serial 820 nm inputs with ST connectors are
available and these can be multiplexed onto port 3. 2 devices
with an optical 820 nm interface, such as the line differential
protection devices of the SIPROTEC 4/5 series or the 7XV5652
RS232/820 nm converter, can be connected to ports 1 and 2 via
duplex multimode optical fiber for distances of up to 1.5 km.
These signals are transmitted to port 3 via the single duplex LC
plug in wavelengths of 1300 nm/1550 nm for the connection
of a duplex singlemode fiber-optic cable. Using port 3, there
are 3 options for max. 25 km (1300 nm)/60 km (1300 nm) and
100 km/170 km (1550 nm) optical fiber lengths. The device can
be connected to all battery voltages and AC voltage sources. To
support commissioning, loops can be activated for port 1/2 so
that the input signals are reflected at the respective port. [ph_7XV5461_W3, 1, --_--]

Figure 3.4/4 Optical Repeater with Wide-range Power Supply Unit

Benefits
• 2 independent multiplexed 820 nm ports with ST connectors mission distance between the protection device and the FO
for max. 1.5 km via 50/125 µm and 62.5/125 µm duplex repeater is specified at 1.5 km when using a 62.5/125 μm fiber-
multimode fiber-optic cables optic cable or a 50/125 μm fiber-optic cable.
• Transmission rate of the serial ports 1/2 of 300 bit/s up to The FO repeater supports easy commissioning of the entire
4.096 Mbps. Automatic baud rate matching to synchronous communication path. For commissioning, loops can be activated
and asynchronous serial signals; no settings necessary for port 1/2 so that the input signals are reflected at the respec-
• Powerful 1300 nm/1550 nm port with duplex LC plug for tive port. The FO repeater has a relay contact to issue a “device
distances up to 24 km/60 km/100 km/170 km using a duplex ok” indication (DOK), and is equipped with a wide-ranging
singlemode fiber-optic cable at 9/125 µm power supply unit that covers the entire normal DC and AC
auxiliary voltage range.
• Wide-range power supply of DC 24 V to 250 V and
AC 115 V to 230 V with alarm relay Power system control or additional protection-data transmis-
sions can be connected via port 2. As a result, the long-distance
• Display of the data traffic via LED optical fiber is put to optimal use for 2 separate serial connec-
3.4 • Integrated commissioning aids tions to transmit data between 300 bit/s and 4.096 Mbps.

Applications Application Example with SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5

The typical application area for the FO repeater is protection- Figure 3.4/5 shows the interference-free data exchange of
interface communication for SIPROTEC 4/5 differential and SIPROTEC 5 protection devices, e.g. line differential protection
distance protection. Furthermore, serial data from the 7XV5 7SD8 or distance protection 7SL8, via duplex mono-mode Fiber
device series can be transmitted over long distances. Optic cable up to a distance of 170 km and the DIGSI 5 access
The conntection to the protection device is provided interfer- via Ethernet.
ence-proof with a fibre-optic connection. The maximum trans-

174 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 170 km

[dw_SIP5_prot-data transm_170km, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.4/5 Transfer of Protection Data Signals of SIPROTEC 5 Devices via Duplex-Mono-Mode FO Cable and DIGSI 5 Access via Ethernet

Application Example with SIPROTEC 4 and DIGSI 4 or CM-0822. A serial connection to other switchgear is estab-
lished via this port using a PC with DIGSI 4 installed. The protec-
The protection devices (for example, differential protection
tion devices of the remote switchgear can be queried from a
7SD5/7SD6 or distance protection 7SA52/7SA6) exchange infor-
distance via port 2. The baud rate is optimally set to 57.6 Kbps
mation via port 1. Data is exchanged interference-free using
so that there are no differences from local control.
an duplex mono mode fiber-optic cable covering a distance of
170 km. A protection remote control with DIGSI 4 is connected When commissioning and during operation, the data of the
to port 2 of the repeater using a mini star coupler 7XV5450 device can be changed or read from the other switchgear.
3.4

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 175
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 170 km

[dw_prot-data transm_and_integration_optical_DFÜ-connection, 3, en_US]

Figure 3.4/6 Protection Data Transmission and Remote Control of Switchgear via an optical dial-up Network Connection

(1) Multimode fiber-optic cable with ST connectors (6XV8100)

3.4
Power supply
Technical Data Wide range 24 to 250 VDC, without switch-over 115/230 VAC

Connections Displays
Ports 1/2 ST connectors for 820 nm, for 4 LEDs
50/125 µm and for 62.5/125 µm
Green Power supply
multimode fiber-optic cable
Red Alarm relay
Port 3 Duplex LC plug for 1300 nm,
for 50/125 µm/62.5/125 µm multi- 2 × yellow Data exchange
mode fiber-optic cable
Screw terminals 2-pole screw terminals for auxiliary You can find additional technical data in the manual under:
voltage www.siemens.com/accessories
3-pole make contact/break contact
for an alarm relay

Housing
Aluminum housing, 188 x 56 x 100 mm for mounting to 35-mm DIN
rail according to EN 50032.
Weight: 0.8 kg. Degree of protection according to EN 60529: IP41

176 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 170 km

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Optical repeater for singlemode optical fiber 7 X V 5 4 6 1 - 0 B ☐ 0 0

▲
|
1300 nm/for transmission distances up to 24 km G
1300 nm/LC connector/for transmission distances up to 60 km H
1550 nm/LC connector/for transmission distances up to 100 km J
1550 nm/LC connector/for transmission distances up to 170 km M
For converting/amplifying multimode optical fiber, 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm (820 nm), to singlemode optical fiber, 9/125 µm, for serial data from 300
bit/s to 4.096 Mbps
2 independent serial optical input channels with ST connectors and 820 nm for multimode optical fiber,
permissible path attenuation of the 820 nm path is 8 dB (approx. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 µm fiber).
Wide-range power supply, DC 24 V to 250 V and AC 115/230 AC
1 fault signaling contact for auxiliary voltage faults or loss of data connection

NOTE

i Repeaters can only be used in pairs.

3.4

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 177
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 8 km

Description
The optical repeater 7XV5461 duplex multimode fiber-optic
cable transmits serial optical signals over long distances via
a duplex multimode fiber-optic cable. It converts serial optical
820 nm signals at port 1 and port 2 in the range of 300 bit/s up
to 1.5 Mbps up to 1300 for duplex multimode fiber-optic cable.
Synchronous and asynchronous signals can be connected. In
this way, 2 independent, serial 820 nm inputs with ST connec-
tors are available and these can be multiplexed onto port 3.
It supports a transmit signal (Tx) and a receive signal (Rx) (no
RTS/CTS handshake signals).
2 devices with an optical 820 nm interface, such as the line
differential protection device of the SIPROTEC 4/5 series or the
7XV5652 RS232/820 nm converter, can be connected to ports 1
and 2 via multimode fiber-optic cables for distances of up to
1.5 km. These signals are transmitted to port 3 via the single
duplex LC plug in wavelengths of 1300 nm for the connection
of a duplex multimode fiber-optic cable. There are 2 options
for port 3 for fiber-optic cable lengths of a maximum of 4 km
(1300 nm) and 8 km (1300 nm). The device can be connected [ph_7XV5461_W3, 1, --_--]

to all battery voltages and AC voltage sources. To support Figure 3.4/7 Optical Repeater with Wide-range Power Supply Unit
commissioning, loops can be activated for port 1/2 so that the
input signals are reflected at the respective port. mission distance between the protection device and the FO
repeater specified at 1.5 km when using a 62.5/125 μm fiber-
Benefits optic cable or a 50/125 μm fiber-optic cable.
• 2 independent multiplexed 820 nm ports with ST connectors The FO repeater supports easy commissioning of the entire
for max. 1.5 km via 50/125 µm and 62.5/125 µm duplex communication route. For commissioning, loops can be acti-
multimode fiber-optic cables vated for port 1/2 so that the input signals are reflected at the
• Transmission rate of the serial ports 1/2 of 300 bit/s up to respective port. The FO repeater has a relay contact to issue
1.5 Mbps. Automatic baud rate matching to synchronous and a “device ok” indication (DOK), and is equipped with a wide-
asynchronous serial signals; no settings necessary ranging power supply that covers the entire normal DC and AC
auxiliary voltage range.
• Powerful 1300 nm port with duplex LC plug for distances of
up to 4 km/8 km using 50/125 µm/61.5/125 µm Power-system control or additional protection data transmis-
sions can be connected via port 2. As a result, the long-distance
• Wide-range power supply of DC 24 V to 250 V and AC 115 optical fiber is put to optimal use for 2 separate serial connec-
V to 230 V with alarm relay
3.4 tions to transmit data between 300 bit/s and 4.096 Mbps.
• Display of the data traffic via LED
• Integrated commissioning aids with loop test option. Application Example with SIPROTEC 5 and DIGSI 5
Figure 3.4/8 shows the interference-free data exchange of
Applications SIPROTEC 5 protection devices, e.g. line differential protection
The typical application area for the FO repeater is the protec- 7SD8 or distance protection 7SL8, via duplex multi-mode Fiber
tion-interface communication for SIPROTEC 4/5 differential and Optic cable up to a distance of 4 km to 8 km and the DIGSI 5
distance protection devices. Furthermore, serial data from the access via Ethernet.
7XV5 device series can be transmitted over long distances.
The connection to the protection device is provided interfer-
ence-proof via a fibre-optic connection. The maximum trans-

178 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 8 km

[dw_SIP5_prot-data transm_8km, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.4/8 Transfer of Protection Data Signals of SIPROTEC 5 Devices via Duplex-Multi-Mode FO Cable and DIGSI 5 Access via Ethernet

Application Example with SIPROTEC 4 and DIGSI 4 be queried from a distance via port 2. The baud rate is optimally
set to 57.6 Kbps so that there are no differences from local
2 protection devices (for example, differential protection
control.
7SD52/7SD610 or distance protection 7SA52/7SA6) exchange
information via port 1. Data is exchanged interference-free When commissioning and during operation, the data of the
using an optical duplex multimode fiber-optic cable up to a device can be changed or read from the other switchgear. As
distance of 4 km to 8 km. A protection remote control with an alternative, substation automation technology or additional
DIGSI 4 is connected to port 2 of the repeater using a mini star protection data transmissions can be connected via port 2. As
coupler 7XV5450 or CM-0822. A serial connection to the other a result, the long-distance optical fiber is put to optimal use for
3.4
switchgear is established via this port using a PC with DIGSI 4 2 separate serial connections to transmit data between 300 bit/s
installed. The protection devices of the remote switchgear can and 4.096 Mbps.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 179
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 8 km

[dw_prot-data transm_and_integration_optical_DFÜ-connection_8km, 3, en_US]

Figure 3.4/9 Protection Data Transmission and Remote Control of Switchgear via an optical dial-up Network Connection

Power supply
3.4 Technical Data Wide range 24 to 250 VDC, without switch-over 115 to 230 VAC

Connections Displays
Ports 1/2 ST connectors for 820 nm, for 4 LEDs
50/125 µm and for 62.5/125 µm
Green Power supply
multimode fiber-optic cable
Red Alarm relay
Port 3 Duplex LC plug for 1300 nm, for
50/125 µm / 62.5/125 µm multi- 2 × yellow Data traffic display
mode fiber-optic cable
Screw terminals 2-pole screw terminals for auxiliary You can find additional technical data in the manual under:
voltage www.siemens.com/accessories
3-pole make contact/break contact
for an alarm relay

Housing
Aluminum housing, 188 x 56 x 100 mm for mounting to 35-mm DIN
rail according to EN 50032.
Weight: 0.8 kg. Degree of protection according to EN 60529: IP41

180 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
2-Channel Serial Optical Repeater – 7XV5461 up to 8 km

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Optical repeater for multimode optical fiber 7 X V 5 4 6 1 - 0 B ☐ 0 0

▲
|
1300 nm/LC connector/4 km, multimode F
1300 nm/LC connector/8 km, multimode E
For converting/amplifying multimode optical fiber, 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm (820 nm), to multimode optical fiber for serial data from 300 bit/s to 1.5
Mbps
2 independent serial optical input channels with ST connectors and 820 nm for multimode optical fiber,
permissible path attenuation of the 820 nm path is 8 dB (approx. 1.5 km with 62.5/125 µm fiber).
Wide-range power supply, DC 24 V to 250 V and AC 115/230 V
1 fault signaling contact for auxiliary voltage faults or loss of data connection

3.4

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 181
Communication
Converters – RS485 Optical Fiber Converter

7XV5650/51
Description
The RS485 optical fiber converter 7XV5650/51 makes it possible
to connect up to 31 devices via a bus-capable electrical RS485
interface. It creates an optical connection to a central controller
or a star coupler.

Benefits
• Baud rate: 9.6 to 115 kBd
• Topologies:
7XV5650: Optical star structure
7XV5651: Optical linear structure
• Protocol transparency
• Non-flickering light:
Can be switched to light ON/light OFF
• Radius: 1.5 km at 62.5/125 µm, fiber-optic cable
• 120 Ω load resistor for the RS485 bus, activated/deactivated [ph_7XV5650_51, 2, --_--]

via DIP switches Figure 3.5/1 RS485 Optical Fiber Converter

• Wide-range power supply with self monitoring and alarm
relay • Additional UL approval
• Metal housing (KU-2M basis) in place of plastic
Applications
• Other form factor; converter size the same as CC-2M
The converter was developed for use in switchgear for inter-
ference-free transmission of serial data with transmission rates
• Grounded housing
between 9.6 and 115.2 kBd via multimode fiber-optic cable. • Switchable signal relay/GOK (3 terminals)
The 7XV5651 converter is designed to operate as a T-coupler. • Ring redundancy expansion for 2-channel version
That is, data can be distributed linearly allowing cost-effective • Additional LED to display power/error
optical bus systems to be built. The 7XV5650 version was
designed for star topologies via optical fiber connections. Application
The converters can be used in an optical linear structure or in
Optical Fiber Converter 7XV565x-0CA00
an optical star structure. Use in an optical linear structure allows
The following improvements are planned for the functional interference-free connection of devices using fiber-optic cables;
follow-up model ... -0CA00: for indoor installation, a cost-effective RS485 bus may be used.
• Increased EMC (incl. new standards), adaptation for
3.5 SIPROTEC 5
• Higher temperature ranges

182 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Converters – RS485 Optical Fiber Converter

[dw_line-structure_rs485-bus, 3, en_US]

Figure 3.5/2 Optical linear Structure with connected RS485 Interfaces

3.5

[dw_connec_optical-interface_rs485-bus, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.5/3 Connecting Optical Interfaces to an RS485 Bus

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 183
Communication
Converters – RS485 Optical Fiber Converter

Several devices with an optical interface and DIGSI or RS485 bus topology. Within one system, the data format and
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol can be connected to an existing the baud rate must be set to the same values.

[dw_optical_star-coupler_with_RS485_interface, 3, en_US]

Figure 3.5/4 Optical Star Structure with connected RS485 Interfaces

3.5

184 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Converters – RS485 Optical Fiber Converter

[dw_connec_optical-interface_rs485-bus_01, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.5/5 Connecting Optical Interfaces to an RS485 Bus

Connector Plug
Technical Data RS485 9-pole D-sub socket
2-pole Phoenix screw terminal
Auxiliary Voltage
Signaling contact 2-pole Phoenix screw terminal
Rated input voltage
• Direct voltage DC 24 V to 250 V ± 20 % Non-Flickering Light 3.5
• Alternating voltage AC 60 V to 230 V ± 20 % / 45 to 65 Can be switched to light ON/OFF
Internal fuse 1.25 A slow-blow (soldered)
Protection class III Housing
Power consumption For rated voltage (typical value) Plastic case, EG90, dark gray; 90×75×105 mm (W×H×D) for snap-on
• Direct voltage 3W mounting to 35-mm DIN rail according to EN 60715
• Alternating voltage 2.5 W; 3.5 VA
You can find additional technical data in the manual at:
LEDs www.siemens.com/accessories
3 LEDs
Green Operating voltage OK You can find additional technical data in the manual under:
Yellow Data reception via optical fiber
www.siemens.com/accessories
channel 1
Yellow Data reception via optical fiber Surface Mounting
channel 2 (7XV5651 only) Trans- The converter has a housing for snap-on mounting to a 35-
mitting data mm DIN rail according to EN 60715. Auxiliary voltage can
be provided via screw connections. The fiber-optic cables are
Connector Plug connected using ST connectors. The device contains no silicone
Power supply 2-pole Phoenix screw terminal or halogen and is very flame-resistant.
Fiber-optic cables 820 nm, ST connector

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 185
Communication
Converters – RS485 Optical Fiber Converter

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Converter, optical fiber 820 nm to RS485 7 X V 5 6 5 ☐ – 0 C A 0 0

▲
|
Converter with one RS485 interface and 2 optical fiber ST sockets (receive and transmit) 0
1 optical channel
Not suitable for PROFIBUS
Linear structure up to 115 Kbps
Auxiliary voltage, DC 24 V to 250 V and AC 110/230 V without switchover
Connecting protection devices or RTU with an RS485 interface using 9-pole D-sub connector plugs
Connecting PC via modem using optical fiber 820 nm, via ST connectors for optical fiber 62.5 µm
DIN rail mounting, metal housing
Converter with one RS485 interface and 4 optical fiber ST sockets (2 times receive and transmit) 1
2 optical channels
Not suitable for PROFIBUS
With RTU ring redundancy
Linear structure up to 115 Kbps
Auxiliary voltage, DC 24 V to 250 V and AC 110/230 V
Connecting protection devices with an RS485 interface using 9-pole D-sub connector plugs
4 fiberglass connections for 62.5/125 μm
Multimode optical fiber using ST connectors
DIN rail mounting, metal housing

3.5

186 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Converters – RS232 Optical Fiber Converter

7XV5652
Description
The RS232 optical fiber converter 7XV5652 converts serial
RS232 full duplex signals to optical fiber transmission signals.
It has one optical fiber channel each for the transmit and receive
directions and an RS232 interface isolated for 2 kV. As a result,
the converter can be connected directly to the serial interface of
SIPROTEC devices.

Benefits [ph_7XV5652, 2, --_--]

• Serial baud rates up to 115 kBd Figure 3.5/6 RS232 Optical Fiber Converter

• Not necessary to set the baud rate The converter supports the conversion of serial TxD (transmit)
• Protocol transparency and RxD (receive) signals to an optical output. Handshake
• Non-flickering light: Can be switched to light ON/OFF signals are not supported.
• Radius: 3 km at 62.5/125 µm, fiber-optic cable Application
• Wide-range power supply with self monitoring and signaling
contact Using the serial RS232 optical fiber converter, an existing RS232
interface on a SIPROTEC protection device can be upgraded to
• Supports the serial TxD and RxD lines of the RS232 interface. an optical 820 nm interface to connect the device to other
Handshake lines are not supported.
optical components for central and remote queries using DIGSI.
Another application is the coupling between a line differen-
Applications tial protection and a communication network having electrical
It is designed for use in switchgear and enables the galvanically RS232 inputs. The connection between the communication
separated, interference-free transmission of serial signals to a space containing the converter and the protection device is
central controller, a star coupler, or a PC. established in an interference-free manner via multimode fiber-
optic cable.

3.5

[dw_remote-interrogation_with_RS232-interface, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.5/7 Remote Query with the RS232 Interface

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 187
Communication
Converters – RS232 Optical Fiber Converter

Optical Fiber Converter 7XV565x-0CA00 LEDs

The following improvements are planned for the functional 1 LED
follow-up model ... -0CA00: Green Operating voltage OK

• Increased EMC (incl. new standards), adaptation for Connector Plug

SIPROTEC 5
Power supply 2-pole Phoenix screw terminal
• Higher temperature ranges Fiber-optic cables 820 nm, ST connector
• Additional UL approval RS232 9-pole D-sub socket
• Metal housing (KU-2M basis) in place of plastic Signaling contact 2-pole Phoenix screw terminal
• Other form factor; converter size the same as CC-2M
• Grounded housing Non-Flickering Light
Can be switched to light ON/OFF Using jumpers
• Switchable signal relay/GOK (3 terminals)
• Ring redundancy expansion for 2-channel version Housing
• Additional LED to display power/error Plastic case, EG90, dark gray; 90×75×105 mm (W×H×D) for snap-on
mounting to 35-mm DIN rail according to EN 60715

Technical Data You can find additional technical data in the manual at:
www.siemens.com/accessories
Auxiliary voltage
Rated input voltage You can find additional technical data in the manual under:
www.siemens.com/accessories
• Direct voltage DC 24 V to 250 V ± 20 %
• Alternating voltage AC 60 V to 230 V ± 20 % / 45 to 65
Surface Mounting
Protection class III
Power consumption For rated voltage (typical value) The converter has a housing for snap-on mounting to a 35-
mm DIN rail according to EN 60715. Auxiliary voltage can
• Direct voltage 3W
be provided via screw connections. The fiber-optic cables are
• Alternating voltage 2.5 W; 3.5 VA
connected using ST connectors. The device contains no silicone
or halogen and is very flame-resistant.

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Converter, optical fiber according to RS232 up to 115 kBd 7 X V 5 6 5 2 – 0 C A 0 0

3.5 Auxiliary voltage, DC 24 V to 250 V and AC 110/230 V with alarm relay
Connection for RS232 interface via 9-pole D-sub connector plug
Connection, optical fiber 820 nm, via ST connector
DIN rail mounting, metal housing

188 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Converters – Communication Converter

7XV5662-0AA
Description
The communication converter for interfacing to a communica-
tion network is a peripheral device connected to the protection
device via optical fiber. This peripheral device enables serial
data exchange between 2 protection devices. This exchange
takes place via a digital communication network. The elec-
trical interfaces for the access of the communication converter
to the communication device are optionally X.21 (64 Kbps,
128 Kbps, 256 Kbps or 512 Kbps) or G.703.1 (64 Kbps). The
data is converted at the partner by a second communication
converter, such that they can be read by the second device.
Using the communication converters, 2 protection devices can
communicate synchronously with each other and, while doing
so, exchange a large amount of data over long distances.
Typical applications are serial protection interfaces of differential
protection and of distance protection in the SIPROTEC 4 devices
7SD52/53, 7SD61, 7SA52, 7SA6, and all SIPROTEC 5 devices
such as the 7SD8, 7SA8, and 7SL8, where 7XV5662-0AA00 must
be used. [ph_7XV5662-0AA00, 1, --_--]

If asynchronous serial data of the differential protection 7SD51 Figure 3.5/8 Communication Converter 7XV5662-0AA00 for X.21/
or the 7XV5653/7XV5673 binary signal transducer are to be RS422 and G.703.1
transmitted, the 7XV5662-0AA00 device is to be used (asyn-
chronous, from 300 bit/s to 115.2 Kbps, depending on the baud • Asynchronous data exchange for the protection device
rate of the X.21 or G.703.1 interface). 7SD51, binary signal transducer, 7XV5653/7XV5673 or other
devices with an asynchronous interface
The protection device is connected in an interference-free
manner via a multimode fiber-optic cable pre-assembled at the • Monitoring of:
communication converter with ST connectors. The maximum – Auxiliary voltage,
optical transmission distance is 1.5 km. The 7XV5662-0AA00 is – X21: Clock signal of the communication network;
to be mounted or installed near the communication device or G703.1: Receive data is present and corresponds to the
data circuit terminating equipment in the same cabinet or at standard pulse mask
least in the same room. The maximum electrical transmission – and internal logic
distance should be kept as short as possible, a few meters are
favorable. • Alarm relay (1 change-over contact, SIPROTEC standard)
The data transfer between the protection devices represents • Loop test can be selected via push-button
a point-to-point connection that is bit-transparent. The data • Wide-range power supply unit of DC 24 V to 250 V and AC
exchange must take place via reserved communication channels 115 V to 230 V with alarm relay
in the same communications system. 3.5
Functions
Benefits The protection device is optically connected to the communi-
• Optical interface with ST connector for connection to the cation converter, which enables interference-free data transmis-
protection device sion between the communication converter and the protection
device. The communication converter is located close to the
• Radius: 1.5 km at 62.5/125 µm and 50/125 µm multimode communication device. It matches the optical active interface
fiber-optic cable between the communication converter and
of the protection device to the electrical data of the communi-
protection device/serial device
cation network interface. The interface types – optionally X.21/
• Electrical interface to the communication device via D-sub RS422 or G.703.1 – can be set with a push-button on the enclo-
connector plugs (X.21, 15-pole, automatic setting to 64, 128, sure cover.
256 or 512 Kbps or G.703.1, 9-pole, 64 Kbps)
The device detects the necessary transmission rate automati-
• Synchronous and asynchronous data exchange mode can be cally.
selected in one device by push-button
The data between the protection devices is transmitted on the
• Synchronous data exchange with the SIPROTEC 4 devices basis of a point-to-point connection; in addition, a synchronous,
7SD52/53, 7SD61, 7SA52, 7SA6, and all SIPROTEC 5 devices bit-transparent transmission is possible via the communication
such as the 7SD8, 7SA8, and 7SL8 network.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 189
Communication
Converters – Communication Converter

Applications
Synchronous serial data exchange between two devices of the
same type:
• SIPROTEC 4: Distance protection with a binary permissive
overreach transfer trip scheme and differential protection
(7SA52/6,7SD52/53/61); devices must be equipped with the
optical module LWL5.
• SIPROTEC 5: All device types are possible (such as 7SD8/A8/
L8); devices must be equipped with the optical module
USART-AD-1FO or USART-AE-2FO.
Asynchronous serial data exchange between 2 devices of the
[dw_Wirkkom-IEEE-interface-lwl-anschl, 4, en_US]
same type:
Figure 3.5/10 Protection Communication via a Communication
• SIPROTEC 3: Differential protection (7SD51). Network with X21 or G703.1 (64 kbps / G703.6 (2Mbit))
• Binary Signal Transducer, SICAM I/O unit (7XV5653, Interface
7XV5673): Point-to-point transmission of binary signals, for
example, for serial permissive overreach transfer trip scheme
logic in distance protection.

Application Examples

[dw_connec_2-device_via_comm-network_synch_or_asynch, 3, en_US]

Figure 3.5/9 Connection of Two Protection Devices via a Communica-

tion Network linked with 7XV5662-0AA00 in Synchronous
or Asynchronous Mode

Dimensioned Drawing

3.5

[dw_Dimensions_7XV5662-0AA00-GG, 1, en_US]

Figure 3.5/11 Dimensions of the Communication Converter, Front and Side View

190 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Converters – Communication Converter

Technical Data Housing

Degree of protection according to EN 60529: IP41
Rated auxiliary voltage for snap-on mounting to 35-mm DIN rail according to EN 60715
24 to 250 VDC ± 20%
115 V to 230 VAC ± 20% Operating modes of the communication converter 7XV5662-0AA00
Consumption approx. 2.5 W; < 9.5 VA Synchronous opera- 7SA52/6,7SD52/53/61; and all SIPROTEC 5
tion with device types such as the 7SD8/A8/L8
4 LEDs G.703.1: Interface selectable by push-button
LED 1 Red: Error or loop mode Settings in the protec- Automatic settings in
LED 2 LED 2 “TxD” signals the transmit data tion device the CC-XG
coming from the network interfaces and 64 Kbps per parameter 64 Kbps
transmitted to the protection device as X.21/ RS422: Interface selectable by push-
optical fiber-T. button
Operation color “green”: Device is oper- Settings in the protec- Automatic settings in
ating in synchronous mode tion device the CC-XG
Operation color “yellow”: Device is oper- 64 Kbps per parameter 64 Kbps
ating in asynchronous mode 128 Kbps per param- 128 Kbps
LED 3 LED 3 “RxD” signals the receive data eter
(optical fiber-R) coming from the protec- 256 Kbps per param- 256 Kbps
tion device and to be transmitted to the eter
network interface. 512 Kbps per param- 512 Kbps
Operation color “green”: Device is oper- eter
ating in synchronous mode Asynchronous opera- 7SD51, 7XV5653/7XV5673 and devices with
Operation color “yellow”: Device is oper- tion with asynchronous serial interface (handshake not
ating in asynchronous mode supported, only serial TxD and RxD signals are
supported)
LED 4 The “Power On” LED signals that the auxil-
iary voltage is connected. G.703.1: Interface selectable by push-button
Settings in the protec- Automatic settings in
Operation color “green”: The device
tion device the CC-XG
communicates via the G703 interface.
max. 19.2 Kbps 64 Kbps
Operation color “yellow”: The device
communicates via the X21 interface. X.21/ RS422: Interface selectable by push-
button
Settings in the protec- Automatic settings in
Connections
tion device the CC-XG
Power supply 2-pole screw terminal
max. 19.2 Kbps asyn- 64 Kbps
Signaling/standby contact 3-pole make contact/break contact chronous
Serial G.703.1 interface 9-pole D-SUB socket for the 4-pole receive max. 38.4 Kbps asyn- 128 Kbps
and transmission line chronous
X.21 interface 15-pole D-SUB connector plug for the max. 57.6 Kbps asyn- 256 Kbps 3.5
electrical X.21/RS422 interface chronous
Fiber-Optic Cables 820 nm, 2 ST connectors for T×D and R×D max. 115.2 Kbps asyn- 512 Kbps
for 62.5/125 μm multimode optical fiber chronous
(max. distance to the protection device:
1.5 km)
You can find additional technical data in the manual under:
www.siemens.com/accessories
Housing
Sheet steel housing Dimensions: 188×55×120 mm (W×H×D)
Weight About 0.8 kg

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 191
Communication
Converters – Communication Converter

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Communication converter for X.21/RS422/G.703.1 7 X V 5 6 6 2 - 0 A A 0 0

Converter for synchronous or asynchronous serial For synchronous operation with
coupling of protection devices with optical input 7SA52,7SA6,7SD52/53/61, all SIPROTEC 5 device
types possible, like the 7SD8/A8/L8
Output to communication devices with electrical
X.21/RS422 or G.703.1 interface For asynchronous operation with 7SD51, 7XV5653,
7XV5673 and other devices with an asynchronous
Connection to protection devices via fiber-optic cable
serial interface
at 62.5/125 µm and 820 nm wavelength, max.
distance: 1.5 km
ST connector, electrical with X.21/RS422 (15-pole D-
SUB connector) or G.703.1 (9-pole D-SUB connector)
Automatic baud rate detection,
Synchronous or asynchronous operation selectable
via push-button

3.5

192 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Converters – Communication Converter

7XV5662-0AC
Description
The communication converter, copper (CC-CO) is a peripheral
device connected to the protection device, which enables serial
data exchange between 2 line differential protection devices.
For this, one single pair of copper wires (pilot wires) is used.
It can be part of a telecommunication cable or another suit-
able symmetrical communication cable (not a Pupin cable).
The data is converted at the partner by a second communi-
cation converter such that they can be read by the second
protection device. Using the communication converters (Main
Unit/Secondary Unit), 2 protection devices can communicate
synchronously with each other and, while doing so, exchange
a large amount of data over long distances.
Typical applications are the serial protection interfaces of differ-
ential protection and of distance protection in the SIPROTEC 4/5
device series, where 7XV5662-0AC02 must be used (128 kBit/s
synchronous connection). If asynchronous serial data of the [ph_7XV5662-0AC00, 2, --_--]
7SD5 differential protection or the 7XV5653 binary signal trans-
Figure 3.5/12 Communication Converter 7XV5662-0AC02 for Pilot
ducer is to be transmitted, the 7XV5662-0AC03 device is to be
Wires
used (asynchronous, from 300 bit/s to 38.2 kBit/s).
The protection device is connected in an interference-free Functions
manner via a multimode fiber-optic cable pre-assembled with
The protection device is optically connected to the communi-
ST connectors at the CC-CO end. The maximum optical trans-
cation converter, which enables interference-free data transmis-
mission distance is 1.5 km. The data transfer between the
sion between the communication converter and the protection
protection devices represents a point-to-point connection that is
device. The communication converter is located close to the
bit-transparent. The data exchange must operate over reserved
pilot wire It converts serial data from the protection device into
pilot wires, not via central offices.
a frequency-modulated signal. This signal is transmitted via a
pair of copper wires of a pilot wire/communication line (bidirec-
Benefits
tional, full duplex).
• Optical interface with ST connectors for connection to the Using jumpers, one device is defined as the Main Unit and
protection device
the other device as the Secondary Unit. In a “training” session
• Radius: 1.5 km at 62.5/125 µm, multimode fiber-optic cable during commissioning, the electrical properties of the pilot wires
between CC-CO and the protection device are measured by pressing a Reset key and the communication
• Pilot wire radius: typically: 12 km; cascaded: 12 km + converters are set to these properties.
12 km = 24 km The measured properties are used as parameters that must be
• Electrical interface to the pilot wire (line) with 2 screw termi- maintained for optimal data transmission. The digital data trans- 3.5
nals; 5 kV insulated mission enables a low degree of insulation on the pilot wires
because no high voltages are created on the pilot wires under
• Synchronous data exchange with the SIPROTEC 4 devices short-circuit conditions.
7SD52, 7SD53, 7SD61, 7SA52, 7SA6, and all SIPROTEC 5
devices such as the 7SD8, 7SA8, and 7SL8 to pilot wire (CC- The data between the protection devices is transmitted on
CO version -0AC02) the basis of a point-to-point connection; in addition, it is a
synchronous, bit-transparent transmission. Thanks to the tele-
• Asynchronous data exchange for the 7SD51, 7XV5653, or gram-buffered data exchange, an operating error cannot occur.
other devices with an asynchronous interface (CC-CO version
-0AC03)
Applications
• Loop test function can be selected using jumpers in the CC-CO
The communication converter can be used for 2 applications.
• Main Unit or Secondary Unit operation of the CC-CO can be One application is synchronous, serial data exchange (converter
selected using a jumper (1 Main Unit and 1 Secondary Unit at
version: 0AC02) between SIPROTEC 4/5 differential protection
the end of the pilot wire required; default setting: Main Unit
devices (7SD52, 7SD6, 7SD8, and 7SL8) and/or serial permis-
operation)
sive overreach transfer trip scheme logic between SIPROTEC 4/5
• Wide-range power-supply unit with self-monitoring and distance protection devices (7SA6, 7SA52, and 7SA8). The
signaling contact protection devices must be equipped with an optical 820 nm
FO5 plug-in module or USART-AD-1FO or USART-AE-2FO.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 193
Communication
Converters – Communication Converter

Another application is the transmission of asynchronous serial

data via pilot wires to the line differential protection device
7SD51 or the binary signal transmitter 7XV5653. Other serial
devices can also be used.

Application Examples

[dw_appl_synchon-serial-data-exchange, 3, en_US]
[dw_Dimensions_7XV5662-0AC01, 2, en_US]
Figure 3.5/13 Application Example 1: Typical Design of a Communica-
Figure 3.5/15 Dimensions CC-CO
tion Path
(1) Minimum length of the DIN rail
If the maximum distance between protection devices is greater
(2) Applies to the DIN EN 60715 rail; TH 35 x 7.5
than can be spanned by 2 CC-COs, the converters can be
cascaded (see application example 2). A power supply is needed (3) Phillips screw
between the 2 Main Unit devices. If the insulation degree is (4) A DIN rail mounted on the wall (not included in the scope of
greater than 5 kV (through the pilot wire inputs of the devices), supply)
external isolating transformers can be used at both ends. These
isolating transformers provide 20 kV of isolation voltage and (5) Release device
help to avoid dangerously high voltages at the inputs of the
CC-COs that could be caused by a short circuit of a parallel Supply Voltage via a Wide-Range Power-Supply Unit
high-power line.
Auxiliary voltage – direct voltage DC 24 V to 250 V
Permissible voltage range DC 19 V to 300 V
Power consumption <4W
Permissible AC ripple voltage, ≤ 12 % at the rated voltage,
IEC 60255-1
Peak-peak
Stored-energy time for outage/ ≥ 50 ms
short circuit of the auxiliary
3.5 voltage

Auxiliary voltage – alternating AC 110 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

voltage
[dw_appl_synchon-serial-data-exchange_01, 3, en_US]
Permissible voltage range AC 99 V to 253 V
Figure 3.5/14 Application Example 2: Cascading of CC-COs Power consumption < 10 VA
Connection 2-pole screw terminal

194 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Converters – Communication Converter

Signal Relay (DOK)(Life Contact) Unsuitable for isolating supply voltages

Connection 3-pole screw terminal
Contact 1 change-over contact
Switching power Terminals for Auxiliary Voltage (DOK)(Life Contact), and Line
– ON 1000 W, 1000 VA
– OFF 30 VA; 40 W ohmic Rated line cross-section 0.2 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 solid,
Contact voltage 250 V 0.25 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 with boot-
Permissible current per contact 5 A continuously, lace ferrule
Stripped length 9 mm
30 A for 0.5 s
Tightening torque 0.4 Nm to 0.5 Nm

Internal Fuses

Not interchangeable T 1.6 A at AC 250 V acc. to IEC 60127

Not interchangeable, secondary F 2 A at AC 125 V acc. to UL 248-14

You can find additional technical data in the manual under:

www.siemens.com/accessories

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Communication converter for pilot wires 7 X V 5 6 6 2 - 0 A C 0 ☐

▲
|
For synchronous operation with 7SA52,7SA6,7SD52/53/61, all SIPROTEC 5 device types possible, like the 7SD8/A8/L8 2
For asynchronous operation with 7SD51, 7XV5653, 7XV5673 and other devices with an asynchronous serial interface 3
Converter for synchronous or asynchronous serial coupling of protection devices with optical input and ST connectors.
For conventional two-wire control lines
5-kV isolation of the devices' analog outputs from the two-wire control lines.
Connection to the protection device via fiber-optic cable at 62.5/125 µm and 820 nm wavelength
max. distance: 1.5 km, ST connectors
synchronous serial transmission rate: 128 Kbps
3.5
Asynchronous serial transmission rate: max. 38.4 Kbps

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 195
Communication
Converters – Communication Converter

7XV5662-0AD
Description
The communication converter CC-2M is used for serial data
transmission over long distances via a communication network.
It converts synchronous or asynchronous serial signals from an
optical 820-nm input to the inputs LWL1 and LWL2 to a network
interface and transmits these signals back via the interfaces of
the remote terminal unit. LWL1 and LWL2 can have their param-
eters set independently for either synchronous or asynchronous
operation. However, both ends must be set to the same oper-
ating mode.
In synchronous operation, the interface should be used only for
the exchange of protection data from the SIPROTEC 4/5 differ-
ential protection 7SD5/7SD6/7SD8 or from the SIPROTEC 4/5
distance protection 7SA52/7SA6/7SA8/7SL8. Their default
setting is for 512 Kbps.
In asynchronous operation, the interface can be used
for connecting devices with baud rates between 1.2 and
115.2 Kbps. Another asynchronous electrical RS232 interface is [ph_7XV5662-0AD00, 1, --_--]

available for a maximum of 115.2 Kbps. It is used to connect

Figure 3.5/16 Communication Converter 7XV5662-0AD00 – G.703.6
a serial PC interface with DIGSI and thus as the operational
interface to SIPROTEC devices at the opposite end.
• Network interface in format E1 or T1 for connection to a
The G.703.6 network interface is designed as a 4-pole screw multiplexer
terminal and can be configured as a 2-Mbps interface according
to the European format E1 or as a 1.544-Mbps interface in the
• Wide-range power-supply unit of DC 24 V to 250 V and AC
115 V to 230 V with fail-safe relay
American format T1.
All device settings are made using jumpers so that no special PC
• Display of data exchange via an LED
software is necessary. • Integrated commissioning aid (loop test)
Benefits
• Interference-free protection data transmission from 2 inde-
pendent serial data signals, selectable either in synchronous
or asynchronous operation.
• PC interface for device operation at the opposite end

3.5

196 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Converters – Communication Converter

Dimensional Drawing

[dw_Dimensions_7XV5662-0AD00-DD, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.5/17 Dimensions: Communication Converter 7XV5662-0AD

(1) Minimum DIN-rail length

3.5
(2) The dimensional drawing applies to the DIN EN 60715 DIN rail; TH 35 x 7.5
(3) Phillips screw
(4) A DIN rail mounted on the wall (not included in the scope of supply)
(5) Release device

Technical Data Connections

Fail-safe relay 3-pole screw terminal with break contact/
Connections make contact
Optical fiber 1/2 ST connector / 820 nm for 50 / 125 µm or Network E1/T1 4-pole screw terminal or BNC connector
62.5 / 125 µm multimode fiber-optic cable
(max. 1.5 km) Housing
RS232 for asynchronous connection from 1.2 to Aluminum housing 188×56×120 mm for mounting to 35-mm
115.21 Kbps DIN rail according to EN 50032
Power supply 2-pole screw terminal Weight 0.8 kg
Degree of protection according to EN 60529: IP41

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 197
Communication
Converters – Communication Converter

Power supply You can find additional technical data in the manual under:
Wide-range Power Supply Unit, 24 to 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC, 50/60 www.siemens.com/accessories
Hz

4 LEDs
Green Power supply
Red Fault display
2 × yellow Data Transfer

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

2-channel serial communication converter 7 X V 5 6 6 2 - 0 A D 0 ☐

▲
|
Connection from the multiplexer to the E1/T1 network interface via 4-pole screw terminal 0
Connection from the multiplexer to the E1/T1 network interface via BNC connector 1
2 independent serial optical input channels with ST connectors for 820 nm, for multimode optical fiber, for max. 512/115.2 Kbps for synchronous/asyn-
chronous data.
1 electrical serial RS232 interface with max. 115.2 Kbps designed as 9-pole D-SUB socket for connection to DIGSI cable 7XV5100
Wide-range Power Supply Unit, 24 to 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC
1 current signaling contact for auxiliary voltage faults or loss of data connection
LED for data transmission display
All settings via jumpers in the device (configured for E1) and synchronous serial optical fiber inputs
For synchronous operation with 7SA52,7SA6,7SD52/53/61, all SIPROTEC 5 device types possible, like the 7SD8/A8/L8
For asynchronous operation with 7SD51, 7XV5653, 7XV5673 and other devices with an asynchronous serial interface

3.5

198 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RS900

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RS900 is a rugged, small form factor Layer 2
Fast Ethernet switch. Designed to operate reliably in electrically
harsh and climatically demanding environments, it provides a
high level of immunity to electromagnetic interference and
heavy electrical surges typical of the environments found in
electric substations, on plant floors, or in curbside and wayside
control cabinets.

Benefits
• Field proven, cost effective compact switch reduces acquisi-
tion based CAPEX, as well as OPEX through the very low rate
of unscheduled maintenance visits.
• Opex costs further reduced due to elimination of planned
maintenance requirements through a design that uses no
moving parts or fans.
• Use any available or planned fiber infrastructure with flexible
uplink options.

Functions [P_RCM0_XX_00041P, 2, --_--]

• 3 factory configurable ports supporting Fast Ethernet copper Figure 3.6/1 RUGGEDCOM RS900
or 100 Mbit fiber optic interface options (MTRJ, SC, ST, LC
connectors) Application Example
• 6 Copper (10/100BASE-TX, RJ45) ports
• Fully integrated power supply
– Universal high-voltage input: AC 85 V to 264 V /DC 88 V to
300 V
– Medium-voltage DC input: DC 48 V Nennspannung
(DC 36 V to 72 V)
– Low-voltage DC input DC 24 V nominal voltage (DC 10 V
to36 V)
• Non-blocking store and forward switching
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40°C to +85°C
without the use of fans
[G_RCM0_XX_00101P, 2, --_--]

Figure 3.6/2 RUGGEDCOM RS900G in a fiber optic ring connecting

multiple field devices
3.6

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RS900 6 G K 6 0 9 0 - 0 A S 2 . - 0 . A .
RUGGEDCOM RS900 is a 9-port, industrially hardened, fully managed Ethernet switch supporting 6 Fast Ethernet RJ45 ports and up to 3 Fast Ethernet
Fiber ports available over multiple fiber connector types and distances.
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/1 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 199
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2-RUGGEDCOM RS900G

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RS900G is a rugged, small form factor Layer 2
Fast Ethernet switch with Gigabit uplinks. Designed to operate
reliably in electrically harsh and climatically demanding environ-
ments, it provides a high level of immunity to the electromag-
netic interference and heavy electrical surges typical of environ-
ments found in electric substations, on plant floors, or in curb-
side and wayside control cabinets.

Benefits
Cost effective, highly reliable, field proven compact switch
reduces CAPEX costs on initial acquisition and OPEX costs by
very low rate of unscheduled maintenance visits.

Functions
• 2 factory configurable ports supporting SFPs or an array of
Gigabit fiber optic interfaces
• 8 Copper (10/100BASE-TX, RJ45) ports
• Fully integrated power supply [RS900G, 1, --_--]

– Universal high-voltage input: AC 100 V to 240 V / DC 100 V Figure 3.6/3 RUGGEDCOM RS900G
to 300 V
– Medium-voltage DC input: DC 48 V (DC 36 V to 72 V ) Application Example
– Low-voltage DC input : DC 24 V (DC 10 V to 36 V)
• Non-blocking store and forward switching
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C
without the use of fans

[G_RCM0_XX_00101P, 2, --_--]

Figure 3.6/4 RUGGEDCOM RS900G in a fiber optic ring connecting

multiple field devices

3.6
Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RS900G 6 G K 6 0 9 0 - 0 G S 2 . - 0 . A .
The RUGGEDCOM RS900G is a rugged, fully managed Ethernet switch providing dual fiber optic Gigabit Ethernet ports and 8 Fast Ethernet copper ports;
2 Fiber Optic Gigabit Ethernet Ports (1000BaseX); 8 Fast Ethernet Ports (10/100BaseTX); Multiple fiber connector types (LC, SC, SFP Pluggable Optics);
Bi-directional single strand fiber support; Long haul optics allow Gigabit distances up to 70 km
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/2 Selection and Ordering Data

200 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2-RUGGEDCOM RS900GP

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RS900GP is a rugged, small form factor
Layer 2 switch with Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) capability.
Designed to operate reliably in electrically harsh and climatically
demanding environments, it provides a high level of immunity
to the electromagnetic interference and heavy electrical surges
typical of environments found on plant floors or in curbside and
wayside control cabinets.

Benefits
• High PoE port density to meet the growing demand for
Ethernet in roadside and wayside cabinets without the need
for multiple devices.
• Power over Ethernet ports (PoE+) reduce cabling costs and
simplify camera, radio and peripheral device connectivity by
supplying power and Ethernet in one cable.
• Use any available or planned fiber infrastructure with flexible
uplink options.

Functions
• 2 factory configurable ports supporting SFP, copper RJ-45,
Micro-D, and an array of Gigabit fiber optic interfaces [P_RCM0_XX_00043, 2, --_--]

• 8 Copper (10/100BASE-TX, RJ45) ports each supporting PoE+ Figure 3.6/5 RUGGEDCOM RS900GP
(30 Watts per port) per IEEE 802.3at
• Powered by the external PoE supply (DC 45 V to 57 V) for a Application Example
streamlined power configuration
• Non-blocking store and forward switching
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C
without the use of fans

3.6

[G_RCM0_00003P, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.6/6 RUGGEDCOM RS900GP connecting devices in transporta-

tion networks

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 201
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2-RUGGEDCOM RS900GP

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RS900GP 6 G K 6 0 9 0 - 0 P S 2 . - 0 . A .
The RUGGEDCOM RS900GP is a utility grade, fully managed Ethernet switch providing dual fiber optic or copper Gigabit Ethernet ports and 8
Fast Ethernet copper ports; 8 Fast Ethernet Ports (10/100BaseTX) all 802.3af/802.3at compliant PoE; Up to 2 Fiber Optic Gigabit Ethernet Ports
(100/1000BaseX); Up to 2 10/100/1000 BaseTX ports; Multiple fiber connector types (LC, SC,ST, SFP)
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/3 Selection and Ordering Data

3.6

202 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RSG900C

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RSG910C and RSG908C are compact all
Gigabit, IEEE 1588 compatible Ethernet switches. The RSG910C
supports 4 Gigabit SFP uplink ports and 6 10/100/1000TX
copper ethernet ports while the RSG908C supports 4 Gigabit
SFP uplink ports and 4 multimode fiber 100FX ports with LC
connectors. Both products come with an integrated DIN rail
mount and front-facing interfaces for easy installation in space-
limited areas. They offer redundant power inputs for both DC
and high voltage AC/DC applications, eliminating a single point
of failure. Designed to operate in harsh environments with
widely varying climatic and environmental conditions, these
devices can be used for precise time synchronization in the
Electric Power industry; for high-bandwidth applications such
as video streaming in the Transportation industry and for time-
critical applications such as drilling automation, SCADA (Supervi-
sory Control and Data Acquisition) and RTU (Remote terminal
unit) solutions for wellhead automation, pipeline monitoring,
compression or pumping stations in the oil & gas industry.
[RSG910C, 1, --_--]
Benefits
Figure 3.6/7 RUGGEDCOM RSG910C and RSG908C
• Reduce maintenance costs by combining precision timing
information and data communications onto a single network Application Examples
due to the support of IEEE 1588.
• SFP uplink ports allow for in-field modification at any time
allowing deployment flexibility for varying customer needs.
• The redundant power supply inputs allow for continuous safe
and reliable operations even during single power supply fail-
ures, diminishing the risk of revenue and data loss.
Features
• 4 Fiber optic (100BASE-FX, LC) or 6 Copper
(10/100/1000BASE-X, RJ45) ports
• Industry standard connectors: SFP, LC and/or RJ45
• Fully integrated power supply with redundant power inputs [G_RCM0_00196P, 3, en_US]
– Universal high-voltage dual inputs: AC 100 V to 240 V /
DC 100 V to 300 V Figure 3.6/8 RUGGEDCOM RSG908C and RSG910C provides a mix of
fiber optic and copper ports for IEDs and other edge equip-
– Universal low-voltage DC dual inputs with nominal
ment
voltages: DC 12 V, DC 24 V, DC 48 V (DC 10 V to 60 V)
3.6
• Non-blocking store and forward switching
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C;
without the use of fans

Product Variants
• RUGGEDCOM RSG910C
– The RUGGEDCOM RSG910C is a compact Gigabit IEEE 1588
compatible Ethernet switch, providing 4 Gigabit SFP ports
and 6 Gigabit copper ports.
• RUGGEDCOM RSG908C
– The RUGGEDCOM RSG908C is a compact Gigabit IEEE 1588
[G_RCM0_00186P, 3, en_US]
compatible Ethernet switch, providing 4 Gigabit SFP ports
and 4 100FX multimode fiber optic ports with LC connec- Figure 3.6/9 RUGGEDCOM HSR Coupling Switch with IEEE1588
tors.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 203
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RSG900C

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RSG908C 6 G K 6 4 9 0 - 8 C B . . - . . . .
RUGGEDCOM RSG908C is an 8 port rugged fully managed Ethernet switch featuring integrated IEEE 1588 support for use in harsh industrial environ-
ments. The product has 4x 1 Gbit/s SFP slots and 4x 100 Mbit/s multimode LC ports (max 2 km). -40 °C to +85 °C operating temperature (fanless).
RUGGEDCOM RSG910C 6 G K 6 4 9 1 - 0 C B . . - . . . .
RUGGEDCOM RSG910C is a 10 port rugged fully managed Ethernet switch featuring integrated IEEE 1588 support for use in harsh industrial environ-
ments. The product has 4x 1 Gbit/s SFP slots and 6x 10/100/1000 Mbit/s RJ45 Ethernet ports. -40 °C to +85 °C operating temperature (fanless).
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/4 Selection and Ordering Data

3.6

204 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RSG920P

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RSG920P is a rugged, high density, small form
factor Layer 2 switch with Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) capability
for cabinets with high Ethernet port and bandwidth require-
ments, specifically designed to operate reliably in electrically
harsh and climatically demanding environments. It provides a
high level of immunity to electromagnetic interference and
heavy electrical surges typical of environments found on plant
floors or in curbside and wayside control cabinets.

Benefits
• High port density to meet the growing demand for Ethernet in
roadside and wayside cabinets without the need for multiple
devices.
• Power over Ethernet ports (PoE+) reduce cabling costs and
simplify camera, radio and peripheral device connectivity by
supplying power and Ethernet in one cable.
• Small form factor provides the capacity of a 19” switch in
space constrained environments. [RSG920P, 1, --_--]

• USB console & MicroSD Card slot for easy in field configura- Figure 3.6/10 RUGGEDCOM RSG920P
tion and upgrade.
• Use any available or planned fiber infrastructure with flexible Application Example
uplink options
• Use Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet based on need.
Features
• 4 SFP uplink ports supporting 100 Megabit and 1 Gigabit
speeds
• 16 Copper (10/100/1000BASE-X, RJ45) ports
• 4 PoE+ ports supporting up to 30 Watts per port
(IEEE 802.3at)
• Low power (DC 9 V to 60 V), or high-power (DC 100 V to
300 V/ AC 88 V to 264 V) options for worldwide operability
• Non-blocking store and forward switching
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C
without the use of fans

3.6

[G_RCM0_XX_00062P, 2, --_--]

Figure 3.6/11 RUGGEDCOM RSG920P connecting devices in multimodal

transportation networks

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RSG920P 6 G K 6 0 9 2 - 0 P S 2 . - 0 . A .
RUGGEDCOM RSG920P is a fully managed Ethernet switch with 20 non-blocking Gigabit Ethernet ports; support for 4 SFP modules and 4 PoE ports; -40 °C
to +85 °C operating temperature (fanless)
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/5 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 205
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RSG2100

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RSG2100, RSG2100P and M2100 are utility
grade, fully managed, modular Ethernet switches, specifically
designed to operate reliably in electrically harsh and climatically
demanding utility substation and industrial environments.

Benefits [P_RCM0_XX_00250P, 2, --_--]

• Its utility grade design helps with immunity against EMI and Figure 3.6/12 RUGGEDCOM RSG2100
heavy electrical surges which allows the devices to be used
in harsh electric power, transportation and industrial applica- – 19-port modular managed Ethernet switch with Gigabit
tions. uplinks
• The Build-to-order design ensures flexibility in tailoring the • RUGGEDCOM RSG2100P
device configuration to unique needs which allows for
– Modularer Managed Ethernet-Switch mit 19 Ports, Gigabit-
reduced capital expenses .
Uplinks und festen 10/100BaseTX / 802.3af-konformen PoE-
• Suitable for usage in harsh environments with the minimal fähigen Ethernet-Ports
risk of mechanical failures due to an operating temperature
from -40 °C to +85 °C without fans. • RUGGEDCOM M2100
– 19-port modular MIL-STD managed Ethernet switch with
• Dual redundant power supplies ensure a reliable and Gigabit uplinks
maintenance-free connection to power, reducing downtime
(RSG2100 only).
Application Example
Features
• Up to 3 Gigabit Ethernet ports and 16 Fast Ethernet ports -
copper and/or fiber
• 2 port modules for tremendous flexibility
• Store and forward switching
• Supports many types of fiber (multimode, single mode) with
multiple connector types (ST, MTRJ, LC, SC, SFP)
• Fully integrated, dual-redundant (optional) high-voltage and
low-voltage power supplies
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C
without the use of fans
• RSG2100P version consists of 4 fixed 10/100BaseTX 802.3af
(PoE) compliant Ethernet ports [G_RCM0_EN_00028P, 2, --_--]

• M2100 version has MIL-STD ratings Figure 3.6/13 RSTP Ring with the RUGGEDCOM RSG2100

Product Variants
3.6
• RUGGEDCOM RSG2100

206 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RSG2100

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RSG2100 6 G K 6 0 2 1 - 0 A S □
▲
|
RUGGEDCOM RSG2100NC (is not subject to export controls) 1 . - . . . .
RUGGEDCOM RSG2100 (is subject to export controls) 2 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RSG2100NC is a utility grade, fully managed Ethernet switch; up to 3-Gigabit Ethernet ports copper and/or fiber; up to 16-Fast Ethernet
ports copper and/or fiber; 2 port modules for tremendous flexibility; non-blocking, store and forward switching; supports many types of fiber (multimode,
single-mode, bi-directional single strand); long haul optics allow Gigabit distances up to 115 km; multiple connector types (ST, MTRJ, LC, SC, RJ45,
Micro-D)
RUGGEDCOM RSG2100P 6 G K 6 0 2 1 - 0 P S □
▲
|
RUGGEDCOM RSG2100PNC (is not subject to export controls) 1 . - . . . .
RUGGEDCOM RSG2100P (is subject to export controls) 2 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RSG2100P is a utility grade, Power-Over-Ethernet (PoE) enabled, fully managed, modular Ethernet switch; PoE: 4 x 10/100baseTX
802.3af compliant ports; up to 3-Gigabit Ethernet ports copper and/or fiber; up to 16-fast Ethernet ports copper and/or fiber; 2 port modules for
tremendous flexibility; non-blocking, store and forward switching; supports many types of fiber (multimode, single-mode); multiple connector types (ST,
MTRJ, LC, SC, RJ45, Micro-D)
RUGGEDCOM M2100 6 G K 6 0 2 1 - 0 M S □
▲
|
RUGGEDCOM M2100NC (is not subject to export controls) 1 . - . . . .
RUGGEDCOM M2100 (is subject to export controls) 2 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM M2100 is a MIL-STD hardened, fully managed, modular, Ethernet switch; up to 3-Gigabit Ethernet ports copper and/or fiber; up to
16-fast Ethernet ports copper and/or fiber; 2 port modules for tremendous flexibility; non-blocking, store and forward switching; supports many types of
fiber (multimode, single-mode, bi-directional single strand); long haul optics allow Gigabit distances up to 115 km; multiple connector types (ST, MTRJ,
LC, SC, RJ45, Micro-D)
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/6 Selection and Ordering Data

3.6

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 207
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RSG2488

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RSG2488 is utility grade, field upgradable,
non-blocking 28 Gigabit port layer 2 switch with hot-swappable
dual redundant power supplies.

Benefits
• Suitable for usage in electric power, transportation and indus-
trial applications due to a utility grade design with immunity
against EMI and heavy electrical surges.
• Field replaceable modules and build-to-order design ensures
seamless servicing and tremendous flexibility in tailoring the
device configuration, reduces both upfront capital expenses
and maintenance costs.
• Future-proof due to support of modern IEEE 1588 time
synchronization features and modular design which allows
the device to accommodate network growth and technology
changes.
• Suitable for usage in harsh environments with minimal risk
of failures due to an operating temperature from -40 °C to [P_RCM0_XX_00038P, 1, --_--]

+85 °C without fans. Figure 3.6/14 RUGGEDCOM RSG2488

• Hot swappable, cable-free dual redundant smart power
supplies ensure a convenient, reliable and maintenance free Product Variants
connection to power, reducing MTTR and therefore mainte- • RUGGEDCOM RSG2488
nance expense.
– 28-port modular managed Gigabit switch
Features
• Up to 28 Gigabit Ethernet ports – copper and/or fiber in 19" Application Example
1U rack-mount
• Fully modular with 2/4 port field-replaceable media modules
for tremendous flexibility
• Support for media modules with 100FX or 1000SX fiber-optic
ports
• Optional PTP Module provides GPS time source and IRIG-B
in/out
• Supports IEEE 1588 (PTP), SNTP, IRIG-B. It can convert time
between all of these formats
• Non-blocking, store and forward switching
3.6 • Supports many types of fiber (multimode, single-mode, bidir-
ectional single strand) with multiple connector types (LC, SC, [G_RCM0_00013P, 2, --_--]
SFP, ST)
Figure 3.6/15 IEEE 1588v2 time synchronization with RUGGEDCOM
• Hot swappable, dual-redundant (optional), load sharing, high- RSG2488 as Master Clock/Boundary Clock and Trans-
voltage and low-voltage power supplies parent Clock

• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C bis +85 °C;

without the use of fans

208 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RSG2488

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RSG2488 6 G K 6 0 2 4 - 8 G S 2 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RSG2488NC is a rugged rated fully managed Ethernet switch; up to 28 non-blocking ports; configured as: 10/100/1000TX copper,
100FX or 1000SX fiber; support six 4-port modules plus two 2-port modules; mixture of fiber-optic or copper Gigabit ports with up to 28 Gig Ethernet
ports; –40 °C to +85 °C operating temperature (fanless)
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/7 Selection and Ordering Data

3.6

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 209
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RST2000 Series

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RST2228 and RST2228P are high port density
field modular 19“ Layer 2 rack switches with 10 Gbit/s uplinks
and support for IEEE 1588. The RST2228P supports power-over-
Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3at/bt.

Benefits
• Future-proof Ethernet switch with high port density to mini-
mize capital expense by reducing the number of layer 2
switching devices needed.
• Field-modular media modules with RJ45, FastConnect, Power-
over-Ethernet, LC & SFP interfaces and build-to-order design
ensures seamless servicing and tremendous flexibility in
tailoring the device configuration resulting in lower operating
expenses.
• Suitable for usage in electric power, transportation and oil &
gas applications due to a utility grade design with immunity
against EMI and heavy electrical surges.
• Future-proof due to support of modern IEEE 1588 time
[RST2228, 1, --_--]

synchronization features and modular construction that Figure 3.6/16 RUGGEDCOM RST2228 and RUGGEDCOM RST2228P
allows network traffic growth to be accommodated by
changing only the modules. Application Example

• Suitable for usage in harsh environments with the minimal

risk of mechanical failures due to an operating temperature
from -40 °C to +85 °C without fans.
Features
• Up to 28 Ethernet ports – 4 x 1000BASE-X/10GBASE-X inte-
grated uplinks and up to 24 x 10/100/1000BASE-X ports
• 6 slots for 4-port Media Modules for tremendous flexibility
• Media modules with 4 x 10/100/1000 Mbit/s RJ45, Siemens
FastConnect cabling system support, 100/1000 Mbit/s SFP
interfaces and 100FX LC interfaces supporting multimode
fiber optics up to 2 kilometers
• Support for up to 24 Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) interfaces [G_RCM0_XX_00174P, 2, --_--]
according to IEEE 802.3at/bt (draft) with up to 60W/port and a
Figure 3.6/17 RUGGEDCOM RST2228 with IEEE 1588 V2 and hardware
total power budget of 500W distributed over all PoE ports
time stamping
3.6 • Supports precision timing according to IEEE 1588 (transparent
clock)
• Non-blocking, store and forward switching
• Dual-redundant (optional), load sharing power supplies
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C;
without the use of fans

Product Variants
• RUGGEDCOM RST2228
– 28-port field modular managed layer 2 Gbit/s switch with
10 Gbit/s uplinks supporting IEEE 1588
• RUGGEDCOM RST2228P
– 28-port field modular managed layer 2 Gbit/s switch with
10 Gbit/s uplinks supporting IEEE 1588 and Power-over-
Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3at/bt
[G_RCM0_XX_00239P, 1, --_--]

Figure 3.6/18 RUGGEDCOM RST2228 with the RNA module - Complete

redundancy protection for mission-critical GOOSE

210 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RST2000 Series

messages and control commands, to avoid single points

of failure

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RST2228 6 G K 6 2 2 2 - 6 A B . . - . . . .
RUGGEDCOM RST2228 is a field modular, fully managed Layer 2 Ethernet switch with 4 x 1/10 Gbit/s and 24 x 100/1000 Mbit/s non-blocking ethernet
ports. Support for up to six 4-port media modules with RJ45, SFP or LC interfaces; -40 °C ... +85 °C operating temperature (fanless)
RUGGEDCOM RST2228P 6 G K 6 2 2 2 - 6 P B . . - . . . .
RUGGEDCOM RST2228P is a field modular, fully managed Layer 2 Ethernet switch with 4 x 1/10 Gbit/s and 24 x 100/1000 Mbit/s non-blocking ethernet
ports supporting Power-over-Ethernet. Support for up to six 4-port media modules with RJ45, SFP or LC interfaces; -40 °C ...+85 °C operating temperature
(fanless)
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/8 Selection and Ordering Data

3.6

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 211
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RST2000 Series

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RST2428P is a 28-port, field modular 19
inch Layer 2 rack switch with 10 Gbps uplinks, compliant with
PTP IEEE 1588v2. It supports a suite of basic L3 routing proto-
cols; including static unicast and multicast(54) routing, OSPFv2,
VVRPV3, and more, imparting greater flexibility over standard
Layer 2 switches for modern digital substation networks. [RST2428P, 1, --_--]

Figure 3.6/19 RUGGEDCOM RST2428P

Benefits
• Future-proof Ethernet switching platform with high port • Universal power supply options
density minimizes capital expenses by reducing the number – Hot swappable dual redundant power supplies
of devices on the network.
– Universal high-voltage range: 88 – 300 V DC or 85 – 264 V
• Field-modular media modules with RJ45, FastConnect, Power- AC
over-Ethernet, SFP interfaces and build-to-order design – Screw or pluggable terminal blocks for reliable, mainte-
ensures seamless servicing and tremendous flexibility in nance-free connections
tailoring the device configuration resulting in lower operating
– CSA/UL 62368 safety approved to +85 °C
expenses.
– Low-voltage power supply options 12 V DC (10.5 – 15 V
• Its utility grade design helps with immunity against EMI and DC), 24 V DC (13 – 36 V DC), and 48 V DC (36 – 72 V DC)
heavy electrical surges which allows the devices to be used
in harsh electric power, transportation and industrial applica- • Power-over-Ethernet (PoE)
tions. – Up to 24 PoE ports supporting IEEE 802.3at/bt/af and 500 W
shared power budget per switch at up to 60 W per port
• Support of modern IEEE 1588 time synchronization features
and modular construction allows network traffic growth to be
accommodated by changing only the modules. Application Example

• Suitable for usage in harsh environments with the minimal

risk of failure due to an operating temperature from -40 °C to
+85 °C without the use of fans.
Features
• Ethernet ports
– 4 x 1000BASE-X/10GBASE-X uplink, 4 x 1000BASE-X/
10GBASE-X via SFP+ module
– Up to 24 x 10/100/1000BASE-X ports
– 4-port line modules for added flexibility
– Industry standard connectors: RJ45, LC, and SFP
– Copper, single, and multi-mode optical transceivers
• Engineered for modern digital substation applications
– Precision timing: IEEE 1588v2 with hardware time stamping
3.6
and support for transparent clock (TC), boundary clock
(BC), ordinary clock (OC), and grand master clock (GMC)54
modes
– Redundancy protocols: RSTP, eRSTP, MSTP, STP, MRP, HSR/
PRP54 and link aggregation
• RUGGEDCOM CLP [G_RCM0_XX_00273P, 1, --_--]
– Removable storage media port to easily save and reuse all
configuration data Figure 3.6/20 High-density LAN switch for modern digital substation
applications

212 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 2–RUGGEDCOM RST2000 Series

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RST2428 6 G K 6 2 4 2 - 6 P A . . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RST2428P is a field modular, fully managed Layer 2 Ethernet switch with up to 28 non-blocking interfaces. Standard four, expandable
to eight, 1/10 Gbps SFP+ uplink ports. Supports up to six 4-port hot swappable media modules with RJ45, SFP/SFP+, LC, FC, and PoE interfaces.
Configurations allow for up to twenty-four 100/1000 Mbps, or four 1/10 Gbps SFP+ and up to twenty 100/1000 Mbps ports. Dual redundant hot
swappable power supply modules. Support for Power-over-Ethernet and IEEE 1588. Operating temperature of -40 to +85 °C (fanless).
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/9 Selection and Ordering Data

3.6

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 213
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 3–RUGGEDCOM RX1500 Family

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RX1500 product family is a utility grade
multi-service platform available in various 19” rack-mounted
and DIN/panel mounted form factors. The RUGGEDCOM RX1500
family’s design using hot swappable line modules and power
supplies, allows customers to select among WAN, serial and
Ethernet options even after the product has been deployed in
the network. This, along with extended temperature range oper-
ation and enhanced immunity to surge voltages, electrostatic
discharge and electromagnetic interference, make it ideally
suited for electric power utilities, industrial control networks,
railways and traffic control systems.

Benefits [P_RCM_XX, 2, --_--]

• Enables integration of network functions with universal Figure 3.6/21 RUGGEDCOM RX1500 Model Series
connectivity: Ethernet, 2G, 3G, 4G/LTE with dual-SIM support.
– Up to 4 ports Gigabit Ethernet
• Provides fastest time to repair and re-configure, with its
modular, hot-swappable design. – Up to 12 serial ports
• Universal networking feature-set, including security, routing, • RUGGEDCOM RX1512:
and switching, all in in one platform. – Up to 12 ports 100FX
• One design for all installations: Five form factors for different – Up to 12 ports10/100TX
installation environments. – Up to 6 ports10FL/100SX
• Seamless integration with RUGGEDCOM APE, providing – Up to 4 ports Gigabit Ethernet
advanced additional network security and processing. – Up to 12 serial ports
Features • Power supply
• General device features: – RUGGEDCOM RX1524, RX1510:
– Hot swappable, field replaceable line modules and power – Modular dual and hot-swappable power supply
supplies – Input voltage range of DC 24 V, DC 48 V, DC 88 V to
• RUGGEDCOM RX1524: 300 V and AC 85 V to 264 V for worldwide operability
– Up to 24 ports 100FX – RUGGEDCOM RX1536, RX1511:
– Up to 24 ports 10/100TX – Modular single power Supply
– Up to 12 ports 10FL/100SX – Input voltage range of DC 24 V, DC 48 V, DC 88 V to
– Up to 8 ports Gigabit Ethernet 300 V and AC 85 V to 264 V for for worldwide operability
– Up to 24 serial ports – RUGGEDCOM RX1512:
– Up to 2 APE1808 application hosting modules – Input voltage range of DC 11 V to 72 V
– - Fully integrated power supply (no external adaptors)
• RUGGEDCOM RX1536: – - CSA/UL 60950 safety approved to +85 °C on all units
3.6 – Up to 36 ports 100FX
– Up to 36 ports 10/100TX • Cyber-Security
– Up to 18 ports 10FL/100SX – Integrated router/firewall/VPN
– Up to 4 ports Gigabit Ethernet – Stateful firewall with NAT
– Up to 36 serial ports – Full IPsec Virtual Private Networking
– Up to 2 APE1808 application hosting modules – VPN with 3DES, AES128, AES256 support
– RUGGEDCOM CROSSBOW for NERC CIP Cyber Security
• RUGGEDCOM RX1510: compliance
– Up to 24 ports 100FX
– RADIUS centralized password management
– Up to 24 ports 10/100TX
– Multi-level passwords
– Up to 12 ports 10FL/100SX
– SSH/SSL encryption
– Up to 8 ports Gigabit Ethernet
– Enable/disable ports, MAC based port security
– Up to 24 serial ports
– VLAN (802.1Q) to segregate and secure network traffic
• RUGGEDCOM RX1511: – SNMPv3 encrypted authentication and access security
– Up to 12 ports 100FX – Optional Check Point Firewall and IPS (See RUGGEDCOM
– Up to 12 ports 10/100TX APE Module)
– Up to 6 ports10FL/100SX

214 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 3–RUGGEDCOM RX1500 Family

• WAN Ports and Protocol – Modular (up to 6 modules) utility grade 19” rack-mountable
– Frame relay (RFC 1490 or RFC 1294), PPP, PPPoE, and GPS Multi-Service Platform with enhanced IPsec performance
– PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP, and MS-CHAP2 authentication • RUGGEDCOM RX1510
– GOOSE messaging Support – Modular utility grade layer 2 and layer 3 switch and router
– Cellular, GSM, Edge, HSPA, 2G, 3G, and 4G/LTE with duel- in a compact form factor
SIM support • RUGGEDCOM RX1511
– Up to 4 ports T1/E1 (channelized) (Not compatible with – Modular utility grade layer 2 and layer 3 switch and router
RX1524 and RX1536) in a compact form factor
– Up to 4 ports E1 75 Ohms via BNC (Not compatible with • RUGGEDCOM RX1512
RX1524 and RX1536)
– Modular utility grade layer 2 and layer 3 switch and router
• IP in a compact form factor
– Routing: OSPF, BGP, IS-IS, RIPv
– VRRP redundancy with one-second failover Application Examples
– Traffic and access control
– NTP Client and Server
– IP Multicast Routing
– DCHP Agent (Option 82 Capable)
– MPLS edge routing
• Reliability in harsh environments
– Immunity to EMI and high voltage electrical transients
– Meets IEEE 1613 (electric utility substations)
– Exceeds IEC 61850-3 (electric utility substations)
– Exceeds IEC 61800-3 (variable speed drive systems)
– Exceeds IEC 61000-6-2 (generic industrial environment)
– Exceeds NEMA TS-2 (traffic control equipment)
– 40 °C to +85 °C operating temperature (no fans)
– Fail-safe output relay: for critical failure or error alarming
– 18 AWG galvanized steel enclosure and 19" rack-mount
adapter
[G_RCM0_EN_00033P, 3, --_--]
Product Variants
Figure 3.6/22 Use case: Substation all-in-one switch/router/gateway
• RUGGEDCOM RX1524
– Modular (up to 4 modules) utility grade 19” rack-mountable
Multi-Service Platform with enhanced IPsec performance
and dual redundant power supply modules
• RUGGEDCOM RX1536 3.6

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 215
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 3–RUGGEDCOM RX1500 Family

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RX1524 6 G K 6 0 1 5 - 0 C M 2 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RX1524 is a universal layer-2 and layer-3 switch and router with 2 x power supply (Hot-Swap capable); line modules that can be
replaced on-site, including the RUGGEDCOM APE1808 module, which can include third party applications; up to 24x 100FX ports; up to 24x 10/100TX
ports; up to 8x Gigabit Ethernet ports; up to 12x 10FL/100SX ports, mobile communications (EVDO/HSPA/4G/LTE); up to 24x RS232/422/485
RUGGEDCOM RX1536 6 G K 6 0 1 5 - 0 D M 2 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RX1536 is a universal layer-2 and layer-3 switch and router with 1 x power supply; line modules that can be replaced on-site, including
the RUGGEDCOM APE1808 module, which can include third party applications; up to 36x 100FX ports; up to 36x 10/100TX ports; up to 4x Gigabit
Ethernet ports; up to 18x 10FL/100SX ports, mobile communications (EVDO/HSPA/4G/LTE); up to 36x RS232/422/485
RUGGEDCOM RX1510 6 G K 6 0 1 5 - 1 A M 2 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RX1500 series includes switches and routers for layer-2 and layer-3 for use in the energy supply area. 2x power-supply units (Hot-Swap
capable); line modules that can be replaced on-site; up to 24x 100FX ports; up to 24x 10/100TX ports; up to 8x Gigabit Ethernet ports; up to 12x
10FL/100SX ports, up to 4x T1/E1 ports; mobile communications (EVDO/HSPA/4G/LTE); up to 24x RS232/422/485 ports
RUGGEDCOM RX1511 6 G K 6 0 1 5 - 1 B M 2 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RX1511 series includes compact layer-2 and layer-3 switches and routers for use in the energy supply area. 1x power-supply unit; line
modules that can be replaced on-site; up to 12x 10/100BaseTX ports; up to 4x Gigabit Ethernet ports; up to 12x 100BaseFX ports; up to 6x 10FL/100SX
ports; pluggable fiberglass port; up to 4x T1/E1 ports; mobile communications (EVDO/HSPA/4G/LTE); up to 12x RS232/422/485 ports
RUGGEDCOM RX1512 6 G K 6 0 1 5 - 1 C M 2 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RX1512 series includes compact layer-2 and layer-3 switches and routers for use in the energy supply area. 1x fixed power-supply unit,
11 to 72 VDC; line modules that can be replaced on-site; up to 12x 10/100BaseTX ports; up to 4x Gigabit ports; up to 12x 100BaseFX ports; up to 6x
10FL/100SX ports; pluggable fiberglass port; up to 4x T1/E1 ports; mobile communications (EVDO/HSPA/4G/LTE); up to 12x RS232/422/485 ports
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/10 Selection and Ordering Data

3.6

216 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 3–RUGGEDCOM RX5000/MX5000

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RX5000 and MX5000 are high-density
Ethernet routing and switching platforms designed to operate
in harsh environments. These integrated switch and routers
can withstand high levels of electromagnetic interference, radio
frequency interference, and a wide temperature range of –40
°C to +85 °C. This platform is designed to meet the challenging
climatic and environmental demands found in utility, industrial,
and military grade networks.

Benefits
• RUGGEDCOM RX5000:
– Up to two 10 Gigabit uplinks
– Up to 26 Gigabit ports
– Up to 96 10/100TX copper ports
– Up to 48 100FX optical ports
– Long-reach optics for distances up to 90 km
• RUGGEDCOM MX5000: [P_RX5000, 1, --_--]
– Up to 48x 10/100TX MicroD copper ports
Figure 3.6/23 RUGGEDCOM RX5000 and RUGGEDCOM MX5000
– Up to 48x 100FX optical ports
– Up to 2 Gigabit Ethernet ports – Rugged enclosure with modular high-density routing and
– Long-reach optics for distances up to 90 km switching platform, designed to operate in the most
• Power supplies demanding environments
– Modular, redundant power supplies
Application Example
– Universal high voltage ranges: DC 88 V to 300 V or AC 85 V
to 264 V
• Reliability in harsh environments
– Immunity to EMI and high voltage electrical transients
– Meets IEEE1613 (electric utility substations)
– Exceeds IEC61850-3 (electric utility substations)
– Exceeds IEC61800-3 (variable speed drive Systems)
– Exceeds IEC61000-6-2 (generic industrial Environment)
– Exceeds NEMA TS-2 (traffic control Equipment)
• -40 °C to +85 °C operating temperature (no fans)
• Conformal coated printed circuit boards (optional) [G_RCM0_00037P, 3, en_US]
3.6
Product Variants Figure 3.6/24 The RUGGEDCOM Multi-service platform is used to
connect IEDs with a Wide Area Network (WAN)
• RUGGEDCOM RX5000
– Modular high-density routing and switching platform
• RUGGEDCOM MX5000
– Modular high-density routing and switching platform,
designed to operate in the most demanding environments
• RUGGEDCOM MX5000RE

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 217
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Ethernet Switches – Layer 3–RUGGEDCOM RX5000/MX5000

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RX5000 6 G K 6 0 5 0 - 0 A M 2 . - . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RX5000 is a high-density routing and switching platform. Up to 96 10/100TX + 2 10/100/1000T copper ports; up to 48 100FX optical
ports; up to 2 Gigabit Ethernet ports; long-reach optics for distances of up to 90 km
RUGGEDCOM RM5000 6 G K 6 0 5 0 - 0 M M 2 . - . . . 1
The RUGGEDCOM MX5000 is an MIL-STD high-density routing and switching platform, designed to operate in the most demanding environments. The
RUGGEDCOM MX5000 can withstand high levels of electromagnetic interference, radio frequency interference and a wide temperature range of -40 ºC
to +85 ºC; up to 48 10/100TX MicroD Up to 96 10/100TX RJ45 ports; up to 48 100FX optical ports; up to 2 Gigabit Ethernet ports; long-reach optics for
distances of up to 90 km
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.6/11 Selection and Ordering Data

3.6

218 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Redundancy Box (HSR/PRP) – RUGGEDCOM RS900R Series

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RSG907R and RSG909R are compact Gigabit
IEEE 1588 compatible Ethernet switches supporting High Avail-
ability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) and Parallel Redundancy
Protocol (PRP) according to IEC 62439-3. The RSG907R supports
3 RNA(Redundant Network Access) ports (SFP) and 4 SAN
(Singly Attached Node) fiber optic ports (LC). The RSG909R
supports 3 RNA ports (SFP) and 6 SAN copper ports (RJ45).

Benefits
• Avoid revenue loss by mitigating the risk of communication
disruptions and downtime with a redundant fault tolerant
network supporting HSR and/o PRP.
• SFP ports allow for in-field modification at any time allowing
deployment flexibility for varying customer needs.
• The redundant power supply inputs allow for continuous safe
and reliable operations even during single power supply fail-
ures, diminishing the risk of revenue and data loss
• Reduce maintenance costs by combining precision timing [P_RSG900R, 1, --_--]

information and data communications onto a single network Figure 3.7/1 RUGGEDCOM RSG907R
due to the support of IEEE 1588.
Features – A 9 port compact high density switch with 3 RNA ports
supporting HSR and PRP according to IEC 62439-3 and
• Support of HSR and PRP according to IEC 62439-3 6 SAN copper ports.
• 3 x RNA Ethernet ports according to IEC 62439-3 (1000BASE-
X) Application Example
• 4 Fiber optic (100BASE-FX, LC) or 6 Copper
(10/100/1000BASE-X, RJ45) SAN ports
• Industry standard connectors: SFP, LC and/or RJ45
• Fully integrated power supply with redundant power input
– Universal high-voltage dual inputs: AC 100 V to 240 V /
DC 100 V to 300 V
– Universal low-voltage DC dual inputs with nominal
voltages: DC 12 V, DC 24 V, DC 48 V (DC 10 V to 60 V)
• Supports precision timing according to IEEE 1588 (transparent
clock, ordinary clock)
• Non-blocking store and forward switching [G_RCM0_00186P, 3, en_US]
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C; Figure 3.7/2 Two RUGGEDCOM RSG907R / RSG909R in each HSR bay
without the use of fans
ring for redundant coupling with PRP station level LANs 3.7

Product Variants
• RUGGEDCOM RSG907R
– A 7-port compact high density switch with 3 RNA ports
supporting HSR and PRP according to IEC 62439-3 and
4 SAN fiber optic ports.
• RUGGEDCOM RSG909R

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 219
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Redundancy Box (HSR/PRP) – RUGGEDCOM RS900R Series

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RSG907R 6 G K 6 4 9 0 - 7 R B . . - . . . .
RUGGEDCOM RSG907R is a 7 port industrially hardened, fully managed Ethernet switch featuring an integrated HSR/PRP RedBox for use in harsh industrial
environments. The product has 3x 1 Gbit/s SFP slots and 4x 100 Mbit/s multimode LC ports (max 2 km). -40 °C to +85 °C operating temperature (fanless).
RUGGEDCOM RSG909R 6 G K 6 4 9 8 - 0 R B . . - . . . .
RUGGEDCOM RSG909R is a 9 port industrially hardened, fully managed Ethernet switch featuring an integrated HSR/PRP RedBox for use in harsh industrial
environments. The product has 3x 1 Gbit/s SFP slots and 6x 10/100/1000 Mbit/s RJ45 Ethernet ports. -40 °C to +85 °C operating temperature (fanless).
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.7/1 Selection and Ordering Data

3.7

220 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Multiprotocol Router – RUGGEDCOM RX1400

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RX1400, thanks to its compact form factor
and multi-function capability, offers a cost saving solution for
large scale deployments by avoiding the need for multiple
devices to achieve the needed interface, switching, routing and
application hosting capabilities.

Benefits
• CAPEX avoidance: through using a single box solution to
replace multiple functionalities such as an L2 switch, L3
router, serial server, WLAN Access Point, WLAN client, LTE/3G
modem, Fiber optic converter, firewall, MPLS end point, and
GPS location devices.
• OPEX avoidance: by having multiple functionalities housed in
a single box, training and operating expenses are reduced.
• CAPEX avoidance: the LTE (4G) Interface with Rollback to
3G provides a high bandwidth, reliable interface that allows
customers to avoid/defer expensive fiber installations.
• Its utility grade design helps with immunity against EMI and [P_RCM0_XX_00327P, 1, --_--]

heavy electrical surges which allows the devices to be used Figure 3.8/1 RUGGEDCOM RX1400
in harsh electric power, transportation and industrial applica-
tions. • WAN-Protocols
• Suitable for usage in harsh environments with the minimal – Frame relay RFC 1490 or RFC 1294
risk of failure due to an operating temperature from -40 °C to – PPP RFC 1661, 1332, 1321, 1334, PAP,
+85 °C without the use of fans. CHAP Authentication
Features – GOOSE messaging Support
• 4 copper Fast Ethernet ports and 2 Gigabit or 100Mbps Small • IP
Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) slots – Routing: OSPF, BGP, IS-IS, RIPv
• Support for multimode and single-mode SFPs for distances – VRRP redundancy with one-second failover
ranging from 500 meters up to 100 km – NTP Client and Server
• Optional GPS input available – Traffic and access control
• Optional 3G / LTE-Modems for Europe, North America and – IP Multicast Routing
Asia Pacific – DCHP Agent (Option 82 Capable)
• Fully integrated, DC +/-12 V to 24 V, DC +/- 48 V or HI power – MPLS edge routing
supplies
• Available WLAN option (WiFi Access Point or Client) with Product Variants
variety of international wireless approvals • RUGGEDCOM RX1400
• Reliable operation at ambient temperatures from -40 °C to – Small form-factor industrial Ethernet-switch and TCP/IP
+85 °C without the use of fans router with LTE and fiber optic WAN options
• Two antenna connectors for reliable LTE or 3G cellular
connections 3.8

• Serial interface to support backward compatibility with

deployed devices
– Cybersecurity
– Integrated router/firewall/VPN
– Stateful firewall with NAT
– Full IPSec Virtual Private Networking
– VPN with 3DES, AES128, AES256 support
– RADIUS centralized password management
– Multi-level passwords
– SH/SSL encryption
– VLAN (802.1Q) to segregate and secure network traffic
– SNMPv3 encrypted authentication and access security

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 221
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Multiprotocol Router – RUGGEDCOM RX1400

Application Examples

[G_RCM0_00046P, 3, en_US]

Figure 3.8/4 Using the serial ports of the RUGGEDCOM RX1400 to

connect to serial gauges enables communication with the
Control Center via fiber optics and a cellular network

[G_RCM0_EN_00052P, 2, --_--]

Figure 3.8/2 The RUGGEDCOM RX1400 with LTE-support provides a

high bandwidth connection for the large amounts of
Smart Meter data

[G_RCM0_00054P, 3, en_US]

Figure 3.8/3 Redundant connection to end-devices used in conjunction

with signaling and monitoring when wireline backhaul is
combined with cellular connectivity. Serial ports ensure
legacy device support

3.8
Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RX1400 6 G K 6 0 1 4 - 0 A M 2 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RX1400 is a rugged small form-factor industrial Ethernet-switch and TCP/IP router with 4 copper Gigabit Ethernet ports, 2 DB9 serial
ports and 2 SFP-Slots. Optionally equipped with LTE modem, WLAN AP or Client, SFPs and GPS/GLONASS support
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.8/1 Selection and Ordering Data

222 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Media Converter – RUGGEDCOM RMC40

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RMC40 is a 4-port unmanaged Ethernet
switch that provides both copper-to-fiber media conversion
as well as 10Mbps to 100Mbps speed conversion. The
RUGGEDCOM RMC40 can be used in place of traditional copper-
to-fiber media converters with the added ability to convert
speed from 10Mbps to 100Mbps. With dual fiber optics, daisy
chaining of Ethernet enabled devices can easily be accom-
plished. For the most demanding of systems, a dual-redundant
fiber optic connection can be created for a device that only
offers a single 10/100TX port.

Benefits
• IEC 61850-3 and IEEE 1613 standards compliant to support
communications in mission critical verticals such as electric
power substations.
• Saving CAPEX thanks to the media conversion capability
between existing infrastructures.
• Reduced OPEX due to simple plug and play unmanaged opera- [P_RCM0_XX_00089P, 1, --_--]
tions.
Figure 3.9/1 RUGGEDCOM RMC40
• Product designed to address harsh environments with
extended temperature ranges. – 4-port Ethernet media and speed converter
• No need for external power supply, reducing CAPEX for world-
wide applications. Application Example
Features
• Multiple port configurations available
– 2x 10/100TX-Port + 1x 100FX-Port (SC/ST)
– 2x 10/100TX-Port + 2x 100FX-Port (MTRJ/LC)
– 4x 10/100TX-Ports
• Multimode and single-mode optical transceivers including
long-haul optics supporting distances from 20 km to 90 km.
• Industry standard fiber-optic connectors: LC, SC, ST, MTRJ
• Non-blocking, store and forward switching with only 10 µs
latency for high network throughput
• DC 24 V, DC 48 V, or high-power (DC 88 V to 300 V/ AC 85 V
to 264 V) options for worldwide operability
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C
without the use of fans [G_RCM0_xx_00010P, 2, --_--]

Figure 3.9/2 The RUGGEDCOM RMC40 is used to provide speed conver-

Product Variants sion at the device level.
• RUGGEDCOM RMC40
3.9

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RMC40 6 G K 6 0 0 4 - 0 A C 0 . - . . . .
The RUGGEDCOM RMC40 is a 4-port unmanaged Ethernet switch that provides both copper-to-fiber media conversion as well as 10 Mbps to 100 Mbps
speed conversion; configurations: 2 ports 10/100TX + 1 port 100FX (SC/ST); 2 ports 10/100TX + 2 ports 100FX (MTRJ/LC) or 4 ports 10/100TX
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.9/1 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 223
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Media Converter – RUGGEDCOM RMC8388

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RMC8388 is a time converter for use in
the energy supply area, which has been specially developed
for operation in electrically hostile and climatically challenging
environments. RUGGEDCOM RMC8388 offers time conversion
between IEEE 1588 and IRIG-B. The network-based configura-
tion is simple and intuitive, either via the integrated web server
or subnet server.
The RUGGEDCOM RMC8388 offers the following time conver-
sion modes:
• IEEE 1588 V2 -> IRIG-B TTL/PPS, IRIG-B AM
• IRIG-B AM -> IEEE 1588 V2
This product helps reduce cabling and maintenance costs, by
enabling customers to migrate to an Ethernet-based timing
distribution; this modernizes the data and timing network
by including IRIG-B-based source and target devices. It is
compatible with existing RUGGEDCOM 1588 products, such
as RSG2488, RST2228, RSG910C, RSG909R, RSG908C and
RSG907R. [P_RMC8000, 1, --_--]

Figure 3.9/3 RUGGEDCOM RMC8388

Benefits
– Utility-grade time converter
• Avoidance of capital expenditure by enabling the continued
use of non-1588-compatible IEDs after the transition to a
1588-based timing solution. Application Example

• Built-in reliability in hostile environments reduces the demand

for expensive maintenance.
• The elimination of dedicated timing networks reduces mainte-
nance costs and increases timing availability.
• Shared operating system (ROS) with other RUGGEDCOM
Layer-2 products reduces or eliminates the need to retrain
technical personnel.
• No external power supply needed, therefore lower capital
expenditure for global applications.
Product features
• Cyber security functions for communication protection
• Supported IRIG-B formats: B000 – B007, B120 – B127
• Ethernet port options 100TX (RJ45) or 100FX (LC)
• PPx: Enables a configurable PPS timer to trigger a signal once
every x seconds, up to once per 24 hours
• Flexible power supply options with 24 VDC, 48 VDC or high
voltage (88 VDC to 300 VDC / 85 VAC to 264 VAC) for global
3.9 operation
• For operating temperatures of -40°C to +85°C; fan-free opera-
tion [G_RCM0_XX_00071P, 1, --_--]

• Various management interfaces: Web-based, Telnet, Figure 3.9/4 The RUGGEDCOM RMC8388 enables legacy IEDs to
connect to a modern Ethernet network supporting IEEE
command lines
1588v2 without the need for a separate PPS time synchro-
nization network.
Product Variants
• RUGGEDCOM RMC8388

224 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Media Converter – RUGGEDCOM RMC8388

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RMC8388 6 G K 6 0 8 3 - 8 A C 2 . - . . . .
Accessories
Console Cable Cable DB-9 Female to Male, 2 m 6 G K 6 0 0 0 - 8 D U 0 0 - 0 A A 0
Power Cable w/o lugs Power cable with NEMA 5-15P plug without 6 G K 6 0 0 0 - 8 B B 0 0 - 0 A A 0
lugs for pluggable terminal blocks, 6 ft.
DIN Mounting Kit 6 G K 6 0 0 0 - 8 H U 0 0 - 0 A A 0
Panel Mounting Kit 6 G K 6 0 0 0 - 8 M G 0 0 - 0 A A 0
RJ45 Dust Covers Kit 8 RJ45 Dust covers for RUGGEDCOM Products 6 G K 6 0 0 0 - 8 H T 0 1 - 0 C A 0
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.9/2 Selection and Ordering Data

3.9

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 225
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Serial Device Servers – RUGGEDCOM RS400

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RS400 is a utility grade, serial device server
with an integrated, fully managed Ethernet switch, designed to
operate reliably in electrically harsh and climatically demanding
environments. Featuring an integrated 4-port serial server, a
4-port managed Ethernet switch, and an optional V.90 modem,
the RUGGEDCOM RS400 is able to interconnect multiple types of
intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) that have different methods
of communication. Using the RUGGEDCOM RS400 results in
fewer connectivity devices, reducing overall system costs, and
also extends the useful life of existing legacy IEDs, minimizing
capital expenditure for new equipment.

Benefits
• Reduced CAPEX resulting from fewer connectivity devices to
be deployed.
• Protected CAPEX due to extended useful life of legacy IEDs
when transitioning to Ethernet based communications.
• Managed switch supports features to support a full array [P_RCM0_XX_00103P, 1, --_--]
of intelligent functionality for high network availability and
Figure 3.10/1 RUGGEDCOM RS400
manageability.
• Product designed to address harsh environments with Application example
extended temperature ranges.
• No need for external power supply, reducing CAPEX for world-
wide applications with HI and LO options.
Features
• Fully compliant EIA/TIA RS485, RS422, RS232 serial ports
(software selectable)
• DB9-, RJ45-, Phoenix style connectors
• Integrated Ethernet switch – up to 4 ports
• 10/100BaseTX, 10BaseFL, 100BaseFX options
• Transmit serial data over an IP network
• Non-blocking, store and forward switching
• DC 24 V, DC 48 V, or high-power (DC 88 V to 300 V/ AC 85 V
to 264 V) options for worldwide operability
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C
without the use of fans
[G_RCM0_00009P, 3, en_US]

Product Variants Figure 3.10/2 Intelligent Traffic Systems - wayside infrastructure using
the RUGGEDCOM RS400 to connect legacy devices to an
• RUGGEDCOM RS400 Ethernet infrastructure
– Serial device server with integrated fully managed Ethernet
switch with 256-bit encryption

3.10

226 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Serial Device Servers – RUGGEDCOM RS400

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RS400 6 G K 6 0 4 0 - 0 A T 2 . - 0 . A .
The RUGGEDCOM RS400 is a utility grade, serial device server with an integrated, fully managed, Ethernet switch, designed to operate reliably in
electrically harsh and climatically demanding environments; 4 port serial server, 4 port managed Ethernet switch and an optional V.90 modem
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.10/1 Selection and Ordering Data

3.10

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 227
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Serial Device Servers – RUGGEDCOM RS910

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RS910 is a utility grade, serial device server
with an integrated, fully managed Ethernet switch, designed to
operate reliably in electrically harsh and climatically demanding
environments. The RUGGEDCOM RS910 is able to interconnect
multiple types of intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) that have
different methods of communication. Using the RUGGEDCOM
RS910 results in fewer connectivity devices, reducing overall
system costs, and also extends the useful life of existing legacy
IEDs, minimizing capital expenditure for new equipment.

Benefits
• Reduced CAPEX resulting from fewer connectivity devices to
be deployed.
• CAPEX avoidance due to extending useful life of legacy IEDs
while transitioning to an Ethernet based communications
network.
• Managed switch features support a full array of intelligent
functionality for high network availability and manageability.
• Product designed to address harsh environments with
extended temperature ranges.
• No need for external power supply, reducing CAPEX for world- [P_RS910, 2, --_--]

wide applications with HI and LO options.

Figure 3.10/3 RUGGEDCOM RS910
Features
• Serial device server with 2 serial port interfaces RS485/RS422/ Application Example
RS232 (DB9 or RJ45 connectors)
• Optional fiber serial interface with ST connectors
• Support for Modbus TCP, DNP3, TIN serial protocols
• Integrated managed Ethernet switch – up to 3 ports, fiber
and/or copper
• Supports many types of fiber (multimode, single-mode) with
multiple connector types (ST, MTRJ, LC, SC)
• Enables transmitting serial data over an IP network
• DC 24 V, DC 48 V, or high-power (DC 88 V to 300 V/AC 85 V
to264 V) options for worldwide operability
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C
without the use of fans

Product Variants
• RUGGEDCOM RS910
– Compact serial device server with 2 serial ports and [G_IK10_DE_50714P, 3, en_US]
3 Copper or Fiber Fast Ethernet ports; managed Ethernet
Figure 3.10/4 Intelligent Traffic Systems - wayside infrastructure using
switch and 256-bit encryption
the RUGGEDCOM RS910 to connect legacy devices to an
3.10 Ethernet infrastructure

228 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Serial Device Servers – RUGGEDCOM RS910

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RS910 6 G K 6 0 9 1 - 0 A T 2 . - 0 . A .
The RUGGEDCOM RS910 is a utility grade serial device server with an integrated, fully managed, Ethernet switch, designed to operate reliably in
electrically harsh and climatically demanding environments; 2 serial ports (RS485/ RS422/RS232) and/or up to 3 Ethernet ports (copper or fiber);
multimode, single-mode; multiple connector types (ST, MTRJ, LC, SC)
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.10/2 Selection and Ordering Data

3.10

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 229
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Serial Device Servers – RUGGEDCOM RMC30

Description
The RUGGEDCOM RMC30 is a utility grade, 2-port Serial-to-
Ethernet server that has been specifically designed to operate
in electrically harsh and climatically demanding environments.
The RUGGEDCOM RMC30 offers both an RS232 port and an
RS485/422 port simultaneously via a solid screw down terminal
block. The 10Base-T Ethernet port supports both auto-negotia-
tion and auto-crossover detection and simplifies cabling. Simple
and intuitive network based configuration using either the built
in Web or Telnet server makes setup a breeze.

extended temperature ranges. Figure 3.10/5 RUGGEDCOM RMC30

• No need for external power supply, reducing CAPEX for world-
wide applications. Application Example

• Multiple port options available to provide customers great

flexibility for a variety of use scenarios.
Features
• Serial ports: 1x RS232 and 1x RS422/485 port
• Ethernet ports: 1x 10BaseTX
• Transmit serial data over an IP network
• Support for Modbus TCP, DNP 3, TIN serial protocols
• DC 24 V, DC 48 V, or high-power (DC 88 V to 300 V/ AC 8 V to
264 V) options for worldwide operability
• For use at ambient temperatures from –40 °C to +85 °C
without the use of fans
• Multiple management interfaces : Web-based, Telnet, CLI
management interfaces

Product Variants
• RUGGEDCOM RMC30
– Serial device server, export controlled version
• RUGGEDCOM RMC30NC
– Serial device server, non export controlled version [G_RCM0_XX_00165P, 2, --_--]

Figure 3.10/6 Using the RMC30 that allows communicating virtually

3.10 any serial device with Ethernet in a simple and reliable
network connectivity.

230 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Serial Device Servers – RUGGEDCOM RMC30

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM RMC30
RUGGEDCOM RMC30NC 2-port Serial-to- RUGGEDCOM RMC30NC 6 G K 6 0 0 3 - 0 A C 1 . - . . . .
Ethernet server RUGGEDCOM RMC30 6 G K 6 0 0 3 - 0 A C 2 . - . . . .
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.10/3 Selection and Ordering Data

3.10

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 231
Communication
RUGGEDCOM Software – RUGGEDCOM CROSSBOW

Description • Automate user login

RUGGEDCOM CROSSBOW is an enterprise level solution • Manage device passwords and configurations
for managing and securing remote maintenance access to
• Compare device configurations and firmware against known
field devices in compliance with the NERC CIP standards. approved versions
RUGGEDCOM CROSSBOW provides cyber-secure local and
remote user access and management of all Intelligent Electronic • Automated file retrieval and storage
Devices and their associated files. • Control, log, and report user access and activity
Benefits Application Example

• Provides a strong foundation to enable compliance to NERC

CIP & IEC-62443 in the areas of remote IED access, activity
logging and data privacy.
• Secure remote access capabilities saves costly field visits and
truck rolls.
• User access can be revoked in external strong authentica-
tion system (AD, RSA, Radius), no need for costly and time
consuming password changes in all devices.
• Labor intensive automated tasks can be automated saving
time and expense, such as password, firmware, and configu-
ration management.
• Device event records can be extracted and stored without
the need for additional substation hardware and associated
maintenance and patching requirements.
• Optional Asset Discovery & Management automates network
asset discovery saving time and expense associated with
device inventory.
[G_RCM0_00017P, 2, en_US]
Features
Figure 3.11/1 RUGGEDCOM CROSSBOW – System Architecture
• Secure, role based remote access
• Authenticate users against IT systems

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

RUGGEDCOM CROSSBOW Software-Installer 6 G K 6 0 0 0 - 2 B A ☐ 0 - 0 A A 0

▲
|
RUGGEDCOM CROSSBOW Server/CAM Soft- Software installers for CROSSBOW Server, Client, and CAMs 0
ware
RUGGEDCOM CROSSBOW SAC Software Software installers for CROSSBOW Station Access Controller (both Windows
1
and ROX variants)
Selection and ordering data for RUGGEDCOM accessories: Further Information

Table 3.11/1 Selection and Ordering Data

3.11

232 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
SCALANCE X204RNA – HSR

Description
The SCALANCE X-200RNA (Redundant Network Access)
Managed Industrial Ethernet Switches with HSR function-
ality (High-availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol as per
IEC 62439-3) are used to connect up to two non HSR-capable
terminal devices or network segments to a ring-shaped HSR
network structure. They can also be used for the simple and
redundant transition from HSR to PRP (Parallel Redundancy
Protocol) network structures.
• Participant or network connection depending on the port
characteristic of the devices, electrical or optical
• Media redundancy by transmitting telegrams twice in ring
networks
• High system availability thanks to simultaneous transmission
of telegrams via two paths in the ring
• No reconfiguration times of the ring network in the event of
an error thanks to double transmission of the telegrams in the
ring [ph_SCALANCE X204RNA HSR, 1, --_--]

• Simple and redundant coupling of HSR and PRP network struc- Figure 3.12/1 SCALANCE X204RNA HSR
tures
– SCALANCE X204RNA
• Redundant 24 VDC voltage supply or wide-range power for connection of up to two non-HSR-capable terminal
supply unit, depending on the device model
devices to ring networks with four electrical ports
• SNMP access, integrated web server and automatic e-mail • Industrial Ethernet Switches in a metal housing with electrical
send function for remote diagnostics and signaling over the
and optical ports and a wide-range power supply unit for use
network
in extended environmental conditions
– SCALANCE X204RNA EEC
Benefits
for connection of up to two non-HSR-capable terminal
• Ideal solution for building Industrial Ethernet networks with devices to ring networks with two electrical terminal-device
high network availability (seamless media redundancy due to ports and two optical/electrical combination ports for
parallel data transmission in parallel network structures) network connection
• Seamless data transmission in ring network structures for – SCALANCE X204RNA EEC
high-availability systems (for example, process automation) with configurable functionality (PRP or HSR) for connection
of up to two non-HSR-capable terminal devices to ring
• Fast, simple diagnosis via the LED on the device, using an networks with two electrical terminal-device ports and two
integrated web server or using the signaling contact
optical/electrical combination ports for network connection
• Integration of the SCALANCE X-200RNA switches in existing
Network Management Systems (for example SINEC NMS) Product features:
through SNMP access • Device diagnosis via LED (power, link status, data traffic)
• Simple commissioning without mandatory configuration • Remote diagnostics via signaling contact (signal mask can be
• Device replacement without PG by using the removable set on-site via push-button), SNMP protocol and web browser
storage medium C-PLUG for saving the configuration data possible
• The SCALANCE X204RNA EEC with its expanded environ-
Applications mental conditions is suitable for use in power switching and
The Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-200RNA with HSR distribution systems (IEC 61850-3, IEEE 1613)
functionality facilitate the cost-effective connection of non-HSR-
capable terminal devices to ring networks requiring high availa-
bility. The devices with IP 20 degree of protection are designed
for use in the control cabinet.
Product Versions:
3.12
• Industrial Ethernet Switches in plastic case with electrical
ports

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 233
Communication
SCALANCE X204RNA – HSR

Additional information
You can find other devices and variants in the Industry Mall.
You will find more information about Redundant Network
Access under http://www.siemens.com/rna
For support with selecting SCALANCE network components, see
the TIA Selection Tool:
• http://www.siemens.com/tia-selection-tool

[G_IK10_DE_10344P, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.12/2 Seamless Ring Network with HSR Redundancy Method

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SCALANCE X204RNA for PRP networks 6 G K 5 2 0 4 - 0 B A 0 0 - 2 M B 2

SCALANCE X204RNA EEC for PRP networks 6 G K 5 2 0 4 - 0 B S 0 0 - 2 N A 3
SCALANCE X204RNA EEC for HSR and PRP networks 6 G K 5 2 0 4 - 0 B S 0 0 - 3 P A 3
SFP pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1 (multimode, glass up to 3 km) 6 G K 5 9 9 1 - 1 A D 0 0 - 8 A A 0
SFP991-1LH+ (single mode, glass up to 70 km, LH+) 6 G K 5 9 9 1 - 1 A E 0 0 - 8 A A 0
SFP991-1LD (single mode, glass up to 26 km) 6 G K 5 9 9 1 - 1 A F 0 0 - 8 A A 0
IE FC RJ45 plug connector 180 6 G K 1 9 0 1 - 1 B B 1 0 - 2 A ☐ 0
RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with sturdy metal case and integrated cutting
terminal contacts for connecting industrial Ethernet FC installation cables, with 180° cable
output for network components and CPs/CPUs with industrial Ethernet connection
▲
|
1 package = 1 unit A
1 package = 10 unit B
1 package = 50 unit E

Table 3.12/1 Selection and Ordering Data

3.12

234 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
SCALANCE X204RNA – PRP

Description
The Managed Industrial Ethernet network access points
SCALANCE X-200RNA (Redundant Network Access) with PRP
functionality (Parallel Redundancy Protocol according to IEC
62439-3) are used to connect up to two non-PRP-capable
terminal devices or network segments to parallel networks.
• Participant or network connection depending on the port
characteristic of the devices, electrical or optical
• Media redundancy due to double transmission of telegrams
into two parallel separate networks
• High system availability thanks to telegram transmission via
two separate networks at the same time.
• Reconfiguration times in a partial network do not affect the
propagation time because the telegrams are transmitted into
two separate networks (seamless redundancy)
• Redundant DC 24 V voltage supply or wide-range power
supply unit, depending on the device model [ph_SCALANCE X204RNA PRP, 1, --_--]

• SNMP access, integrated web server and automatic e-mail Figure 3.12/3 SCALANCE X204RNA PRP
send function for remote diagnostics and signaling over the
network
– SCALANCE X204RNA EEC
for connection of up to two non-PRP-capable terminal
Benefits devices to redundant networks with two electrical terminal-
• Ideal solution for building Industrial Ethernet networks with device ports and two optical/electrical combination ports for
high network availability (seamless media redundancy due to network connection
parallel data transmission in parallel network structures) – SCALANCE X204RNA EEC
• The reconfiguration time of a partial network does not affect with configurable functionality (PRP or HSR) for connection
the telegram transmission of up to two non-HSR-capable terminal devices to ring
networks with two electrical terminal-device ports and two
• Fast, simple diagnosis via the LED on the device, using an optical/electrical combination ports for network connection
integrated web server or using the signaling contact
Features:
• Integration of the SCALANCE X-200RNA switches into existing
network management systems (e.g. SINEMA Server or SINEC • Device diagnosis via LED (power, link status, data traffic)
NMS) using SNMP access
• Remote diagnostics via signaling contact (signal mask can be
• Simple commissioning without mandatory configuration set on-site via push-button), SNMP protocol and web browser
possible
• Device replacement without PG by using the removable
storage medium C-PLUG for saving the configuration data • The SCALANCE X204RNA EEC with its expanded environ-
mental conditions is suitable for use in power switching and
Applications distribution systems (IEC 61850-3, IEEE 1613)
The Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-200RNA facili-
tate the cost-effective connection of non-PRPcapable terminal
devices to parallel, separate networks requiring high availability.
The devices with IP 20 degree of protection are designed for use
in the control cabinet.
Product Versions
• Industrial Ethernet Switches in plastic case with electrical
ports
– SCALANCE X204RNA
for connection of up to two non-PRP-capable terminal
devices to redundant networks with four electrical ports 3.12
• Industrial Ethernet Switches in a metal case with electrical and
optical ports and a wide-range power supply unit for use in
extended environmental conditions

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 235
Communication
SCALANCE X204RNA – PRP

Additional information
You can find other devices and variants in the Industry Mall.
Cable system technology:
You will find more information on the SIMATIC NET cable system
family under: www.siemens.com/fastconnect
Selection Tool:
For support with selecting SCALANCE network components, see
the TIA Selection Tool:
• http://www.siemens.com/tia-selection-tool

[G_IK10_DE_10344P, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.12/4 Redundant Transition from Ring HSR Network Struc-

ture to parallel PRP Network Structure using SCALANCE
X204RNA

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SCALANCE X204RNA for PRP networks 6 G K 5 2 0 4 - 0 B A 0 0 - 2 K B 2

SCALANCE X204RNA EEC for PRP networks 6 G K 5 2 0 4 - 0 B S 0 0 - 3 L A 3
SCALANCE X204RNA EEC for HSR and PRP networks 6 G K 5 2 0 4 - 0 B S 0 0 - 3 P A 3
SFP pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1 (multimode, glass up to 3 km) 6 G K 5 9 9 1 - 1 A D 0 0 - 8 A A 0
SFP991-1LH+ (single mode, glass up to 70 km, LH+) 6 G K 5 9 9 1 - 1 A E 0 0 - 8 A A 0
SFP991-1LD (single mode, glass up to 26 km) 6 G K 5 9 9 1 - 1 A F 0 0 - 8 A A 0
CP 443-1RNA 6 G K 7 4 4 3 - 1 R X 0 0 - 0 X E 0
IE FC RJ45 plug connector 180 6 G K 1 9 0 1 - 1 B B 1 0 - 2 A ☐ 0
RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with sturdy metal case and integrated cutting
terminal contacts for connecting industrial Ethernet FC installation cables, with 180° cable
output for network components and CPs/CPUs with industrial Ethernet connection
3.12
▲
|
1 package = 1 unit A
1 package = 10 unit B
1 package = 50 unit E

Table 3.12/2 Selection and Ordering Data

236 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
SOFTNET-IE RNA – PC to PRP

Description
• SOFTNET-IE RNA (Redundant Network Access) is the software
for connecting a PC to PRP-capable (Parallel Redundancy
Protocol according to IEC 62439-3)
• High system availability by transmitting telegrams twice in
two parallel separate networks
• Reconfiguration times in a partial network do not affect the
propagation time because the telegrams are transmitted into
two separate networks (seamless redundancy)
• Integration into network management systems with SNMP
support
• Configuration tools are part of the scope of supply of the
communication software

Benefits
• Increases the availability of the PC application by building
Industrial Ethernet networks with high network availability [SOFTNET-IE RNA, 1, --_--]
(seamless media redundancy due to parallel data transmission
in parallel networks) Figure 3.13/1 SOFTNET-IE RNA

• High availability of the entire system

• No additional programming effort required on the PC
• Secures investments by using existing applications and
offering flexible application options
• Simple integration into existing network management
systems thanks to diagnostic data access via SNMP as a
standard interface

Applications
The software package SOFT-IE RNA facilitates the cost-effective
connection of PCs with two network interfaces to parallel sepa-
rate networks requiring high availability.

[G_IK10_DE_10333P, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.13/2 Parallel PRP Network Structure with SOFTNET-IE RNA and
SCALANCE X204RNA

3.13

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 237
Communication
SOFTNET-IE RNA – PC to PRP

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SOFTNET-IE RNA software for connecting PCs to PRP-capable networks with integrated SNMP,
runtime software, software and electronic manual on CD-ROM, license key on a USB stick, Class
A
SOFTNET-IE RNA V17 6 G K 1 7 1 1 - 1 E W 1 7 - 0 A A 0
for Windows® 10 Pro/Enterprise (64 bit) Version 1909, 2004, 20H2
for Windows® Server 2016 (Standard Edition, Datacenter)
for Windows® Server 2019 (Standard Edition, Enterprise)
for Windows® 10 (IoT) Enterprise 2016 LTSB
for Windows® 10 (IoT) Enterprise 2019 LTSC

• Single license for one installation

Software Update Service 6 G K 1 7 1 1 - 1 E W 0 0 - 3 A L 0
for one year, with automatic extension;
Prerequisite: current software version
Upgrade 6 G K 1 7 1 1 - 1 E W 0 0 - 3 A E 0
From V8.1 to latest version

• Single license for one installation

Table 3.13/1 Selection and Ordering Data

3.13

238 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
SCALANCE M87x Mobile Wireless Router – Router for Wireless IP Communications

Overview
• EDGE/HSPA+/LTE/5G router for wireless IP communication of
Industrial Ethernet-based automation devices using cellular
networks
• Integrated security functions with firewall
• NAT/network applications/1:1 NAT
• Both VPN servers and VPN clients
• A variety of tunnel protocols available: IPsec, OpenVPN
• User-specific login
Benefits
• Monitoring and control of wirelessly connected telecontrol
substations with low investment and operating costs
• Reducing travel costs or telephone fees using remote
programming and remote diagnostics via mobile wireless
service
• Convenient diagnostics via terminal clients and short down-
load times due to the high speed of HSPA+/LTE/5G
• High security thanks to IPsec-based VPN functionality and fire-
wall
• Can be used globally with GSM Quadband technology, UMTS,
as well as LTE Pentaband and 5G technology (keep the coun-
tryspecific approvals in mind!). For SCALANCE MUM853-1 5G
router only: eSIM support and GPS tracking possible

Functions
Interfaces [ph_SCALANCE_M87x, 2, --_--]

• 1 digital input and 1 digital output each for signaling faults Figure 3.14/1 SCALANCE M876-4/SCALANCE MUM853-1
and outages
• 4 Ethernet ports for Industrial Ethernet Applications

• Diagnostics LEDs for modem status, field strength, connection • The SCALANCE Industrial Routers can be used universally. Due
check, VPN status, and DI/DO channels to their type of construction and electrical properties, the
routers are primarily suited to use in the industrial sector
• 2/4x SMA antenna connection for 2G/3G/4G/5G antenna
Mobile wireless standards supported
• Worldwide remote programming and maintenance via mobile
wireless
• SCALANCE 876-4: 2G (GSM ,GPRS, EDGE) / 3G (UMTS, • Energy-saving designs of systems, for example, by statusde-
HSPA+) / 4G (LTE) pendent rotational speed control of pumps in satellite stations
• SCALANCE MUM853-1 (3G (UMTS, HSPA+) / 4G (LTE) / 5G • Control and monitoring of
Management – Wastewater treatment plants, water treatment
• Web interface for configuration and management – Oil and gas supplies
• CLI for configuration and management – District heating
– Power distribution
• SNMP and MIBs, TRAPS are supported
– Pump stations
Security and Routing
– Traffic and transportation
• Secure data transmission using encryption and secure identi- – Buildings
fication (authentication) of the communication users by the
application of VPN (IPsec, OpenVPN). Several VPN tunnels are – Wind power and photovoltaic systems
possible at the same time. • Connecting mobile participants, with central monitoring and
control
• Login and firewall function for specific assignment and
checking of access rights.
• Routing and port forwarding by NAT, NAPT and 1:1 NAT are 3.14
supported.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 239
Communication
SCALANCE M87x Mobile Wireless Router – Router for Wireless IP Communications

[G_IK10_DE_30374P, 2, en_US]

Figure 3.14/2 Transparent Transportation of Telecontrol Protocols, for example, IEC 60870-5-104, in the Energy Automation Environment

Additional information Cable system technology:

You can find additional information on remote networks at: You will find more information on the SIMATIC NET cable system
http://siemens.com/remote-networks family under: http://www.siemens.com/fastconnect
Country approvals: Selection Tool:
You can always find the current country approvals and For support with selecting SCALANCE network components, see
country-specific constraints at the following link: http:// the TIA Selection Tool:
www.siemens.com/mobilenetwork-approvals
• http://www.siemens.com/tia-selection-tool

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SCALANCE M876-4 6 G K 5 8 7 6 - 4 A A 1 0 - 2 B A 2
SCALANCE MUM853-1 6 G K 5 8 5 3 - 2 E A 1 0 - 2 A A 1
IE FC RJ45 plug connector 180 6 G K 1 9 0 1 - 1 B B 1 0 - 2 A ☐ 0
RJ45 plug connector for Industrial Ethernet with sturdy metal case and integrated cutting
terminal contacts for connecting industrial Ethernet FC installation cables, with 180° cable
output for network components and CPs/CPUs with industrial Ethernet connection
▲
|
1 package = 1 unit A
1 package = 10 unit B
1 package = 50 unit B

Table 3.14/1 Selection and Ordering Data

3.14

240 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
PROFIBUS/MPI Router SCALANCE M804PB – Router for PROFIBUS/MPI Systems

Description
The SCALANCE M804PB is a compact Industrial Ethernet router
with 1x RS 485 interface for a cost-effective and reliable connec-
tion of PROFIBUS/MPI systems. The protection against unauthor-
ized access and the security of the data transfer are increased by
the integrated security functions firewall and VPN (IPsec and, for
connecting to SINEMA Remote Connect, OpenVPN).
Widely distributed PROFIBUS/MPI-based plant segments and
terminal devices can be generically accessed via the
SCALANCE M804PB. In addition, access to PROFIBUS/MPI
programmable controllers is also possible from the local
Ethernet interface. The devices can be connected via the TIA
Portal or SIMATIC STEP 7. The PROFIBUS/MPI interface is acti-
vated using the free TIA Portal Cloud Connector software and is
then available in the TIA Portal as of V15 and SIMATIC STEP 7 as
of V5.6. Please note that a TIA Portal Cloud Connector version
>= 1.1 SP2 is required for this. As of TIA Portal Version 15 SP1,
a more current version of the TIA Portal Cloud Connector is
installed which is also compatible with the SCALANCE M804PB.
The SCALANCE M804PB is suitable for use in remote program- [P_IK10_XX_02399, 1, --_--]

ming and remote diagnostics, as well as remote maintenance Figure 3.15/1 SCALANCE M804PB
(Teleservice) and network segmentation. The connection to
SINEMA RC via the autoconfiguration interface (can be enabled functionality. The SCALANCE M804PB has IP20 degree of protec-
with the KEY-PLUG SINEMA RC) also allows the easy configuration and also has a redundant power supply connection.
tion of a connection to SINEMA Remote Connect.
The KEY-PLUG is inserted in the PLUG slot of the
SCALANCE M804PB. It also supports the tried-and-tested C-PLUG

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SCALANCE M804PB55 6 G K 5 8 0 4 - 0 A P 0 0 - 2 A A 2
Compact Industrial Ethernet router with 1x RS 485 interface for the cost-effective and reliable connection of PROFIBUS/MPI systems; with integrated
firewall and VPN with IPsec (OpenVPN for connecting SINEMA RC); 2 x RJ45 ports, 1x RS 485 interface PROFIBUS/ MPI
Accessories
C-PLUG Removable data storage medium for simple
replacement of devices in the event of a fault;
for storing configuration or engineering and 6 G K 1 9 0 0 - 0 A B 1 0
application data; can be used for SIMATIC NET
products with C-PLUG slot
SCALANCE CLP 2 GB Removable data storage medium for simple
device replacement in case of failure, for
6 G K 1 9 0 0 - 0 U B 0 0 - 0 A A 0
recording configuration data, can be used in
the following products with CLP slot
KEY-PLUG SINEMA RC Removable data storage medium for enabling
connection to SINEMA Remote Connect for
6 G K 5 9 0 8 - 0 P B 0 0
simple device replacement if a fault occurs,
and for storing configuration data

3.15

55 Please note country approvals under: http://www.siemens.com/mobilenetwork-approvals

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 241
Communication
PROFIBUS/MPI Router SCALANCE M804PB – Router for PROFIBUS/MPI Systems

Description Order no.

CLP SINEMA RC Removable data storage medium for enabling
the connection to SINEMA Remote Connect
for SCALANCE MUM85X with CLP slot for 6 G K 5 9 0 8 - 0 U A 0 0 - 0 A A 0
simple device replacement in case of failure
and for recording of configuration data
SCALANCE M desktop pedestal SCALANCE M-800 desktop pedestal for table
mounting for SCALANCE M812 / M816 / 6 G K 5 8 9 8 - 8 M D 0 0
M874-x / M876-x / S615

Table 3.15/1 Selection and Ordering Data

3.15

242 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Mobile Wireless Antennas – For Wireless Connections

Description
Mobile wireless antennas are used to optimize the reception and
emission of signals for the respective application. This increases
the reliability of the mobile wireless connections.
• Use for routers, modems, and communication processors for
the mobile wireless standards GSM/GPRS (2G), UMTS (3G),
LTE (4G) and (5G)
• Coordinated assortment of omnidirectional and directional
antennas for different applications, both indoors and
outdoors

Benefits
• Cost-effective connection to devices in remote, difficult to
access or volatile environments
• Building a reliable mobile wireless infrastructure using remote
antennas, even if mobile wireless devices are installed, for
example, in the control cabinet [P_IK10_XX_02150P, 2, --_--]

Examples: Figure 3.16/1 Mobile Wireless Antennas

• Telecontrol applications, for example, in water treatment and You can find all information, including detailed product informa-
wastewater treatment plants, oil and gas applications, railroad
use or public transportation tion and the ordering information, online in the Industry Mall:
https://mall.industry.siemens.com/mall
• Teleservice applications, for example, in machine manufac-
turing
• Additional applications, for example, automation of energy
distribution networks (Smart Grid), video surveillance

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

2G/3G/4G antenna ANT896-4MA 6 G K 5 8 9 6 - 4 M A 0 0 - 0 A A 3

Omnidirectional antenna for GSM (2G), UMTS (3G), and LTE (4G) networks; omnidirectional characteristic; can be rotated radially with additional joint;
with SMA plug for direct assembly on the device; antenna gain 2dBi; IP54
2G/3G/4G antenna ANT896-4ME 6 G K 5 8 9 6 - 4 M E 0 0 - 0 A A 0
Omnidirectional antenna for GSM (2G), UMTS (3G), and LTE (4G) networks; omnidirectional characteristic; with N-Female plug for recessed mounting
indoors and outdoors; antenna gain 3dBi; IP66
2G/3G/4G antenna ANT794-4MR 6 N H 9 8 6 0 - 1 A A 0 0
Omnidirectional antenna GSM (2G), UMTS (3G), and EU-wide LTE (4G) networks; omnidirectional; weather-resistant for indoors and outdoors; 5 m
connecting cable permanently attached to the antenna; SMA plug; incl. mounting bracket, screws, dowels
3G/4G/5G antenna ANT897-4MA 6 G K 5 8 9 7 - 4 M A 0 0 - 0 A A 3
Mobile wireless antenna for public 3/4/5G mobile wireless networks and private 5G networks worldwide; omnidirectional characteristic; 600 to
5000 MHz; antenna gain: 1 to 2 dBi, incl. SMA male connector, IP5
3G/4G/5G antenna ANT897-4ME 6 G K 5 8 9 7 - 4 M E 0 0 - 0 A A 0
Antenna for public 3/4/5G mobile wireless networks and private 5G networks worldwide; omnidirectional characteristic; 600 to 6000 MHz; antenna gain:
2 to 6 dBi, incl. N-Connect female connector, IP65; wall or tower mounting, incl. mounting bracket

Table 3.16/1 Selection and Ordering Data

3.16

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 243
Communication
Mobile Wireless Antennas – For Wireless Connections

Antenna Accessories

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SIMATIC NET Antenna N-Connect Male/Male Flexible Connection Cable

Flexible connection cable for connecting an 6 X V 1 8 7 5 - 5 A ☐ ☐ 0
RCoax cable or an antenna to a SCALANCE ▲ ▲
W/M device; pre-assembled with two N-
| |
Connect male connectors
1m H 1
2m H 2
5m H 5
10 m N 1
Flexible connection cable for connecting an 6 X V 1 8 7 5 - 5 S H ☐ 0
RCoax cable or an antenna to a SCALANCE ▲
W/M device; pre-assembled with two N-
|
Connect male connectors, suitable for railroad
applications 1m 1
2m 2
5m 5
SIMATIC NET Antenna N-Connect/SMA Male/Male Flexible Connection Cable
Flexible connection cable for connecting an 6 X V 1 8 7 5 - 5 L ☐ ☐ 0
antenna to a SCALANCE M-800 device; pre- ▲ ▲
assembled with one N-Connect male and one
| |
SMA male connector
0.3 m E 3
1m H 1
2m H 2
5m H 5
Flexible connection cable for connecting an 6 X V 1 8 7 5 - 5 U H ☐ 0
antenna to a SCALANCE M-800 device; pre- ▲
assembled with one N-Connect male and one
|
SMA male connector, suitable for railroad
applications 1m 1
2m 2
5m 5
Lightning Protector LP798-1N 6 G K 5 7 9 8 - 2 L P 0 0 - 2 A A 6
Lightning protection with N/N female/female connector, IP67 (-40°C to +85°C), frequency range: 0 to 6 GHz
SIMATIC NET N-Connect/N-Connect Female/Female Panel Feedthrough 6 G K 5 7 9 8 - 2 P P 0 0 - 2 A A 6
Panel feedthrough for wall thicknesses up to a maximum of 4.5 mm, 2 N-Connect female connectors
SIMATIC NET N-Connect Male/Male Coupler 6 G K 5 7 9 8 - 0 C P 0 0 - 1 A A 0
HF bus coupler; 2 N-Connect male connectors
SIMATIC NET SMA/SMA Angle Adaptor 6 G K 5 8 9 8 - 1 C V 0 0 - 4 A A 0
Angle adaptor, SMA/SMA male/female
We offer a wide range of accessories for various applications. You can find an overview of further products at: https://mall.industry.siemens.com/
mall/de/WW/Catalog/Products/10022025?tree=CatalogTree

Table 3.16/2 Selection and Ordering Data

3.16

244 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Industrial Security Appliances SCALANCE S – Network Protection

Description
3.17
Industrial Security Appliances SCALANCE S are used to protect
devices and networks in automation engineering as well as
industrial communication.
They are characterized by the following features, amongst
others:
• Implementation of a cell protection concept and support
during implementation of the Siemens security concept
Defense in Depth
• Inspection and filtering of the data traffic via the integrated
firewall and consequently:
– Protection against incorrect operation
– Prevention of unauthorized access
– Avoidance of malfunctions and communication overload
• Authentication of communication users and encryption of
data transmission using VPN and providing protection of the
communication against spying and manipulation
• Sturdy, industry-compliant design of the devices [P_IK10_XX_2327, 1, --_--]

• Simple and clearly structured configuration: Figure 3.17/1 SCALANCE S

With the TIA portal, all SIMATIC NET security products can be
configured and diagnosed from a central location Applications
• The security of communication is independent of the protocol SCALANCE S industrial security appliances can protect all devices
(for example, PROFINET or other Ethernet-based field bus of an Ethernet network against unauthorized access. They also
solutions) protect data transmission between devices or network segments
(for example, automation cells) against data manipulation and
• Secure remote access via the Internet is possible using any spying, and can be used for secure remote access via the
provider
Internet.
Benefits Secure remote access via the Internet or via 2G/3G/4G are
possible in connection with the industry routers of the
• Protection of industrial automation networks against unau- SCALANCE M-800 product line.
thorized access and creation of a DMZ (protected zone)
is possible to exchange data with other networks without SCALANCE S is optimized for use in the automation environment
having to allow direct access to the production network and in the industrial sector and fulfills the special requirements
of automation engineering such as easy upgrading of existing
• Implementation of a flexible cell protection concept provides: systems, simple installation and minimum downtimes in the
– Protection of any Ethernet-based automation devices and
event of a fault.
systems that do not have their own security functions
– Protection of several devices at the same time
– Reduction of the risk of network incidents and unauthorized
network access by forming secure communication islands
(network segmentation)
– Backup of communication to and from the automation cells
• Universal network diagnostics by integrating into IT infra-
structures and network management systems via SNMP (for
example SINEC NMS)
• Remote access security via the Internet. Even dynamic IP
addresses can be used with PPPoE and DDNS.
• Easy integration into existing networks without reconfiguring
end users or creating new IP subnetworks
• Device replacement without PG by using the removable
storage medium C-PLUG for saving the configuration data
• Direct integration in fiber optic networks is possible
(SCALANCE SC632-2C, SC636-2C, SC642-2C, SC646-2C)

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 245
Communication
Industrial Security Appliances SCALANCE S – Network Protection

Product Versions – Protects network segments against unauthorized access via

3.17
Stateful Inspection firewall
Industrial Firewall Appliances:
– Simultaneous operation of up to 200 VPN tunnels is
• SCALANCE SC632-2C possible
– Protects network segments against unauthorized access via
– Connection via 2x Combo Port, electrically with RJ45
Stateful Inspection firewall
(10/100/1000 Mbit/s) or optically with SFPs (100 Mbit/s or
– Connection via 2x Combo Port, electrically with RJ45 1000 Mbit/s)
(10/100/1000 Mbit/s) or optically with SFPs (100 Mbit/s or
– Firewall data throughput up to 600 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s)
– VPN data throughput up to 120 Mbit/s
– Firewall data throughput up to 600 Mbit/s
– Connection to SINEMA Remote Connect via VPN
– Connection to SINEMA Remote Connect via VPN
• SCALANCE SC646-2C
• SCALANCE SC636-2C – Protects network segments against unauthorized access via
– Protects network segments against unauthorized access via
Stateful Inspection firewall
Stateful Inspection firewall
– Simultaneous operation of up to 200 VPN tunnels is
– Connection via 4x Port, electrically with RJ45
possible
(10/100/1000 Mbit/s) and 2x Combo Port, electrically
– Connection via 4x Port, electrically with RJ45
with RJ45 (10/100/1000 Mbit/s) or optically with SFPs
(10/100/1000 Mbit/s) and 2x Combo Port, electrically
(100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s)
with RJ45 (10/100/1000 Mbit/s) or optically with SFPs
– Firewall data throughput up to 600 Mbit/s
(100 Mbit/s or 1000 Mbit/s)
– Connection to SINEMA Remote Connect via VPN
– Firewall data throughput up to 600 Mbit/s
Industrial VPN Appliances: – VPN data throughput up to 120 Mbit/s
• SCALANCE S615 – Connection to SINEMA Remote Connect via VPN
– Protects network segments against unauthorized access via You can find more information on SCALANCE S at: http://
Stateful Inspection firewall www.siemens.com/securityappliance
– Simultaneous operation of up to 20 VPN tunnels is possible
For support with selecting SCALANCE network components, see
– Connection via 5x port, electrically with RJ45 the TIA Selection Tool:
(10/100 megabit/s)
– Firewall data throughput up to 100 Mbit/s
• http://www.siemens.com/tia-selection-tool
– VPN data throughput up to 35 Mbit/s
– Connection to SINEMA Remote Connect via VPN
• SCALANCE SC642-2C

246 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Industrial Security Appliances SCALANCE S – Network Protection

Selection and Ordering Data

3.17

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SCALANCE SC632-2C 6 G K 5 6 3 2 – 2 G S 0 0 – 2 A C 2
Industrial Security Appliance; for protecting devices and networks in discrete manufacturing and the process industry for securing industrial communica-
tion with firewall; additional functions: Address translation (NAT/NAPT); 2x combo port, electrical with RJ45 (10/100/1000 Mbps) or optically with SFPs
(100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps)
SCALANCE SC636-2C 6 G K 5 6 3 6 – 2 G S 0 0 – 2 A C 2
Industrial Security Appliance; for protecting devices and networks in discrete manufacturing and the process industry for securing industrial communica-
tion with firewall; additional functions: Flexible security zones, address translation (NAT/NAPT); 4x electrical with RJ45 (10/100/1000 Mbps) and 2x
combo port, electrical with RJ45 (10/100/1000 Mbps) or optical with SFPs (100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps)
SCALANCE SC642-2C 6 G K 5 6 4 2 – 2 G S 0 0 – 2 A C 2
Industrial Security Appliance; for protecting devices and networks in discrete manufacturing and the process industry for securing industrial communica-
tion with firewall and VPN; additional functions: Address translation (NAT/NAPT); 2x combo port, electrical with RJ45 (10/100/1000 Mbps) or optically
with SFPs (100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps)
SCALANCE SC646-2C 6 G K 5 6 4 6 – 2 G S 0 0 – 2 A C 2
Industrial Security Appliance; for protecting devices and networks in discrete manufacturing and the process industry for securing industrial communica-
tion with firewall and VPN; additional functions: Flexible security zones, address translation (NAT/NAPT); 4x electrical with RJ45 (10/100/1000 Mbps) and
2x combo port, electrical with RJ45 (10/100/1000 Mbps) or optical with SFPs (100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps)
SCALANCE S615 6 G K 5 6 1 5 – 0 A A 0 0 – 2 A A 2
LAN router; for protection of devices/networks in automation technology and for protection of industrial communication by means of VPN and firewall;
further functions: address conversion (NAT/NAPT), connection to SINEMA RC, 5-port switch, 1x dig. input, 1x digital output
Accessories
C-PLUG Removable data storage medium for simple 6 G K 1 9 0 0 – 0 A B 1 0
replacement of devices in the event of a fault;
for storing configuration or engineering and
application data; can be used for SIMATIC NET
products with C-PLUG slot
KEY-PLUG SINEMA RC Removable data storage medium for enabling 6 G K 5 9 0 8 – 0 P B 0 0
connection to SINEMA Remote Connect for
simple device replacement if a fault occurs,
and for storing configuration data
SFP plug-in transceiver 6 G K 5 9 9 1 – 1 ☐ ☐ ☐ 0 – 8 A A 0
▲ ▲ ▲
| | |
SFP991-1, 1x 100 Mbps LC port, optical (multimode, glass), up to 5 km A D 0
SFP991-1LD, 1x 100 Mbps LC port, optical (single-mode, glass), up to 26 km A F 0
SFP991-1LH+, 1x 100 Mbps LC port, optical (single-mode, glass), up to 70 km A E 0
SFP991-1ELH200, 1x 100 Mbps LC port, optical (single-mode, glass), up to 200 km A E 3
SFP992-1, 1x 1000 Mbps LC port, optical (multimode, glass), up to 750 km A L 0
SFP992-1+, 1x 1000 Mbps LC port, optical (multimode, glass), up to 2000 m A G 0
SFP992-1LD 1x 1000 Mbps optical LC port (single-mode, glass), up to 10 km A M 0
SFP992-1LH, 1x 1000 Mbps optical LC port (single-mode, glass), up to 40 km A N 0
SFP992-1LH+, 1x 1000 Mbps LC port, optical (single-mode, glass), up to 70 km A P 0
SFP992-1ELH 1x 1000 Mbps optical LC port (single-mode, glass), up to 120 km A Q 0

Table 3.17/1 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 247
Communication
SINEMA Remote Connect – Remote Network Management

Description
The management platform for remote networks, SINEMA
3.18 Remote Connect, is a server application for secure connection
establishment between users, widely distributed systems and
machines. SINEMA Remote Connect facilitates the management
and establishment of tunnel connections (VPN). Secure remote
maintenance can then be performed via the TIA portal, for
example. Direct access to the company network incorporating
the machine to be maintained is avoided. The participants who
are to communicate with one another "meet" at a neutral loca-
tion, the SINEMA Remote Connect. There, the identity of the
participants is determined using certificate exchange before
they can access the company network. [ph_SINEMA Remote Connect, 2, --_--]

Additional features of SINEMA Remote Connect are: Figure 3.18/1 SINEMA Remote Connect
• Address book function with SINEMA RC client
– Support of multiple subnetworks behind an industrial router
• Simple to issue rights via the user-friendly web interface SCALANCE M or an Industrial Security Appliance S615 or
• Auto configuration of Siemens routers and for the SINEMA RC SC-600
client – User-defined access rights for dedicated access to specific IP
addresses in subnetworks
Benefits
KEY-PLUG SINEMA RC
• Low investment and operating costs for operator control and
monitoring of remotely connected substations • Connecting SINEMA RC and support during commissioning:
– Auto configuration interface for simple connection configu-
• Secured and simple dialup into the plants from any location in ration of industrial routers SCALANCE M oder S615
the world
• Simple and low-cost migration from classical remote commu- SINEMA Remote Connect Client
nication to IP-based remote communication • Address book:
• Wide range of applications from remote service to remote – List view of all devices assigned to one user
control on the basis of transparent IP communication • SIMATIC Teleservice
• Easy integration into existing infrastructure – Selection of a device to perform a teleservice in the SIMATIC
• Extremely simple connection of terminal devices via auto environment
configuration (e.g. SCALANCE S615, M-800, SC-600 and • Proxy server:
selected SIMATIC CPs) and SINEMA Remote Connect Client – For communication with networks behind a proxy server
(minimal IT expertise required) infrastructure
• More flexible assignment of rights, avoidance of operating • Support of HTTPS and SOCKS proxy servers
errors during remote maintenance by unauthorized personnel
due to individual access restriction • Auto configuration interface:
– For simple configuration of a connection to SINEMA Remote
Functions Connect

SINEMA Remote Connect • Tunnel encryption:

– OpenVPN
• Management of devices and users:
– User management with the configuration of rights Applications
– Device and user management with group administration
SINEMA Remote Connect is suitable for use in industrial and
• Connection management: industry-oriented areas:
– Establishing of encrypted connections using OpenVPN
Global remote programming and maintenance (Remote Service)
– Establishing of permanent or event-based connections for example of:
(using wake-up SMS or a signal at the digital input)
• Plant and machine building
• Connecting subnetworks downstream of the industrial routers
(e.g. SCALANCE S or M) • Power distribution/substations (municipal utility)
– Routing support • Logistics/harbor logistics
– NAT support for mapping locally identical subnetworks • ITS/transport companies
– NAT support for mapping dedicated local IP addresses • Water & waste water (municipal utility, etc.)

248 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
SINEMA Remote Connect – Remote Network Management

Product Variants – Industrial routers SCALANCE M, Industrial Security Appli-

ances SCALANCE S615 and SC-600, selected SIMATIC CPs
The SINEMA Remote Connect management platform is divided
and compact SIMATIC RTU's.
into the following products: 3.18

• SINEMA Remote Connect Virtual Appliance • SINEMA Remote Connect as a Service

– SINEMA Remote Connect aaS offers components of SINEMA
– The SINEMA RC Virtual Appliance contains the basic soft-
Remote Connect as a cloud service which is hosted and
ware package SINEMA RC for establishing 4 VPN connec-
maintained by Siemens. The offer includes a cloud instance
tions. It also contains the SINEMA RC Client software.
with an installed current version of SINEMA Remote
• SINEMA Remote Connect upgrade-license Connect Server which is maintained and serviced by
– With the SINEMA RC upgrade licenses, the number of Siemens. Since all required licenses are included, SINEMA
available VPN connections for users and devices can be Remote Connect as a Service is an all-in-one solution which
increased. allows simple and safe remote access for teleservice and
remote maintenance.
• SINEMA Remote Connect Client
– The SINEMA Remote Connect Client is an open VPN client
Additional information
for optimal connection to SINEMA RC.
You can find all information, including detailed product infor-
• KEY-PLUG and CLP SINEMA RC mation and ordering information, online in the Industry Mall:
– With the plugs connecting to the SINEMA RC via the
https://siemens.com/mall-sinema-remote-connect
auto configuration interface of the industrial routers
SCALANCE M and S615 is enabled. In this way, the configu- You can find more information on the topic of remote networks
ration of the connections of these devices to the SINEMA on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/remote-networks
Remote Connect is simple and quick. You can find more information on the topic of industrial security
• Supported hardware on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 249
Communication
SINEMA Remote Connect – Remote Network Management

Selection and Ordering Data

3.18
Description Order no.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

SINEMA RC Virtual Appliance 6 G K 1 7 2 0 - 1 A H 0 1 - 0 B V 0

Up to 4 VPN connections including SINEMA RC Client; documentation on DVD, license key; 2 languages
(German, English); single license for one installation
SINEMA RC UPGRADE OSD 64+ 6 G K 1 7 2 2 - 1 V H 0 1 - 0 B K 0
Upgrade by 64-1024 VPN connections; license only, OSD (online software delivery)
SINEMA RC Client OSD 6 G K 1 7 2 1 - 1 X G 0 3 - 0 A K 0
OpenVPN client for connection to SINEMA Remote Connect; OSD (online software delivery), license key;
2 languages (German, English); single license for one installation
Accessories
KEY-PLUG SINEMA RC 6 G K 5 9 0 8 - 0 P B 0 0
Removable medium for enabling connection to SINEMA Remote Connect for industry router, for simple
device replacement in the event of an error and adopting configuration data
CLP SINEMA RC 6 G K 5 9 0 8 - 0 U A 0 0 - 0 A A 0
Removable data storage medium for enabling the connection to SINEMA Remote Connect for
SCALANCE MUM85X with CLP slot for simple device replacement in case of failure and for recording of
configuration data
Hosting and maintenance by Siemens; SINEMA Remote Connect Server; 64 VPN licenses, 10 client 6 G K 1 8 0 0 - 0 A A 0 0 - 7 C A 0
licenses, 5 Edge app client licenses, REST API
Hosting and maintenance by Siemens; SINEMA Remote Connect Server; 256 VPN licenses, 30 client 6 G K 1 8 0 0 - 0 A A 0 0 - 7 C A 1
licenses, 20 Edge app client licenses, REST API
Hosting and maintenance by Siemens; SINEMA Remote Connect Server; 1024 VPN licenses, 60 client 6 G K 1 8 0 0 - 0 A A 0 0 - 7 C A 2
licenses, 50 Edge app client licenses, REST API

Table 3.18/1 Selection and Ordering Data

250 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Industrial Ethernet – Cable System Technology – Communication Networking

Description
Communication networks are of crucial importance for auto-
mation solutions. SIMATIC NET represents a varied supply of
modular building blocks that help resolve pending communica-
tion tasks efficiently. 3.19
Passive Power-System Components - Cable System Technology
Powerful and consistent communication networks are the basis
for efficient automation. Industrial Ethernet is the proven tech-
nology to meet these challenges. SIMATIC NET from Siemens
relies on Industrial Ethernet and includes everything you need
to implement maximum efficiency industrial networks and bus
systems: powerful, future-proof power-system components for
reliable use in hostile industrial environments, a cable system
for quick assembly on-site, fast redundancy for fail-safe opera-
tion as well as a reporting concept for continuous monitoring of
the power-system components.
Particularly high demands are set for assembly of the cable
system in the industrial environment. With FastConnect,
Siemens is offering a system that can meet all these require- [P_IK10_XX_02103, 1, --_--]

ments: On-site assembly – simple, quick, and healthy.

Figure 3.19/1 Industrial Ethernet – Cable System Technology
FastConnect - The Complete System
With FastConnect, Siemens has developed a well thought-out different lengths. FastConnect optical fiber makes the impos-
quick-assembly system of cables, plug connectors, and assembly sible possible!
tools for fast and healthy surface mounting or changes on- You can find more information at:
site. FastConnect is available for Industrial Ethernet/PROFINET
and PROFIBUS, for RJ45, M12, or Sub-D/RS-485. And in the
• www.siemens.com/fastconnect
meantime also for optical fiber: ST/BFOC, SC RJ, and LC for • www.siemens.com/mall-verkabelungstechnik

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 251
Communication
Industrial Ethernet – Cable System Technology – Communication Networking

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3.19
Installation cable for 4-wire cabling (2 x 2) 6 X V 1 8 4 0 - 2 A H 1 0
4-wire, shielded TP installation cable for connection to IE FC outlet RJ45/IE FC RJ45 plug. Sold by the meter: Delivery unit max. 1000 m, minimum order
quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP standard cable GP 2 x 2 (PN Type A, AWG22, Cat5e) 6 X V 1 8 4 0 - 2 A ☐ ☐ 0
▲ ▲
| |
Rigid TP cable for universal use, sold by the meter 20 m H 2
50 m N 5
100 m T 1
200 m T 2
500 m T 5
1000 m U 1
IE FC TP flexible cable GP 2 x 2 (PN Type B, Flexible cable for occasional movement, sold by the 6 X V 1 8 7 0 - 2 B
AWG22, Cat5e) meter, minimum order quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP trailing cable GP 2 x 2 (PN Type C, For drag chain use, sold by the meter, minimum 6 X V 1 8 7 0 - 2 D
AWG22, Cat5e) order quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP trailing cable GP pre-assembled with two Length 1 m, other lengths on request 6 X V 1 8 7 1 - 5 B H 1 0
IE FC RJ45 Plug 180
Note: M12 connecting cables, see
www.siemens.com/fastconnect
IE FC TP robust standard cable GP 2 x 2 (PN Type TPE coating, fixed installation for connection to 6 X V 1 8 4 1 - 2 A
A, AWG22, Cat5e) FC RJ45 plug/FC outlet RJ45; sold by the meter,
minimum order quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP robust flexible cable GP 2 x 2 (PN Type B, TPE coating, with flexible cores, for connection to 6 X V 1 8 4 1 - 2 B
AWG22, Cat5e) FC RJ45 plug/FC outlet RJ45; sold by the meter,
minimum order quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP trailing cable 2 x 2 (PN Type C, AWG22, TP installation cable, 4-wire, for use in highly flexible 6 X V 1 8 4 0 - 3 A H 1 0
Cat5e) applications (torsion); sold by the meter, minimum
order quantity: 20 m
TP installation cable for cable tray applications, 4-
wire, shielded CAT. 5
IE ground cable 2 x 2 Underground cable, 4-wire, shielded; sold by the 6 X V 1 8 7 1 - 2 G
meter, minimum order quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP robust food cable GP 2 x 2 (PN Type C, TP installation cable for use in the food and beverage 6 X V 1 8 8 1 - 2 A
AWG22, Cat5e) industry, 4-wire; sold by the meter, minimum order
quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP marine cable 2 x 2 (PN Type B, AWG22, Certified for shipbuilding, sold by the meter, 6 X V 1 8 4 0 - 4 A H 1 0
Cat5e) minimum order quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP food cable 2 x 2 (PN Type C, AWG22, TP installation cable for use in the food and beverage 6 X V 1 8 7 1 - 2 L
Cat5e) industry, sold by the meter, delivery unit max.
1000 m, minimum order quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP festoon cable 2 x 2 (PN Type B, AWG22, (PROFINET TYPE B), TP installation cable for festoon 6 X V 1 8 7 1 - 2 S
Cat5e) cabling, min. 5 million bending cycles, sold by the
meter, delivery unit max. 1000 m, minimum order
quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 2 x 2 (PN Type B, AWG22, (PROFINET TYPE B), shielded, halogen-free TP instal- 6 X V 1 8 7 1 - 2 F
Cat5e) lation cable for connection to IE FC outlet RJ45/IE
FC RJ45 plug for occasional movement, sold by the
meter; delivery unit max. 1000 m, minimum order
quantity: 20 m
IE TP torsion cable 2 x 2 (PN Type C, AWG22, Highly flexible cable for robot use, sold by the meter 6 X V 1 8 7 0 - 2 F
Cat5e)
You can find more information at: https://support.industry.siemens.com

Table 3.19/1 Extract of Selection and Ordering Data

252 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Communication
Industrial Ethernet – Cable System Technology – Communication Networking

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3.19
Power-system components for 8-wire cabling (4 x 2) 6 X V 1 8 7 8 - 2 ☐
▲
|
IE FC TP standard cable 4 x 2 (PN Type C, 8-wire rigid FC TP installation cable (CAT 6) for universal use, sold by the A
AWG24, Cat6A) meter, delivery unit max. 1000 m, minimum order quantity: 20 m
IE FC TP flexible cable 4 x 2 (PN Type C, Cord for occasional movement, sold by the meter B
AWG24, Cat6A)
IE FC TP trailing cable GP 4 x 2, (PN Type C, AWG 24, for connection to IE FC RJ45 plug 4 x 2, AWG24, sold by the C
AWG24, Cat6A) meter, delivery unit max. 1000 m, minimum order quantity 20 m
IE ground cable 4 x 2, (PN Type C, AWG24, Underground extension cable, CAT6A, 8-wire, shielded, cable for G
Cat6A) connection to IE FC RJ45 plug 4 x 2, AWG24, sold by the meter, delivery
unit max. 1000 m, minimum order quantity 20 m
IE FC TP FRNC cable GP 4x2 (PN Type C, For connection with IE FC RJ45 Plug 4x2; 8 wires F
AWG24, Cat6A)
IE connecting cable RJ45-180/RJ45-180 6 X V 1 8 7 8 - 5 B ☐ ☐ ☐
▲ ▲ ▲
| | |
Pre-assembled IE FC FRNC cable GP 4x2 IE FC FRNC cable 4 x 2, 2 m H 2 0
(AWG24, Cat6A) with 2 IE FC RJ45 plugs IE FC FRNC cable 4 x 2, 3 m H 3 0
180 4 x 2 IE FC FRNC cable 4 x 2, 5 m H 5 0
Lengths: 2 m to 30 m IE FC FRNC cable 4 x 2, 10 m N 1 0
Note: For M12 connecting cables, see Industry IE FC FRNC cable 4 x 2, 15 m N 1 5
Mall IE FC FRNC cable 4 x 2, 20 m N 2 0
IE FC FRNC cable 4 x 2, 25 m N 2 5
IE FC FRNC cable 4 x 2, 30 m N 3 0
TP Cord RJ45/RJ45 Patch Cord (Cat6A, 1m) 6 X V 1 8 7 0 - ☐ ☐ H 1 0
Note: For further lengths see Industry Mall ▲ ▲
| |
Jacket colour green 3 Q
Jacket colour red 4 R
Jacket colour yellow 4 G
Jacket colour blue 4 B
Jacket colour grey 4 U
IE FC RJ45 plug 4x2 Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RJ45 6 G K 1 9 0 1 - 1 B B 1 2 - 2 A A 0
plug 180 4x 2, RJ45 plug connector;
(10/100/1000/10000 Mbit/s) with sturdy metal
housing and FC connectivity technique, Cat6A,
for IE FC cable 4 x 2 (AWG24); 180° cable
IE FC RJ45 plug 2x2 Industrial Ethernet FastConnect RJ45 plug 180 6 G K 1 9 0 1 - 1 B B 1 0 - 2 A A 0
2x 2, RJ45 plug connector (10/100 Mbit/s)
with sturdy metal housing and FC connectivity
technique, Cat5e, for IE FC cable 2x 2; 180°
cable
You can find information on other cables (such as PCF, POF, or glass optical fibers, Industrial Twisted Pairs, energy cables) – assembled or sold by the
meter – and the corresponding plug connectors at: http://www.siemens.com/fastconnect or at: https://support.industry.siemens.com. For customized
cables please send your enquiry to [email protected].

Table 3.19/2 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 253
Communication
Industrial Ethernet – Cable System Technology – Communication Networking

3.19

254 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Power Supply

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 255
Power Supply
LOGO!Power

Description
The miniature power supply units in the same design as the
LOGO!8 modules offer great performance in the smallest space.
Efficiency has been improved across the entire load range,
and the low power losses in no-load operation ensure efficient
operation. The wide-range input for single-phase networks as
well as connection with direct voltage networks, the wide oper-
ating temperature range, comprehensive certifications as well
as switch-on behavior optimized for capacitive loads makes
4.1 them suitable for universal use. These reliable power supplies
with their flat, stepped profile can be used extremely flexibly
in numerous applications such as in distribution boards, for
example.
To further increase 24 V availability, the 24 V LOGO!Power
power supply units can be combined with DC-UPS, redundancy
and selectivity modules.

Benefits
• Low structural width with minimum of 18 mm to maximum of [P_KT01_XX_01789P, 1, --_--]
72 mm, thus requiring very little space in the control cabinet
or distribution board Figure 4.1/1 LOGO!Power, 1-phase, 24 V, 0,6 A

• Gesteigerte Energieeffizienz durch hohen Wirkungsgrad bis zu

90 % über den gesamten Leistungsbereich und ERP-konforme
Leerlaufverlustleistung von < 0,3 W
• Global use due to operating temperature range from -25 °C to
+70 °C and international certificates
• Load monitoring thanks to real-time measurement of the
output current without disconnecting the cable, i.e. without
interrupting the DC supply
• Flexible mounting with standard rail or wall mounting in
different installation positions
• Broad portfolio including 11 devices with DC 5 V, 12 V, 15 V
and 24 V up to 100 watts (new: 12 V/0.9 A and 24 V/0.6 A)
• Flexible operation in all standard single-phase supply
networks thanks to wide-range input of AC 100 V to 240 V
without switchover and operation on DC networks with
DC 110 V to 300 V
• Reliability due to problem-free connection of loads with high
inrush currents thanks to power reserve when starting up as
well as constant current in the event of overload

256 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Power Supply
LOGO!Power

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

LOGO!Power, 1-phase 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

LOGO!POWER 5 V 6 E P 3 3 1 ☐ - 6 S B 0 0 - 0 A Y 0
▲
|
3 A Stabilized power supply 0
4.1
Input: AC 100 V to240 V
Output: DC 5 V/3 A
6.3 A Stabilized power supply 1
Input: AC 100 V to 240 V
Output: DC 5 V/6.3 A
LOGO!POWER 12 V 6 E P 3 3 2 ☐ - 6 S B 0 0 - 0 A Y 0
▲
|
0.9 A Stabilized power supply 0
Input: AC 100 V to 240 V
Output: DC 12 V/0.9 A
1.9 A Stabilized power supply 1
Input: AC 100 V to 240 V
Output: DC 12 V/1.9 A
4.5 A Stabilized power supply 2
Input: AC 100 to 240 V
Output: DC 12 V/4.5 A
LOGO!POWER 15 V 6 E P 3 3 2 ☐ - 6 S B 1 0 - 0 A Y 0
▲
|
1.9 A Stabilized power supply 1
Input: AC 100 V to 240 V
Output: DC 15 V/1.9 A
4 A Stabilized power supply 2
Input: AC 100 V to 240 V
Output: DC 15 V/4 A
LOGO!POWER 24 V 6 E P 3 3 3 ☐ - 6 S B 0 0 - 0 A Y 0
▲
|
0.6 A Stabilized power supply 0
Input: AC 100 V to 240 V
Output: DC 24 V/0.6 A
1.3 A Stabilized power supply 1
Input: AC 100 V to 240 V
Output: DC 24 V/1.3 A
2.5 A Stabilized power supply 2
Input: AC 100 V to 240 V
Output: DC 24 V/2.5 A
4 A Stabilized power supply 3
Input: AC 100 V to 240 V
Output: DC 24 V/4 A
For further devices and designs, see Catalog KT 10.1.

Table 4.1/1 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 257
Power Supply
SITOP PSU – PSU6200

Description
The SITOP PSU6200 product family is the new standard
power supply for customers with high technical requirements
regarding reliability, efficiency and integration. It is suitable for
many fields of application, particularly in the industrial environ-
ment, such as series machine building. The SITOP PSU6200
represents the state-of-the-art and takes the SITOP product port-
folio into new dimensions of efficiency.
The slim and excellent design of the PSU6200 family combined
with the push-in terminals means easy installation and wiring.
The power supply units in this product family are all-rounders
4.2
featuring a long service life and absolute reliability.
The high efficiency of up to 96 % guarantees resource-saving
energy consumption.
To further increase the 24 V availability, the SITOP PSU6200
power supplies can be combined with buffer, DC UPS, redun-
dancy and selectivity modules.

Benefits [P_KT01_XX_01890, 1, --_--]

Product highlights of the product line Figure 4.2/1 SITOP PSU6200, 1-phase, 24 V/10 A

• Diagnostics monitor56 • Push-in connection system

– LED display for DC OK, utilization (<30 %, >30 %, >60 %,
– Easy, time-saving installation without need for tools
>90 %) and remaining life time
– Additional minus terminal56 (grounding) for wiring
• Diagnostics interface56 according to PELV (Protected Extra Low Voltage)
– Provision of important operating parameters (e.g. output
current/voltage, overload, temperature status, undervoltage
• High overload capability57
and overvoltage detection at output, operating hours, – Power reserves in case of overload 150 % extra power for 5
device settings, etc.) s/min
– Continuous 120 % rated current up to 45 °C ambient
• Switchable output characteristic56 temperature
– Constant current: Power supply not switched off immedi-
ately in the event of overload
– Parallel operation: Uniform load sharing between power
supply units connected in parallel for longer service life in
every scenario
• Rugged input
– Active PFC (Power Factor Correction)56 for lower reactive
and inrush current and protection against mains pulses
– Optimized protection of the input circuit
– Wide-range input
– DC capability of 1-phase devices
– Continuous operation possible on 2 phases of 3-phase
devices
• Coordinated product family
– For 12 V, 24 V and 48 V applications of varying power
requirements
– 24 V versions for NEC Class 2 and Ex protection applications
• Narrow overall width
– For direct side-by-side mounting without lateral clearance
requirements
– Visually attractive design (IF Design Award 2019)

56
57 from 24 V/5 A and 12 A/7 A

258 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Power Supply
SITOP PSU – PSU6200

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SITOP PSU6200, 1-phase 6 E P 3 3 ☐ ☐ - 7 ☐ B 0 0 - ☐ A X 0

▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | |
DC 12 V/2 A 2 1 S 0
DC 12 V/7 A 2 3 S 0
DC 12 V/12 A 2 4 S 3
4.2
DC 24 V/1.3 A 3 1 S 0
DC 24 V/2.5 A 3 2 S 0
DC 24 V/3.7 A 3 3 L 0
DC 24 V/5 A 3 3 S 0
DC 24 V/10 A 3 4 S 3
DC 24 V/20 A 3 6 S 3
DC 48 V/5 A 4 4 S 3
DC 48 V/10 A 4 6 S 3

Table 4.2/1 Selection and Ordering Data

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SITOP PSU6200, 3-phase 6 E P 3 4 ☐ ☐ - 7 S B 0 0 - ☐ A X 0

▲ ▲ ▲
| | |
DC 24 V/5 A 3 3 0
DC 24 V/10 A 3 4 3
DC 24 V/20 A 3 6 3
DC 24 V/40 A 3 7 3
DC 48 V/5 A 4 4 3
DC 48 V/10 A 4 6 3
DC 48 V/20 A 4 7 3

Table 4.2/2 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 259
Power Supply
SITOP PSU – PSU8600

Description
As a unique power supply system with network integration,
SITOP PSU8600 sets new standards in industrial power supplies.
It can be fully integrated into Totally Integrated Automation
(TIA) and networked via OPC UA and SITOP Manager with auto-
mation systems from different manufacturers.
The comprehensive functions offer new possibilities, and the
online diagnostics increase the reliability of the power supply.
Voltage and current response thresholds can be set individually
for each output of the power supply system, and selective moni-
toring of each output for overload allows fast fault location.
4.2
Depending on requirements, more modules from the modular
system can be added without wiring work, for example to buffer
against power failures in the second, minute or hour range, or
for increasing the number of outputs.
SITOP PSU8600 can be easily configured in the TIA Portal: From
the product selection through the network integration to the
parameter assignment.
Comprehensive diagnostic and maintenance information is [P_KT01_XX_01677P, 1, --_--]

available via PROFINET. It can be evaluated directly in

Figure 4.2/2 SITOP PSU8600, 3-phase, 24 V/20 A
SIMATIC S7 and visualized in SIMATIC WinCC. Remote moni-
toring is also possible via the integrated web server. Optimal
support is also provided for energy management of plant or
• SIMATIC S7 function blocks for easy integration in STEP 7 user
programs
machines: From the acquisition of energy data from individual
outputs, the specific activation and deactivation of outputs • Fast integration in operator control and monitoring with
via PROFIenergy, to direct integration in power management WinCC faceplates
systems. • Direct integration in SIMATIC PCS 7 via SITOP library
The integrated OPC UA server also allows direct integration into • Easy configuration and monitoring via SITOP Manager
automation applications with OPC UA clients made by different
manufacturers, e.g. of controllers or PCs. The power supply
• Preventive maintenance reduces downtimes
system can be both configured and diagnosed via the open • Energy savings during breaks through targeted switching of
interface, e.g. via SITOP Manager. outputs
• Easy integration in energy management systems (PROFIe-
Benefits nergy protocol)
• Space and cost savings through up to 36 integrated outputs • Variant with EtherNet/IP interface (2 ports), integrated in the
with selective monitoring (no need for one or more additional Rockwell Automation Studio 5000 design software
selectivity modules)
• Individually parameterizable outputs (elimination of an addi-
tional power supply unit, e.g. for 5 V, 12 V or 15 V)
• Compensation for power losses can be set separately for each
output
• Narrow width without lateral installation clearances
• Low temperature rise in the control cabinet due to very high
efficiency
• Depending on requirements, modular expansion without
wiring work (additional outputs, buffer module, UPS module)
• Reliable operation by bridging power failures in the second,
minute or hour range
• Two integrated Ethernet/PROFINET or Ethernet/IP ports (no
external switch required)
• Integrated web server
• Integrated OPC UA server for open, multi-vendor communica-
tion Integrierter OPC UA Server
• Complete integration in TIA requires less time and reduces
costs during configuration (TIA Portal) and in operation

260 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Power Supply
SITOP PSU – PSU8600

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SITOP PSU8600 6 E P 3 ☐ 3 ☐ - 8 ☐ B ☐ 0 - 2 ☐ Y 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | |
24 V/20 A/4x5 A, Stabilized power supply 3 6 M 0 C
Input: AC 100 V to AC 240 V, DC 110 V to DC 220 V
Output: DC 24 V/20 A/4x5 A with PN/IE connection, Web server integrated, OPC UA server integrated 4.2
24 V/20 A/4x5 A PN, Stabilized power supply 4 6 M 0 C
Input: 3 AC 400 V to AC 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/20 A/4x5 A with PN/IE connection, Web server integrated, OPC UA server integrated
24 V/20 A PN, Stabilized power supply 4 6 S 0 A
Input: 3 AC 400 V to AC 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/20 A with PN/IE connection, Web server integrated, OPC UA server integrated
24 V/40 A/4x10 A PN, Stabilized power supply 4 7 M 0 C
Input: 3 AC 400 V to AC 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/40 A/4x10 A with PN/IE connection, Web server integrated, OPC UA server integrated
24 V/40 A/4x10 A EIP, Stabilized power supply 4 7 M 1 C
Input: 3 AC 400 V to AC 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/40 A/4x10 A with Ethernet/IP connection
24 V/20 A PN, Stabilized power supply 4 7 S 0 A
Input: 3 AC 400 V to AC 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/40 A with PN/IE connection, Web server integrated, OPC UA server integrated
SITOP BUF8600 6 E P 4 2 9 ☐ - 8 H B ☐ 0 - 0 X Y 0
▲ ▲
| |
4 s Buffer module for PSU8600. Buffer capacity 4 s/40 A with dual-layer capacitators maintenance-free 3 0
10 s Buffer module for PSU8600. Buffer capacity 10 s/40 A with double-layer capacitors maintenance-free 5 0
100 ms Buffer module for PSU8600. Buffer capacity 100 ms/40 A with electrolytic capacitors maintenance-free 7 0
300 ms Buffer module for PSU8600. Buffer capacity 300 ms/40 A with electrolytic capacitors maintenance-free 7 1
SITOP UPS8600 UPS module for PSU8600 6 E P 4 1 9 7 - 8 A B 0 0 - 0 X Y 0
Nominal voltage: DC 48 V
Buffer power: 960 W
Charging power: 120 W, 60 W (switchable)
SITOP BAT8600 6 E P 4 1 4 ☐ - 8 ☐ B 0 0 - 0 X Y 0
▲ ▲
| |
LiFePO4 battery module for UPS8600 DC 48 V/264 Wh energy storage: mainten.-free lithium iron-phosph. 3 J
batteries
Pb battery module for UPS8600 DC 48 V/380 Wh energy storage: mainten.-free lead batteries 5 G
SITOP CNX8600 6 E P 4 4 3 ☐ - 8 X B 0 0 - 0 ☐ Y 0
▲ ▲
| |
4x5 A Extension module for PSU8600; Output: DC 24 V/4x5 A 6 C

8x2,5 A Extension module for PSU8600; Output: DC 24 V/8x2.5 A 6 D

4x10 A Extension module for PSU8600; Output: DC 24 V/4x10 A 7 C

Table 4.2/3 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 261
Power Supply
SITOP PSU – PSU8200

Description
The single-phase, two-phase and three-phase SITOP modular
units are the technology power supplies for demanding solu-
tions. They offer maximum functionality for use in complex
plants and machines. The wide-range input allows a connection
to almost any electrical power system worldwide and ensures
a high degree of safety even if there are large voltage fluctu-
ations. They offer outstanding overload characteristics: Power
boost delivers up to three-times the rated current for short
periods of time, and with extra power of 150 %, loads with
high power consumption can be connected without any prob-
4.2 lems. And in the event of an overload, you can choose between
constant current or automatic restart. The extremely high effi-
ciency keeps energy consumption and heat buildup in the
control cabinet low, and the compact metal enclosure also saves
space.
To further increase the 24 V availability, the SITOP smart power
supplies can be combined with buffer, DC UPS, redundancy
and selectivity modules.
[P_KT01_XX_01551P, 1, --_--]

Benefits Figure 4.2/3 SITOP PSU8200, 1-phase, 24 V/5 A

• 1-phase, DC 24 V/5 A, 10 A, 20 A, 40 A
• 1- and 2-phase, DC 24 V/5 A, 10 A
• 3-phase, DC 24 V/20 A, 40 A, 36 V/13 A and 48 V/10 A, 20 A
• Extremely slim design – no lateral installation clearances
required
• Power boost with 3 times rated current (for 25 ms) for trip-
ping protective devices
• Extra power with 1.5 times rated current (5 s/min) for brief
functional overload
• Selectable short-circuit response between constant current
and restart
• Symmetrical load distribution can be selected for parallel
operation
• Operating state on 3 LEDs
• Extremely high efficiency up to 94 %
• Wide temperature range from -25 °C to +70 °C
• Comprehensive certifications, such as cULus and DNV GL

262 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Power Supply
SITOP PSU – PSU8200

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SITOP PSU8200, 1-phase

24 V/5 A Stabilized power supply 6 E P 3 3 3 3 - 8 S B 0 0 - 0 A Y 0
Input: AC 120/230 V
Output: DC 24 V/5 A
24 V/10 A Stabilized power supply 6 E P 3 3 3 4 - 8 S B 0 0 - 0 A Y 0
Input: AC 120/230 V 4.2
Output: DC 24 V/10 A
24 V/20 A Stabilized power supply 6 E P 1 3 3 6 - 3 B A 1 0
Input: AC 120 V/230 V
Output: DC 24 V/20 A
24 V/40 A Stabilized power supply 6 E P 3 3 3 7 - 8 S B 0 0 - 0 A Y 0
Input: AC 120/230 V
Output: DC 24 V/40 A
SITOP PSU200M, 1- and 2-phase
24 V/5 A Stabilized power supply 6 E P 1 3 3 3 - 3 B A 1 0
Input: AC 120 V to 230 V/230 V to 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/5 A
24 V plus 5 A Stabilized power supply 6 E P 1 3 3 6 - 3 B A 1 0 - 8 A C 0
Input: AC 120 V to 230 V/230 V to 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/5 A Option for with protective varnish
24 V/10 A Stabilized power supply 6 E P 1 3 3 4 - 3 B A 1 0
Input: AC 120 V to 230 V/230 V to 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/10 A
24 V plus 10 A Stabilized power supply 6 E P 1 3 3 4 - 3 B A 1 0 - 8 A B 0
Input: AC 120 V to 230 V/230 V to 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/10 A Option for with protective varnish
SITOP PSU8200, 3-phase 6 E P 3 4 ☐ ☐ - 8 S B ☐ 0 - 0 A Y 0
▲ ▲ ▲
| | |
24 V/20 A Stabilized power supply 3 6 0
Input: 3 AC 400 V to 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/20 A
24 V/40 A Stabilized power supply 3 7 0
Input: 3 AC 400 V to 500 V
Output: DC 24 V/40 A
36 V/13 A Stabilized power supply 4 6 1
Input: 3 AC 400 V to 500 V
Output: DC 36 V/13 A
48 V/10 A Stabilized power supply 4 6 0
Input: 3 AC 400 V to 500 V
Output: DC 48 V/10 A
48 V/20 A Stabilized power supply 4 7 0
Input: 3 AC 400 V to 500 V
Output: DC 48 V/20 A

Table 4.2/4 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 263
Power Supply
SITOP Add-on Modules – Redundancy and Buffer Modules

Description
A power supply unit on its own cannot guarantee fault-free 24 V
supply. Power failures, extreme variations in the mains voltage,
or a faulty load can bring plant operation to a standstill and
cause high costs. The add-on modules offer everything from
extensive protection against interference on the primary and
secondary side right up to complete all-round protection.
The SITOP redundancy modules are the optimal extension for
all power supplies to ensure additional protection from failure
of the control voltage. The redundancy module decouples the
feeding power supply units and, in case of failure of one unit,
the other one automatically takes over the DC supply. SITOP
RED1200 redundancy modules compensate for the missing
4.3
signal function when power supplies with diagnostic signals
are used. If a fault occurs, the signal from the defective power
supply remains off. The error message is still generated. The
rugged RED1200 add-on modules decouple power supply units
with output voltages from 10 to 58 V.
Benefits [P_KT01_XX_01305P, 2, --_--]

• High safety of the control voltage due to redundant design Figure 4.3/1 SITOP RED1200 Redundancy Module 2 x 10 A
• Power is reliably supplied even when a power supply fails
• Compact redundancy modules for power supplies up to 40 A
• Redundancy module 24 V/NEC Class 2 with limiting to 100 VA
• SITOP PSE202U 24 V: Diagnostic message via LED and
signaling contacts with adjustable switching thresholds
• SITOP RED1200 12 V, 24 V, 48 V: Compact and high dielectric
strength
The SITOP PSE201U and SITOP BUF1200 buffer modules bridge
short-term power failures in a range of seconds. The PSE201U
buffer module can be used with 24 V power supply units of
the SITOP PSU8200, PSU6200 and SITOP smart product lines,
the BUF1200 buffer module with the 24 V power supply units
of all SITOP product lines. The buffers modules are equipped
with maintenance-free capacitors as energy storage units and
automatically take over the 24 V power supply in case of a line
voltage failure.
The SITOP DC UPS modules offer protection in the event of
extended power failures. The maintenance-free DC UPS with
capacitors supplies reliable 24 V up to the minute range and the
DC UPS with battery modules supplies reliable 24 V up to the
hour range.
Benefits
• About 80% of the power system faults in Germany last less
than 100 ms; these 80% can be bridged with a buffer module
without disturbance
• Inexpensive protection against power failure up to seconds
• Support of the power supply unit in case of short-term
increased power demand
• High load current up to 40 A
• Connection to the power supply unit only via two lines
• Short charging times
• Long service life
• Parallel connection of multiple buffer modules possible
• Fast mounting onto top hat DIN rail and simple wiring

264 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Power Supply
SITOP Add-on Modules – Redundancy and Buffer Modules

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SITOP BUF1200 6 E P 4 2 3 1 - 7 H B 0 0 - 0 A X 0
SITOP BUF1200 buffer module Buffer time 300 ms at 40 A depending on load current
SITOP PSE201U 6 E P 1 9 6 1 - 3 B A 0 1 - 0 A X 0
SITOP PSE201U buffer module Buffer time 200 ms to 40 A depending on load current
SITOP RED1200 6 E P 4 3 4 ☐ - 7 R B 0 0 - 0 A X 0
▲
|
Redundancy module 6 4.3
Input/output:DC 12 V, 24 V, 48 V/20 A Suitable for decoupling two SITOP power supplies with a maximum of 10
A output current each
Redundancy module 7
Input/output:DC 12 V, 24 V, 48 V/40 A Suitable for decoupling two SITOP power supplies with a maximum of 20
A output current each
Redundancy module 8
Input/output:DC 12 V, 24 V, 48 V/40 A Suitable for decoupling two SITOP power supplies with a maximum of 40
A output current each
SITOP PSE202U 6 E P 1 9 6 ☐ - ☐ B A ☐ ☐ - 0 A X 0
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | |
Redundany module 1 3 2 1
Input/output:DC 24 V/40 A Suitable for decoupling two SITOP power supplies with a maximum of 20 A output
current each
Redundany module 2 2 0 0
Input/output: DC 24 V/NEC Class 2 Suitable for decoupling two SITOP power supplies output power limited to <
100 VA
Redundany module 4 2 0 0
Input/output: DC 24 V/10 A suitable for decoupling two SITOP power supplies with a maximum of 5 A output
current each

Table 4.3/1 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 265
Power Supply
SITOP Add-on Modules – Selectivity Modules

Description
The SITOP PSE200U and SITOP SEL1200/SEL1400 selectivity
modules are the optimal expansion for all 24 V power supplies
in order to distribute the load current across multiple feeders
and monitor it. Overload and short-circuit in one or more
feeders is reliably detected and signaled.
The electronics permit brief current peaks caused, for example,
by high inrush currents, but disconnect feeders in the event of
an extended overload. This is ensured even on high-resistance
lines and in the case of "creeping" short-circuits. In such cases,
miniature circuit breakers fail to trip, or trip too late, even if the
power supply unit could deliver the required tripping current.
The SITOP expansion module continues to supply the intact
4.3
feeders with 24 V, without any interruption and totally reaction
free – features which avoid a potential total system failure.

Benefits
• Reliable detection of overload or short-circuit in the 24 V
circuit [P_KT01_XX_01939, 1, --_--]

• Safe tripping regardless of line resistance Figure 4.3/2 SITOP RED1200 Redundancy Module 2 x 10 A
• Switching characteristic for standard protection and high
inrush currents (SEL1200) • Evaluation via free SIMATIC S7 function blocks
• Current-limiting characteristic for increased fuse protection (S7-1500/1200/400/300) and faceplates for SIMATIC Comfort
requirements (SEL1400, PSE200U) Panels for SITOP SEL1200 and SITOP SEL1400

• Either 4 or 8 load feeders per module with individually adjust- • Evaluation via free SIMATIC S7 function blocks
able response threshold (S7-1500/1200/400/300) or SIMOTION function blocks for
SITOP PSE200U modules with single-channel message
– 4 outputs 24 V, adjustable, 0.5 – 3 A or 3 – 10 A (PSE200U)
– 4 outputs 24 V, adjustable, 2 – 10 A (SEL1200, SEL1400) • Simple configuration thanks to individual setting of maximum
current for every output using potentiometers
– 8 outputs 24 V, adjustable, 1 – 5 A or 2 – 10 A (SEL1200,
SEL1400) • 3-color LEDs for fast on-site fault localization
– 4 outputs 48 V, adjustable, 1 – 10 A (SEL1200) • Remote reset possible from a central location
• Common signaling contact or single-channel diagnostics for • Simple commissioning thanks to manual switch on/off of
voltage, current, set threshold value, and if applicable reason outputs
for switch off (SEL1200, SEL1400)
• Sequential connection of feeders to reduce total inrush
• Common signaling contact or single-channel signaling for current
output state (PSE200U)
• Sealable transparent cover over adjusters for currents and
• Voltage measuring points for output currents (1 V = 1 A), times protects against maladjustment
disconnection of load circuit is not required (PSE200U)
• Library for visualization in SIMATIC PCS 7
• Versions with power limitation of the outputs to 100 VA
according to NEC Class 2 (PSE200U)

266 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Power Supply
SITOP Add-on Modules – Selectivity Modules

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SITOP select 6 E P 1 9 6 1 - 2 B A 0 0
Selectivity module, 4-channel Input: DC 24 V Output: DC 24 V/10 A per output. Adjustable response threshold 2 A to 10 A
SITOP SEL1200 6 E P 4 4 ☐ ☐ - 7 F B 0 0 - 3 ☐ X 0
▲ ▲ ▲
| | |
Selectivity module, 4-channel, switching Input: DC 24 V Output: DC 24 V/10 A per output. Adjustable response 3 7 C
threshold 2 A to 10 A
Selectivity module, 8-channel, switching Input: DC 24 V Output: DC 24 V/5 A per output. Adjustable response 3 7 D
threshold 1 A to 5 A 4.3

Selectivity module, 8-channel, switching Input: DC 24 V Output: DC 24 V/10 A per output. Adjustable response 3 8 D
threshold 2 A to 10 A
Selectivity module, 4-channel, switching Input: DC 48 V Output: DC 48 V/10 A per output. Adjustable response 4 8 C
threshold 1 A to 10 A
SITOP SEL1400 6 E P 4 4 3 ☐ - 7 E B 0 0 - 3 ☐ X 0
▲ ▲
| |
Selectivity module, 4-channel, limiting Input: DC 24 V Output: DC 24 V/10 A per output. Adjustable response 7 C
threshold 2 A to 10 A
Selectivity module, 8-channel, limiting Input: DC 24 V Output: DC 24 V/5 A per output. Adjustable response 7 D
threshold 1 A to 5 A
Selectivity module, 8-channel, limiting Input: DC 24 V Output: DC 24 V/10 A per output. Adjustable response 8 D
threshold 2 A to 10 A
SITOP PSE200U 6 E P 1 9 6 1 - 2 B A ☐ 1
▲
|
SITOP PSE200U 3 A With common alarm signal 1
6EP1961-2BA11
Selectivity module, 4-channel Input: DC 24 V Output: DC 24 V/3 A per output. Adjustable
response threshold 0.5 A to 3 A With single-channel signaling 3
SITOP PSE200U 3 A NEC Class 2 With common alarm signal 5
6EP1961-2BA51
Selectivity module, 4-channel Input: DC 24 V Output: DC 24 V/3 A per output. Adjustable
response threshold 0.5 A to 3 A With single-channel signaling 6
SITOP PSE200U 10 A With common alarm signal 2
6EP1961-2BA21
Selectivity module, 4-channel Input: DC 24 V Output: DC 24 V/10 A per output. Adjustable
response threshold 3 A to 10 A With single-channel signaling 4

Table 4.3/2 Selection and Ordering Data

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 267
Power Supply
SITOP DC UPS – With Capacitors - UPS500

Description
SITOP 24 V power supplies can be expanded with a
SITOP UPS500 uninterruptible DC power supply (DC UPS) for
bridging short-term power failures in the order of minutes.
In PC-based automation solutions, the highly capacitive double-
layer capacitors of the SITOP UPS500 supply enough energy to
safeguard operating and application data and close software
applications in a defined manner. You can increase the buffer
times using SITOP PSU501S expansion modules (up to 3).
• 24 V buffering for a few minutes to allow data to be backed
up and applications to be closed
• Absolutely maintenance-free
• Long lifetime, even at high temperatures
4.4
• High ambient temperatures up to+60 °C
• Short charging times
• No ventilation is required since no gas is emitted
• Distributed applications possible without control cabinet
• Software tool, free of charge, for easy configuring and inte-
[P_KT01_XX_01079P, 1, --_--]

grating in PC-based systems Figure 4.4/1 SITOP UPS500S 15 A, 2.5 kWs

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SITOP UPS500S 6 E P 1 9 3 3 - 2 E C ☐ 1
▲
|
Maintenance free uninterruptible power supply with USB interface Basic device 2.5 kWs 4
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/15 A
Maintenance free uninterruptible power supply with USB interface Basic device 5 kWs 5
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/15 A
SITOP UPS501S 6 E P 1 9 3 5 - 5 P G 0 1
Expansion module 5 kWs for UPS500S (2.5 kWs, 5 kWs)

Table 4.4/1 Selection and Ordering Data

268 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Power Supply
SITOP DC UPS – UPS1600 DC UPS Modules with BAT1600 Battery Modules

Description
By combining one SITOP UPS1600 DC UPS module with at
least one BAT1600 battery module and a SITOP power supply
unit, longer power failures can be bridged without any interrup-
tion. The intelligent battery management automatically detects
the BAT1600 energy storage unit, ensures optimized tempera-
ture specific charging and continuous monitoring. The compact
DC UPS modules have overload capability, for example, to
supply the inrush current of industrial PCs. In stand-alone mode,
they support starting from the battery.
The DC UPS communicates openly over a USB or Ethernet/
PROFINET port. It is easily integrated into the PC or PLC envi-
ronment over the two Ethernet/PROFINET ports. Total integra-
tion in TIA provides user-friendly engineering in the TIA Portal
and is supported with ready-to-use function blocks for S7 user
4.4
programs and WinCC faceplates for fast visualization.
SITOP Manager supports easy monitoring and configuration of
PC systems, e.g. shutdown of multiple PCs in accordance with
the master-slave principle. [P_KT01_XX_01453P, 1, --_--]

The UPS1600 modules with Ethernet/PROFINET ports have an

Figure 4.4/2 SITOP UPS1600 24 V/10 A
OPC UA server with which the DC UPS can communicate with
both PCs and PLCs, even from different manufacturers, thanks
to the open communication standard. Parameter assignment
• Defined shutdown of several PCs or controllers on one UPS
(versions with Ethernet/PROFINET
and the diagnostics of the uninterruptible power supply are
possible via the open interface. The integrated web server • Remote monitoring via integrated web server (versions with
supports remote monitoring of the DC UPS. Ethernet/PROFINET)

• 24 V buffering for a few hours for the purpose of continuing • Time-saving engineering in PC-based systems via SITOP
processes Manager (versions with Ethernet/PROFINET)

• Open communication over USB or two Ethernet/PROFINET • Integrated OPC UA server facilitates flexible, multi-vendor
ports communication with other systems (versions with Ethernet/
PROFINET)
• High-performance DC UPS modules in space-saving, slim
design • Full integration in TIA saves time and costs during the
planning stage and in operation (versions with Ethernet/
• High overload capability for mains and buffering operation PROFINET)
• Starting from the battery module supports stand-alone mode, • User-friendly engineering in the TIA Portal
e.g. for starting generators
• SIMATIC S7 function blocks for easy integration in STEP 7 user
• Easy configuration thanks to automatic detection of battery programs
modules
• Fast integration in operator control and monitoring with
• High reliability and availability due to monitoring of the WinCC faceplates
operational readiness, battery feeder, aging and charging
status • Direct integration in SIMATIC PCS 7 via SITOP library
• Battery-saving charging due to temperature-specific charging
characteristic

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 269
Power Supply
SITOP DC UPS – UPS1600 DC UPS Modules with BAT1600 Battery Modules

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SITOP UPS1600 6 E P 4 1 3 ☐ - 3 A B 0 0 - ☐ A Y 0
▲ ▲
| |
24 V/10 A uninterrupted power supply 4 0
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/10 A
24 V/10 A USB uninterrupted power supply with USB interface 4 1
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/10 A
4.4
24 V/10 A Ethernet/PROFINET uninterrupted power supply with Ethernet/PROFINET interface/OPC UA Server/ 4 2
Webserver
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/10 A
24 V/20 A uninterrupted power supply 6 0
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/20 A
24 V/20 A USB uninterrupted power supply with USB interface 6 1
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/20 A
24 V/20 A Ethernet/ PROFINET uninterrupted power supply with Ethernet/PROFINET interface/OPC UA Server/ 6 2
Webserver
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/20 A
24 V/40 A uninterrupted power supply 7 0
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/40 A
24 V/40 A USB uninterrupted power supply with USB interface 7 1
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/40 A
24 V/40 A Ethernet/PROFINET uninterrupted power supply with Ethernet/PROFINET interface/OPC UA Server/ 7 2
Webserver
Input: DC 24 V
Output: DC 24 V/40 A

Table 4.4/2 Selection and Ordering Data

270 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Power Supply
SITOP DC UPS – UPS1600 with Battery Modules BAT1600

Description
The intelligent UPS1600 battery management charges the
BAT1600 with the optimum temperature-controlled charging
characteristics and monitors the status (operating data and diag-
nostic information) of the connected battery modules via the
energy storage link. For longer buffer times, up to six battery
modules can be connected in parallel. These can be mounted
onto a DIN rail or directly to the wall.

Benefits
BAT1600 family for SITOP UPS1600 DC UPS modules
• Five batteries with different technologies and applications;
2.5 Ah & 7 Ah LiFePO, 3.2 Ah to 38 Ah lead gel batteries
• The capacity can be expanded by parallel switching of the
batteries. Up to six batteries are supported 4.4

• Smart communication (Energy Storage Link - ESL) is respon-

sible for battery management to achieve optimum perform-
ance
• Three-color status LED for easier commissioning
[P_KT01_XX_01972, 1, --_--]

Figure 4.4/3 SITOP BAT1600 Family

• State of Health (SOH) calculation for batteries
• SITOP BAT1600 2.5 Ah Li, 3.2 Ah Pb, and 7.5 Ah Li mountable
on DIN rail
• SITOP BAT1600 2.5 Ah Li and 3.2 Ah Pb have the same foot-
print as SITOP UPS1100 1.2 Ah Pb

The table shows the maximum buffer times for the SITOP BAT 1600 battery modules for different load currents

Product SITOP BAT1600 SITOP BAT1600 SITOP BAT1600 SITOP BAT1600 SITOP BAT1600
Trade Name
Type of 24 V/3.2 Ah 24 V/2.5 Ah LiFePO 24 V/12 Ah 24 V/7.5 Ah LiFePo 24 V/38 Ah
Power
Supply
Article No. 6EP4133-0GA00-0AY0 6EP4132-0JA00-0AY0 6EP4135-0GE00-0AY0 6EP4134-0JA00-0AY0 6EP4137-0GE00-0AY0
Load Buffer Times58
Current
1A 1 h 40 min 2 h 9 min 8 h 30 min 6 h 28 min 30 h
2A 50 min 1 h 13 min 4 h 20 min 3 h 39 min 16 h 40 min
3A 30 min 51 min 2 h 40 min 2 h 33 min 11 h 20 min
4A 20 min 39 min 1 h 50 min 1 h 57 min 8h
6A 10 min 27 min 1 h 20 min 1 h 20 min 5h
8A 6 min 20 min 50 min 61 min 3 h 40 min
10 A 4 min 16 min 40 min 49 min 2 h 50 min
12 A 2 min 14 min 30 min 41 min 2h
14 A 1 min 12 min 25 min 35 min 1 h 50 min
16 A < 1 min - 20 min 31 min 1 h 40 min
20 A - - 15 min 25 min 1 h 15 min
30 A - - 6 min 17 min 45 min
40 A - - 3 min 13 min 30 min

Table 4.4/3 Overview Battery Modules

58 Calculation of the buffer times is based on the discharge period of new and completely charged battery modules with a battery temperature of not less
than +25 °C until shutdown of the DC UPS (min. 20 V). Buffer times for additional values can be determined using the SITOP Selection Tool

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 271
Power Supply
SITOP DC UPS – UPS1600 with Battery Modules BAT1600

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23

SITOP BAT1600 6 E P 4 1 3 ☐ - 0 ☐ ☐ 0 0 - 0 A Y 0 - ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐
▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | |
SITOP BAT1600 battery module 2.5 Ah, LiFePO Lithium battery for 2 J A | | | |
SITOP UPS1600 DC
UPS module
For air-freight suitable 2 J A Z A 0 3
version with 30%
loading
SITOP BAT1600 battery module 7.5 Ah, LiFePO Lithium battery for 4 J A | | | |
4.4 SITOP UPS1600 DC
UPS module
For air-freight suitable 4 J A Z A 0 3
version with 30%
loading
SITOP BAT1600 battery module 3.2 Ah, Pb Lead-acid rechargeable battery for SITOP 3 G A
UPS1600 DC UPS module
SITOP BAT1600 battery module 12 Ah, Pb Lead-acid rechargeable battery for SITOP 5 G E
UPS1600 DC UPS module
SITOP BAT1600 battery module 38 Ah, Pb Lead-acid rechargeable battery for SITOP 7 G E
UPS1600 DC UPS module

Table 4.4/4 Selection and Ordering Data

272 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Miniature Current Transformers – 4NC for 100% Stator Ground-Fault Protection

Description
4NC are miniature current transformers with a transformation
ratio of 400 A/5 A for 100 % stator ground-fault protection (20
Hz trip initiation) in the SIPROTEC 7UM62 and SIPROTEC 7UM85
devices.

[KSO_63, 1, --_--]
5.1
Figure 5.1/1 Low Voltage Transformer KSO 63 from Ritz

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Current transformer 4 N C 5 2 2 5 - 2 C E 2 1
(400 A/5 A), can be used over short distances (burden < 5 VA)
In the event that the burden is > 5 VA
Request further information from the head office or the Ritz KSO 63 indoor window-type current transformer

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 273
Machine Protection
20 Hz Generator – 7XT33 100% Stator Ground-Fault Protection

Description
The 7XT33 is a 20-Hz generator for generating a square-wave
voltage of about 26 V. The maximum power consumption is <
100 VA. The 20-Hz generator is required for the 100 % stator
ground-fault protection in the SIPROTEC 7UM62 and 7UM85
devices. As the supply voltage, an alternating voltage or a direct
voltage may be used.

Functions
The 7XT33 has a wide-range power supply unit. The auxiliary
voltage of this unit in normal operation is assured by connection
to a voltage transformer having an output voltage of 3 x 100/AC
110 V (50 Hz/60 Hz). Optionally, the device can also be powered
with an auxiliary voltage (DC 10 V to 220 V) in uninterrupted
duty (see the connection example). In addition, it is possible to
supply power to the device, for example for a standstill test,
using 1-phase alternating voltage (AC 100 V to 230 V). The
auxiliary voltage of about DC 28 V, obtained from 2 DC/DC
converters (main and auxiliary power supply units) is converted
by a full-wave bridge circuit driven by a single-chip controller [7XT33, 1, --_--]

into a symmetrical, rectangular output voltage at a frequency Figure 5.2/1 20-Hz Generator 7XT33
5.2 of 20 Hz and a voltage of about 25 V. Proper operation of the
device is indicated by a green light-emitting diode, one on the
front and one on the back. Connection Example
In addition to controlling the output stage, the controller moni-
tors the device functions.

Applications
The 20-Hz generator 7XT33 is used in combination with the
band-pass filter 7XT34 in machine protection (7UM62/7UM85).
For the implementation of 100 % stator ground-fault protection,
it is the source of voltage injection into the generator neutral
point. Voltage injection can be performed by connecting the
7XT33 and the 7XT34 to the load resistance of a grounding [dw_connection_7XT33_to_DC-voltage-supply, 3, en_US]
or neutral-point transformer. The function of the 100 % stator
Figure 5.2/2 Interface of the 7XT33 to a DC Power Supply via a 2 A
ground-fault protection detects ground faults in the stator
Miniature Circuit Breaker
winding of generators connected to the electrical power system
via a generator transformer. The protection operating with the (1) Follow-up model = 5SY5202-7 T70MM in place of T55MM
7XT33 detects ground faults in the entire area of the winding,
including the machine neutral point. The employed measuring
principle operates without being influenced by the mode of the
generator and also makes it possible to measure during gener-
ator standstill.

274 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
20 Hz Generator – 7XT33 100% Stator Ground-Fault Protection

Dimensioned Drawings

5.2

[massbild-20-hz-generator-7xt3300-0ca00-020907-ho, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.2/3 Dimensions of the 7XT33 in the Surface-Mounting Version

[massbild-20-hz-generator-7xt33-7xp2040-1-080707, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.2/4 Dimensions of the 7XT33 Switch Panel or Cabinet Flush

Mounting

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 275
Machine Protection
20 Hz Generator – 7XT33 100% Stator Ground-Fault Protection

Auxiliary Voltage
Permissible voltage ranges DC 88 V to 253 V
Power consumption on 8 Ωimpedance ≤ 110 VA

20-Hz Output Voltage

Connections (4A1 to 4A3)
Output voltage Approx. 25 V, square wave, 20 Hz ±
0.2 Hz
Output load rating, contin- 75 VA
uous
Note: If the input voltage rises slowly, the output voltage is ensured
only after about 1 minute!

Blocking Input
Connections (2A1 to 2A3)
Operating shaft Can be changed using jumpers
- For rated voltages Approx. 16 V
24/48/60 V
- For rated voltages Approx. 70 V
110/125/220/250 V
Permissible voltage, contin- DC 300 V
5.2 uous

Signal Relay
Connections (3A1 to 3A3)
Switching power ON; OFF 20 W/VA
Contact voltage DC 250 V
Permissible current ON 5V
OFF 1V

[massbild-20-hz-generator-7xt3300-0ba00-020907-ho, 1, en_US]
Test Voltage 2.8 kB, direct voltage
Figure 5.2/5 Dimensional Drawing, 20-Hz Generator 7XT3300-0BA00
for Panel Surface Mounting
Permissible Ambient Temperatures
At RB< 5Ω ≤ 40°C

Technical Data At RB> 5Ω ≤ 55°C

Note: At maximum power output, the device generates internal power
Auxiliary Voltage dissipation of about 20 W. To ensure unimpeded removal of the
Rated auxiliary AC voltage 3x (AC 100 V to 1x (AC 110 V to internal power dissipation, the clearance to other devices or side walls
VH 110 V), 50/60 Hz 230 V), 50/60 Hz must be at least 100 mm. For this reason, the device is to always be
installed at the bottom of the cabinet.
Permissible voltage ranges AC 80 V to 130 V AC 80 V to 265 V
or as an alternative
Rated auxiliary DC voltage DC 110 V to 220 V
VH

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Accessories for 100 % stator ground-fault protection 7 X T 3 ☐ 0 0 - 0 ☐ A 0 0

▲ ▲
| |
20-Hz generator in housing 7XP20 For panel surface mounting 3 B
For panel flush mounting 3 C

276 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
20 Hz Band-Pass – 7XT34 100% Stator Ground-Fault Protection

Description
7XT34 is a 20-Hz band-pass filter. It filters the square-wave
voltage of the 20-Hz generator (7XT33) and protects it in the
event of ground faults at maximum residual voltage. At 20 Hz,
the series resistance is 8 Ω, and at rated frequency (50/60 Hz),
it is more than 100 Ω. In addition, the device contains a voltage
divider to reduce the measured residual voltage (divider ratio
is 5:2 or 5:1) to a grounding or neutral-point transformer. The
external divider 3PP1336-1CZ is not used.

Functions
The function of the 100 % stator ground-fault protection detects
ground faults in the stator winding of generators connected to
the electrical power system via a generator transformer. The
protection operating with the 7XT33 and the 7XT34 detects
ground faults in the entire area of the winding, including the
machine neutral point. The employed measuring principle oper-
ates without being influenced by the mode of the generator and
also makes it possible to measure during generator standstill.
[sc_7XT34-device, 1, --_--]

Applications Figure 5.3/1 20-Hz Band-Pass 7XT34

The 20-Hz band-pass filter 7XT34 is used in combination with
the 20-Hz generator 7XT33, in the machine protection 7UM62
and 7UM85 devices. Dimensioned Drawings 5.3

In this process, the 20-Hz generator is the source of voltage

injection into the generator neutral point to realize 100 % stator
ground-fault protection.
Voltage injection can be performed, for example, by connecting
the 7XT33 and the 7XT34 to the load resistance of a grounding
or neutral-point transformer.

[massbild-20-hz-bandpass-7xt3400-0ca00-020907-ho, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.3/2 7XT34 Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cabinet Flush
Mounting

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 277
Machine Protection
20 Hz Band-Pass – 7XT34 100% Stator Ground-Fault Protection

Load Rating of the 7XT34 Device

Superimposed alternating AC 550 V for ≤ 30 s
voltage, transient
Frequency of the superim- ≥ 45 Hz
posed alternating voltage
Alternating voltage, AC 3.25 A
current-carrying capacity,
continuous
Test voltage DC 2.8 kV

Load Rating of the Resistive Voltage Divider

Permissible voltage, contin- AC 55 V
uous
Permissible voltage, tran- AC 550 V for ≤ 30 s
sient
Test voltage DC 2.8 kV

Ambient Temperature
At RB < 5 Ω ≤ 40 °C
At RB > 5 Ω ≤ 55 °C
An internal power dissipation of up to 75 W can occur in the device
with the minimum load resistance RB.
To ensure unimpeded removal of the internal power dissipation, the
[massbild-20-hz-bandpass-7xt3400-0ba00-020907-ho, 1, en_US]
5.3 clearance to other devices or side walls must be at least 100 mm. Install
Figure 5.3/3 Dimensional Drawing, 20-Hz Band-Pass 7XT3400-0BA00 this device always at the bottom of the cabinet.
for Panel Surface Mounting
Degree of Protection acc. to IEC 60529
For equipment IP20
Technical Data For personal protection IP2x with standard terminals
For personal protection IP1x with ring-type lug terminal
Load Rating of the 7XT34 Device
Connections (1B1 to 1B4)
Superimposed alternating AC 55 V
voltage, continuous

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Accessories for 100 % stator ground-fault protection 7 X T 3 ☐ 0 0 - 0 ☐ A 0 0

▲ ▲
| |
Band-pass filter, 20 Hz, for housing 7XP20 For panel surface mounting 4 B
For panel flush mounting 4 C

278 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Injection Unit – 7XT71 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Description
7XT71 is an injection unit used together with the 7XR6004 for
the 1- to 3-Hz rotor ground-fault protection in the SIPROTEC
7UM62. A low-frequency square-wave voltage of about +/- 50 V
is injected into the rotor circuit. As the supply voltage, an alter-
nating voltage or a direct voltage may be used.

Applications
In the case of large generators, a high sensitivity is necessary for
the rotor ground-fault protection. Not only must the influence
of the rotor ground capacitance be eliminated to the maximum
possible degree, the signal-to-noise ratio with respect to the
harmonics (for example, the 6th harmonic) of the excitation
machine must be increased.
For this type of machine protection, the injection unit 7XT71,
in conjunction with the resistor unit 7XR6004 and the multi
functional machine protection 7UM62 or generator protection
7UM85 is used in the SIPROTEC family. This combination
of devices ensures sensitive rotor ground-fault protection by [7XT71, 1, --_--]
continuously monitoring the rotor ground resistance. Starting
with hardware version /DD, up to 2 devices 7UM62 or 7UM85 Figure 5.4/1 Injection Unit 7XT71
can be connected to the injection unit 7XT71. In this way, the
protection function can be assigned to two protection groups Function Description
and a greater functional redundancy can be achieved. The rotor ground-fault protection operates with a direct voltage
The square-wave generator of the injection unit 7XT71 produces of about 50 V that, depending on the settings, reverses polarity
roughly 1 to 4 times per second. This voltage injection into 5.4
a low-frequency square-wave voltage of about ±50 V. This
voltage can be set from 0.5 Hz to 4.0 Hz in 0.5-Hz increments the rotor circuit at Vg is generated in the injection unit 7XT71
in the device using a DIP switch. The square-wave voltage via the resistor unit 7XR6004 (or 7XR6003), this voltage is
is supplied via the resistor unit 7XR6004 between the rotor injected symmetrically via high-impedance resistors to the exci-
winding of a generator and the grounding brushes. tation circuit and, at the same time, connected to the grounding
brush (ground potential) via a low-impedance measurement
The square-wave voltage injected into the rotor winding results
shunt RM. The voltage tapped via the measurement shunt and
in a constant charge reversal on the rotor ground capacitance.
The ground current is detected via the measuring circuit in the control voltage is injected into the protection by means of
the injection unit 7XT71 and injected, galvanically separated, the measuring transducer. The control voltage is proportional
into the measuring input of the SIPROTEC 7UM62 or SIPROTEC to the injected 50 V voltage Vg in amplitude and frequency.
7UM85 devices. In fault-free operation, (Rerd≈ infinite), the rotor The flowing rotor ground current is reflected in the measuring
ground current is virtually zero after the ground capacitance voltage.
is charged. In the event of a fault, fault resistance and series The direct voltage Vg drives, during every polarity reversal, a
resistance of the resistor unit 7XR6004, as well as the supplying charging current Ig through the resistor unit into the ground
voltage, determine the stationary current. capacitance of the excitation circuit. This current results in a
At the same time, the polarity reversal generated by the square- proportional voltage drop Vmeas in the measurement shunt of
wave voltage in the injection unit 7XT71 (square-wave voltage the injection unit. After charging the rotor ground capacitance,
and frequency) is measured and fed to the control input of the charging current becomes zero. If a rotor ground fault is
the 7UM62/7UM85 in the form of control signals after being present, a ground current flows continuously. The magnitude is
galvanically separated. determined by the fault resistance.
The rotor ground circuit is monitored for an open circuit in the By using a low-frequency square-wave voltage as the residual
7UM62/7UM85 by evaluation of the rotor ground current during voltage, the influence of the ground capacitance is eliminated
polarity reversals. and at the same time the signal-to-noise ratio for the interfer-
The sensitivity of the rotor ground-fault protection is designed ence frequencies is correspondingly large due to the excitation
so that fault resistances up to 80 kΩ are detected. machine.

The auxiliary voltage is conditioned for the printed circuit board

assemblies of the device using an AC/DC wide-range power
supply unit in the injection unit 7XT71.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 279
Machine Protection
Injection Unit – 7XT71 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

[dw_RGF 1-3 Hz principle rotor winding tension, 6, en_US]

Figure 5.4/2 Circuitry Principles of the Rotor Winding Voltage Injection

RE Fault resistance Vg Square-wave voltage from the 7XT71

CE Rotor ground capacitance Ig Current flowing from the 7XT71 to ground via the rotor
RV Series resistor fg Square-wave frequency of the 7XT71

5.4
Dimensional Drawings

[massbild-vorschaltgeraet-7xt7100-0ba00-020907-ho, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.4/3 Dimensional Drawing, Injection Unit 7XT7100-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting

280 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Injection Unit – 7XT71 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

With • AWG 17 to 13
• Power connections (terminals 1 to 6): • Stripped copper cable direct:
Not used in 7XT71 Cross-sections from 0.5 to 2.6 mm2
• Control connections (terminals 7 to 31): • AWG 20 to 13
Insulated ring-type lug: for 4 mm bolts, max. outer diameter:
9 mm
• For stranded wire:
Terminal lug necessary, max. tightening torque: 1.8 Nm
• Type:
For example, PIDG from Tyco Electronics AMP for copper wire
cross-sections of 1.0 mm2 to 2.6 mm2

Dimensional Drawings

5.4

[massbild-vorschaltgeraet-7xt7100-0ea00-020925-ho, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.4/4 Dimensional Drawing, Injection Unit 7XT7100-0EA00 for Panel Flush Mounting

With
• Power connections (terminals 1 to 6): Technical Data
Not used in 7XT71
Auxiliary voltage, direct voltage; terminal 17 (-) and 18 (+)
• Control connections (terminals 7 to 31) Rated Auxiliary DC voltage 60 V to 250 V
• Screw terminal (ring-type lug): Permissible range of the 48 V to 300 V
For 4 mm bolts, max. outer diameter: 9 mm rated auxiliary DC voltage
• Type: Superimposed alternating ≤ 12% at the rated voltage, IEC 60255-11
For example, PIDG from Tyco Electronics AMP for copper wire voltage, peak-peak
cross-sections of 1.0 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 Power consumption <6W

• AWG 17 to 13 Stored-energy time for

outage/short circuit of the
≥ 50 ms

• Parallel to this, double flat-spring crimp contact: auxiliary direct voltage

For copper wire cross-sections of 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 Recommended external Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, Character-
• AWG 20 to 13 protection istic C according to IEC 60898

• Max. tightening torque: 1.8 Nm Auxiliary voltage, alternating voltage; terminals 17 (N) and 18 (L)
Rated Auxiliary AC voltage 60 V to 250 V
Permissible range of the 48 V to 285 V
rated auxiliary AC voltage
Power frequency 45 Hz to 65 Hz
Power consumption < 10 VA

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 281
Machine Protection
Injection Unit – 7XT71 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Auxiliary voltage, alternating voltage; terminals 17 (N) and 18 (L) Settings

Stored-energy time for ≥ 50 ms Settings 0.5 Hz, 1.0 Hz, 1.5 Hz, 2.0 Hz, 2.5 Hz, 3.0
outage/short circuit of the Hz, 3.5 Hz, 4.0 Hz
auxiliary direct voltage Factory setting 1.5 Hz
Recommended external Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, Character-
protection istic C according to IEC 60898
Design structure
Housing 7XP20, 1/6 19” housing
Signaling voltages/currents at the terminals
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Terminal 1 (VoutputA) and terminal 2 (VoutputB)
7XT7100-0BA00 312.8 mm x 75.0 mm x 243.5 mm with Z
Output voltage VoutputA/B ± 50 V ± 10% angles and junction block
Output current at VoutputA/B < ± 20 V 7XT7100-0EA00 266.0 mm x 75.0 mm x 235.5 mm with
junction block
Maximum output current at < ± 2 mA, short-circuit proof
VoutputA/B Weight
7XT7100-0BA00 2.3 kg
Terminals 8, 10 (VControl1) and 7, 9 (VControl2)
7XT7100-0EA00 2.1 kg
Output voltage VControl1/2 < ± 15 V
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 (flush-mounting version)
Maximum output current at < ± 2 mA, short-circuit proof
Front IP51
VControl1/2
Housing and terminals IP20
Terminals 12, 14 (Vmeas1) and 11, 13 (Vmeas2)
Degree of protection according to EN 60529 (surface-mounting
Output voltage Vmeas1/2 < ± 15 V version)
Maximum output current at < ± 2 mA, short-circuit proof Device IP20
Vmeas1/2
Electrical Inspections
Settings Standards IEC 60255-26 (product standards)

5.4 Output frequency of VoutputA/B (setting using DIP switch) IEEE Std C37.90
Setting range 0.5 to 4.0 Hz ±5% For more standards, see the individual
tests

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Injection unit 7 X T 7 1 0 0 - 0 ☐ A 0 0
▲
|
for rotor ground-fault protection for panel surface mounting B
(0.5 to 4 Hz) 7XT71, in housing 7XP20 for panel flush mounting E

282 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Coupling Unit – 7XR61 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Description
7XR61 is a coupling unit for the rotor ground-fault protection
with 50-Hz/60-Hz coupling into the SIPROTEC 7UM6 device. In
addition, a 3PP1336-0DZ is necessary.

[7XR61, 1, --_--]

Figure 5.5/1 Coupling Unit 7XR61

5.5

[dw_conn example 7UM85 rotor ground fault, 7XR61, sensitive, 5, en_US]

Figure 5.5/2 Connection Example for Generators: Rotor Sensitive Ground-Fault Protection with the 7XR61 Additional Device for Voltage Interference of
the Rotor Circuit at the Rated Frequency during Implementation with the Sensitive Ground-Current Input

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 283
Machine Protection
Coupling Unit – 7XR61 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Dimensioned Drawings
Technical Data
Limiting values for inputs and outputs

Auxiliary Voltage
Rated auxiliary AC voltage 100 to 125 V∼, 230 V ∼, 50/60 Hz
VH ∼ 50/60 Hz
Permissible voltage ranges 80 to 144 V∼ 176 to 265 V∼

Load Rating of the Capacitive Coupling Circuit

Connections (4A1 to 4B1)
Permissible voltage, contin- 3.15 kV–
uous
RMS voltage 60 V ∼ (≤ 300 Hz)
RMS current ≤ 0.2 A∼(1) continuous
Test voltage 4.7 kV– for ≤ 2 s

(1) Do not use the internal resistors if the continuous currents

are higher. These are then short circuited, and the external
resistor unit 3PP1336-0DZ-0130002 is used instead.

Output Load Rating

(Short circuit on 4A1 and 4B1)
Continuous 100 mA (without reactor)
Output (1B1 to 1B3) 175 mA (with reactor), max. 1 hour
[massbild-ankoppelgeraet-7xr6100-0ba0-020916-ho, 1, en_US]
Output (1B1 to 1B4) 230 mA, max. 0.5 Hours
Figure 5.5/3 Dimensional Drawing Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0BA0 in
5.5 Panel Surface Mounting Housing

[massbild-ankoppelgeraet-7xr6100-0ca0-020830-ho, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.5/4 Dimensional Drawing Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0CA0 in

Panel Flush Mounting Housing

284 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Coupling Unit – 7XR61 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Coupling unit 7 X R 6 1 0 0 - 0 ☐ A 0 0
▲
|
for rotor ground-fault protection 50/60 Hz For panel surface mounting B
For panel flush mounting C

5.5

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 285
Machine Protection
Coupling Unit – 7XR81 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection (50 Hz/60 Hz)

Description
The new coupling unit 7XR81 is used as a required accessory
for rotor ground-fault protection in 7UM62/7UM85 machine
protection devices. This device substitutes the earlier coupling
unit 7XR6100-0*A00 and the series resistor 3PP1336-0DZ in one
device.

Benefits
• Tried and tested SIPROTEC 5 design
• Coupling unit and series resistor in one device
Functions
The new coupling unit 7XR81 is used as a required accessory for
rotor ground-fault protection (IRE>, fn) (ANSI 64R) in conjunc-
tion with the SIPROTEC 7UM85:
• Monitors the rotor circuit of electrical synchronous machines
(generator, motor) for a ground fault
• Monitors the rotor circuit of asynchronous machines for a [ph_7XR8100, 1, --_--]

ground fault if the rotor circuit is accessible via a slip ring

Figure 5.5/5 Coupling Unit 7XR81
• Processes a warning (high-impedance fault) and tripping
(low-impedance fault) by activating at least 2 stages
• Detects faults by injecting a rated-frequency voltage into a
rotor circuit and monitoring the rotor ground current

5.5

[ph_7XR8100_W9, 1, --_--]

Figure 5.5/6 Rear View/Mechanical Design of the 7XR81

286 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Coupling Unit – 7XR81 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection (50 Hz/60 Hz)

Connection Example

5.5

[dw_7xr81_connection_examples, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.5/7 Connection Example for 7XR81

You can find additional information on commissioning the

coupling unit in the user manual for the protection relay
7UM62/7UM85.

[dw_7xr81_block_diagram, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.5/8 Block Diagram of the 7XR81

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 287
Machine Protection
Coupling Unit – 7XR81 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection (50 Hz/60 Hz)

(1) AC 39 V to 49 V for AV 100 V to 125 V between terminal 1A

and 2A
AC 43 V for AC 230 V between terminal 1 A and 3 A
(2) AC 58 V to 74 V for AC 100 V to 125 V between terminal 1
A and 2 A
AC 64 V for AC 230 V between terminal 1 A and 3 A

Dimensional Drawings

5.5

[dw_7xr81_6, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.5/9 7XR81 Surface Mounting Dimensions

288 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Coupling Unit – 7XR81 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection (50 Hz/60 Hz)

5.5

[dw_7xr81_8, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.5/10 7XR81 Flush Mounting Dimensions

Auxiliary Voltage and Output Power

Terminals 1A to 2A Terminals 2A to 3A
Rated auxiliary voltage 100 V to 125 V AC, 50 Hz/60 Hz (1) 230 V AC, 50 Hz/60 Hz (2)
Permissible auxiliary voltage 80 V to 144 V AC, 45 Hz to 65 Hz 176 V to 265 V AC, 45 Hz to 6 5 Hz
Terminals 4A to 6A Terminals 4A to 5A
Nominal output voltage 39 V to 49 V AC for (1) 58 V to 74 V AC for (1)
43 V AC for (2) 64 V AC for (2)

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 289
Machine Protection
Coupling Unit – 7XR81 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection (50 Hz/60 Hz)

Continuous output current (1B to 3B shorted

100 mA
to ground, without choke L1)
Output current for max. 30 minutes (1B to 3B
shorted to ground, with choke L1)
175 mA 200 mA
Recovery time 60 min
Max. power consumption 22 W

Load rating of the capacitive coupling circuit

Terminals 1B – 3B
Max. permissible continuous voltage 1000 V DC + 250 V peak value (max. 300 Hz)59
Max. permissible continuous current 500 mA RMS59
Max. dissipated power 60 W

You can find additional routing information and technical data

in the SIPROTEC, coupling unit for generator protection
manual or at www.siemens.com/accessories.

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Coupling unit 7 X R 8 1 0 0 - 0 ☐ A 0 0
▲
|
5.5
for rotor ground-fault protection 50/60 Hz Housing for panel surface mounting with screw connections B
Housing for panel flush mounting with screw connections C

59 The RMS voltage and current over the resistors R1 ( 2x 100 Ω) must be measured to avoid exceeding 50 W of power dissipation.

290 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Resistor Unit – 7XR6004 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Description
7XR6004 is a resistor unit with 4 x 20 kΩ resistors for interfacing
the 1- to 3-Hz rotor ground-fault protection in the SIPROTEC
7UM62.

Function Description
The rotor ground-fault protection operates with a direct voltage
of about 50 V that, depending on the settings, reverses polarity
roughly 1 to 4 times per second. This voltage injection into
the rotor circuit at Vg is generated in the injection unit 7XT71
via the resistor unit 7XR6004 (or 7XR6003), this voltage is
injected symmetrically via high-impedance resistors to the exci-
tation circuit and, at the same time, connected to the grounding
brush (ground potential) via a low-impedance measurement
shunt RM. The voltage tapped via the measurement shunt and
the control voltage is injected into the protection by means of
the measuring transducer. The control voltage is proportional
to the injected 50 V voltage Vg in amplitude and frequency.
The flowing rotor ground current is reflected in the measuring [7XR6004, 1, --_--]
voltage.
Figure 5.6/1 Resistor Unit – 7XR6004
The direct voltage Vg drives, during every polarity reversal, a
charging current Ig through the resistor unit into the ground By using a low-frequency square-wave voltage as the residual
capacitance of the excitation circuit. This current results in a voltage, the influence of the ground capacitance is eliminated
proportional voltage drop Vmeas in the measurement shunt of and at the same time the signal-to-noise ratio for the interfer-
the injection unit. After charging the rotor ground capacitance, ence frequencies is correspondingly large due to the excitation
the charging current becomes zero. If a rotor ground fault is machine.
present, a ground current flows continuously. The magnitude is
determined by the fault resistance.
5.6

[dw_RGF 1-3 Hz principle rotor winding tension, 6, en_US]

Figure 5.6/2 Circuitry Principles of the Rotor Winding Voltage Injection

RE Fault resistance fg Square-wave frequency of the 7XT71

CE Rotor ground capacitance
RV Series resistor
Vg Square-wave voltage from the 7XT71
Ig Current flowing from the 7XT71 to ground via the rotor

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 291
Machine Protection
Resistor Unit – 7XR6004 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Connection Examples

5.6

[dw_connectoin_example_excit-equipmentfed_slip-rings, 2, en_US]

Figure 5.6/3 Connection Example when Supplying the Excitation Winding via Slip Rings

[dw_connectoin_example_excit-rotating_rectifiers_with_meas-brushes, 2, en_US]

Figure 5.6/4 Connection Example when Exciting via Rotating Rectifiers with Measurement Brushes

292 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Resistor Unit – 7XR6004 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Dimensioned Drawings

[massbild-widerstandsgeraet-7xr6004-0ca00-020830-ho, 1, en_US] 5.6

Figure 5.6/6 Dimensional Drawing Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0CA00 for
Panel or Cabinet Flush Mounting
[massbild-widerstandsgeraet-7xr6004-0ba00-020830-ho, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.6/5 Dimensional Drawing Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0BA00 in

Panel Surface Mounting Housing Technical Data

Rated power loss

20 kΩ power resistors P70=45 W
3.3 kΩ test resistor P70=7.5 W

Load rating of the 20 kΩ power resistors

When using 2 resistors 9 W, continuous
corresponds to an input 425 V
voltage of
When using 4 resistors 4.5 W, continuous
corresponds to an input 300 V
voltage of
transient 4-times the continuous load rating for a
maximum of 10 s
dynamic 900 W for max. 10 ms

Insulation tests
Voltage test (routine test) 5.5 kV RMS value (1 min), 50/60 Hz
Surge immunity test (type 10 kV (peak); 1.2 μs/50 μs; 3 positive and
test) 3 negative impulses at intervals of 5 s

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 293
Machine Protection
Resistor Unit – 7XR6004 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Temperatures Temperatures
Recommended tempera- -5 °C bis +55 °C Limiting temperature -25 °C to +70 °C
ture during operation during transport
Temporary permitted limit -20 °C bis +70 °C Storage and transport using factory packaging!
temperatures during opera- To ensure unimpeded removal of the heat loss generated in the device,
tion a clearance to other devices or sheet metal of at least 100 mm must be
Limiting temperature -25 °C to +55 °C maintained above the device and 50 mm below the device.
during storage
Degree of protection according to IEC 60529
For equipment IP 20
For personal protection IP 2x with covering cap in place

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Resistance-coupling unit 7 X R 6 0 0 4 - 0 ☐ A 0 0
▲
|
for rotor ground-fault protection For panel surface mounting B
(1 to 3 Hz) in 7XP20 For panel flush mounting C

5.6

294 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Resistance-Coupling Unit – 7XR8004 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Description
The resistance-coupling unit 7XR8004 is used as a required
accessory, together with the generator protection devices
7XT71 (1 Hz to 3 Hz) and the machine protection devices
7UM62/7UM85 for 1-Hz to 3-Hz rotor ground-fault protection.
The device substitutes the earlier resistor unit 7XR6004-0*A00
and allows excitation voltages to be reached at smaller sizes.

Functions
The rotor ground-fault protection operates with a direct voltage
of about 50 V that, depending on the settings, reverses polarity
roughly 1 to 4 times per second.
This voltage injection into the rotor circuit at Vg is generated
in the injection unit 7XT71 Via the resistor unit 7XR8004, this
voltage is injected symmetrically via high-impedance resistors
to the excitation circuit, and, at the same time, is connected
to the grounding brush (ground potential) via a low-impedance
measurement shunt RM. The voltage tapped via the measure-
ment shunt and the control voltage are injected into the protec- [ph_7XR8_W3, 1, --_--]
tion with the measuring transducer. The control voltage is
Figure 5.7/1 Resistance-Coupling Unit 7XR8004
proportional to the injected 50 V voltage Vg in amplitude and
frequency. The flowing rotor ground current is reflected in the
measuring voltage.
The direct voltage Vg, during every polarity reversal, drives a
charging current Ig through the resistor unit into the ground
capacitance of the excitation circuit. This current results in a
proportional voltage drop Vmeas in the measurement shunt of
the injection unit. After charging the rotor ground capacitance,
the charging current becomes zero. If a rotor ground fault is
present, a ground current flows continuously. The magnitude is
determined by the fault resistance. 5.7

[ph_7XR8_Resistor_Units, 1, --_--]

Figure 5.7/3 Resistance-Coupling Unit 7XR8004 Connection Terminals

[dw_7xr8004_block_diagram, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.7/2 Basic Circuit Diagram 7XR8004

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 295
Machine Protection
Resistance-Coupling Unit – 7XR8004 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

[dw_7xr8004_connex2, 3, en_US] [dw_7xr8004_connex2, 3, en_US]

Figure 5.7/4 Connection Example for Excitation fed via Slip Rings Figure 5.7/5 Connection Example for Excitation via Rotating Rectifiers

(1) The distance between 7XT71 and 7UM85/7UM62 should be (1) The distance between 7XT71 and 7UM85/7UM62 should be
as short as possible (to be installed in the same panel). The as short as possible (to be installed in the same panel). The
connections in between shall be laid closely together and connections in between shall be laid closely together and
twisted or a screened cable should be used. twisted or a screened cable should be used.

Dimensional Drawings

5.7

[dw_7xr8004_dimensions, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.7/6 Panel Surface Mounting 7XR8004

296 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Resistance-Coupling Unit – 7XR8004 for Rotor Ground-Fault Protection

Load rating of the capacitive coupling circuit Description Value

The 7XR8004 replaces the old 7XR6004. The electrical design Max. permissible continuous voltage 600 V DC
stayed mostly the same, but only one connection option is (3.3 kΩ between terminal 2A and 3A)
supported (2 x 40 kΩ). The following points are changed/ Max. dissipated power (R3) 110 W (max. 1 min)
improved:
Recovery time 20 min
• The terminals are designed to support higher excitation Max. total dissipated power 160 W (max. 1 min)
voltages, to satisfy the safety requirements and future higher
Recovery time 20 min
excitation voltages.
• The resistors R1/R2 are dimensioned to allow using the config- You can find additional routing information and technical data
uration of a maximal excitation voltage (UcV) of DC 2000 V: in the SIPROTEC, coupling unit for generator protection
PRtotal = UcV2 / Rtotal = (2000 V)2 / 80 kΩ = 50 W manual or at www.siemens.com/accessories.

Description Value
Max. permissible continuous voltage 2000 V RMS (3500 Vp-
(2 x 40 kΩ between terminal 1B and 2B) p)

Max. continuous dissipated power (R1 + R2) 50 W

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Resistance-coupling unit 7 X R 8 0 0 4 - 0 ☐ A 0 0
▲
|
Housing for panel surface mounting with screw connections B

5.7

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 297
Machine Protection
Voltage Divider – 3PP1326/36

Description
The 3PP1326 is a device with wire resistors as voltage dividers
(divider ratio is 10:1 or 20:1) for coupling the excitation voltage
into the underexcitation protection in the SIPROTEC 7UM62.
The 3PP1336 is a device with wire resistors for the stator
ground-fault or rotor ground-fault protection with 50 Hz/60 Hz
coupling.
In the -1CZ version, the device is used as a voltage divider
(divider ratio is 5:1) for coupling the residual voltage into the
stator ground-fault protection of a SIPROTEC 7UM6 device. It
is used when the residual voltage is measured in a grounding
transformer.
In the -0DZ version, the device has two 105 Ω resistors and is
used as a series resistor for the rotor ground-fault protection
with 50 Hz/60 Hz coupling in the SIPROTEC 7UM6.

[3PP13_, 1, --_--]

Figure 5.8/1 Voltage Dividers 3PP1326 and 3PP1336

5.8

[laeufererdschlussschutz-3pp1336-020925-ho, 2, en_US]

Figure 5.8/2 Connection Example: Rotor Ground-Fault Protection with 7XR61 Add-On Device for Voltage Injection of Rotor Circuit with Rated-Frequency
Voltage and with 3PP1336 Dropper Resistor

298 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Voltage Divider – 3PP1326/36

Dimensional Drawings Note:

• 3PP132: for voltage divider 3PP1326-0BZ-K2Y (20: 10: 1)
• 3PP133: for voltage divider 3PP1336-1CZ-K2Y (5: 2: 1) for the
series resistor 3PP1336-0DZ-K2Y

[massbilder-3pp13-020830-ho, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.8/3 Dimensional Drawings, 3PP13

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Short code

Wire resistor GR 3, IP20 3 P P 1 3 3 6 - 0 D Z K 2 Y

5.8
Series resistor for rotor ground-fault protection 6 cylinders
(2 x 105 Ω) Group: 013002
as a load resistor
Wire resistor GR 3, IP20 3 P P 1 3 3 6 - 0 C Z K 2 Y
for stator ground fault protection (divider ratio is 4 cylinders
5:1)
Group: 013001
as a load resistor
Wire resistor GR 2, IP20 3 P P 1 3 2 6 - 0 B Z K 2 Y
for underexcitation protection (divider ratio is 20:1) 3 cylinders
Group: 012009
as a load resistor

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 299
Machine Protection
Voltage Divider – 7XR86 for Stator Ground-Fault Protection

Description
The coupling unit 7XR86 is used for stator ground-fault protec-
tion (90 %) in 7UM62/7UM85 machine protection devices. The
device substitutes the earlier resistor unit 3PP1336-1CZ-K2Y
(5:1, 5:2 voltage divider). 7XR86 and 7XR8004 have an identical
design.
Only 7XR8004 resistances are substituted. The voltage divider is
required for grounding or point transformer applications with a
higher secondary voltage than 200 V (for example, 500 V) of the
max. voltage (for example, 100 V) for the voltage inputs of the
protection device.

[ph_7XR8_W3, 1, --_--]

Figure 5.8/4 Coupling Unit 7XR86

Dimensional Drawing
See Figure 5.7/6 Panel Surface Mounting 7XR8004

[dw_7xr86_block_diagram, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.8/5 Basic Circuit Diagram of the New 7XR86

5.8

[ph_7XR86_Resistor_Units, 1, --_--]

Figure 5.8/6 7XR86 Coupling Unit Connection Terminals

300 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Voltage Divider – 7XR86 for Stator Ground-Fault Protection

Load Rating of the Voltage Divider

Terminals 1B – 4B
Max. permissible continuous voltage 55 V AC
Continuous output power 2 W
Max. permissible voltage (60 s) 550 V AC
Max. dissipated power 185 W (max. 60 s, recovery time 600 s)

You can find additional routing information and technical data

in the SIPROTEC, coupling unit for generator protection
manual or at www.siemens.com/accessories.

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Coupling unit 7 X R 8 6 0 0 - 0 ☐ A 0 0
▲
|
for stator ground-fault protection Housing for panel surface mounting with screw connections B

5.8

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 301
Machine Protection
Voltage Divider – 7XR87 for Underexcitation Protection

Description
The coupling unit 7XR87 is used for interfacing the excitation
voltage generator to the direct current measurement inputs of
the 7UM62/7UM85 machine protection devices. Various voltage
divider ratios can be converted with the 7XR87 as an additional
criterion for underexcitation protection.
This allows the protection device to be optimally adjusted to
different excitation voltages. The coupling unit also receives
components for reducing harmonic components and transients
from the excitation circuit. This device substitutes the earlier
3PP1326-0BZ-K2Y (divider ratio 10:1, 20:1).

The 7XR87 replaces the 3PP1326 voltage divider. The electrical

design was changed compared to the 3PP1326 in order to
provide additional divider ratios for higher excitation voltages.
The device provides 6 different voltage dividers ordered in 2
groups with 3 dividers each:
• Divider 1: 10:1, 20:1, and 30:1 for a maximum input voltage [ph_7XR87_W3, 1, --_--]
of DC 600 V
• Divider 2: 40:1, 80:1, and 100:1 for a maximum input voltage Figure 5.8/7 Coupling Unit 7XR87
of DC 2000 V
A capacitor (C1) provides, in combination with the input resis-
tors, a low pass filter for attenuating the ripple of the excitation
voltage.
The resistor R5 provides the necessary impedance adaptation
for using the C-IO-6 of the SIPROTEC 4 7UM6x protection relay.
For the IO210 of the SIPROTEC 5 7UM85, do not connect the
resistor R5 (see connection example below).

5.8

[dw_7xr87_connection examples, 1, en_US]

Figure 5.8/8 7XR87 Connection Example

[dw_7xr87_connection_examples_01, 1, en_US]

The excitation voltage has to be connected between GND1 or Figure 5.8/9 7XR87 Redundancy Example
GND2 and the required divider ratio. Use only 1 of the 6 voltage
dividers at once.
Only 1 protection relay can be connected at the output. If
redundancy is needed, connect two 7XR87 units to the excita-
tion voltage of the generator, see example below.

302 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Machine Protection
Voltage Divider – 7XR87 for Underexcitation Protection

Dimensional Drawings

[dw_7xr87_dimensions_flush_variant_BB, 1, en_US]

[dw_7xr87_dimensions_panel_variant_BB, 2, en_US]
Figure 5.8/10 7XR87 Flush Mounting Dimensions

Load Rating of the Voltage Divider

Description Value
Max. permissible continuous voltage 2000 V DC (Terminal C); 1000 V DC (UL Rating)
600 V DC (Terminal B)
Max. dissipated power 3.5 W

You can find additional routing information and technical data

in the SIPROTEC, coupling unit for generator protection 5.8
manual or at www.siemens.com/accessories.

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Coupling unit 7 X R 8 7 0 0 - 0 ☐ A 0 0
▲
|
for underexcitation protection Housing for panel surface mounting with screw connections B
Housing for panel flush mounting with screw connections C

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 303
Machine Protection
Voltage Divider – 7XR87 for Underexcitation Protection

5.8

304 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
High Impedance Protection Accessories

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 305
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Auxiliary Units – 7XG15 and 7PG1110-7AE10

Description
7XG15 High Impedance Component Box
High impedance protection operates on the differential current-
balance principle. In each zone, the current transformers of
the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected together and
form a current balance group.
A relay is connected at a convenient point to form a spill circuit.
An internal fault upsets the current balance and causes the relay
to operate. The system employs one or more relay elements
with sensitive current setting and low operating burden.
An external series resistor is used to give each relay element the [sc_7SR23_Auxiliary, 1, --_--]
voltage setting required to ensure stability under through fault
Figure 6.1/1 7XG15 and 7PG1110-7AE10
conditions. This is the setting or stabilizing resistor.
The resistance of the setting resistor should be sufficient to When an unbalance is detected, the alarm element is used to
ensure the effective setting voltage exceeds the voltage devel- operate a suitably rated CT shorting relay, which will prevent
oped by a through fault with one CT fully saturated. any protection maloperation. The relay is arranged to short
The current setting of the 7SR23 may be adjusted to achieve the circuit the CT secondary wiring, diverting current from the
desired primary operating current. protection relay and preventing its operation.

Non-linear resistors (e.g. Metrosils) are used to protect the relay The 7PG1110-7AE10 (AR901) CT shorting relay is such a device,
components, the insulation of secondary wiring and current its contacts are rated to carry in excess of 50 A for three
transformers, by suppressing high voltage peaks which may seconds, which is suitable for the majority of installations.
otherwise be developed by the current transformer secondary This relay is supplied in a 4U, size E2 relay enclosure.
winding under internal fault conditions.
Resistors and non-linear resistors are fitted on a per phase basis. Applications

The resistors and non-linear resistors may be fitted as discrete Auxiliary units for High impedance Busbar and Auto transformer
components; however the High Impedance Component Box protection.
7XG15 contains these items within a 4U high, size E6 relay Used in conjunction with the 7SR23 High Impedance Protection
enclosure. Relay, the High Impedance Component Box 7XG15 and its asso-
7PG1110-7AE10 CT Shorting Relay ciated CT Shorting Relay 7PG1110-7AE10 provides a complete,
panel mounted solution for the provision of High Impedance
C.T. Supervision and Shorting: Unbalance in any current-balance Protection.
group due to an open-circuited current transformer, the primary
of which is carrying load current, produces a voltage across the Features of the system include: CT supervision using elements
relay circuit. This causes a spill current to flow and leads to within the 7SR23.
instability of the protection. This condition is monitored using a Provision of test points on the front panel of the Component
sensitive element, either within the main protection relay or as a Box.
6.1
stand alone device.
CT shorting on the detection of a CT fault, and whenever a
CT supervision is especially recommended for protections protection operation occurs. This limits the dissipation of the
applied to High Voltage switchgear and for schemes at all resistor and metrosil networks within the protection panel.
voltages where current transformers are switched to accommo-
date different busbar arrangements.

306 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Auxiliary Units – 7XG15 and 7PG1110-7AE10

Connection Diagrams

[sc_7XG15_2000, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.1/2 7XG15 High Impedance Component Box - 2000 Ohms

6.1

[sc_7XG15_1000, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.1/3 7XG15 High Impedance Component Box - 1000 Ohms

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 307
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Auxiliary Units – 7XG15 and 7PG1110-7AE10

[sc_7XG15_500, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.1/4 7XG15 High Impedance Component Box - 500 Ohms

6.1

[sc_7XG15_7PG11_AC, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.1/5 7SR23, 7XG15, 7PG1110 AC Schematic Diagram

308 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Auxiliary Units – 7XG15 and 7PG1110-7AE10

NOTE

i 7SR23 DAD connections to the 7XG15 unit are

correct for a setting resistance of 2000 Ohms.
These connections must be varied on the 7XG15
unit where the alternative values of 1000 or 500
Ohms are required for a given application.
The CT Shorting Relay and the 7XG15 unit are
both fitted with case shorting contacts. In the
event that either device is withdrawn, the Current
Transformers are automatically short circuited
and indication is given by the 7SR23.
The 7XG15 unit is designed to be used in
conjunction with the 7PG11 CT Shorting Relay.
Do not use the 7XG15 unit without a CT shorting
relay, or with alternative scheme connections.

6.1

[sc_7XG15_7PG11_DC, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.1/6 7SR23, 7XG15, 7PG1110 DC Schematic Diagram

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 309
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Auxiliary Units – 7XG15 and 7PG1110-7AE10

This maximum voltage can be determined by means of a simple

NOTE

i
calculation which makes the following assumptions
The rated DC voltage of the CT Shorting Relay and • One current transformer is fully saturated making its excita-
the 7SR23 DAD (Power Supply and Binary Inputs) tion impedance negligible.
must be compatible with the available auxiliary
supply. • The resistance of the secondary winding of the saturated CT
together with the leads connecting it to the relay circuit termi-
On the 7SR23, Binary Input 1 must be suitably nals constitutes the only burden in parallel with the relay.
mapped to provide a self –reset LED indication
that the CT Shorting Relay is operated, and the • The remaining current transformers maintain their ratio.
protection is temporarily out of service (until the Thus the required relay operating voltage is given by:
CT Shorting Relay Resets).
The CT Shorting Relay and the 7XG15 unit are
both fitted with case shorting contacts. In the [fo_function87GHApplication&SettingsFunction1, 1, en_US]

event that either device is withdrawn, the Current

Transformers are automatically short circuited Where:
and indication is given by the 7SR23. Vs = Relay circuit setting voltage
Binary Outputs on the 7SR23 are to be mapped as RL = The largest value of pilot loop resistance between the CT
indicated. This is to allow automatic operation of and the relay circuit terminals.
the CT Shorting Relay as required by the scheme.
RCT = The secondary winding resistance of the CT.
BO3 must be configured as hand reset. The
protection is reset from the keypad on the 7SR23, IF = The CT secondary current corresponding to the maximum
this will also reset the CT shorting relay and indi- steady-state through-fault current of the protected equipment.
cation.
T = Turns ratio of all current transformers (Primary turns / Secon-
CB Trip is to be via a latched Trip Relay. dary turns)
Method of establishing the value of relay setting resistors.
To give the required voltage setting the relay operating level is
Technical Data adjusted by means of an external series resistor as follows:

7XG15
Stabilising resistor values 2000, 1000, or 500 Ω
[fo_function87GHApplication&SettingsFunction4, 1, en_US]
Non-linear resistor C = 1000, B = 0.22 to 0.25
Pressure tests 2 kV for 1 minute between phases,
and all circuits to earth
Where:
Shock, bump, vibration, and IEC 60255-21-1,2,3 RSTAB = Resistance of the stabilising resistor
seismic tests
Vs = Relay circuit setting voltage
6.1 7PG1110-7AE10
Is = Relay setting current
Make and carry for 3 s 50 A
Break 300 VA within the limits of 250 V Fault Setting
and 5 A
The fault setting of a current –balance protection using a high
impedance relay circuit can be calculated in the usual manner.
Cases
It should, however, be noted that because the operating voltage
of the relay circuit is relatively high, the excitation currents of
Modular Cases the CTs in parallel with the relay may comprise a large portion of
7PG1110-7AE10 relay E2 the fault setting.
7XG15 high impedance compo- E6
nent box
Thus, if Is = the relay setting current, and I1, I2, I3 etc are the
excitation currents of the CTs at the setting voltage, and T is the
Determination of Stability CT turns ratio then Primary Operating Current = (Is +I1+I2+I3)xT

The stability of a current balance scheme using a high impe-

dance relay circuit depends upon the relay voltage setting being
greater than the maximum voltage which can appear across the
relay under a given through fault condition.

310 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Auxiliary Units – 7XG15 and 7PG1110-7AE10

Current Transformer Requirements From the supplied plant data a primary operate current (POC) of
1000 A is chosen.
The basic requirements are:
• All CTs should have identical turns ratios. CT and Connection Details
• The knee point voltage of the current transformers should be Turns ratio (T) 1/2000
at least twice the relay setting voltage. The knee point voltage Voltage knee point (VK) 600 V
is expressed as the voltage applied to the secondary circuit of
Magnetising current (Imag) @ VK 100 mA
a current transformer which when increased by 10 % causes
the magnetising current to increase by 50 %. CT secondary resistance (RCT) 10 Ω

• The current transformers should be of the low leakage reac- CT lead loop resistance (RL) 0.15 Ω max
tance type to IEC 60044 class PX. Generally most modern
current transformers are of this type and there should be no 7SR23 Relay
difficulty in meeting this requirement. Low leakage reactance 87/50-1 Element Enabled
current transformers have a jointless core with the secondary 87/50-1 Current setting 0.365 A
winding evenly distributed along the whole length of the
87/50-1 Delay setting 0s
magnetic circuit, and the primary conductor passes through
CT50 Element Enabled
the centre of the core.
CT50 Setting 0.02 A
See also the 7SR23 relay manual, applications section. (Chapter CT50 Delay 3s
7, Section 3)
Example: 3-Pole Differential Busbar Protection Auxiliary Component Box
RSTAB 500 Ω
Metrosil 75 mm, c = 1000

Control Scheme Settings for 7SR23

Protection healthy BO2
87/50-1 Operated BO3
CT50 Operated BO3
Zone switch out BO3
BI 1 Operated L8
[sc_Plant_Data, 1, --_--]
Self reset LED L8 (L8 to be marked as “ CT
Shorting Relay Operated “)
Setting Requirements BO3 Minimum operate time 5s
Assigned through fault current (rated stability limit) = 31.5 kA
(CB break capacity)
Required Fault Setting (Primary Operate Current)
• Approximately 50% of busbar rating, or 6.1
• 10 to 30 % of minimum fault current available, or
• As specified by the user

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 311
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Auxiliary Units – 7XG15 and 7PG1110-7AE10

Ordering Information - 7PG111 Auxiliary Relay (AR901)

Product Description Order No.

312 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Auxiliary Units – 7XG15 and 7PG1110-7AE10

Ordering Information - 7XG15 High Impedance Component

Box

Product Description Order No.

6.1

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 313
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Resistors – Protection Resistors

Description
The stability of the high impedance differential protection
scheme is ensured because the applied operate voltage setting
is greater than the maximum voltage that can appear across the
relay circuit under through fault conditions. An external series
stabilising resistor (RSTAB) is installed to provide a relay circuit
operate voltage above that required to guarantee stability.
For more information on the calculating of stabilising resistor
value, you can find detailed calculations in the 7SR23 device
manual.

[sc_Resistors_Bracket, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.2/3 Resistors with Bracket

[sc_3_Pole_Circuit, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.2/1 3 Pole Differential Relay Circuit

Restricted Earth Protection (REF); an external stabilising resistor

in series connected with a relay current circuit to limit the
overvoltage developed across the high impedance components
during internal faults to a ‘safe’ voltage level and stability.
For more information on the calculating of stabilising resistor
value, you can find detail calculations in the device manuals.

6.2

[sc_Composite_OC_RE_EFProtection, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.2/2 Composite Overcurrent and Restricted Earth Fault Protec-

tion

Ordering Information - Protection Resistors

18 W Power Rating Resistors

5Ω VCE: 2101H10050
100 Ω VCE: 2101H10101

314 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Resistors – Protection Resistors

18 W Power Rating Resistors

1000 Ω VCE: 2101H10102
1500 Ω VCE: 2101H10152

Table 6.2/1 Wire Wound Resistors Complete with Bracket

30 W Power Rating Resistors

3000 Ω VCE: 2103C99044

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

40 W Power Rating Resistors
60 Ω VCE: 2103C99038
250 Ω VCE: 2103C91053

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

45 W Power Rating Resistors
1500 Ω VCE: 2103C91093

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

60 W Power Rating Resistors
480 Ω VCE: 2103C91127
2000 Ω VCE: 2103C91161
2700 Ω VCE: 2103C91142

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

90 W Power Rating Resistors
90 Ω VCE: 2103C91149
470 Ω VCE: 2103C91162
500 Ω VCE: 2103C91164
600 Ω VCE: 2103C99043
1000 Ω VCE: 2103C91083
1150 Ω VCE: 2103C91051
1800 Ω VCE: 2103C99046
2000 Ω VCE: 2103C91135
2750 Ω VCE: 2103C91022
4700 Ω VCE: 2103C91153
8000 Ω VCE: 2103C91141 6.2

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

130 W Power Rating Resistors
250 Ω VCE: 2103C91139
2750 Ω VCE: 2103C91035
6000 Ω VCE: 2103C91138
6800 Ω VCE: 2103C91160
10000 Ω VCE: 2103C91144

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

150 W Power Rating Resistors
550 Ω VCE: 2103C91133

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 315
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Resistors – Protection Resistors

180 W Power Rating Resistors

47 Ω VCE: 2103C91151
220 Ω VCE: 2103C91152
300 Ω VCE: 2103C91128
500 Ω VCE: 2103C91129
1000 Ω VCE: 2103C91130
1500 Ω VCE: 2103C91131
1800 Ω VCE: 2103C91158
2000 Ω VCE: 2103C91159
2300 Ω VCE: 2103C91134
2700 Ω VCE: 2103C91125
3000 Ω VCE: 2103C91132
4000 Ω VCE: 2103C91146
6500 Ω VCE: 2103C91145
15000 Ω VCE: 2103C91154

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

220 W Power Rating Resistors
15 Ω VCE: 2103C91067
170 Ω VCE: 2103C91147
220 Ω VCE: 2103C91156
250 Ω VCE: 2103C91157
350 Ω VCE: 2103C91163
22000 Ω VCE: 2103C91155

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

320 W Power Rating Resistors
820 Ω VCE: 2103C91148
1150 Ω VCE: 2103C91050
2700 Ω VCE: 2103C91143

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

380 W Power Rating Resistors
300 Ω VCE: 2103C91150

Table 6.2/2 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Mountings

6.2
90 W Power Rating Resistors
35 Ω VCE: 2103C91124
100 Ω VCE: 2103C99047
800 Ω VCE: 2103C91126

Table 6.2/3 Resistors 5 % Adjustable with Mountings

180 W Power Rating Resistors
10000 Ω VCE: 2103C99054

Table 6.2/3 Resistors 5 % Adjustable with Mountings

316 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Resistors – Protection Resistors

320 W Power Rating Resistors

250 Ω VCE: 2103C91137
1000 Ω VCE: 2103C91068

Table 6.2/3 Resistors 5 % Adjustable with Mountings

45 W Power Rating Resistors

100 Ω VCE: 2103C91120
500 Ω VCE: 2103C91014
1000 Ω VCE: 2103C91008
2500 Ω VCE: 2103C91165

Table 6.2/4 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Reverse Mountings

90 W Power Rating Resistors
4500 Ω VCE: 2103C91117

Table 6.2/4 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Reverse Mountings

130 W Power Rating Resistors
200 Ω VCE: 2103C91003
300 Ω VCE: 2103C91004
620 Ω VCE: 2103C91005
2700 Ω VCE: 2103C91006
7500 Ω VCE: 2103C91123

Table 6.2/4 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Reverse Mountings

150 W Power Rating Resistors
1000 Ω VCE: 2103C91122

Table 6.2/4 Resistors 10 % Adjustable with Reverse Mountings

45 W Power Rating Resistors

50 Ω VCE: 2103C91116

Table 6.2/5 Resistors 5 % Adjustable with Reverse Mountings

130 W Power Rating Resistors
1000 Ω VCE: 2103C91108 6.2
1250 Ω VCE: 2103C91099
1500 Ω VCE: 2103C91106
3000 Ω VCE: 2103C91095
4000 Ω VCE: 2103C91096

Table 6.2/5 Resistors 5 % Adjustable with Reverse Mountings

180 W Power Rating Resistors
9000 Ω VCE:2103C91113
10000 Ω VCE:2103C91115

Table 6.2/5 Resistors 5 % Adjustable with Reverse Mountings

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 317
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Metrosils – Metrosil 7XG14

Description
Metrosil is a semi-conducting material with the property that its
electrical resistance depends on the applied voltage. Resistors
made from Metrosil are thus termed “voltage dependent resis-
tors” or varistors.
Metrosil varistors are made by mixing silicon carbide with
ceramic binder, pressing in a mould to the required shape,
usually a disc, then firing at a high temperature, in closely
controlled conditions. After firing , the faces of the disc are
metal sprayed to give good electrical contact, and connection
is made by either clamping the disc between the metal plates, or
(in smaller sizes) by soldering wires to the metal sprayed faces.
Metrosil Specification
By varying the composition and processing conditions involved
in the manufacture of Metrosil discs, a broad spectrum of elec- [sc_7XG14, 1, --_--]

trical characteristics can be achieved.

Figure 6.3/1 7XG14 Metrosil Non Linear Resistor for High Impedance
Metrosil Identification Schemes

Each Metrosil resistor type is identified by a series of letters and

disc with our outer diameter of 75 mm; and the 600-A, with
numbers, thus: A-B/C/D/E, where:
outer diameter of 150 mm. In addition a range of 400-A (100
• A refers to the nominal disc diameter in inches mm) series discs is available to special order.
– 37 = 0.37 inches (10 mm) Both 300-A and 600-A types are supplied discs assemblies. The
– 100 = 1.00 inches (25 mm) standard assembly utilities a central stud which holds the discs
– 175 = 1.75 inches (45 mm) and their contact plates as necessary for connections, and the
– 300 = 3.00 inches (75 mm) whole assembly is carefully tightened to a torque which gives
good electrical contract without damaging the discs.
– 600 = 6.00 inches (150 mm)
• B refers to the type of disc Applications
– A = annular
Most of the applications of Metrosil make use of its nonlinear
– P = plain properties to provide an “electric safety valve” for protecting
– E = embossed equipment and insulation from the effects of overvoltages.
– D = dished Protection of field coils, contactor coils, relay coils and sole-
• C refers to the type of mounting and number of discs per noids.
assembly When an inductive DC current is broken suddenly, there is a
– S = Standard stud mounting transient rise in voltage across the inductance which can be 10
– F = Standard stud mounting with cooling fins (300-A) to 20 times the supply voltage and may damage insulation or
– ES = stud mounting electronic type (100-A and 175-A) circuit components. The source of this overvoltage is the energy
which is stored in the magnetic field of the inductance at the
– W = Wired disc
moment of switching off.
6.3
• D indicates the type of connection in the assembly It is therefore essential to provide some means for this energy to
– S = all discs in series dissipate itself harmlessly. This can be achieved by connecting
– P = all discs in parallel a discharge resistor across the inductive coil. At the instant
– I = all discs insulated from each other when the circuit is broken, the current, briefly held constant by
– CT = centre tapped the inductance of the coil, is diverted through the resistor and
rapidly decays to zero. The voltage across the coil is therefore
– E is the electrical specification number
limited to the voltage necessary to pass the coil current through
Item D may be omitted for single disc assemblies and items C the resistor, the value of which is so chosen that the voltage
and D will not be needed for loose discs. is a safe one. This transient voltage reduction is illustrated by
Example: 300-A/S3/P/860 Specifies three 3 inch (75 mm) diam- the oscillograms. If an ordinary linear resistor is used and it is
eter annular discs stud mounted and connected in parallel, each permanently connected across the coil, there will be a contin-
disc to specification no. 860. uous waste of power at normal voltage. If the resistor is inserted
just before the circuit is broken, additional contacts and wiring
Series 300-A and 600-A
will be required. A Metrosil resistor on the other hand can be
This data sheet describes the largest Metrosil voltage dependent permanently connected across the coil, and yet will consume
resistor discs, having diameters up to 150 mm. The product at normal voltages only a fraction of the power taken by the
range is concentrated on two basic discs: the 300-A, an annual ordinary resistor.

318 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Metrosils – Metrosil 7XG14

Metrosil discharge resistors can be supplied for all AC and DC

voltages and for use with almost any inductive device such as
contactor, clutch and brake coils, relay coils and solenoids, elec-
tromagnets and the fields of motors, generators and alternators
of all sizes.

Dimension Drawings

Single Phase
MLFB No. Reference and Drawing
7XG1430-3AA00-0AA0 600A/S1 Spec 887 SkM 940307
7XG1410-3AA00-0AA0 300A/S1 Spec 646 SkM 900926
7XG1410-2AA00-0AA0 300A/S1 Spec 3198 SkM 900926
7XG1410-1AA00-0AA0 300A/S1 Spec 431 SkM 900926
7XG1430-1AA00-0AA0 600A/S1 Spec 256 SkM 940307
7XG1430-2AA00-0AA0 600A/S1 Spec 1088 SkM 940307
[sc_300A/S1_Spec_646_SkM_900926, 1, --_--]

Table 6.3/1 Reference Table Figure 6.3/3 300A/S1 Spec 646 SkM 900926
Three Phase
MLFB No. Reference and Drawing
7XG1440-3AA00-0AA0 600A/S3/I Spec 887 A3_3398410
7XG1420-3AA00-0AA0 300A/S3/I Spec 3063 SkM 800730
7XG1420-2AA00-0AA0 300A/S3/I Spec 3152 SkM 800730
7XG1420-1AA00-0AA0 300A/S3/I Spec 1030 SkM 800730
but 152 mm stud length
7XG1440-1AA00-0AA0 600A/S3/I Spec 802 A3_3398410
7XG1440-2AA00-0AA0 600A/S3/I Spec 1195 A3_3398410

Table 6.3/1 Reference Table

[sc_300A/S1_Spec_3198_SkM_900926, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.3/4 300A/S1 Spec 3198 SkM 900926

6.3

[sc_600A/S1_Spec_887_SkM_940307, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.3/2 600A/S1 Spec 887 SkM 940307

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 319
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Metrosils – Metrosil 7XG14

[sc_300A/S1_Spec_431_SkM_900926, 1, --_--]
[sc_600A/S1_Spec_1088_SkM_940307, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.3/5 300A/S1 Spec 431 SkM 900926 Figure 6.3/7 600A/S1 Spec 1088 SkM 940307

[sc_600A/S1_Spec_256_SkM_940307, 1, --_--] [sc_600A/S3/I_Spec_887_A3_3398410, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.3/6 600A/S1 Spec 256 SkM 940307 Figure 6.3/8 600A/S3/I Spec 887 A3 3398410
6.3

320 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Metrosils – Metrosil 7XG14

[sc_300A/S3/I_Spec_3063_SkM_800730, 1, --_--]
[sc_300A/S3/I_Spec_1030_SkM_800730, 1, --_--]
Figure 6.3/9 300A/S3/I Spec 3063 SkM 800730
Figure 6.3/11 300A/S3/I Spec 1030 SkM 800730 but 152 mm stud
length

[sc_300A/S3/I_Spec_3152_SkM_800730, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.3/10 300A/S3/I Spec 3152 SkM 800730

[sc_600A/S3/I_Spec_802_A3_3398410, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.3/12 600A/S3/I Spec 802 A3 3398410

6.3

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 321
High Impedance Protection Accessories
Metrosils – Metrosil 7XG14

[sc_600A/S3/I_Spec_1195_A3_3398410, 1, --_--]

Figure 6.3/13 600A/S3/I Spec 1195 A3 3398410

Ordering Information - 7XG14 Metrosil

Product Description Order No.

322 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Devices for Input/Output Signals
SICAM I/O-Unit – 7XV5673

Description
The SICAM I/O-Unit 7XV5673 is a binary input/output device that
has been developed for substations and industrial sectors with
increased environmental demands. The SICAM I/O-Unit permits
transmission from binary inputs to binary outputs locally or over
large distances. It can be used for protection applications, such
as overcurrent protection, permissive overreach transfer trip
scheme, distance protection with signal connection, or as I/O
extension in substation automation systems.

Binary inputs • 6 robust EMC-hardened binary inputs

• The pickup threshold can be set to DC 19
V, DC 88 V, or DC 176 V for different rated
voltages of the station battery
Binary outputs • 6 command relay outputs
• Secure contact status after loss of connec-
tion, set by the user
Signal/alarm outputs 4 LEDs
Wide-range power DC 24 to 250 V ± 20 % and AC 100 V to 230 V,
supply unit 45 Hz to 65 Hz
Electrical RJ45 Cascading many devices without additional [ph_SICAM IO_Unit, 1, --_--]
Ethernet interface cost by using the integrated switch
Figure 7.1/1 SICAM I/O-Unit 7XV5673
Serial fiber-optic inter- ST connector, 820 nm for multimode optical
face (optional) fiber 62.5/125 μm, typical range: 2000 m
with optical fiber 62.5 μm/125 μm, baud rate: – Detection and output of binary states via substation control-
1.2 Kbps to 187.5 Kbps, set by software lers with the standard protocols Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP,
or IEC 61850
Communication proto- • IEC 61850 (GOOSE, MMS, Reporting) for
cols the connection to protective and substation – Extension for protection devices of the compact classes
controllers SIPROTEC 7SJ80 and SIPROTEC 7SK80 by connection to
• Modbus TCP or Modbus RTU for connection their low-cost Ethernet interface (port A)
to a substation controller
• Modbus UDP for point-to-point connection • Contact duplicator: Transmission of signals via one or more
between 2 SICAM I/O-Units binary inputs by means of relay contacts of the same
• SNTP for time synchronization SICAM I/O-Units, for example for separation between different
Time synchronization • External time synchronization via Ethernet voltage levels
NTP
• External time synchronization via Fieldbus Applications
with communication protocol Modbus RTU,
Modbus TCP, or Modbus UDP Binary signal transmitter
Housing IP20, DIN rail If the SICAM I/O-Unit is used as a binary signal transmitter to
Figure 7.1/2, there is a bidirectional transfer of binary signals of
Functions exactly 2 units at any one time. The transmission takes place
between server and client device via serial connections (option)
All types of binary signals from switching devices/protective
or via Ethernet networks. Via the relay output contacts, voltages
procedures (such as trip commands, switch position signals,
of up to AC/DC 250 V and currents of up to AC/DC 5 A can be
fault and status messages) are reliably recognized via binary
switched. The pickup threshold of the binary inputs can be set
inputs. This information can be transferred via contacts directly
by the user on different levels. The user can assign signal inputs
on this SICAM I/O-Unit or via communication connections
and outputs as required.
to other SICAM I/O-Units or substation automation systems.
Secured telegrams are used for communication via Ethernet 7.1
or serial connections. The parameters of the SICAM I/O-Units
can be set easily via a standard Web browser on the PC that is
connected via the Ethernet interface.
The SICAM I/O-Unit can for example, be used as:
• Binary signal transmitter (BST): Point-to-point transmission of
binary signals between 2 SICAM I/O-Units via Ethernet or a
serial connection. Signal inputs and outputs can be assigned
[dw_io-Mirror_bidirect-trans-2-device, 3, en_US]
by the user.
• I/O extension: Figure 7.1/2 Binary Signal Transmitter, Bidirectional Transmission
between 2 Units
– Extension of protection devices via binary inputs and
outputs with GOOSE

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 323
Devices for Input/Output Signals
SICAM I/O-Unit – Applications

Extension of the communication route

An extension of the communication route is possible.
The following devices can be used:
• With serial optical repeater 7XV5461, scalable up to 170 km
• Optical fiber connection also with mini star coupler 7XV5450,
CM-0822 or RS485/optical fiber converter 7XV5650
• With different communication converters 7XV5662 (pilot
wires, X.21/G.703.1 and G.703.6)
• Media converter for Ethernet RMC (Ruggedcom)
• Wireless transmission RS 900WNC (Ruggedcom)
Unidirectional binary signal transmission
When you use SICAM I/O-Units for unidirectional binary signal
transmission to Figure 7.1/3 then the units transfer binary
signals in one direction from a client unit to several server units.
In this application, the transmission takes place exclusively in [dw_log-config_of_bi-to-bo, 3, en_US]
one direction. Input signals (max. 6) are transmitted from the
Figure 7.1/4 Logical Structure of Two Separate Binary Signal Transfers
left device to the output contacts of one or more devices on the
from Binary Input (BI) to Binary Output (BO) between
right side. The serial ports of the I/O-Unit can be electrical or Corresponding SICAM I/O Units A1 and B1, Using the
serial. Alternatively, you may use RS485/optical fiber converters Gateway Function of the Units A and B
7XV5650 and mini star couplers 7XV5450 or CM-0822 for
cascading. In this structure, only the pair A-B and the pair A1-B1 exchange
the states of their binary inputs to the binary outputs. Here, the
SICAM I/O-Units A1 and B1 use the gateway function of devices
A and B.
I/O extension of protection devices or direct connection to a
station control or power systems control via Ethernet. Protocols:
IEC 61850 GOOSE/Reporting/MMS, Modbus TCP/UDP
The SICAM I/O-Unit is used as I/O extension in accordance with
Figure 7.1/5. Binary signals are exchanged between a substation
controller of the automation substation as Modbus or IEC 61850
client, such as SICAM PAS/SCC, SICAM RTUs or Spectrum Power
- CC or a protection device, such as SIPROTEC with GOOSE,
SIPROTEC Compact (also directly, proprietary) and the SICAM
[dw_io-Mirror_unidirect-trans-sicam-io-unit, 3, en_US]
I/O-Units via an Ethernet network. If the integrated switch in the
SICAM I/O-Unit is used, the devices can be operated in a line
Figure 7.1/3 Binary Signal Transmitters, Unidirectional Transmission without an additional external switch.
from One SICAM I/O-Unit to Several SICAM I/O Units

Binary signal transmitters with gateway function

The application shows 2 separate bidirectional binary signal
transmissions. The main application is the following constella-
tion:
• Due to EMC environments, one SICAM I/O-Unit is to be
7.1 installed, for example, in the switch bay and connected via
a serial optical fiber.
• The optical fiber arrives in a central communication room and
is to be converted to electrical Ethernet. This is implemented
via SICAM I/O-Units as a serial gateway server. The logic struc-
ture is described in Figure 7.1/4.

324 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Devices for Input/Output Signals
SICAM I/O-Unit – Applications

[dw_io-extension_switchgear_BI-and-BO, 4, en_US]

Figure 7.1/5 I/O Extension of Switchgear with Binary Inputs and

-Outputs

Instead of an Ethernet network, a serial connection with the

protocol Modbus RTU can also be used. The connection can be
made by an RS485 bus line or an optical star topology.
[dw_contact-multiplier, 3, en_US]

Figure 7.1/7 Contact Duplicator

[dw_io-extension_station-unit_star-topology, 4, en_US]

Figure 7.1/6 I/O Extension for the Connection to the Substation

Controller with Serial, Optical Star Topology 7.1

Contact duplicator
Input signals at one or more binary inputs can be allocated to
binary outputs of the local unit (Figure 7.1/7).
• 1 binary signal at up to 6 relay outputs
• Several binary signals to several relay outputs that can be
assigned
• Different voltage levels for inputs and outputs in a wide
voltage range to isolate different voltage levels

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 325
Devices for Input/Output Signals
SICAM I/O-Unit – Applications for Teletransmission

Applications for the Teletransmission of Binary Signals

Binary Signal Transmission via Two-Wire Copper Line with
Locking
Figure 7.1/8 shows the optical fiber connection of a SICAM
I/O-Unit to a communication converter 7XV5662-0AC03, that
establishes a connection via pilot wires. Only 1 pair is required
for bidirectional signal exchange.
An additional isolating transformer allows 20 kV isolation of the
pilot wire connection.
A maximum of 6 individual binary signals can be transmitted
bidirectionally via the pilot wires. The additional time delay that
is caused by the transmission via the communication converter
and the pilot wires is less than 1 ms.
A typical application is the permissive overreach transfer trip
scheme of a directional overcurrent protection via pilot wires. In
[dw_bi-com-converter_12sign, 3, en_US]
this case, the independent overcurrent protection is connected
to the SICAM I/O-Unit via contacts and binary inputs and direc- Figure 7.1/9 Binary Signal Exchange of Up to 12 Signals via Long
tional signals are transmitted. Optical Fiber Connections

Transmission of Binary Signals via Communication Networks

with a G.703.1-/X.21 Interface
Figure 7.1/10 shows the optical connection of a SICAM I/O-Unit
to a communication converter (KU-XG) 7XV5662-0AA00, which
establishes a connection with a multiplexer with G.703.1 or
X.21 interface. In this way, this communication converter can
be used to transmit the signals via a communication network.
The average time delay in the network and the signal quality
are monitored by the SICAM I/O-Unit. Furthermore, a connection
[dw_bi-com-converter_6sign, 5, en_US] loss is displayed. In this case, the state of the binary outputs
can be set by the user to a secure state depending on the
Figure 7.1/8 Binary Signal Exchange of 6 Signals via a Pilot Wire
application. A maximum of 6 individual binary signals can be
Connection
transmitted bidirectionally via the communication network.
Binary Signal Exchange via Long Optical Fiber Connections
Figure 7.1/9 shows the optical fiber connection of a SICAM I/O-
Unit to a serial optical repeater 7XV5461-0B_00, which estab-
lishes a connection to multi-mode or single-mode fiber-optic
cables. With this application, a radius of up to 170 km can be
attained without additional amplifiers.
A maximum of 12 binary signals can be exchanged via long
optical fiber connections because the repeater allows the
connection of 2 SICAM I/O-Units.
[dw_bi-com-converter, 4, en_US]

Figure 7.1/10 Binary Signal Exchange via a Communication Converter

7.1 with a G.703.1-/X.21 Interface via a Communication
Network

Transmission of Binary Signals via Communication Networks

with a G.703.6 Interface
The application (Figure 7.1/11) shows the optical fiber connec-
tion of 1 to 3 SICAM I/O-Units to a communication converter
KU-2M 7XV5662-0AD00, which establishes a connection to a
multiplexer with a G.703.6 interface (1.44 Kbps/2 megabits/s,
E1/T1).
A maximum of 18 individual binary signals can be transmitted
bidirectionally via the communication network. The communica-

326 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Devices for Input/Output Signals
SICAM I/O-Unit – Applications for Teletransmission

tion converter KU-2M has 2 optical interfaces and one electrical

RS232 interface. 2 SICAM I/O-Units can be connected directly
with the KU-2M via a fiber-optic cable. At the RS232 interface
you can connect another SICAM I/O-Unit via an optoelectronic
converter 7XV5652. With the use of all input interfaces (2
optical fibers, 1 RS232) of the KU-2M, a maximum of 18 signals
can be bidirectionally exchanged.

[dw_io-Mirror_fiber-optic, 5, en_US]

Figure 7.1/12 Binary Signal Transmission via Optical Fiber or Wire-

less Connection; Connection via the Integrated Ethernet
Interface to External Transmission Devices

(1) Optical-fiber transmission with media converter for

Ethernet, for example RMC40 from Ruggedcom
(2) Wireless power transmission with media converter for
Ethernet, for example RS900WNC from Ruggedcom

Typical application examples can be found in the Internet

[dw_bi-com-converter_with_g703-6-interface, 4, en_US] www.siemens.com/sicam-io -> Downloads.
Figure 7.1/11 Binary Signal Exchange with G.703.6 Interface via a
Communication Network Device Configuration
The SICAM I/O-Unit is equipped with an integrated Web server
(1) Optional 2nd connection
that simplifies the settings with the help of a standard Internet
(2) Optional 3rd connection Web browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer). Figure 7.1/13 shows
the user interface. In the same way, operational logs and
For dial-up network connections via Ethernet, media converters commissioning aids are supported by the browser such as
or Ethernet networks are used. The SICAM I/O-Unit supports display of the actual state of the inputs and outputs.
IP address settings and settings for a standard gateway. The
The SICAM I/O mapping tool is used to configure the
electrical Ethernet interface of the SICAM I/O-Unit is connected
IEC 61850 GOOSE.
with one media converter or switch that transmits the signals of
the devices via dial-up network connections with Ethernet. The As soon as the IEC 61850 GOOSE configuration is completed,
average time delay in the network is measured by the SICAM the SICAM I/O mapping tool reads the corresponding SCD file
I/O-Unit. and generates the binary IEC 61850 parameter set, which can
be uploaded via HTML.
Binary Signal Transfer via Optical Fibers or Wireless Connection
The application (Figure 7.1/12) shows the electrical connection
of a binary signal transmitter (BST) SICAM I/O-Unit 7XV5673 to
Ethernet-based transmission units via patch cables that establish
a connection via optical fibers or a wireless connection at the 7.1
trunk line end. The connection could also be made via switches
with long-distance modules or via IP networks.

[sc_Config_Screen, 3, en_US]

Figure 7.1/13 Configuration Screen of the SICAM I/O-Unit in the Web

Browser

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 327
Devices for Input/Output Signals
SICAM I/O-Unit – Selection and Ordering Data/Dimensioned Drawing

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SICAM I/O-Unit 7 X V 5 6 7 3 – 0 J J □ 0 – □ A A 1
▲ ▲
Serial Interface and Communication Protocol │ │
Without serial communication 0 │
RS485 – Modbus RTU, binary signal transmission 1 │
Optical, 820 nm – Modbus RTU, binary signal transmission 2 │
Ethernet Interface and Communication Protocol │
Ethernet interface with Modbus TCP/UDP, binary signal transmission 1
Ethernet interface with Modbus TCP/UDP, binary signal transmission, and IEC 61850 server (GOOSE and reporting/MMS) 2
Accessories
Y-bus cable (required for using the internal switch/cascading) 7 K E 6 0 0 0 – 8 G D 0 0 – 0 B A 2
Device Type
DIN rail device IP20;
Dimensions 96 mm x 96 mm x 100 mm (W x H x D);
Power supply: DC 24 to 240 V, AC 100 V to 230 V;
Integrated Web server for parameterization; Ethernet interface RJ45 connector; integrated switch function; CE and UL approved
Inputs/Outputs
6 binary inputs with selectable threshold voltage;
6 relay outputs (4 make contacts, 2 change-over contacts)

Table 7.1/1 SICAM I/O-Unit Selection and Ordering Data

Dimensional Drawing

7.1

[dw_SICAM IO dimension_01, 3, en_US]

Figure 7.1/14 Dimensions SICAM I/O-Unit 7XV5673

328 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Devices for Input/Output Signals
SICAM AI-Unit – 7XV5674

Description
The SICAM AI-Unit 7XV5674 is an analog input device (20
mA) that is used by power utilities in the field of substations
and in the industrial sector where there are increased envi-
ronmental demands. Besides analog signal input, the SICAM
AI-Unit can compress the measured data by demand calcu-
lation, and can monitor and signal parameterized limiting
values. Measured values and messages can be transferred to
a protection device, to a SICAM I/O-Unit, or to a substation
or power-system control for process automation. Interoperable
standard protocols IEC 61850 GOOSE, Reporting/MMS, and
Modbus RTU/TCP/UDP are used here. The SICAM AI-Unit is thus
a practical external 20mA extension and a local or remote auto-
mation unit.

Inputs 12 x 20 mA for direct current measurements

(in accordance with IEC 60688)
Insulated housing 96 mm x 96 mm x 100 mm (W x H x D)
Assembly on a DIN rail
Degree of protection IP20
[ph_SICAM AI Unit, 1, --_--]
Approval CE and UL
Figure 7.2/1 SICAM AI-Unit 7XV5674

Benefits
• Battery-backed real-time clock (RTC) and message logs (can
• Wide field of application (SCADA, protection and automation be exported as .csv)
processes) from swift and protected real-time applications to
continuous long-term acquisition (24-h value): • Binary message and alarm stamp exact to 1 ms
– Current measured value every 642 ms • Simulation of input signals for easier system commissioning
(IBS)
– 10 sec, 1 min, 1 hr, 24 hr demand calculation in the device.
This on-site compression reduces the data volume that is to • Comparison of redundant measured data from different
be transferred and processed (making handling mass data SICAM AI - units is possible due to the simultaneous start of
possible) the average value window generation
– Independent on-site automation and monitoring unit with • Integrated communication and device supervision
signaling of the parameterized limit violation conditions in
the unit Applications
• Connection to serial interfaces or Ethernet interfaces of The SICAM AI-Unit supports various applications. It can be used
SIPROTEC 4 or SIPROTEC 5 devices in the following sections for the acquisition of DC field signals:
• Connection to all protection and bay devices via IEC 61850- • Power system protection
GOOSE messages and IEC 61850 reporting
• SCADA (station and power systems control)
• Compact and robust design (-25°C to 70°C operating tempera- • DMS (Distribution Management System)
ture)
• Flexible communication options (Ethernet, optical fiber or • EMS (Energy Management System)
RS485 electrical) • GIS (Gas-insulated switchgear) – gas pressure monitoring
• Modbus RTU/TCP, SIPROTEC 20-mA, serial or Ethernet connec- • Other industrial processes
tion to SIPROTEC 5 devices via SUP protocol • Modernization of old plants: Automation/interface to old 20
• Precise process measurement (0.2% with reference condi- mA technology (for example, 7SA511/513 issuing the fault
tions) location)
7.2
• Time synchronization via NTP (support of 2 time servers, The currents from the connected transducers (such as tempera-
fieldbus (Modbus RTU/TCP), IEC 61850, PC, internal RTC ture, pressure or position sensors) can be transferred via the
supporting communication protocols automation processes for
• Cost saving with integrated Ethernet switch permits a further processing (such as visualization). See also Figure 7.2/2.
chain structure to be built up (cascading with Y adaptor
7KE6000-8GD00-0BA2) The DC inputs of the SICAM AI-Unit can be parameterized for the
following ranges:
• Web server for parameterization with an IWeb browser. No
special parameterization software necessary • 0 mA to 20 mADC
• 4 LEDs for different parameterizable messages/alarms • 4 mA to 20 mADC
• 4 freely parameterizable group indications

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 329
Devices for Input/Output Signals
SICAM AI-Unit – 7XV5674

The measuring accuracy is 0.2% of the rated current (20 mA) at With the integrated Web server, parameterization is carried out
reference conditions. Under environmental influence (including by means of HTML pages with the use of a Web browser.
EMC), the measuring accuracy is 1.0% of the rated current (20
Typical applications can be found on the Internet
mA).
www.siemens.com/sicam-ai -> Downloads

[dw_ai-unit_application, 4, en_US]

Figure 7.2/2 Application Example

Measured quantities Communication

The SICAM AI-Unit permits only direct current to be measured. To communicate with the substation controller / protection
The measurement cycles on both PCB assemblies are carried out device and the other peripheral devices, the SICAM input meas-
at the same time. A complete measuring cycle via 6 channels uring device has an Ethernet interface and optionally a serial
takes 642 ms. The measurement of a channel takes 107 ms and interface (RS485 or optical).
is repeated after 642 ms. Using the Internet browser, the meas-
The ordering options for communication via Ethernet are:
ured current, 10 second, minute, hour, and day average values
of all channels can directly be viewed and measured by the • With integrated Ethernet switch: Modbus TCP protocol
7.2 device, and transferred via communication protocols, together • With integrated Ethernet switch: Modbus TCP protocol and
with messages (such as limit violation conditions). IEC 61850 protocol
Limit settings The following functions are supported via Ethernet:
Up to 16 limit violations of current measured values in both • Connection to SIPROTEC 5 devices via SUP (Slave Unit
directions can be set via the automation functions menu. Limit Protocol)
violation conditions of the upper and lower range of values can
be indicated as an individual or group indication on 3 LEDs.
• Device parameterization
The parameters of 4 group indications can be set, wherein each • Transmission of measured data
indication can be assigned up to 16 logically linked single-point • Transmission of messages
indications.
• Time synchronization via NTP

330 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Devices for Input/Output Signals
SICAM AI-Unit – 7XV5674

• Communication protocols Modbus TCP and IEC 61850 Dimensional Drawing

(reporting and GOOSE)
• Integrated Ethernet switch
With the Ethernet switch integrated in the device, further
network components can be cascaded via a Y-cable and hence
also included in an available network with IEC 61850 or a
further Ethernet protocol.
• Serial interface
– With RS485 interface
– With optical interface
• Communication with existing RS485 or optical 820 nm inter-
face
– With the Modbus RTU protocol and SIPROTEC RTU protocol
20 mA/SUP (Slave Unit Protocol)
The serial interface supports the following functions:
• Transmission of measured data
• Transmission of messages
• Time synchronization via Modbus RTU
When selecting the serial interface, either Modbus RTU or the
SIPROTEC RTU 20 mA/SUP (Slave Unit Protocol) communication
protocol can be used. [dw_SICAM AI dimension, 3, en_US]

Time synchronization Figure 7.2/3 Dimensions of the SICAM AI-Unit 7XV5674

During operation, the SICAM AI-Unit needs the date and time for
all time-relevant processes. In communication with peripheral
devices, this ensures a uniform time base and allows correct
time stamping of the process data.
The following types of time synchronization can be carried out:
• External time synchronization via Ethernet NTP (preferred)
• External time synchronization via Fieldbus with communica-
tion protocol Modbus RTU
• Internal time synchronization via RTC (Real-Time Clock) – if
external time synchronization is unavailable
LED indications
The SICAM AI-Unit automatically monitors communication
connections and the functions of its hardware/software/firm-
ware components. The LEDs on the top of the housing signal
the current state of the device. They can be parameterized for
individual or group indication.
Parameterization
No special software is required for parameterization. Parameter
setting is carried out by the computer via HTML pages and a
Web browser. Internet Explorer 6 (or higher) is necessary for this
purpose. 7.2

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 331
Devices for Input/Output Signals
SICAM AI-Unit – Selection and Ordering Data

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

SICAM AI-Unit 7 X V 5 6 7 4 – 0 K K □ 0 – □ A A 1
▲ ▲
Serial Interface and Communication Protocol │ │
Without serial communication 0 │
RS485 – Serial Modbus RTU and SIPROTEC 20 mA protocol/point-to-point connection 3 │
FO 820 nm, ST connector – serial Modbus RTU and SIPROTEC 20 mA protocol/point-to-point connection 4 │
Ethernet Interface and Communication Protocol │
Ethernet interface with Modbus TCP 1
Ethernet interface with Modbus TCP and IEC 61850 server (GOOSE and reporting/MMS) 2
Accessories
Y-bus cable (required for using the internal switch/cascading) 7 K E 6 0 0 0 – 8 G D 0 0 – 0 B A 2
Device Type
DIN rail device, IP20; 12 x 20-mA inputs for example SIPROTEC-/SICAM units;
Dimensions: 96 mm x 96 mm x 100 mm (WxHxD);
Power supply: DC 24 to 240 V, AC 100 V to 230 V;
Ethernet interface, RJ45 connector; integrated switch function; integrated Web server for parameterization; CE and UL approved

Table 7.2/1 SICAM AI-Unit Selection and Ordering Data

7.2

332 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Temperature Measurement

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 333
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR1200 – 7XV5662-6AD10

Description
The RTD unit TR1200 can measure up to 12 temperatures
with 12 measuring inputs. It supports 2-wire and 3-wire
Pt 100 sensors. For 2-wire operation, the measured line resis-
tance can be compensated with an appropriate setting. For
commissioning purposes, the temperature measurement can be
simulated.
The measured value is output to the protection device compat-
ible with the TR600 using the bus cable 7XV5103-7AAxx via an
RS485 bus.
All settings are made using three push-buttons on the front
panel. Input can be inhibited by means of a code.
The TR1200 has a wide-range power supply unit, DC 24 V to
250 V and AC 115/230 V, and an alarm relay. A sensor inter-
ruption or a sensor short is reported and transmitted to the
SIPROTEC device via protocol.

Benefits
• 3-digit temperature display [ph_7XV5662-6AD10_, 1, --_--]

• 12 inputs for temperature sensors, 1 to 12 sensors can be Figure 8.1/1 RTD Box TR1200 – 7XV5662-6AD10
connected
7UT6, 7UM6) or the Compact protection 7SK80 with serial
• Pt 100 thermocouples for 2-wire or 3-wire technology RS485 interface (port B) via the RS485 interface. The special
• 1 fault relay (electrically isolated change-over contact) cable 7XV5103-7AAxx is used for connection. The RTD unit
is connected to a SIPROTEC 5 device according to Figure
• RS485 interface (ZIEHL standard protocol and Modbus RTU 8.1/4). You can find detailed information at www.siemens.com/
protocol)
siprotec.
• LEDs indicate the measuring channel, fault condition, relay The RTD unit can be connected to a Reyrolle 5 (7SR5) device and
function and RS485 activity
used with the 49TS Temperature Sensor Supervision
• A code lock prevents parameter manipulation function. For further details see the 7SR5 Device Manual.
• TR600-compatible (to replace 1 TR600 with 6 connected
sensors)
• Universal power supply unit, AC/DC 24 V to 240 V
• Snap-on mounting to 35-mm DIN rail according to EN 60715
Applications
Communication over the RS485 bus
The RTD unit TR1200 is connected to a SIPROTEC 4 protec-
tion device with temperature function (for example, 7SJ6,

8.1

334 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR1200 – 7XV5662-6AD10

Connection Examples

[dw_connection_dev_via_serial-RS485-Bus_or_FO-cable, 2, en_US]

Figure 8.1/2 Connection of Devices using a Serial RS485 Bus or Fiber-Optic Cable

[halb-duplex-1-thermobox-060606, 1, en_US]

Figure 8.1/3 SIPROTEC Compact Connection Example – Half-Duplex Operation with an RTD Unit (top: Optical version (2 optical fibers); bottom: RS485
Version. Optional Ethernet via Port A (EN100–LC)

8.1

[dwverbau-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Figure 8.1/4 Connection Example of the RTD Unit to a SIPROTEC 5 Device

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 335
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR1200 – 7XV5662-6AD10

Dimensioned Drawing

[dw_Dimensions_7XV5662-8AD10, 2, en_US]

Figure 8.1/5 Dimensions, RTD Unit 7XV5662-6AD10

Sensor connections
Technical Data Quantity 24 to 240 VAC/VDC, 0/45 to 65 Hz, < 5 VA
Measuring cycle/meas- 20.4 to 297 VDC, 20 to 264 VAC
Rated auxiliary voltage urement time
Auxiliary voltage VH 24 to 240 VAC/VDC, 0/45 to 65 Hz, < 5 VA Measuring cycle/line 0.25 to 30 s (each measuring cycle of a sensor)
resistance
Tolerance 20.4 to 297 VDC, 20 to 264 VAC
Measuring range –199 to 850 °C

Relay/output Resolution 1 °C

Quantity 1 change-over contact (CO) Accuracy ± 0.5% of the measured value ± 1 K

Contact voltage max. 415 VAC Sensor current ≤ 0.8 mA

Switched current max. 5 A Temperature drift < 0.04 °C

Switching power max. 2000 VA (resistive load) Short circuit < 15 ohm
Open circuit > 400
max. 120 W at 24 VDC
Sensor resistance + max. 500 ohms
Reduction factor at cos 0.5
line resistance
φ = 0.7
Electrical rated data 250 VAC, 3 A, general purpose
VL: RS485 interface
D300 1 A, 240 VAC
Device address 0 to 96
Rated AC 15 IE = 2 A VE = 250 V
Measuring cycle/meas- 20.4 to 297 VDC, 20 to 264 VAC
operating
DC 13 IE = 2 A VE = 24 V urement time
current IE
Measuring cycle/line 0.25 to 30 s (each measuring cycle of a sensor)
IE = 0.2 A VE = 125 V
resistance
IE = 0.1 A VE = 250 V Measuring range –199 to 850 °C
Recommended fuse 3.5 A (gL) Resolution 1 °C
8.1 Contact service life, 1 × 107 switching cycles Accuracy ± 0.5% of the measured value ± 1 K
mechanical Sensor current ≤ 0.8 mA
Contact service life, 1 x 105 switching cycles at 250 VAC/5 A Temperature drift < 0.04 °C
electrical
Short circuit < 15 ohm

336 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR1200 – 7XV5662-6AD10

RS485 interface Test conditions

Open circuit > 400 Fast transient bursts EN 61000-4-4 ± 4 kV
Sensor resistance + max. 500 ohms Pulse 5/50 ns, f = 5 kHz, t = 15 ms, T = 300 ms
line resistance
Energy surge voltages IEC 61000-4-5 ± 1 pulse: 1.2/50 µs (8/20 µs)
(SURGE)
RS485 interface Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 ± 4 contact discharge, ± 8 kV air
Device address 0 to 96 test discharge
Baud rate 4800, 9600, 19200 bit/s
Parity N, O, E (no, odd, even) Housing
Max. cable length 1000 m at 19200 bit/s Housing type V8, distribution panel mounting
Serial protocol serial RTD protocol Ziehl/SIPROTEC, detailed Dimensions (W x H x 140 × 90 × 58 mm
protocol description in the manual D)
Depth/width 55 mm / 8 HPs
Test conditions Line termination, 1 × 1.5 mm2 each
According to EN 61010-1 single conductor
Rated surge immunity 4000 V Braided conductor 1 × 1.0 mm2 each
with end sleeve
Overvoltage category III
Tightening torque for 0.5 Nm
Degree of pollution 2
terminal screw
Rated insulation 300 V
Degree of protec- IP30/IP20
voltage VI
tion of the housing/
Operational time 100% terminal
Permissible ambient -20 °C bis +65 °C Vertical/horizontal optional
temperature mounting
EN 60068-2-2, dry heat
Fastening Snap-on mounting to 35-mm DIN rail
Galvanic separation Power supply – measuring inputs 3820 VDC
according to EN 60715 or screw fixing(with
No galvanic separation RS 485-interface – measuring inputs 2 additional angle brackets)
EMC Tests EN 61326-1 Weight about 370 g
EMC test for emitted EN 61000-4-3
interference

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Temperature measuring device (RTD unit) TR1200 7 X V 5 6 6 2 - 6 A D 1 0

With 12 temperature sensors Pt100, RS485 interface; mounting on DIN rail, wide range power supply AC/DC 24 V to 240 V
For SIPROTEC 5 (except 7SS85, 7VK87, 7KE85), SIPROTEC 4 Compact, SIPROTEC 4 protection relays

8.1

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 337
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR800Web – 7XV5662-7AD10

Description
The universal relay TR800 Web has 8 measuring or sensor inputs
and can measure 8 temperatures using Pt 100 elements (Ni100
and Ni120). The measured values 1 to 6 can be transmitted
by protocol to SIPROTEC 4 devices with temperature function.
2 universal relays with a total of 12 measuring inputs can be
connected.
The connection uses a serial RS485 interface (see Figure
8.2/4). The TR800 is protocol-compatible with the TR600
(7XV5662-3AD10, 7XV5662-5AD10) to the serial RS485 inter-
face and transfers the 6 temperatures in the same format. In this
mode, the TR800 can replace the TR600.
The serial RS485 interface can be connected to a Reyrolle 5
(7SR5) device and used with the 49TS Temperature Sensor
Supervision function. For further details see the 7SR5 Device
Manual.
For the motor protection SIPROTEC 7SK80, the connection
can also use the Ethernet interface if the system interface is
(already) used (see Figure 8.2/2 and Figure 8.2/3). The universal [ph_7XV5662-7AD10_, 1, --_--]

relay is operated and configured via the Ethernet interface using Figure 8.2/1 Universal Relay/RTD Box TR800
a web browser. Support is provided for 3-wire thermocouples.
For the 2-wire connection, the measured line resistance can be
compensated by a software setting. In addition, temperatures
• Universal power supply unit, AC/DC 24 V to 240 V
can be simulated to test the temperature function in SIPROTEC • Integrated Web server for configuration, reading measured
devices. data, e-mail alarms to user management, data and alarm
logging
As an alternative to temperature sensors, 8 analog values (DC
0/4 mA to 20 mA and DC 0 V to 10 V) can be measured The • Time-dependent control (day/night)
output can be scaled and the units (°C, V, A, %) can be adapted • Real-time clock with synchronization via the time server.
in the TR800. The RTD protocol in temperature format is used
for transmission to the SIPROTEC device and six of the 8 analog Application Examples
sensor values are available there. With two TR800s, 12 values
are available. Accordingly, for example, 5.5 mA is transmitted NOTE
using the temperature value 55 and can be displayed either as
a temperature in the SIPROTEC device or queried as a threshold
value with respect to limits. This allows further processing of
i The TR800 Web can only be used with SIPROTEC 4
or SIPROTEC 4 Compact devices.
analog values in SIPROTEC devices with temperature function
or the transmission of these values to systems control (for Communication with a TR800 Web over the Ethernet
example, SICAM PAS). In the SIPROTEC 6MD66 bay controller interface
(starting with V4.8), all 8 measuring inputs are available.
If a universal relay TR800 is sufficient for measured-value acquis-
The TR800 has a wide-range power supply unit, DC 24 V to ition, this relay can be connected directly to the protection
250 V and AC 115/230 V, and an alarm relay. A sensor inter- device (for example, 7SK80x/port A) by means of a CAT 5 patch
ruption or a sensor short is reported and transmitted to the cable. The TR800 Web is set in advance in the Web browser
SIPROTEC device via protocol. on a PC using the same cable. A TR800 can be queried by two
or more SIPROTEC devices. The IP address and the UDP port of
Benefits the TR800 can be set in the SIPROTEC device. In this way, a
SIPROTEC device can use the temperatures 1 to 3 and another
• 8 measuring inputs: device can use the temperatures 3 to 6 for further processing,
– Pt 100, Pt 1000 in 2-wire or 3-wire technology
however, each device reads all 6 temperature values (Figure
– KTY 83 or KTY 84 8.2/2).
– Thermocouple types B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T
– DC 0 V to 10 V, DC 0/4 mA to 20 mA
– Resistance: 500 ohms, resistance: 30 kOhms
• 4 relay outputs (all as isolated change-over contacts)
8.2 • Ethernet interface (http, https, UDP, Modbus, Bonjour, UpNP,
SNMP)
• RS485 interface (ZIEHL standard protocol and Modbus RTU
protocol)

338 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR800Web – 7XV5662-7AD10

Communication over the RS485 bus

One or two TR800s can be connected to a SIPROTEC 4 device
with temperature function (7SJ6, 7UT6, 7UM6) or the Compact
device SIPROTEC 7SK80 via the RS485 interface.
The special cables 7XV5103-7AAxx are used for connection. In
the case of remote measuring points, a connection can also
be established via a multimode optical fiber and the converter
7XV5650.
3 operating modes are available for various applications. All 3
types are compatible with the RTD unit TR600 with 6 measuring
inputs. The operating mode is set using the RS485 address of
the TR800 Web.
You can find detailed information at www.siemens.com/siprotec

[dw_connection_one_device_via_Ethernet, 2, en_US]

Figure 8.2/2 Connecting a Device via the Ethernet

Communication with 2 TR800 Webs over the Ethernet

interface
If 2 TR800s are used for measured-value acquisition on
large engines, a switchgear-compatible switch (for example,
RUGGEDCOM RS900 or Hirschmann RSR20) must be used. The
switch, the 2 TR800 Web relays, the protection device and the
control PC, connected via the patch cable (1:1), form their own
subnetwork or are part of a larger Ethernet network.
[dw_connection_dev_via_serial-RS485-Bus_or_FO-cable_01, 3, en_US]
DIGSI 4 and the Web browser may run in parallel on the control
Figure 8.2/4 Connection via the Serial RS485 Bus or Fiber-Optic Cable
PC. Accordingly, one of the 2 TR800 Webs and the protection
device can be used in parallel during normal operation and data
can be read from them (Figure 8.2/3).

[dw_connection_two_device_via_Ethernet, 2, en_US]

Figure 8.2/3 Connecting 2 Devices via the Ethernet

8.2

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 339
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR800Web – 7XV5662-7AD10

Dimensioned Drawing

[dw_Dimensions_7XV5662-8AD10, 2, en_US]

Figure 8.2/5 Dimensions, RTD Unit 7XV5662-7AD10

Relay/output
Technical Data Recommended fuse 3.5 A (gL)
Contact service life, 1 × 107 switching cycles
Rated auxiliary voltage mechanical
Auxiliary voltage VH 24 to 240 VAC/VDC, 0/45 to 120 Hz, < 4 W, < Contact service life, 1 x 105 switching cycles at 250 VAC/6 A
8 VA electrical
Tolerance 20.4 to 297 VDC, 20 to 264 VAC
Isolation voltage 2000 VAC Real-time clock
Buffer for 7 days
Relay/output Continuous synchronization is possible via the
Quantity 4 x 1 change-over contact SNTP protocol to the Ethernet interface
Contact voltage max. 415 VAC
Switched current max. 5 A Test conditions
Switching power max. 2000 VA (resistive load) According to EN 61010-1

max. 120 W at 24 VDC Rated surge immunity 4000 V

Reduction factor at cos 0.5 Degree of pollution 2

φ = 0.7 Rated insulation 300 V
Electrical rated data 250 VAC, 3 A, general purpose voltage VI
VL: Operational time 100%
AC 240 V, ¼ hp. 2.9 FLA
Permissible ambient -20 °C bis +65 °C
120 VAC, ¹⁄₁₀ hp. 3.0 FLA
temperature
EN 60068-2-1, dry heat
A C 300
Earthquake safety EN 2 to 25 Hz, ± 1.6 mm
D 300 1 A, 240 VAC 60068-2-6
25 to 150 Hz, 5 g
Rated AC 15 IE = 3 A VE = 250 V
operating Galvanic separation Ethernet-measuring input: min. 500 VDC
DC 13 IE = 2 A VE = 24 V
current IE No galvanic separation RS 485-interface – measuring inputs
8.2 IE = 0.2 A VE = 125 V EMC Tests EN 61326-1

IE = 0.1 A VE = 250 V EMC test for emitted EN 61000-4-3

interference

340 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR800Web – 7XV5662-7AD10

Test conditions Voltage/current input

Fast transient bursts EN 61000-4-4 ± 4 kV 0/4–20 mA 8 kΩ 100 mA 0.5%
Pulse 5/50 ns, f = 5 kHz, t = 15 ms, T = 300 ms Temperature drift < 0.02% / K
Energy surge voltages IEC 61000-4-5 ± 1 pulse: 1.2/50 µs (8/20 µs)
(SURGE) Resistance measurement
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 ± 4 contact discharge, ± 8 kV air Accuracy 0.0 to 500.0 0.2% of the measured value ± 0.5 Ω
test discharge Ω
Ethernet connection 10/100 megabit Auto-MDIX (no crossover cable Accuracy 0 to 30.00 0.5 % of the measured value ± 2 Ω
required) kΩ
Sensor current ≤ 0.6 mA
Sensor connection
Measuring cycle/meas- < 3 s Housing
urement time (for 8 Housing type V8, distribution panel mounting
measurands)
Dimensions (W x H x 140 × 90 × 58 mm
Pt100, Pt1000 according to EN 60751: D)
Measuring range °C Short Open Sensor Depth/width 55 mm / 8 HPs
circuit, circuit, resistance
Line termination, 1 × 1.5 mm2 each
ohms ohms + line
single conductor
resistance,
ohms Braided conductor 1 × 1.0 mm2 each
with end sleeve
Sensor min. max. < > > max.
Tightening torque for 0.5 Nm
Pt 100 -199 860 15 400 500
terminal screw
Pt 1000 -199 860 150 4000 4100
Degree of protec- IP30/IP20
If Ni100 or Ni120 sensors are connected, the SIPROTEC device handles tion of the housing/
conversion. terminal
The TR800 is configured for Pt100 sensors. Vertical/horizontal optional
Accuracy ± 0.5 % of the measured value ± 0.5 K mounting
Sensor current ≤ 0.6 mA Fastening Snap-on mounting to 35-mm DIN rail
according to EN 60715 or screw fixing(with
Temperature drift < 0.04 °C
2 additional angle brackets)
Weight about 370 g
Voltage/current input
Input impedance Max. input Accuracy of the
signal end value
0 – 10 V 12 kΩ 27 V 0.1%

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Temperature measuring device (RTD unit) TR800Web 7 X V 5 6 6 2 - 7 A D 1 0

With 8 temperature sensors PT100, RS485 or Ethernet interface, DIN rail mounting, wide range power supply AC/DC 24 V to 240 V.
Can only be used with SIPROTEC 4 Compact and SIPROTEC 4 relays, for each relay 2 units can be used.

NOTE

i Consider 7XV5674 for 20 mA applications

8.2

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 341
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR1200IP – 7XV5662-8AD10

Description
The RTD unit TR1200 IP has 12 sensor inputs and can thus
measure up to 12 temperatures using Pt100 sensors.
Support is provided for 3-wire sensors For 2-wire operation, the
measured line resistance can be compensated with an appro-
priate setting.
All settings on the TR1200 IP can be made using 3 push-buttons
on the front of the device or in a web browser (for example,
Internet Explorer).
For Ni100 or Ni120 sensors, the measured values must be
converted in the protection device. The SIPROTEC 7SK80
supports with its integrated temperature function.
The measured values are output to the protection device via the
Ethernet network using RJ45 plugs.
Note: The SIPROTEC 4 system interface with an EN100 module
does not support temperature measurement by the RTD unit
TR1200 IP.
[ph_7XV5662-8AD10_, 1, --_--]
Benefits
Figure 8.3/1 RTD Unit TR1200 IP (Ethernet) 7XV5662-8AD10
• 3-digit display for temperature at a maximum of 12 meas-
uring points The protection device is parameterized with DIGSI 4 on a laptop
• 12 sensor inputs; 1 to 12 sensors may be connected computer using the USB front interface.

• Pt100 in 2-wire or 3-wire technology; if connecting Ni100 or The TR1200 IP RTD unit is set with the front push-buttons or in
Ni120, conversion to the correct temperature is necessary in a web browser on a laptop computer via the Ethernet interface.
the evaluation device; SIPROTEC devices (for example, 7SK80) To do this, the patch cable must be moved from the protection
support this function. The EN100 module in the SIPROTEC 4 device to a laptop computer.
devices does not support the TR1200 IP. Tip: If, during commissioning, a commercially available switch is
• 1 alarm relay (1 change-over contact) temporarily used with 3 patch cables, the protection device and
the TR1200 IP can be set in parallel using a PC and DIGSI 4.
• Electrical 10 Mbps Ethernet interface (RTD IP protocol from
ZIEHL or MODBUS IP protocol) You can find detailed information at www.siemens.com/siprotec
• Display, configuration, simulation and firmware update via a
web browser
• Mozilla Firefox 3.5 and Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0 were
tested
• LEDs for measurement assignment, faults, relay status and
Ethernet interface
• Code lock against changing the set point values
• Wide-range power supply unit AC/DC 24 V to 240 V
• Distributor housing for panel flush mounting, 8 HP, depth:
55 mm
• Mounting on 35-mm DIN rail according to EN 60715
Application Examples
Measurement of up to 12 measured values with an RTD unit
TR1200 IP
For measuring up to 12 measured values, an RTD unit TR1200 [dw_connection_one_device_via_Ethernet_01, 2, en_US]
IP is connected directly to the protection device (for example,
Figure 8.3/2 Connecting a Device via the Ethernet
7SK80x/port A) via a double-shielded CAT 5 patch cable (1:1 or
crossed).

8.3

342 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR1200IP – 7XV5662-8AD10

Dimensioned Drawing

[dw_Dimensions_7XV5662-8AD10, 2, en_US]

Figure 8.3/3 Dimensions, RTD Unit 7XV5662-7AD10

Relay/output Temperature measurement

Quantity 1 change-over contact Measurement time, 0.25 to 3 s (depending on the number of
Contact voltage max. 415 VAC sensor sensors)
Switched current max. 5 A Measurement time, 0.25 to 30 s (each measuring cycle of a sensor)
Switching power max. 2000 VA (resistive load) sensor

max. 120 W at 24 VDC Measuring range -199 °C bis 850 °C

Reduction factor at cos 0.5 Resolution 1 °C

φ = 0.7
Electrical rated data 250 VAC, 3 A, general purpose Sensor connection
VL: 12 × Pt100 according to EN 60751, the connection of Ni100 and Ni120
AC 240 V, ¼ hp. 2.9 FLA
sensors is possible
120 VAC, ¹⁄₁₀ hp. 3.0 FLA
The measured values must be converted in the evaluation device.
C 300
Measuring range °C Short Open Sensor
D 300 1 A, 240 VAC circuit, circuit, resistance
Rated AC 15 IE = 1 A VE = 400 V ohms ohms + line
operating resistance,
current IE DC 13 IE = 2 A VE = 250 V ohms
IE = 2 A VE = 24 V Sensor min. max. < > > max.
Pt 100 -199 860 15 400 500
IE = 0.2 A VE = 125 V
Tolerance ± 0.5% of the measurement ± 1 K
IE = 0.1 A VE = 250 V 8.3

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 343
Temperature Measurement
RTD Unit TR1200IP – 7XV5662-8AD10

Sensor connection Test conditions

Sensor current ≤ 0.8 mA Galvanic separation 3820 VDC
Temperature drift < 0.04 °C of control voltage –
measuring input
Ethernet – control 500 VDC
Ethernet interface
voltage – measuring
Transmission rate 10 Mbps input
IP address Standard: 192.182.1.100, adjustable
Subnet mask Standard: 255.255.255.0, adjustable Housing
UDP port Standard: 5000 (5001), adjustable Housing type V8, distribution panel mounting
Max. cable length 20 m when using a CAT 5 patch cable Dimensions (W x H x 140 × 90 × 58 mm
Max. response time, < 700 μs D)
RTD/Modbus Depth/width 55 mm / 8 HPs
Line termination, 1 × 1.5 mm2 each
Test conditions single conductor
According to EN 61010-1 Braided conductor 1 × 1.0 mm2 each
Rated surge immunity 4000 V with end sleeve
Surge category III Tightening torque for 0.5 Nm
terminal screw
Degree of pollution 2
Degree of protec- IP30/IP20
Rated insulation 300 V
tion of the housing/
voltage VI
terminal
Operational time 100% Flush mounting any
Permissible ambient -20 °C bis +65 °C Fastening Snap-on mounting to 35-mm DIN rail
temperature during according to EN 60715 or screw fixing(with
EN 60068-2-2, dry heat
operation 2 additional angle brackets)
Electromagnetic EN 61000-6-2 Weight about 350 g
compatibility –
immunity
EMC – emitted inter- EN 61000-6-4
ference

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Temperature measuring device (RTD unit) TR1200IP 7 X V 5 6 6 2 - 8 A D 1 0

With 12 temperature sensors Pt100, mounting on DIN rail, wide range power supply AC/DC 24 V to 240 V.
For SIPROTEC 5 protection relays (except 7SS85, 7VK87, 7KE85) or SIPROTEC 4 Compact 7SK80, port A (Ethernet, RJ45).

NOTE

i Not compatible with SIPROTEC 4 EN100 module

8.3

344 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Arc Protection

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 345
Arc Protection
Sensors for SIPROTEC 5 and Reyrolle 5

Description can also be passed through the breaker compartment and the
cable connection compartment of the feeders in addition to the
The arc protection function detects arcs in switchgear via optical
busbar compartment. Line sensors detect arcs along the entire
sensors. These sensors will detect direct and reflected flash light
9.1 sensor length from 5 m to 40 m. Line sensors are connected via
within a specific detection range(purely optical and fastest way).
a supply line to the arc protection module of protection relay.
This arc flashlight activates optic sensors.
The supply line can be ordered in lengths from 3 m to 10 m.
Detection of arcs takes place either optically only or optionally
using an additional current criterion in order to prevent an over
function. The arc protection function uses a self-monitoring
circuit. This circuit monitors the optical arc sensors and the fiber-
optic cables.
The arc flash sensors are connected to the SIPROTEC 5 device
via an ARC-CD-3FO module or Reyrolle 5 device with the D order
code on the 10th digit of mlfb code 7SR5xxx-xxDxx-xAA0.
Optic sensitivity of sensors can be edited and set to trigger the
light intensity level for light detection threshold from protection [sc_LineSensor, 1, --_--]
device settings parameters.
Figure 9.1/2 Line Sensor P1X
Benefits
Inputs for Optical Sensors for Arc Protection (via Module
The arc flash protection cares for an extremely fast trip avoiding ARC-CD-3FO)
additional damage of the assets and, even more important, for
the safety of personal. Thus, the resulting arcs can be detected Connector type AVAGO AFBR-4526Z
reliably and quickly. The protection device can trip correspond-
Number of trans- 3
ingly quickly and without time delays. This increases safety of ceivers
personnel.
Fiber type Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) 1 mm
Receiver
Applications
Maximum -10 dBm ± 2 dBm
Within an air insulated switchgear, the optic sensors are placed Minimum -40 dBm ± 2 dBm
in such a way that arcs in the busbar compartment, the circuit
Spectrum 400 nm to 1100 nm
breaker compartment, and the cable connection department are
Attenuation In the case of plastic optical fibers, you can
reliably detected. Up to 3 optical point or line sensors can be
expect a path attenuation of 0.2 dB/m. Addi-
connected to the protection relay module. tional attenuation comes from the plug and
sensor head.
Point Sensors Minimal 25 dB
Optical budget60
Point sensors detect flashlight of arc faults in the control cabi- Analog sampling rate 16 kHz
nets of the air-insulated system part. The point sensors can ADC type 10-bit successive approximation
be ordered with line lengths from 3 m to 35 m. Line cable is Transmitter
connected to protection device module at one end and on the
Type LED
other end sensor with light sensitive part.
Wavelength λ = 650 nm
Transmitter power Minimum 0 dBm
Maximum 2 dBm
Numerical aperture 0.5 61
Signal rate connection 1 pulse per second
test
Pulse duration connec- 11 μs
tion test

[sc_PointSensor, 1, --_--]

Figure 9.1/1 Point Sensor P1X

Line Sensors
Depending on the application, the line sensor can be used in
large sections, for example, laid along the busbar, or if allowed
by the mechanical design of the switchgear, the line sensor

60 All values in combination with sensors approved by Siemens.

61 Numerical aperture (NA = sin θ (launch angle))

346 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Arc Protection
Sensors for SIPROTEC 5 and Reyrolle 5

Selection and Ordering Information

Group Accessories Article per packaging unit Order no. (short designa- 9.1
tion)
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 3 m 1 P1X19
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 4 m 1 P1X28
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 5 m 1 P1X37
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 7 m 1 P1X277
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 10 m 1 P1X46
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 15 m 1 P1X55
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 20 m 1 P1X64
Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 35 m 1 P1X82
Sensors for arc protection Line sensor, length 3 m 1 P1X107
Sensors for arc protection Line sensor, length 10 m 1 P1X116
Sensors for arc protection Line sensor, length 20 m 1 P1X125
Sensors for arc protection Line sensor, length 30 m 1 P1X134
Sensors for arc protection Line sensor, length 40 m 1 P1X143
Sensors for arc protection Supply line for line sensors 3 m 1 P1X152
Sensors for arc protection Supply line for line sensors 5 m 1 P1X161
Sensors for arc protection Supply line for line sensors 10 m 1 P1X170

Table 9.1/1 Accessories

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 347
Arc Protection
ReyArc 7XG31

Description
The Reyarc 7XG31 arc protection system detects arcs by using
an optical sensor and an auxiliary device to signal a protection
device or a switching device. A trip signal can be triggered in
less than 10 ms using arc detection only or within 20 ms when
9.2 using overcurrent check with an overcurrent protection device.
Reyarc consist of two main elements:
• Optic sensors in chambers and auxiliary devices
• Interface modules connected to these sensors
These devices and interface modules also connect to protection
relays binary inputs or a direct switching equipment (CB) to [sc_ReyArc 7XG31 App, 1, --_--]
provide a fault trip.
Figure 9.2/1 Reyarc 7XG31 Application
Benefits
The Reyarc 7XG31 arc protection system is flexible in arc fault
protection schemes and very retrofittable in many solutions. The
arc flash protection cares for an extremely fast trip avoiding
additional damage of the assets and, even more important, for
the safety of personal. Thus, the resulting arcs can be detected
reliably and quickly. The protection device can trip correspond-
ingly quickly and without time delays.
Existing Switchgear: Where a requirement exists to retrofit
Reyarc arc fault protection to metal clad switchgear utilizing the
existing overcurrent protection relay.
New Switchgear: Where a requirement exists to install Reyarc
arc fault protection to new switchgear for integration with the
customer preferred overcurrent feeder protection relay.

348 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Arc Protection
ReyArc 7XG31

Ordering Information - 7XG3130 Optical Arc Fault Sensor

Product Description Order No.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 349
Arc Protection
ReyArc 7XG31

Ordering Information - 7XG3140 Linear Fibre Optic Arc Fault

Sensor

Product Description Order No.

350 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Arc Protection
ReyArc 7XG31

Ordering Information - 7XG3120 Arc Fault Monitor Relay

Product Description Order No.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 351
Arc Protection
ReyArc 7XG31

Ordering Information - 7XG3123 Arc Fault Interface Module

Product Description Order No.

352 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Arc Protection
ReyArc 7XG31

Ordering Information - 7XG3127 Arc Sensor Fault Monitor

Relay

Product Description Order No.

Accessories Variants Order No.

Rack mounting frames Dual – 4U x 2 frame for mounting 2 high x 1 wide VCE:TBD-AD
RA27
Quad – 4U x 4 frame for mounting 2 high x 2 VCE:TBD-AQ
wide RA27

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 353
Arc Protection
ReyArc 7XG31

9.2

354 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 355
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XV75

Description
The test switch 7XV75 is used to test protection devices,
including the transformer circuits and command contacts. Using
the switches on the front, the current and voltage inputs and
the circuits of the protection device to be tested are discon-
nected and connected to the front side. Using these plug
connectors, currents and voltages can be supplied using test
equipment and the various commands and indications can be
tested.
10.1
Benefits
The following versions are available in a flush-mounting
housing:
• For feeder protection without open neutral point
• For feeder protection without open neutral point and with
additional contacts
• For feeder protection with no open neutral point for 2 trans-
former cores or separate ground-fault transformer
• For feeder protection with an open neutral point
[ph_7XV75, 1, --_--]

Figure 10.1/1 Test Switch 7XV75

• For feeder protection with an open neutral point and inde-
pendently switchable trip and transformer circuits
• For feeder protection with an open neutral point
• For 3-winding transformer differential protection • For feeder protection with an open neutral point and inde-
• For feeder protection without open neutral point, with a 4th pendently switchable trip and transformer circuits
current-transformer input and a 4th voltage-transformer input
(3-stage test switch)
• For 3-winding transformer differential protection
• For feeder protection without open neutral point, with 4th
Applications current transformer and 4th voltage-transformer input (3-
stage test switch)
The following variants are available in a flush-mounting
housing: The test device can be used with auxiliary voltages in the range
of AC/DC 24 V to 250 V. Therefore, there is no longer any need
• For feeder protection without open neutral point to select between different power-supply models.
• For feeder protection without open neutral point and with
additional contacts
• For feeder protection without open neutral point for
2 current-transformer cores or separate ground-fault current
transformers

356 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XV75

Dimensional Drawing

10.1

[dw_7XV75-test-switch_dimensional_drawings, 1, en_US]

Electrical Tests
Technical Data Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J;
All circuits, class III 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
General device data at intervals of 5 s
Rated operating voltage Vn AC/DC 250 V Insulation resistance measurement DC 500 V, For 1 min, ≥100 Ohm
Rated operating current In Max 5 A for all circuits
Test current capacity for 1 s 150 A for CT circuits Construction
Test current capacity for 10 s 60 A for CT circuits Metal case 7XP20
Continuous current 20 A for CT circuits Dimension 1/6 of 19”wide
Overvoltage category, IEC III Weight approx. 3.4 kg
60255-27 Protection type acc. to IEC 60529
Operating Altitude Max 2000 m With closed cover IP40
Minimum admissible atmospheric 783.8 hPA With open cover IP20
pressure
For operator protection IP2x for terminals
Degree of pollution 2
Protection Class 1

Electrical Tests
Insulation tests IEC 60255-27, Edition 2.0
Voltage test (routine test and type 2.5 kV; 50 Hz
test)

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 357
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XV75

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Test switch combination in a 7XP20 housing for panel flush mounting 7 X V 7 5 0 ☐ – ☐ C A 0 0

▲ ▲
Without open neutral point for feeder protection 0 │
With 16-pole Harting plug │ 0
10.1 With 16 insulated 4-mm plugs (not for 7XV7506) │ 1
With open neutral point for feeder protection 1 │
With 16-pole Harting plug │ 0
With 16 insulated 4-mm plugs │ 1
For 3-winding transformer 2 │
With 16-pole Harting plug │ 0
With 16 insulated 4-mm plugs │ 1
Without open neutral point for 2 current-transformer cores or separate ground fault 3 │
With 16-pole Harting plug │ 0
With 16 insulated 4-mm plugs │ 1
Without open neutral point for feeder protection 6 │
With 4 current-transformer inputs and 4 voltage-transformer inputs │ │
With 16-pole Harting plug │ │
Without open neutral point for feeder protection with additional make and break contacts 7 │
With 16-pole Harting plug │ 0
With 16 insulated 4-mm plugs │ 1
With open neutral point, independently switching trip input circuit 8 │
With 16-pole Harting plug 0
With 16 insulated 4-mm plugs 1
Connecting cable 7XV6201 for test switch 7XV75 with 2 m cable
With 16-pole Harting plug and 17 insulated plugs, 4 mm with core marking and tagging 7 X V 6 2 0 1 – 5
With 16-pole Harting plug and 17 end sleeves with core marking and tagging 7 X V 6 2 0 1 – 6

358 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG22 2RMLG

Description
The 7XG222 range of test blocks, housed within an Epsilon
enclosure, offers facilities for monitoring and secondary injec-
tion testing of power system protection schemes in conjunction
with the appropriate multi-fingered test plug.
The 2RMLG Test Block has 14 pairs of spring loaded contacts
which are linked to a terminal block positioned at the rear of the
enclosure.
The 2RMLG07 is coded to only accept the 2RMLB-R7 Test Plug
10.1
which has connection terminals 21, 23, 25, and 27, internally.
The 2RMLG08 is coded to only accept the 2RMLB-R8 Test Plug
which has internal pairs 1 and 3, 5 and 7, 9 and 11, and 15 and
17, shorted together internally.
The 2RMLG09 is coded to only accept the 2RMLB-R9 Test Plug
which has terminals 1-3-5-7, 9-11, 17-19 & 21-23-25-27 shorted
together internally..
Each pair of contacts is normally closed completing the circuit
through the test block when the associated protection equip-
ment is in use.
For testing purposes the test block can be accessed by removing
the front cover. The 2RMLG01 has a metallic probe attached to
the front cover assembly which when withdrawn open circuits
the 2 contacts at position 13 and 14.
The main DC auxiliary supply to the protection scheme or relay
can be wired to this circuit to prevent inadvertent tripping of the
[sc_7XG22, 1, --_--]
protection circuit after removal of the cover and during the test
procedure.
numbered sockets of the test plug. If a number of 2RMLG test
The 2RMLG02/07/08/09 do not include the above facility and blocks are connected to a relay it is recommended that the DC
contacts 13 and 14 are normally closed. These contacts must supply be routed through each of them to safeguard against
not be used for current circuits, as the relevant contact finger on inadvertent operation.
the 2RMLB-R test plug is shorter in this position.
The short test finger in position 13 and 14 on the 2RMLB-R will Benefits
open contacts 13 and 14 in the test block after the other fingers
The features of the Test Block are:
have made contact in all other positions.
It is important that the sockets in the test plug which correspond
• Finger safe design
to the current transformer secondary windings are linked prior • Finger safe test leads
to the test plug being inserted into the test block. • Various scheme configurations
This will ensure that the current transformer secondary wind- • Retention fixings on test plugs
ings are short circuited prior to disconnection from the protec-
tion scheme or relay. If the DC auxiliary supply is to be used
• 7XG222 Suitable for vertical or horizontal mounting
during testing it can be linked using the sockets in the test plug. • Standard 4U case design
Operation of the contacts can be monitored by connecting the • Coded test plugs prevent incorrect insertion
test equipment to the protection scheme or relay with the even

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 359
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG22 2RMLG

Connection Diagrams

10.1

[dw_7XG22_connection_2RMLG01/02, 1, en_US]

Figure 10.1/2 Typical Application of the 2RMLG01 / 2RMLG02 Test Block and 2RMLB-R1 Test Plug

NOTE

i 2RMLG01 13/14 open cct when cover is removed

and all other positions are connected.
2RMLG02 13/14 connected as in the same way as
other positions.

360 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG22 2RMLG

10.1

[dw_7XG22_connection_2RMLG07, 1, en_US]

Figure 10.1/3 Typical Application of the 2RMLG07 Test Block and 2RMLB-R7 Test Plug

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 361
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG22 2RMLG

10.1

[dw_7XG22_connection_2RMLG08, 1, en_US]

Figure 10.1/4 Typical Application of the 2RMLG08 Test Block and 2RMLB-R8 Test Plug

[dw_7XG22_connection_2RMLG09, 1, en_US]

Figure 10.1/5 Typical Application of the 2RMLG09 Test Block and 2RMLB-R9 Test Plug

362 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG22 2RMLG

Dimension Drawings

10.1

[dw_7XG22_dimension_panelcutout, 1, en_US]

Figure 10.1/6 Panel Cut-out View

[dw_7XG22_dimension_side, 1, en_US]

Figure 10.1/7 Side View (Vertical) Top View (Horizontal)

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 363
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG22 2RMLG

10.1

[dw_7XG22_dimension_top, 1, en_US]

Figure 10.1/8 Front View

NOTE Technical Data

i The ∅3.6 holes are for M4 thread forming (trilob-

ular) screws. These are supplied as standard and
Indication of Conformity

are suitable for use in ferrous/aluminum panels This product complies with the
directive of the Council of the
1.6 mm thick and above. For other panels, holes
European Communities on the
to be M4 clearance (typically ∅4.5) and relays harmonization of the laws of the
mounted using M4 machine screws, nuts and Member States relating to electro-
lockwashers (supplied in panel fixing kit). magnetic compatibility (EMC Direc-
tive 2014/30/EU) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within
specified voltage limits (Low
Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU) as
well as restriction on usage of
hazardous substances in electrical
and electronic equipment (RoHS
Directive 2011/65/EU).
This conformity has been proved
by tests conducted by Siemens
AG in accordance of the Council
Directive in accordance with the
product standard IEC/EN 60255-26
for the EMC directives, and with
the standard IEC/EN 60255-27 for
the low-voltage directive.
RoHS directive 2011/65/EU is met
using the standard EN 50581. The
device has been designed and
produced for industrial use.

364 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG22 2RMLG

EMC Compliance 2RMLG 01 only 2 kV impulse between terminals

13 and 14 when the cover is
89/336/EEC These products have been classi- removed (e.g. opening the auxil-
fied as electromagnetically benign iary supply or trip circuit).
and are therefore excluded from 2RMLB-R1 As 2RMLG 01 plus 2 kV impulse
the European Community EMC between incoming and outgoing
Directive. (89/336/EEC) contacts when inserted.
2RMLB-R7 As above with the exception of
General Technical Data terminals 21, 23, 25, and 27 which
are permanently shorted together.
High Voltage Withstand
2RMLB-R8 As above with the exception of 10.1
IEC 60255-5 terminal pairs 1-3, 5-7, 9-11,
and 15-17 which are permanently
shorted together as pairs.
2RMLG 01/02/07/08/09 5 kVRMS for 1 minute between all
2RMLB-R9 As above with the exception
case terminals connected together
of terminal pairs 1-3-5-7, 9-11,
and the case earth terminal.
17-19, and 21-23-25-27 which are
5 kVRMS for 1 minute between any permanently shorted together in
contact pair and either adjacent groups.
alternate contact pair, provided
the intermediate contact pair is not
Current and Voltage Withstand
used.
2 kVRMS for 1 minute between any
2RMLG 01/02/07/08 All contact circuits rated at 20 A
contact pair and either adjacent
continuously or 400 A for 1 s, AC
contact pair. 2RMLBR1-R9
or DC.
2RMLG 01 only 1 kVRMS for 1 minute between
AC 300 V/DC 300 V maximum
terminals 13 and 14 when the service voltage.
cover is removed (e.g. opening the
auxiliary supply or trip circuit).
Mechanical Tests
2RMLB-R1 As 2RMLG 01 plus 2 kVRMS for
1 minute between incoming and
outgoing contacts when inserted. Test Standard

2RMLB-R7 As above with the exception of Vibration IEC 60255-21-1,

terminals 21, 23, 25, and 27 which Response and endurance,
are permanently shorted together.
Class 2
2RMLB-R8 As above with the exception of
terminal pairs 1-3, 5-7, 9-11,
and 15-17 which are permanently Climatic Environmental Tests
shorted together as pairs. Temperature
2RMLB-R9 As above with the exception
of terminal pairs 1-3-5-7, 9-11,
IEC 60068-2-1/IEC 60068-2-2/IEC 60255-6
17-19, and 21-23-25-27 which are
permanently shorted together in Ambient operating temperature -10 °C to +55 °C
groups. Storage temperature (non-opera- -25 °C to +70 °C
tional)
Transient Overvoltage
IEC 60255-27 Humidity
IEC 60068-2-3
2RMLG 01/02/07/08/09 5 kV impulse between all case
terminals connected together and Damp heat test, steady state 56 days at 93 % RH and +40 °C
the case earth terminal.
5 kV impulse between any contact Enclosure Protection (2RMLG only)
pair and either adjacent alternate
contact pair, provided the inter- IEC 60529
mediate contact pair is not used.
2 kV impulse between any contact IP50 (dust protected)
pair and either adjacent contact
pair.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 365
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG22 2RMLG

Ordering Information – 7XG222

Product Description Order Number

366 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG22 2RMLG

Ordering Information – 7XG2241

Product Description Order Number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 – 8 9 10 11 12 – 13 14 15 16
Test Plugs (2RMLB-R) 7 X G 2 2 4 1 – □ A A 0 0 – 0 A A 0
| | | | |
Category | | | | |
Ancillary equipment 2 | | | |
| | | | 10.1
Ancillary Equipment | | | |
Modular case test components 2 | | |
| | |
Test Component Type | | |
Test plugs (2RMLB-R) 4 1 |
|
Component Type |
Multi finger test plug complete with leads (2RMLB-R1) 1
Multi finger test plug complete with leads and internal shorting links (2RMLB-R7) 3
Multi finger test plug complete with leads and internal shorting links (2RMLB-R8) 4
Multi finger test plug complete with leads and internal shorting links (2RMLB-R9) 5

UK Manufacture Test Modules, E2 Size

2RMLG01 Test block with Trip Isolation contact VCE: 2993H10060D
2RMLG02 Test block with No Isolation contact VCE: 2993H10063D
2RMLG07 Test block with CT shorting VCE: 2993H10067D
2RMLG08 Test block without Trip Isolation VCE: 2993H10080D
2RMLG09 Test block for 2RMLB-S9 Test Plug VCE: 2993H10085D

Accessories for 2RMLG

2RMLG Cover for 2RMLG01 (with probe) VCE: 2993G50002
2RMLG Cover for 2RMLG02 VCE: 2993G50008

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 367
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

Description
7XG225 is a flexible and high performance test block system
with a focus on operator safety. Suitable for application on a
wide range of protection relay panels.
• Finger safe test sockets
• Automatic CT shorting
• 14 or 28 independent test groups
The fourteen (14) test groups are specified to provide automatic
10.1 CT shorting and sequential circuit to suit specific protection
schemes:
• Stage 1 isolation
• CT shorting
• Stage 2 isolation [Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225, 1, --_--]

The main advantage of this approach is the improved level of

Figure 10.1/9 7XG225 3RMLG Test Block System
safety and security afforded to the CT circuits. This is because
the CT shorting function takes place within the 3RMLG Test
Block irrespective of the CT circuit position. In many test block
Connection Diagrams
systems the CT shorting is only accomplished when the Test
Plug is inserted which leaves open the possibility of a CT Recommended Wiring Layout
circuit becoming open circuit due to the CT shorting links being It is recommended that the Test Block is always wired with
omitted or in the wrong position. This potential problem is connections to the protective relay or scheme made to the
avoided in the 3RMLG and allows a single Test Plug to be EVEN numbered equipment side terminals. Connections to other
employed for all 14 way Test Block configurations. equipment, e.g. CT’s, VT’s and DC supplies, should be made to
Each test circuit is connected to a separate pair of terminals at the ODD numbered live side terminals on the Test Block. This
the rear of the case. During normal operation of the associated ensures that when the Test Plug is inserted, the black sockets
protection equipment, each terminal pair is connected via a are connected to the isolated relay circuits and the yellow
circuit-shorting link. sockets are connected to the potentially live supplies. This is
vital as the automatic CT shorting is only applied to the live side.
Where more than 14 test circuits are required such as in EHV
transmission protection panels, the 3RMLG Test Block with 28 • This image shows the 3RMLG with the front cover removed to
test circuits may be employed. isolate the Stage 1 circuits.
3RMLB-S Test Plug • The Isolation Plug is in place so the CTs and Stage 2 circuits
are still connected.
• 14 or 28 test circuits
• ‘Finger safe’ test sockets • The front label identifies each cassette type.
• One test plug for all 14 way 3RMLG blocks
• One test plug for all 28 way 3RMLG blocks
Features
• Automatic shorting of CT circuits completed in the test block -
No test links or operator intervention required
• Isolation plug provides sequential circuit isolation timing in
three (3) stages
• ‘Finger safe’ test sockets suit standard or shrouded type 4 mm
banana plugs for direct access to the protection or measure-
ment scheme
• Clear and concise front panel circuit identification
• Test plug fitted with insertion handle and thumb screw reten-
tion system to enhance operator safety and system security
• Side label instructions on test plug for changing from normal
service to the test condition
• High current / voltage rating

368 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

10.1

[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 CT Circuits1, 1, --_--]

Figure 10.1/11 Application wiring example for a three phase overcur-

rent and EF protection scheme with auto CT shorting.
Order Code – 3RMLG01

[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 Recommended Wiring Layout, 1, --_--]

[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 CT Circuits2, 1, --_--]

Figure 10.1/10 Front Panel Layout

Figure 10.1/12 Application wiring example for a three phase directional
O/C and E/F or distance protection scheme with auto CT
CT Circuits shorting. Order Code – 3RMLG07
CT circuits must only be wired to cassette type 8 or 9. CT circuits
must not be wired to cassette types 1, 2 or 3 as this will result in
open circuit CT’s as the isolation plug is re-moved.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 369
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

10.1

[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 CT Circuits3, 1, --_--] [Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 CT Circuits4, 1, --_--]

Figure 10.1/13 Application wiring example for three phase CT’s and Figure 10.1/14 Application wiring example for differential protection
core balance E/F CT with auto CT shorting. Order Code – of transformers with auto CT shorting Order Code –
3RMLG08 3RMLG09

370 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

14 WAY TEST BLOCKS

10.1

Figure 10.1/15 3RMLG – 01 Figure 10.1/16 3RMLG - 02

Figure 10.1/17 3RMLG - 07 Figure 10.1/18 3RMLG - 08

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 371
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

10.1

Figure 10.1/19 3RMLG - 09 Figure 10.1/20 3RMLG - 20

372 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

10.1

Figure 10.1/21 3RMLG - 21 Figure 10.1/22 3RMLG - 22

Figure 10.1/23 3RMLG - 23

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 373
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

28 WAY TEST BLOCKS

10.1

Figure 10.1/24 3RMLG - 11

Figure 10.1/25 3RMLG - 12

Figure 10.1/26 3RMLG - 17 Figure 10.1/27 3RMLG - 18

374 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

10.1

Figure 10.1/28 3RMLG - 19 Figure 10.1/29 3RMLG - 520

Figure 10.1/30 3RMLG - 521 Figure 10.1/31 3RMLG - 522

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 375
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

10.1

Figure 10.1/32 3RMLG - 523 Figure 10.1/33 3RMLG - 524

Figure 10.1/34 3RLMG - 525

376 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

Dimension Drawings Rear View

Front View

10.1

[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 Rear View1, 1, --_--]

Front View

[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 Front View1, 1, --_--]

[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 Front View2, 1, --_--]

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 377
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

Rear View Two-ended test lead long - 180 mm

Test Lead Plugs
Single Plug
The single plug is the most compact and may be plugged into
any test socket.
Dual Plug
The dual or ‘piggy back’ plug is larger and should be plugged
into the test sockets on the outside edge of the 3RMLG.
10.1

[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 Rear View2, 1, --_--]

Panel Cut-Out 14 Way

[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 Test Lead Plugs, 1, --_--]

[Reyrolle Product Catalogue, 7XG225 Panel Cut-Out 14 Way, 1, --_--]
Figure 10.1/35 Two-ended test lead - short 75mm wire length version
depicted
Technical Data
3RMLG Test Block
Shrouded Test Leads
14/28 Equipment side terminals (Even terminal numbers).
Two types of shrouded ‘finger safe’ test leads are available:
14/28 Live side terminals (Odd terminal numbers).
Description
14/28 Live sides to equipment side shorting links.
Two-ended test lead short - 75 mm

378 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

This arrangement provides for up to 14/28 independent circuits Between incoming & outgoing 2.0kV ac rms for 1 minute
to be connected. contacts.
Between all case terminals & the 5.0kV ac rms for 1 minute
3RMLB Multi-Finger Test Plug
case earth
28/56 test sockets suitable for 4mm shrouded or standard
banana plugs. Temperature
Securing screws are built-in to retain the Test Plug during testing
operations. Standard IEC 60068-2-1/2

Ratings Operating Range -10 to +55 degrees Celsius

Storage Range -25 to +70 degrees Celsius 10.1
Current: CT circuits and terminals 20A continuous
Humidity
400A 1 s
Current: Other circuits 10A continuous
Standard IEC 680068-2-78
200A 1 s
Operating Range 40 degrees Celsius and 93 % RH
Voltage: All circuits 600V AC continuous non condensing
320V DC continuous
IP Rating
Case Type
Standard IEC 60529
E2 Size 2 Installed IP5x
28 terminals
E4 Size 2 Vibration - Sinusoidal
56 terminals
Standard IEC 60255-21-1 Class I
Mounting Flush
Vibration Response 0.5gn ≤5 %
4U high rack mount
Vibration Endurance 1.0gn ≤5 %

Insulation – 3RMLG – In Service Shock and Bump

Standard IEC 60255-5

Standard IEC 60255-21-2 Class I
Type Level
Shock Response 5gn, 11 ms ≤5 %
Between any contact pair & either 2.0kV ac rms for 1 minute
Shock Withstand 15gn, 11 ms ≤5 %
adjacent contact pair.
Bump Test 10gn, 16 ms ≤5 %
Between all case terminals & the 5.0kV ac rms for 1 minute
case earth
Between any alternate contact 5.0kV ac rms for 1 minute
Seismic
pair, provided that the inter-
mediate pair is not used. Standard IEC 60255-21-3 Class I
Seismic Response 1gn ≤5 %
Insulation – 3RMLG with 3RMLB
Mechanical Classification
Standard IEC 60255-5
Type Level Durability >105 operations at no load

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 379
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

Ordering Information - 7XG225 3RMLG Test Block System

Product Description Order No.

380 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

Product Description Order No.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 381
Test Equipment
Test Switch/Test Block – 7XG225 3RMLG

Product Description Order No.

382 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Time Synchronization

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 383
Time Synchronization
SNTP Master/Server – 7SC8021

Description
The hardware version of the 7SC80 integrates an SNTP server
and a GPS module.
In this way, the first switchgear-compatible SNTP server with
GPS receiver is available for precise time synchronization for
all SIPROTEC 4/Compact/5 protection devices and all other SNTP-
compatible devices, for example SIPROTEC 7KE85/SICAM P/Q/T
or third-party devices. The few configuration settings necessary
(for example, the IP address) are made using DIGSI 4.
With an additional 12 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs
The communications redundancy protocols RSTP/PRP/HSR and
the IEC 61850 protocol are fully supported. In this way, the
SNTP server with optical Ethernet interfaces can be operated
11.1 directly in SIPROTEC ring networks.
A GPS antenna kit with antenna, antenna mount and 25 m cable
is available separately.

Functions
[ph_SNTP-Master_Server_7SC80_, 1, --_--]

• An external GPS antenna kit with a flat-roof/wall mounting Figure 11.1/1 SNTP Master Server 7SC80
bracket, 25 m cable RG59 and BNC/SMB adaptor cable is avail-
able separately
– 8 and 4 inputs each, connected to common potential
• GPS antenna input (SMB plug) • 8 binary outputs
• USB port for configuration using DIGSI 4 – All relays can be configured as desired
• Equipped as standard with 2 electrical Ethernet ports RJ45 • 1 life contact
• Redundant connection with active standby operation – Change-over contact
• Can be optionally equipped with 2 optical Ethernet interfaces • Optional display can be removed with/without connecting
• Remote operation possible, up to 24 km using singlemode cable
interfaces
• Power supply unit/battery voltage
• Full support of redundant ring structures with the – Input voltage DC 24/48 V, DC 60 V to 250 V and AC 110 V to
RSTP/PRP/HSR protocols 230 V ± 20 %
• Stainless steel housing for surface mounting • Ethernet interface RJ45
• Satisfies the EMC requirements in switchgear – 2 x 100 Mbps
• Expanded temperature range: -50 °C to +85 °C • Optical interface (optional)
• Robust with respect to high GOOSE loads in IEC 61850 – LC connector, 1300 nm for multimode optical fiber,
networks 50/62.5 μm type Radius: 4 km
• Can be used as a central data collector, for example, to record – LC connector, 1300 nm for singlemode optical fiber 9 μm
GOOSE messages type Radius: 24 km

• Supports IEC 61850 Edition 1 and Edition 2 • USB interface

– for configuration using DIGSI 4
• Integration in IEC 61850 systems control (with a maximum of
6 clients) • SMB plug
• Integration into DIGSI 4 IEC 61850 System Configurator – for connection of an active GPS antenna, 5 V supply
Alternatively: Connection to systems control via DNP IP voltage, max. 50 mA
protocol • Housing
• Additional use for automation functions (Continuous Function – Stainless steel housing IP40 for surface mounting, back-up
Chart) battery can be replaced from outside
• Remote access • EMC
• Optimized for use together with SIPROTEC devices and DG – EMC capability according to SIPROTEC protection devices
products
Applications
Equipment features
All devices connected via Ethernet can be synchronized to the
• 12 binary inputs millisecond using the 7SC80 SNTP time server via the SNTP

384 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Time Synchronization
SNTP Master/Server – 7SC8021

protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol). Either the standar-

dized UTC time or the local time is transmitted. For these appli-
cations, all (protection) devices need a suitable Ethernet inter-
face, for example port B for SIPROTEC 4 (EN100 module).

Application
The GPS antenna is mounted outdoors without obstructions
towards the sky. The SNTP server is installed near the GPS
antenna and is usually supplied with power via the same auxil-
iary voltage as used for the protection devices.
If optical Ethernet interfaces are used, EMC effects are elimi-
nated, even in the case of longer distances between the SNTP
server and the protection devices.
An accuracy of ±1 ms is achieved in SIPROTEC networks when 11.1
using the 7SC80 SNTP server. It is not necessary to establish a
separate network for time synchronization.
Using the 7SC80 in redundant time-server projects is also
[dw_example_SIP-ring-Network_of_SNTP Master_Server 7SC80, 4, en_US]
possible. Integration into DIGSI 4 projects can be carried out
using the complete 7SC80 parameter set, and the use of the Figure 11.1/2 Sample Configuration of a Redundant Integration of a
earlier SNTP.ICD files is not necessary in this case. For the indi- 7SC80 SNTP Server in an Optical SIPROTEC Ring Feeder
vidual protection devices, set “EthernetNTP” as the time source.
Local time settings, for example, switchover between standard
time and daylight saving time or a time offset should also be
kept in mind.

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Short code

SNTP protocol server with GPS receiver (optical/electrical) 7 S C 8 0 2 1 - ☐☐ B 9 7 - 3 F N 0 L ☐ ☐

Auxiliary voltage (power supply) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | |
DC 60 V to 250 V, AC 115 V, AC 230 V 1│ │ │
DC 24 V/48 V 2│ │ │
Design structure │ │ │
Surface mounting variant without HMI A │ │
Surface mounting/flush mounting variant with HMI B │ │
Surface mounting variant with detached HMI C │ │
Protocols │ │
IEC 61850 (EN100) 0 │
DNP/IEC 61850 2 │
System interface │
100 mbit Ethernet, electrical, RJ45 plug R
100 mbit Ethernet, switch, optical, 2 x LC connector, multimode S
100 mbit Ethernet, optical, 2 x LC connector, singlemode, 24 km T
For precise time synchronization for all SIPROTEC protection devices and all other (S)NTP-compatible devices, for example SIPROTEC 7KE85/SICAM P/Q/T
or third-party devices. Configuration is performed using DIGSI 4. With an additional 12 binary inputs and 8 binary outputs. Supports the Ethernet
redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP, HSR and IEC 61850 Edition 1 and 2. The time server can be operated directly in SIPROTEC ring networks using the
optical Ethernet module. It is designed for the increased requirements of switchgear. It is delivered without a GPS antenna or cable, please order the GPS
antenna kit (7XV5663-0AA00) and, optionally, the indirect lightning protection (7XV5664- 0LA00) separately.
GPS antenna 7 X V 5 6 6 3 - 0 A A 0 0
For (S)NTP server (master) with GPS receiver, consisting of:
GPS antenna with flat-roof and wall mounting bracket, 25 m antenna cable RG59B/U, 1 m adaptor cable, BNC-SMB
Indirect lightning protection 7 X V 5 6 6 4 - 0 L A 0 0
For switchgear-compatible (S)NTP server 7SC8021 with 2 BNC connectors for cable RG58/V

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 385
Time Synchronization
Bus Cable for Time Synchronization – 7XV5104

Description
7XV5104 is a 2-wire shielded bus system for standard time
synchronization at port A (24 V connection) in SIPROTEC protec-
tion devices. Only the 24 V input of the interfaces is supported.
For SIPROTEC 5 Compact, the 7XV5104 bus cable is connected
to port E via an IRIG-B adapter cable 7XX8310-0CG00.
The evaluation of fault records, operational and fault indications
requires determination of the absolute time with an accuracy of
milliseconds. The SIPROTEC 4/5 devices have an internal quartz-
based clock that deviates from standard time after a while. For
this reason, radio -controlled clocks are used for precise synchro-
nization; they synchronize the clocks in the devices using time
signals or protocols such as DCF77 or IRIG-B.
All of these devices are connected in parallel to an electrical bus
so that they all receive the time information at the same time
11.2 at port A. The SIPROTEC 4/5 devices can be connected directly
to the sync transceiver 7XV5654 via their IRIG-B interface with
the help of the prefabricated bus cables and adaptors 7XV5104.
If the prefabricated cables are used, the length of the electrical [ph_RS485 bus system, 1, --_--]
bus is a maximum of 2 x 10 m.
Figure 11.2/1 RS485 Bus System
Benefits
Application Examples
• Optoelectrical solution for SIPROTEC 4/5 devices with IRIG-B
interface (port A). Port E for SIPROTEC 5 Compact. The 9-pin male connector S1 of the first Y-bus cable is
connected to the time signal source (radio-controlled clock with
• Direct connection of SIPROTEC 4/5 devices with IRIG-B inter- sync transceiver) and forwards the time signals to the associ-
face to the sync transceiver 7XV5654
ated device via the 1, 3, 5, or 10 m long cable and the 9-pin
• Adaptor/cable for cascading and adapting to other converters male connector S2. A 9-pin female connector B3 is additionally
• 4 cable lengths can be ordered, from 1 m to 10 m led out at the connector S2 on a 20 cm long cable, in order
to be able to cascade further Y-cables and devices. If more
• 2-wire twisted and shielded cable with 9-pole D-sub connec- than six SIPROTEC 4/5 devices are to be connected to the sync
tors
transceiver 7XV5654, the adaptor 7XV5104-3AA00 splits the
• Metal connector housing with fastening screws and strain connection X1 of the sync transceiver into two buses with a
relief for the cable connections maximum of six devices each. The connection of more than
• Compact dimensions of the connectors 2 x six protection devices requires signal replication using an
intermediate ministerial coupler that can control up to 5 sync
• Maximum length of the electrical bus is 10 m (or 2 x 10 m transceivers, each with 6 protection devices. Typical applications
if the sync transceiver is operated in channel pairing mode
are described in the manual for the sync transceiver 7XV5654.
together with the T-adaptor 7XV5654; Use only within build-
ings.

[dw_12_SIP4-devices_IRIG-B-bus_via_pref_y-bus-cable, 2, en_US]

Figure 11.2/2 Example: Connection of a maximum of twelve SIPROTEC 4 Devices to the IRIG-B Bus using a pre-assembled Y Bus Cable

386 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Time Synchronization
Bus Cable for Time Synchronization – 7XV5104

Wiring Examples for SIPROTEC 5 Compact Devices with IRIG

NOTE

i
B for Time Synchronization
The serial interface in the SIPROTEC 5 Compact device can be The IRIG-B connection cannot be used in parallel
used for IRIG-B time synchronization. The separately available with another serial protocol.
time-synchronization bus cable 7XV5104-0AAxx and the IRIG-B The IRIG-B adapter cable 7XX8310-0CG00, in
adapter cable 7XX8310-0CG00 are required to connect to the particular the D-Sub connection, must be
SIPROTEC 5 Compact devices. protected against mechanical stresses (tension or
vibration) by suitable relief measures. Avoid sharp
bendings when connecting the RJ45 plug.

11.2

[dw_serma2_SIP5_Compact_IRIG-B, 2, en_US]

Figure 11.2/3 Communication with IRIG B for Time Synchronization

(1) SIPROTEC 5 Compact device

(2) SIPROTEC 5 device
(3) IRIG-B adapter cable 7XX8310-0CG00
(4) Time-synchronization bus cable 7XV5104-0AAxx

[dw_Notes on the IRIG-B bus, 2, en_US]

Notes about the IRIG-B bus has an additional second pulse. The housing of all bus partic-
ipants must be grounded at both ends according to specifica-
In this system solution, only the time synchronization inputs of
tions as otherwise hazardous ground-potential currents may
the SIPROTEC 4/5 devices for 24 VDC are used. The 7XV5105
flow via the bus cable shield.
cable for the synchronization of differential protection devices

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 387
Time Synchronization
Bus Cable for Time Synchronization – 7XV5104

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

7 X ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ - ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐ ☐
Y bus cable for SIPROTEC 4 – time synchronization bus (2-wire) ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
| | | | | | | | | |
Length: 1 m V 5 1 0 4 0 A A 0 1
Length: 3 m V 5 1 0 4 0 A A 0 3
Length: 5 m V 5 1 0 4 0 A A 0 5
Length: 10 m V 5 1 0 4 0 A A 1 0
Extension cable for SIPROTEC 4 – time synchronization bus (2-wire) V 5 1 0 4 │ A A │ │
Length: 10 m V 5 1 0 4 1 A A 1 0
Adaptor cable for SIPROTEC 4 – time synchronization bus V 5 1 0 4 │ A A │ │
11.2
Length: 0.3 m V 5 1 0 4 2 A A 0 0
T adaptor cable for 2 buses V 5 1 0 4 3 A A 0 0
T adaptor cable for time synchronization converter 7XV5654-0BA00
V 5 1 0 4 A A
Connector X1 splits into buses to 6 devices each
IRIG B adaptor cable for SIPROTEC 5 Compact X 8 3 1 0 0 C G 0 0

388 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Time Synchronization
Bus Cable for Time Synchronization – 7XV5105

Description
7XV5105 is a 4-wire shielded bus system for standard time
synchronization with second pulse on port A (24 V connection)
in SIPROTEC protection devices. The additional high-precision
second pulse is needed only for synchronizing 2 line differential
protection devices via GPS.
The evaluation of fault records and operational and fault indi-
cations requires a real-time stamp with an accuracy of millisec-
onds. The differential protection devices have an internal quartz-
based internal clock that the protection device normally uses
for synchronization. In special applications, GPS radio clocks are
used to synchronize the differential protection devices 7SD5 to
the absolute time. These clocks transmit a set clock telegram
together with a second pulse that is accurate to the millisecond,
so that the transmission time can be measured precisely both in
the transmit and in the receive direction. All devices in each of
11.2
these systems are connected in parallel via an electrical bus so
that all devices receive the time information or the second pulse
simultaneously
[ph_RS485 bus system, 1, --_--]
The devices 7SD5/7SD8 can be connected directly to the sync
transceiver 7XV5654 via their IRIG-B interface (port A) with Figure 11.2/4 Y-Cable 7XV5105
the help of the pre-assembled bus cable 7XV5105. If the pre-
assembled cables are used, the length of the electrical bus is a Application Examples
maximum of 10 m. The 9-pin male connector S1 of the first Y-bus cable is
connected to the time signal source (radio-controlled clock with
Benefits sync transceiver) and forwards the time signals to the associ-
• Optoelectrical solution for SIPROTEC 4/5 differential protec- ated device via the 1, 3, 5, or 10 m long cable and the 9-pin
tion devices with, for example, 7SD5 IRIG-B interface (port A) male connector S2. A 9-pin female connector B3 is additionally
led out at the connector S2 on a 20 cm long cable, in order
• Direct connection of protection devices 7SD5 via the IRIG-B to be able to cascade further Y-cables and devices. If more
interface to the sync transceiver 7XV5654
than six SIPROTEC 4/5 devices are to be connected to the sync
• Simultaneous transmission of the set clock telegram and transceiver 7XV5654, the adaptor 7XV5104-3AA00 splits the
second pulse connection X1 of the sync transceiver into two buses with a
• Adaptor/cable for cascading and adapting to other converters maximum of six devices each. The connection of more than
2 x six protection devices requires signal replication using an
• 4 cable lengths can be ordered, from 1 m to 10 m intermediate ministerial coupler that can control up to 5 sync
• Shielded and twisted four-wire cable with 9-pole D-sub transceivers, each with 6 protection devices. Typical applications
connectors are described in the manual for the sync transceiver 7XV5654.
• Metal connector housing with compact dimensions, with
fastening screw and strain relief for the cable connections
• Maximum length of the electrical bus is 1 x 10 m; Use only
within buildings.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 389
Time Synchronization
Bus Cable for Time Synchronization – 7XV5105

[dw_6_SIP4-devices_IRIG-B-bus_via_pref_y-bus-cable, 2, en_US]

11.2 Figure 11.2/5 Example: Connection of a maximum of six SIPROTEC 4 protection devices 7SD5 to the IRIG-B bus using a prefabricated Y bus cable

[dw_Notes on the IRIG-B bus_max.6, 1, en_US]

Notes about the IRIG-B bus used. Two-wire cables 7XV5104 are used for the time synchroni-
zation of SIPROTEC 4/5 protection devices without an additional
In this system solution, only the time synchronization inputs
second pulse.
(port A) of the SIPROTEC 4/5 protection devices for 24 VDC are

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Y bus cable 7 X V 5 1 0 5 - ☐ A A ☐ ☐
▲ ▲ ▲
For the time synchronization bus of the GPS extension of line differential protection 7SD52 (4-wire) | | |
Length: 1 m 0 0 1
Length: 3 m 0 0 3
Length: 5 m 0 0 5
Length: 10 m 0 1 0
Extension cable │ │ │
For the time synchronization bus of the GPS extension of line differential protection 7SD52 (4-wire) | | |
Length: 10 m 1 1 0

390 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Time Synchronization
GPS Time Synchronization Unit – 7XV5664-1

Description
The GPS time synchronization unit 7XV5664-1 (time signal
receiver) provides a complete solution, with the additional
components of the mini star coupler 7XV5450 or CM-0822, sync
transceiver 7XV5654, and pre-assembled cables and adaptors,
for the time synchronization of any number of SIPROTEC protec-
tion devices.
Optical fiber can be used to transmit time signals (telegrams
or pulses) without interference even over greater distances and
in electromagnetically polluted environments. In this case, the
optical signals are converted in the sync transceiver into elec-
trical signals on the bus (< 200 ns later). The output of different
protocols such as IRIG-B or DCF77 makes it also possible to
synchronize other devices such as SIMEAS R/R PMU or the SICAM
Q80 V3 besides synchronizing SIPROTEC devices.
The GPS antenna is mounted to an exterior wall or on a roof
without obstructions towards the sky. The lightning protection
should be mounted near the antenna and is looped into the 11.3
antenna line. The GPS time synchronization unit is supplied with [ph_gps, 2, --_--]

auxiliary voltage from the alternating current power system or Figure 11.3/1 GPS Time Synchronization Unit 7XV5664-1
the station battery.
Simple PC software makes it possible to set the GPS time Optional Scope of Delivery
synchronization unit via an RS232 interface.
• 7XV5654-0BA00
Sync transceiver:
Benefits 2 x optical-fiber input for 62.5/125 µm with ST connectors to
• Time receiver with an integrated, high-precision clock and 2 x electrical, DC 24 V/maximum 50 mA per channel
high-grade free running behavior. • 7XV5104-xAAxx
• Special hardware and firmware developed and adapted specif- Bus cable system for synchronization of clock time
ically for the high-precision synchronization of SIPROTEC • 7XV5105-xAAxx
and SIMEAS devices Type test according to 2014/30/EU, Bus cable system for synchronization using a second pulse
2014/35/EU, 2014/53/EU, 2011/65/EU, 2015/863/EU and EN
62368-1, Poll. 2. • 7KE6000-8AK or -8AL
SIMEAS sync transceiver:
• 3 programmable optical outputs with ST connector for 50/125 1 x optical-fiber input for 62.5/125 µm with ST connectors to
or 62.5/125 µm, 850 nm multimode optical fiber for interfer- 1 x electrical, DC 24 V/maximum 20 mA to a terminal
ence-free transmission of the signals/telegrams
• Telegram selection (even simultaneously): IRIG-B (B003+4,
B006+7,IEEE1344, AFNOR,C37.118). DCF77 in UTC or local
time (daylight saving time). DCF77 modified for SIMEAS R V3.
Second and minute pulse (high-precision)
• GPS outdoor antenna
• Wall-mounting holder and 50 m RG58 cable (BNC/N
connector)
• Lightning protection with 5 m RG58 cable (N connector)
• Fail-safe relay (1 change-over contact, SIPROTEC standard)
• Auxiliary voltage, DC/AC 100 V to 240 V (50/60 Hz)
• Auxiliary voltage, DC/AC 19 V to 72 V
• Operating program with connecting cable, 3 m, PC interface
RS232 (9-pole D-sub connector)
• Aluminum housing for DIN rail mounting.

[Time_synch_comp, 1, --_--]

Figure 11.3/2 Components in the 7XV5664-1 Scope of Delivery

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 391
Time Synchronization
GPS Time Synchronization Unit – 7XV5664-1

Application Examples protection devices distributed within the system using optical
fibers.
Time synchronization of the SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5
protection devices The optical star structure can be extended using mini star
couplers 7XV5450 or CM-0822. Sync transceivers 7XV5654 are
The internal time of all connected protection devices
used to convert the light signals into 24 VDC signals for the
is synchronized using the GPS time synchronization unit
SIPROTEC time synchronization interfaces.
7XV5664-1. The internal clock of the protection devices is
updated using the standardized telegram (IRIG-B, DCF77). IRIG-B You can find detailed application examples in the manual of the
C37.118 should be preferred for use with SIPROTEC 5. sync transceiver 7XV5654.
The SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5 protection devices have special The SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5 protection devices are
interfaces for time synchronization as standard: SIPROTEC 4 port connected to the sync transceiver 7XV5654 using the specially
A, SIPROTEC 5 port G. pre-assembled bus cable system 7XV5104 (see Figure 11.3/3).
The time telegrams or synchronization pulses are transmitted Note: In this case, no bus load resistor is needed.
without interference from the three optical outputs to the

11.3

[dw_SIP4/5-devices_with_IRIG-B_or_DCF77_time-synchro, 4, en_US]

Figure 11.3/3 SIPROTEC 4/5 Protection Device with IRIG-B or DCF77 Time Synchronization

392 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Time Synchronization
GPS Time Synchronization Unit – 7XV5664-1

Joint Time Synchronization of SIPROTEC Protection Devices, 7KE85, SIMEAS R-PMU, SICAM Q80 V3

11.3

[dw_time-synch_SIP3/4/5_pmu_7KE_Simeas_Sicam, 4, en_US]

Figure 11.3/4 Joint Time Synchronization of SIPROTEC Protection Devices 3/4/5/PMU, 7KE85, SIMEAS R-PMU, SICAM Q80 V3 Using Different Time Signals

If stored indications, measured values and fault records with have the required high-precision properties with regard to the
a time stamp from different devices are to be compared, time transmission behavior for time. The GPS clock 7XV5664-1, with
synchronization of all devices is absolutely necessary. This can its special hardware and firmware, has been especially devel-
be ensured only by using a central clock that can synchronize, oped and adapted for the high-precision synchronization of
with high precision, all the devices installed in the system with SIPROTEC and SIMEAS devices.
different synchronization interfaces. The GPS time synchroniza-
The SIPROTEC 4 and SIPROTEC 5 devices are synchronized at
tion unit 7XV5664-1 can handle these requirements. The GPS
port A or D-sub 9, respectively, via the optical output Out 1
time synchronization unit can output 3 different telegrams or
of the GPS receiver, channel R1 of the sync transceiver, the T
pulses for the time synchronization of devices, even in parallel,
adaptor, and the bus cable system 7XV5104. Here, a choice
using its 3 optical channels. The connection of the various
can be made between the IRIG-B or DCF77 telegrams. Both tele-
device models to the system is shown in Figure 11.3/4.
grams can be used for the time synchronization of devices.

Properties If the PMU function (Phasor Measurement Unit) is used in the

SIPROTEC 5 devices or the SIPROTEC 5 fault recorder 7KE85,
Many clocks available on the market do offer signals/protocols the device are also connected via the 2-wire cable 7XV5104.
such as IRIG-B Signal C37.118. However, these usually do not

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 393
Time Synchronization
GPS Time Synchronization Unit – 7XV5664-1

The PMU function is only synchronized using the IRIG-B C37.118 entitled: "Application description, time synchronization SIMEAS
telegram. R/SIMEAS R-PMU."
The GPS time synchronization unit 7XV5664-1 outputs this IRIG- All SIPROTEC protection devices with an internal clock (for
B C37.118 telegram with a higher quality because of its high- example, SIPROTEC V3 and SIPROTEC Compact) can be
precision properties and this forms a basis for the PMU applica- synchronized using a binary input and the minute pulse from
tions of SIPROTEC and SIMEAS. the GPS time synchronization unit. To do this, the internal clock
of the protection device is set exactly to the start of the new
You can find more detailed information on the applications in
minute at every complete minute. A condition for this method
the device manuals and application documentation.
is that the internal clock of the protection device was properly
The SIMEAS R-PMU V4 (Phasor Measurement Unit) is synchron- set once and the auxiliary voltage is buffered against outage. If
ized using the high-precision rising edge of the DCF77 telegram the clock update does not occur for a longer period of time, the
at the optical output (for example, FO Out 3). The sync trans- difference between the internal clock of the protection device
ceiver 7XV5654 or the converter 7KE6000-8AK/L is used to and the current time of day must be less than one minute.
convert the optical signals into electrical signals. The change between daylight saving and standard time must be
The SIMEAS R V3 is synchronized using the modified DCF77 performed manually (if desired).
telegram. A synchronization box (7KE6000-8HA*) is not needed The protection devices are equipped with a binary input that
when using the GPS clock 7XV5664-1. The sync transceiver detects the minute pulses by applying appropriate voltage
7XV5654 or the converter 7KE6000-8AK/L is used to convert the (24 to 60 V or, for the wide range, 24 to 250 VDC) and
11.3 optical signals into electrical signals. then provides these pulses to the internal clock. The pulse is
The SICAM Q80 V3 is synchronized using the rising edge of distributed to the protection devices via a 2-wire bus to be
the DCF77 telegram at the optical output (for example, FO Out implemented using shielded twisted cables. All devices must
3). The converter 7KE6000-8AK/L is used to convert the optical be connected to a grounding system, the cable shields are
signals into electrical signals. connected at both ends to the housing.

You can find a more detailed application description in the

Power Quality & Measurements downloads in the document

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order no.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

GPS time synchronization unit 7 X V 5 6 6 4 - 1 A B ☐ 0

▲
|
Auxiliary voltage, DC/AC 100 V to 240 V (50/60 Hz) 0
Auxiliary voltage DC 19 to 72 V 1
Especially for precise time synchronization of SIPROTEC 5 PMU, differential protection applications, and 7KE85. Also for normal time synchronization
applications using DCF77 or IRIG-B.
Time receiver with high-precision integrated clock, using GNSS (GPS and Galileo). Including GPS antenna, lightning protection, and 50 m (+5 m) RG58
cable. 3 programmable optical outputs (high-precision pulse per second, IRIG-B, DCF77) with ST connector for 50/125 µm or 62.5/125 µm, 850 nm
multimode fiber.
With fail-safe relay, DIN rail mounting, and setting software per download including RS232-cable.

394 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Miscellaneous

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 395
Miscellaneous
Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker – 3RV16

Description
The 3RV16 voltage-transformer circuit breaker protects the
secondary circuit of voltage transformers that are used to
connect protection devices to a voltage-dependent pickup.
The miniature circuit breaker is used for distance protection
using underimpedance pickup. Special auxiliary contacts reliably
prevent the underimpedance pickup from tripping the distance
protection if only one fault has occurred on the voltage trans-
former line.
The miniature circuit breaker for the voltage transformer can
also be used to reliably isolate the distance protection device
from the voltage transformer. In this case, the special auxil-
iary contacts also prevent an uncontrolled trip of the distance
protection.
Other fuses are not necessary. A "Fuse Failure Monitor" (FFM) is
also not necessary.
The miniature circuit breakers are snapped onto a 35-mm DIN
rail as per EN 60715. The miniature circuit breakers can be [ph_3RV16, 1, --_--]

connected using plug-in terminals. The miniature circuit breaker Figure 12.1/1 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker – 3RV16
for voltage transformers also has 2 auxiliary contacts (usually
1 make contact + 1 break contact). When closing, contact is
• Auxiliary switch for blocking the distance protection
12.1
made via the make contact of the control switch later than If the voltage-transformer circuit breaker trips or is switched
via the main contacts. When opening, the auxiliary circuits off, the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker are
open at the same time as the main circuits, if not earlier. This opened. The distance protection would interpret a low impe-
setting prevents generating an undesired trip command caused dance incorrectly as a fault and this would lead to an imme-
by the opening of the miniature circuit breaker via the underim- diate, undesired disconnection within a few milliseconds.
pedance pickup of the distance protection device. The auxiliary To avoid this unwanted tripping, special auxiliary contacts
voltage for blocking the voltage-dependent pickup (underimpe- with a time-based assignment to the main contacts of the
dance) must always be routed via the make contacts 11 to 14. miniature circuit breaker (see Technical data) are required.
The distance protection is blocked via these auxiliary contacts
Functions so that unwanted tripping is avoided.
• The auxiliary contact of the 3RV16 prevents the distance The distance protection device is blocked via an auxiliary
protection from tripping via the underimpedance pickup in switch with 1 change-over contact which is permanently
the event of a fault in the voltage transformer circuits. installed in the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. This
change-over contact can be used as 1 make contact (11 to 14)
• The operate time of the electromagnetic overcurrent protec- or 1 break contact (11 to 12). These auxiliary contacts have
tion is as short as few milliseconds.
a high contact stability at minimum rated operating currents
of Ie/AC-15 ≥ 0.5 mA at 230 V, meaning that they are also
Applications
suitable for today's electronic distance protection devices.
Protection of the secondary circuits of voltage transformers for For indication functions, laterally attachable auxiliary switches
connecting protection devices with a voltage-dependent pickup. from the SIRIUS series may be used. However, these cannot
be used for blocking the distance protection device.
Special features
• Impedance via the main contacts
The voltage-transformer circuit breaker is largely equivalent to Only small currents flow via the main contacts of the voltage-
the miniature circuit breaker 3RV1, SIRIUS, size S00. In order to transformer circuit breaker. To ensure reliable operation of
reliably prevent unwanted tripping of the distance protection, the distance protection, the resistance of the main contacts
two particular product features are taken into consideration. must be minimal and remain virtually constant over the entire
service life of the miniature circuit breaker.
This is realized using suitable contacts and contact materials
for the voltage-transformer circuit breaker 3RV16.
Performance properties
The specified operate curves of the thermal overload release (a)
correspond to the average value of the scatter band when cold.
At operational temperature, these times are reduced to about
25% of the specified values. The characteristic curves shown
below are basic principle drawings.

396 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Miscellaneous
Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker – 3RV16

[dw_Time-diagram_auxCont_block_dis_Abb13-2, 2, en_US]

Figure 12.1/2 Timing Diagram for the Auxiliary Switch for blocking the Distance Protection

Connections

12.1

[dw_internal_connections, 2, en_US]

Figure 12.1/4 Inside Connections

[dw_characteristics_sip4_catalog, 2, en_US]
[dw_typ-connections, 2, en_US]

Figure 12.1/3 Characteristic Curves

Figure 12.1/5 Typical Connections

Note: When connecting the voltage-transformer circuit breaker

via the break contact, the binary input of the distance protection
(Siemens 7SAxx) should be set to "active without voltage." The
correct wiring is also monitored with this connection type.

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 397
Miscellaneous
Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker – 3RV16

Dimensioned Drawings

[dw_connection_3RV61_circuit-breaker, 2, en_US]

Figure 12.1/6 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker – 3RV16

(1) Auxiliary switch, 2-pole, arranged laterally

12.1
(2) Auxiliary switch, 4-pole, arranged laterally
(3) Auxiliary release
(4) Auxiliary switch, transverse
(5) Connection for screw fixing
(6) Only with under-voltage release combined with a leading auxiliary switch
(7) Drilling diagram
(8) Can be interlocked with a lock in the OFF position, angular diameter: 3.5 to 4.5 mm

Auxiliary switch for blocking the distance protection

Technical Data With defined time-dependent 1 change-over contact, electron-
assignment for blocking the ically compatible (suitable as 1
Surface Mounting distance protection make contact or 1 break contact)
Snap-on mounting to 35-mm DIN rail or screw mounting Rated operating current IE/rated AC-14 0.5 A/VE 250 V
operating voltage VE AC-14 1 A/VE 125 V
Conductor cross sections, main circuits, 1 or 2 conductors DC-13 0.27 A/VE 250 V
Type 3RV1611- DC-13
1AG14 1CG14 1DG14 0.44 A/VE 125 V

Terminal type Screw terminal

Screw terminal Prozidriv, size 2 Short-circuit protection for the auxiliary circuit
Single-wire 2 × (0.5 to 1.5 mm2) Fuse, gL/gG max. 10 A
Miniature circuit breaker, charac- max. 6 A
2 × (0.75 to 2.5 mm2)
teristic curve C
(max. 4 mm2)
Fine wire with bootlace ferrule 2 × (0.5 to 1.5 mm2) General technical data
2 × (0.75 to 2.5 mm2) Type 3RV1611-
Stranded wire 2 × (0.5 to 1.5 mm2) 1AG14 1CG14 1DG14

2 × (0.75 to 2.5 mm2) Rated current 1.4 2.5 3

Permissible ambient temperature
(max. 4 mm2) –50 to +80 °C
Storage/transportation
–20 to +60 °C (up to 70 °C
Operation possible with reduced current)
Rated operating voltage VE 400 V

398 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Miscellaneous
Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker – 3RV16

General technical data General technical data

Rated frequency 16.7 to 60 Hz Internal resistance
> 0.25 Ω ± 6.5%
Rated insulation voltage VI 690 V - when cold
> 0.30 Ω ± 6.5%
Short-circuit breaking capacity at 50 kA - when warm
400 VAC, short-circuit proof up to
Impact resistance according to IEC 15 g
Current setting for thermal over- 1.4 A 2.5 A 3A 60068, part 2-27
load release
Degree of protection according to IP 20
Pickup value of the instanta- 6 ± 20% 10.5 ± 20 ± 20% IEC 60529
neous electromagnetic overcurrent 20%
Protection against electric shock Finger-safe
protection
according to DIN VDE 0106 part
Operate time of the instanta- 6 ms at 12 6 ms at 20 6 ms at 40 100
neous electromagnetic overcurrent A A A
Service life Switching cycles
protection
Disconnection service life: - mechanical 10,000

Short-circuit current Ip Max. short-circuit disconnections - electrical 10,000

≤ 0.1 kA ≤ 10 Permissible position of use any

0.1 to 2 kA ≤3
2 kA to 50 kA 1

Selection and Ordering Data

12.1
Description Order no.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker – 3RV16 3 R V 1 6 1 1 - 1 □ G 1 4

▲
With 1 auxiliary contact, 1 change-over contact │
1.4/6 A A
2.5/10.5 A C
3/20 A D
Laterally mountable auxiliary switch, 1 make contact/break contact 3 R V 1 9 0 1 - 1 A

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 399
Miscellaneous
Isolating Transformer – 7XR95

Description
7XR95 is an isolating transformer for pilot wire differential
protection.
The isolating transformer provides galvanic separation between
the pilot wires and the relay.
Climate requirements according to previous standard DIN
40040:
HKG = -25 °C to +125 °C, relative air humidity: max. 75%;
annual average < 65 % on 60 days per year up to 85 % (evenly
distributed over the year); condensation not permitted

[ph_7XR95, 1, --_--]

Figure 12.2/1 Isolating Transformer 7XR9516 (left), Isolating Trans-

former 7XR9515 (right)

Order no. Isolating transformer Windings of the auxiliary current transformers Weight, ca.
12.2 7XR9 513 for line differential protection Isolating transformer 1:1, max. 550 V 5 kg
with 1 pair of pilot wires
0.4 A continuous, 3 A 10 s, 10 A 1 s
Test voltage 20 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
HKG
7XR9 515 for differential power protec- Isolating transformer 1:1, max. 450 V 2 kg
tion with 1 pair of pilot wires
Test voltage 5 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
HKG

7XR9 516 for communication converter Isolating transformer 1:1, 1.4 kg

(for 7SA and 7SD, among
max. test voltage: 20 kV, 50 Hz, 1 min
others)

Table 12.2/1 Overview of the Isolating Transformer

400 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Miscellaneous
Isolating Transformer – 7XR95

Dimensioned Drawings

[dw_7xr9516_isolating_transformer, 2, en_US]

Figure 12.2/4 Isolating Transformer 7XR9516 – Side View/Top View

[dw_7xr9513_isolating_transformer, 2, en_US]

Figure 12.2/2 Isolating Transformer 7XR9513

12.2

[dw_7xr9515_isolating_transformer, 2, en_US]

Figure 12.2/3 Isolating Transformer 7XR9515 – Side View/Top View

Selection and Ordering Data

Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Isolating transformer 7 X R 9 5 1 □
▲
|
For line differential protection Insulation voltage: 20 kV 3
Insulation voltage: 5 kV 5
For communication converters 7XV5662-0AC0; for
Insulation voltage: 20 kV 6
example for 7SD61, 7SD52, 7SA6, 7SA522

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 401
Miscellaneous
Diodes – Diodes

Description INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX>General Alarm n – Assigned to

BI
A common use of digital relay binary inputs is to provide indica-
tion of alarm or fault conditions e.g. transformer Buchholz Gas INPUT CONFIG>GENERAL ALARMS>General Alarm n – 16
or Buchholz Surge conditions. The Binary Inputs can be mapped character string
to LED(s), waveform storage trigger, and binary outputs.
Where transformer outputs require high speed tripping, such as
The inputs can also be mapped as ‘General Alarms’ – this allows a Buchholz Surge, these should be wired to a binary input to
user defined text to be displayed on the LCD when the BI is provide LED indication and also have a parallel connection wired
energised. Inputs used in this way are programmed using: to directly trip the circuit via a blocking diode, see Figure 12.3/1.

Connection Diagrams and Dimension Drawings

12.3

[sc_Transformer_Alarm_Trip_Wiring, 1, --_--]

Figure 12.3/1 Example of Transformer Alarm and Trip Wiring

402 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Miscellaneous
Diodes – Diodes

[sc_7XG1300-2AA00-0AA0, 2, --_--]

Figure 12.3/4 7XG1300-2AA00-0AA0 - Accessories for Protection Resin

Encapsulated Blocking Diode Incorporating Metrosil Over-
12.3
voltage Protection (6A)

[sc_7XG1300-1AA00-0AA0, 1, --_--]

Figure 12.3/2 7XG1300-1AA00-0AA0 - Accessories for Protection Resin

Encapsulated Blocking Diode Incorporating Metrosil Over-
voltage Protection (750MA)

[sc_7XG1300-1AA00-0AA0_PottingBox, 1, --_--]
[sc_7XG1300-1AA00-0AA0_DiodeAssembly, 1, --_--]

Figure 12.3/5 Potting Box for Diode Assembly

Figure 12.3/3 Moulding for Diode Assembly

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 403
Miscellaneous
Diodes – Diodes

[sc_7XG1300-3AA00-0AA0, 1, --_--]

Figure 12.3/6 7XG1300-3AA00-0AA0 - Accessories for Protection Diode Assembly - 10 Way (1A)

12.3

404 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Miscellaneous
Reyrolle Device Accessories – Dropper Resistors

Description Where a digital relay binary input is both used to influence

a control function (e.g. provide a tripping function) and it
The digital relay binary inputs have a low minimum operate
is considered to be susceptible to maloperation the external
current and may be set for instantaneous operation. Considera-
circuitry can be modified to provide immunity to such distur-
tion should be given to the likelihood of maloperation due to
bances.
capacitance current. Capacitance current can flow through the
BI for example if an earth fault occurs on the DC circuits associ-
ated with the relay.
The binary inputs will be less likely to maloperate if they:
• Have both the positive and negative switched (double-pole
switched).
• Do not have extensive external wiring associated with them
e.g. if the wiring is confined to the relay room.

Connection Diagrams

12.4

[sc_BI_Config, 1, --_--]

Figure 12.4/1 Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 405
Miscellaneous
Reyrolle Device Accessories – Dropper Resistors

[sc_DropperResistorDimensions, 1, --_--]

Figure 12.4/2 Dimension Drawing for Dropper Resistors

12.4

Ordering Information - Dropper Resistors

DC 30 V Nominal, BI 19 V
A:470 / B:1500 Ω (Low Burden) VCE: 2435H90001
A:220 / B:820 Ω (High Burden) VCE: 2435H90004

DC 48 V Nominal, BI 19 V
A:1600 / B:1500 Ω (Low Burden) VCE: 2435H90002
A:820 / B:820 Ω (High Burden) VCE: 2435H90005

DC 110 V Nominal, BI 19 V
A:2K / B:560 Ω (Low Burden) VCE: 2435H90003
A:1K2 / B:330 Ω (High Burden) VCE: 2435H90007

DC 110 V Nominal, BI 88 V
A:NA / B:1300 Ω (High Burden) VCE: 2435H90008
A:NA / B:2700 Ω (Low Burden) VCE: 2435H90006

406 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Miscellaneous
Reyrolle Device Accessories – 7SR5 Spares

Ordering Information – 7SR5 Spares and Accessories

Product Description Order No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

7SR5 Spares and Accessories 7 X G 1 n n 1 - 0 A A 0 | - 0 A A 0

| | |
Fiber optic data communication port inserts 1 1 0
Terminal plug for RS485 wiring (3-way) 1 3 0
IP2x Terminal block cover (x10) 1 8 0
Fascia lever securing screw (plastic) – BB hardware (7SR5) 6 1 0
Hinged cover for fascia LED label 6 2 0
Maintenance front cover S6 (155 x 177 x 20 mm) 6 3 1
Maintenance front cover S8 (206 x 177 x 20 mm) 6 3 2
Maintenance front cover S12 (309 x 177 x 20 mm) 6 3 6

Figure 12.4/4 Fascia Lever

Securing Screw
(plastic)
Figure 12.4/3 Fiber Optic Data
Communication
Port Inserts

Table 12.4/1 Photographs of the 7SR5 Spares and Accessories

12.4

Figure 12.4/7 Terminal Plug for

RS485 Wiring (3-
way)

Figure 12.4/5 Hinged Cover for Figure 12.4/6 Terminal Block

Fascia LED Label Cover Fitted to
Device

Table 12.4/1 Photographs of the 7SR5 Spares and Accessories

Figure 12.4/8 Terminal Block

Cover

Table 12.4/1 Photographs of the 7SR5 Spares and Accessories

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 407
Miscellaneous
Reyrolle Device Accessories – Reyrolle Device Accessories

Ordering Information – Reyrolle Spares

Cover Assembly
E2 Cover Assembly (No Reset), Epsilon Case VCE: E2C0
E2 Cover Assembly (With Reset) Epsilon Case VCE: E2CR
E3 Cover Assembly (No Reset) VCE: E3C0
E3 Cover Assembly (RH Reset) VCE: E3CRR
E4 Cover Assembly (7SR1) VCE: 2436G10001
E4 Cover Assembly (No Reset) VCE: 2995G10018
E4 Cover Assembly (No Reset) VCE: E4C0
E4 Cover Assembly (LH/LH Reset), Epsilon Case VCE: E4CRB
E4 Cover Assembly (2 Push Reset) VCE: E4CD02
E6 Cover Assembly (LH Reset), Epsilon Case VCE: E6CRL

Device Case with Front Cover

E2 Case (Basic W/Reset), Epsilon Case VCE: E2B01/FS03/CR
E4 Case (No Reset), Epsilon Case VCE: E4B01/F01/C0
E4 Case for B75/B74 relay (No Reset), Epsilon Case VCE: E4B01/F01/C0

Miscellaneous Accessories
XR Terminal Block Kit VCE: 2995D10025/XR
Relay Mounting screw Kit VCE: 2995G10046
Rear Terminal Fixing Kit - Epsilon VCE: 2995G10047

12.4

408 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Appendix

Indication of Conformity

This product complies with the directive of the Council

of the European Communities on harmonization of the
laws of the Member States concerning electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU), restriction on
usage of hazardous substances in electrical and elec-
tronic equipment (RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU), and elec-
trical equipment for use within specified voltage limits
(Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed
according to the Council Directive in accordance with the
product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive), the
standard EN IEC 63000 (for RoHS directive), and with the
product standard EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage Direc-
tive) by Siemens.
The device is designed and manufactured for application
in an industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards
of IEC 60255 and the German standard VDE 0435.

Disclaimer of Liability
Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this
document only contains general descriptions and/or perform-
ance features which may not always specifically reflect those
described, or which may undergo modification in the course
of further development of the products. The requested perform-
ance features are binding only when they are expressly agreed
upon in the concluded contract.

Copyright
Copyright © Siemens AG 2024.
13
The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this docu-
ment, or utilization and communication of the content are not
permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights, including
rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model
or a design, are reserved.

Trademarks
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGRA, SIGUARD, SICAM, and MindSphere are
trademarks of Siemens. Any unauthorized use is prohibited.

OpenSSL
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL
Project for use in OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
([email protected]).
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric
Young ([email protected]).

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 409
Appendix

410 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Index

1,2,3 ... 7XV5710 160

100% Stator Ground-Fault Protection 274, 277
3PP1326/36 298
3RV16 396
4NC 273
6XV8100/6XV8200 150
B
7KE6000 158
7PA22 8 BAT1600 271
7PA23 13
7PA26 18
7PA27 24
7PA30 1-phase 95
C
7PA30 3-phase 100
7PG11 34 Communication Networking 251
7PG15 62
7PG17-XR105, XR106 and XR107, XR205 and XR206 141
7PG17-XR151 134
7PG17-XR152 and XR153 127 D
7PG17-XR250 to XR351 112
7PG1110-7AE10 306 Diodes 402
7PG1753 148 Dropper Resistors 405
7PJ13 105
7PJ14 120
7PJ15 84
7SC8021 384 H
7SR5 Spares 407
7TS16 29 HSR 233
7XG14 318
7XG15 306
7XG22 2RMLG 359
7XG31 348 L
7XG225 3RMLG 368
7XR61 283 LOGO!Power 256
7XR81 286
14
7XR86 300
7XR87 302
7XR95 400 M
7XR6004 291
7XR8004 295 Mobile Wireless Antennas 243
7XT33 274
7XT34 277
7XT71 279
7XV75 356 N
7XV5100 159
7XV5103 164 Network Protection 245
7XV5104 386
7XV5105 389
7XV5107 169
7XV5461 up to 8 km 178 P
7XV5461 up to 40 km 170
7XV5461 up to 170 km 174
PC to PRP 237
7XV5650/51 182
Protection Resistors 314
7XV5652 187
PRP 235
7XV5662-0AA 189
PSU6200 258
7XV5662-0AC 193
PSU8200 262
7XV5662-0AD 196
PSU8600 260
7XV5662-6AD10 334
7XV5662-7AD10 338
7XV5662-8AD10 342
7XV5664-1 391
R
7XV5673 323
7XV5674 329
Remote Network Management 248

Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 411
Index

Reyrolle Device Accessories 408

Rotor Ground-Fault Protection 279
Router for PROFIBUS/MPI Systems 241
Router for Wireless IP Communications 239
RUGGEDCOM CROSSBOW 232
RUGGEDCOM RMC30 230
RUGGEDCOM RMC40 223
RUGGEDCOM RMC8388 224
RUGGEDCOM RS400 226
RUGGEDCOM RS900 199
RUGGEDCOM RS900G 200
RUGGEDCOM RS900GP 201
RUGGEDCOM RS900R Series 219
RUGGEDCOM RS910 228
RUGGEDCOM RSG900C 203
RUGGEDCOM RSG920P 205
RUGGEDCOM RSG2100 206
RUGGEDCOM RSG2488 208
RUGGEDCOM RST2000 Series 210
RUGGEDCOM RST2428P 212
RUGGEDCOM RX1400 221
RUGGEDCOM RX1500 214
RUGGEDCOM RX5000/MX5000 217

S
Selectivity Modules 266
Sensors for SIPROTEC 5 and Reyrolle 5 346
SITOP Add-on Modules 264
Stator Ground-Fault Protection 300

14
T
Trip-circuit supervision relay 99
Trip-Circuit Supervision Relay 104

U
Underexcitation Protection 302
UPS500 268
UPS1600 269

412 Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1
Accessories ⋅ Energy Automation, Industrial Automation, Power Supplies ⋅ Catalog ⋅ Edition 5.1 413
Published by We create technology to transform the
Siemens AG everyday, for everyone. Our world is changing
Smart Infrastructure at an unprecedented rate. Demographic
Electrification & Automation change, urbanization, glocalization, environ-
Mozartstrasse 31c 91052 mental change, resource efficiency, and
Erlangen, Germany digitalization are presenting new challenges
and opportunities.
For more information, please contact
Phone: +49 9131 1743072 Siemens Smart Infrastructure addresses
Email: [email protected] these topics by combining the real and the
Web: siemens.com/reyrolle digital worlds.
Our technology transforms infrastructure,
across buildings, electrification, and grids,
For the U.S. published by at speed and scale, enabling collaborative
Siemens Industry Inc. ecosystems to accelerate our customers’
3617 Parkway Lane digital journey to become more competitive,
Peachtree Corners, GA 30092 more resilient, and more sustainable.
United States siemens.com/smart-infrastructure

Article no. SIEA-C10001-00-7600-5.1 (Status 12.2024)

Subject to changes and errors. The information given in this document only contains general
descriptions and/or performance features which may not always specifically reflect those described,
or which may undergo modification in the course of further development of the products. The
requested performance features are binding only when they are expressly agreed upon in the
concluded contract.
All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or other companies
whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
©Siemens 2025

SIEA C10001 01 7600 Accessories Catalog en
No ratings yet
SIEA C10001 01 7600 Accessories Catalog en
420 pages
Lockout Relay - 7PA26 - Technical Data
No ratings yet
Lockout Relay - 7PA26 - Technical Data
3 pages
7PA22 Fast-Acting Lockout Relay Guide
No ratings yet
7PA22 Fast-Acting Lockout Relay Guide
6 pages
7pa22 23 Catalog Sip E7
No ratings yet
7pa22 23 Catalog Sip E7
3 pages
Siemens 7PA22/23 Auxiliary Relays Guide
No ratings yet
Siemens 7PA22/23 Auxiliary Relays Guide
3 pages
7pa22 23 Catalog Sip E7
No ratings yet
7pa22 23 Catalog Sip E7
3 pages
7PA22 23 Catalog SIP-2008 en
No ratings yet
7PA22 23 Catalog SIP-2008 en
4 pages
7PA22/23/26/27/30 Auxiliary Relays For Various Applications: Technical Data
No ratings yet
7PA22/23/26/27/30 Auxiliary Relays For Various Applications: Technical Data
7 pages
7PA22/23 Auxiliary Relays For Various Applications
No ratings yet
7PA22/23 Auxiliary Relays For Various Applications
3 pages
7PA22 Fast-Acting Lockout Relay
No ratings yet
7PA22 Fast-Acting Lockout Relay
5 pages
7pa22 23 Catalog Sip E6
No ratings yet
7pa22 23 Catalog Sip E6
3 pages
Test Equipment and Accessories
No ratings yet
Test Equipment and Accessories
23 pages
Tcs 7PA26 - 27 - 30 - Catalog - SIP-2008 - en PDF
100% (1)
Tcs 7PA26 - 27 - 30 - Catalog - SIP-2008 - en PDF
7 pages
7PA26/27/30 Auxiliary Relays For Various Applications
No ratings yet
7PA26/27/30 Auxiliary Relays For Various Applications
5 pages
Siemens 7PA27 Relay Specifications
No ratings yet
Siemens 7PA27 Relay Specifications
7 pages
7PA26 27 30 Catalog SIP E6
No ratings yet
7PA26 27 30 Catalog SIP E6
5 pages
Finder Relay Catalogue 2012
No ratings yet
Finder Relay Catalogue 2012
500 pages
Mech Eng Selection
No ratings yet
Mech Eng Selection
30 pages
Powerflex 400 Adjustable Frequency Ac Drives For Fan & Pump Applications
No ratings yet
Powerflex 400 Adjustable Frequency Ac Drives For Fan & Pump Applications
52 pages
7PA22811 Datasheet en
No ratings yet
7PA22811 Datasheet en
2 pages
Catalogo de Contactores Industriales Noark
No ratings yet
Catalogo de Contactores Industriales Noark
242 pages
SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2025 202502271410306836
No ratings yet
SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2025 202502271410306836
1,452 pages
SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2018 201712111415265308
No ratings yet
SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2018 201712111415265308
1,440 pages
7PA22311 Datasheet En, Lockout
No ratings yet
7PA22311 Datasheet En, Lockout
2 pages
7PA26 27 30 Catalog SIP E6
No ratings yet
7PA26 27 30 Catalog SIP E6
5 pages
Industrial Brochure OEN
No ratings yet
Industrial Brochure OEN
20 pages
Siemens V23042 Small Relay Specifications
No ratings yet
Siemens V23042 Small Relay Specifications
7 pages
General - Catalogue - Control and Automation - English
No ratings yet
General - Catalogue - Control and Automation - English
531 pages
Schneider Zelio Timing Relays Guide
No ratings yet
Schneider Zelio Timing Relays Guide
28 pages
Zelio Time Timing Relays Catalog
No ratings yet
Zelio Time Timing Relays Catalog
28 pages
SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2021 202103291510089022
No ratings yet
SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2021 202103291510089022
1,460 pages
Industrial Controls Catalog
100% (1)
Industrial Controls Catalog
1,438 pages
Contenido de Referencias Bibliograficas 1
No ratings yet
Contenido de Referencias Bibliograficas 1
33 pages
Siemens Small Relay D2 Specs
No ratings yet
Siemens Small Relay D2 Specs
9 pages
Siemens SIRIUS Industrial Controls Catalog 2015
No ratings yet
Siemens SIRIUS Industrial Controls Catalog 2015
1,668 pages
Em221 PDF
No ratings yet
Em221 PDF
2 pages
7PA27320AA001 Datasheet en
No ratings yet
7PA27320AA001 Datasheet en
2 pages
Ge-Industrial Control and Automation
No ratings yet
Ge-Industrial Control and Automation
466 pages
Industrial Controls Catalog
No ratings yet
Industrial Controls Catalog
1,442 pages
SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2019 201901161048071165 PDF
No ratings yet
SIRIUS IC10 Complete English 2019 201901161048071165 PDF
1,486 pages
Controls and Power Electronics GENCAT English Ed10-12 680804 PDF
No ratings yet
Controls and Power Electronics GENCAT English Ed10-12 680804 PDF
570 pages
MiCOM P220 & P225 Relay Overview
67% (3)
MiCOM P220 & P225 Relay Overview
37 pages
Harmony Timer Relays - RE22R1MYMR
No ratings yet
Harmony Timer Relays - RE22R1MYMR
23 pages
Sirius Ic10
No ratings yet
Sirius Ic10
1,420 pages
Harmony Timer Relays - RE22R1MYMR
No ratings yet
Harmony Timer Relays - RE22R1MYMR
23 pages
Wiring VSD 22C-D310A103
No ratings yet
Wiring VSD 22C-D310A103
7 pages
Ej501 t1 Introduction To Automation System1
No ratings yet
Ej501 t1 Introduction To Automation System1
86 pages
8062 KT10$1$e
No ratings yet
8062 KT10$1$e
131 pages
Powerflex 750-Series Ac Drives: Technical Data
No ratings yet
Powerflex 750-Series Ac Drives: Technical Data
242 pages
7PA27420AA000 Datasheet en
No ratings yet
7PA27420AA000 Datasheet en
2 pages
Extra Question - Snake + Rime of The Ancient Mariner
No ratings yet
Extra Question - Snake + Rime of The Ancient Mariner
2 pages
Biology Exam Prep for Students
No ratings yet
Biology Exam Prep for Students
3 pages
Offset Mitigation of A Switched Capacitor Single-Input-Multi-Output Converter Using An Artificial Neural Network Based Virtual Reference Control
No ratings yet
Offset Mitigation of A Switched Capacitor Single-Input-Multi-Output Converter Using An Artificial Neural Network Based Virtual Reference Control
15 pages
Nato Aep 97 Ac 225
100% (1)
Nato Aep 97 Ac 225
798 pages
Milas-Bodrum Airport Info Guide
No ratings yet
Milas-Bodrum Airport Info Guide
15 pages
Finite Element Modeling of UHPC Hybrid Bridge Deck Connections
No ratings yet
Finite Element Modeling of UHPC Hybrid Bridge Deck Connections
12 pages
Classical Conditioning H: Current Theory and Research
No ratings yet
Classical Conditioning H: Current Theory and Research
520 pages
Grey 2015 S
No ratings yet
Grey 2015 S
5 pages
The Preeminence of Jesus Christs Business
No ratings yet
The Preeminence of Jesus Christs Business
4 pages
Remove Paper Texture with FFT Filter
No ratings yet
Remove Paper Texture with FFT Filter
3 pages
Describing Objects for IELTS Speaking
No ratings yet
Describing Objects for IELTS Speaking
2 pages
Global Cement Forecast 2020
No ratings yet
Global Cement Forecast 2020
2 pages
Fire Alarm Control Panel (Linkage Type) : ATL-9000 SERIES ATL-9000-2 ATL-9000-4 ATL-9000-6
No ratings yet
Fire Alarm Control Panel (Linkage Type) : ATL-9000 SERIES ATL-9000-2 ATL-9000-4 ATL-9000-6
26 pages
Hydrology Tutorial 1
No ratings yet
Hydrology Tutorial 1
22 pages
Trend in PPM
No ratings yet
Trend in PPM
11 pages
Two-Way Interaction Effects in Regression
No ratings yet
Two-Way Interaction Effects in Regression
2 pages
Earth Most Strangest Man Transcribed
No ratings yet
Earth Most Strangest Man Transcribed
110 pages
Iesco Online Bill
No ratings yet
Iesco Online Bill
2 pages
European Steel and Alloy Grades
No ratings yet
European Steel and Alloy Grades
2 pages
1,2A
No ratings yet
1,2A
1 page
Dublin Ramadan Timetable 2020
No ratings yet
Dublin Ramadan Timetable 2020
1 page
Uşak
No ratings yet
Uşak
7 pages
Self Learning Assignment
No ratings yet
Self Learning Assignment
4 pages
Sethco Bulletin 354
No ratings yet
Sethco Bulletin 354
10 pages
Laeveld Lollies Daily Activities Guide
No ratings yet
Laeveld Lollies Daily Activities Guide
10 pages
Engineering Management CV
No ratings yet
Engineering Management CV
4 pages
ARTA MeasuringBox Setup Guide
100% (1)
ARTA MeasuringBox Setup Guide
9 pages
AP2113A: 1.6x Linear Fan Driver
No ratings yet
AP2113A: 1.6x Linear Fan Driver
12 pages
Y2 - Module 5 - Maintaining Tools and Equipment
100% (3)
Y2 - Module 5 - Maintaining Tools and Equipment
58 pages
Maruti Swift Customer Satisfaction Report
75% (12)
Maruti Swift Customer Satisfaction Report
78 pages